Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCity of Tamarac Resolution R-2004-175Temp. Reso. #10483 June 16, 2004 1 Revision 1, June 30, 2004 CITY OF TAMARAC, FLORIDA RESOLUTION NO. R-2004- A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COMMISSION OF THE CITY OF TAMARAC, FLORIDA, AUTHORIZING THE APPROPRIATE CITY OFFICIALS TO AWARD BID NO. 04- 17B TO GLOBETEC CONSTRUCTION, LLC, AND EXECUTE AN AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY OF TAMARAC AND GLOBETEC CONSTRUCTION, LLC, FOR AN AMOUNT OF $2,447,000.00 FOR THE 2 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT; APPROVING FUNDING FOR THIS PROJECT FROM THE APPROPRIATE 2004 REVENUE BOND ACCOUNT; AUTHORIZING THE APPROPRIATE CITY OFFICIALS TO ADMINISTER THE CONTRACT; PROVIDING FOR CONFLICTS; PROVIDING FOR SEVERABILITY; AND PROVIDING FOR AN EFFECTIVE DATE. WHEREAS, the City of Tamarac owns, operates and maintains a Water Treatment Plant (WTP) located at 7803 NW 61'c Street; and WHEREAS, it is necessary to provide proper and adequate water pressure, volume and fire protection throughout the City; and WHEREAS, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP), and the Fire Protection Handbook recommends that a water utility maintain water storage capacity equal to one average day water demand; and WHEREAS, the City has water storage capacity of 2 million gallons less than the average daily water demand; and Temp. Reso. #10483 June 16, 2004 2 Revision 1, June 30, 2004 WHEREAS, the City needs to upgrade the high service pumping capacity at the Water Treatment Plant to meet current and future water demand; and WHEREAS, in accordance with the Utilities Department's mandate to improve, renew and rehabilitate existing water and wastewater systems to ensure a safe, reliable and adequate water supply and wastewater system to all residents and customers of the City, the 2 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements Project was recommended, approved and funded as a Capital Improvement Project; and WHEREAS, Eckler Engineering has been contracted to complete the design, bidding, permitting, and construction management for the 2 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements Project as approved under Resolutions R-2003-116 and R-2004-135; and WHEREAS, the City of Tamarac publicly advertised Bid No. 04-17B (a copy of said bid is attached as "Exhibit A"), 2 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements Project in the Sun Sentinel on April 25, 2004 and May 2, 2004; and WHEREAS, the City solicited competitive sealed bids and on May 27, 2004, received, opened and reviewed four (4) bids as follows: COMPANY NAME TOTAL BID $ GlobeTec Construction, LLC 2,447,000 Florida Design Contractors, Inc. 2,461,300 Wharton -Smith, Inc. 2,487,000 Interstate Engineering Corp. 2,540,000 ; and Temp. Reso. #10483 June 16, 2004 3 Revision 1, June 30, 2004 WHEREAS, GlobeTec Construction LLC, was deemed the lowest responsive and responsible bidder (a copy of said bid is attached as "Exhibit B"); and WHEREAS, the City of Tamarac Assistant Director of Utilities and Eckler Engineering recommends the award of this construction contract to GlobeTec Construction LLC, in the amount of $2,447,000.00 as stated in the memo dated May 28, 2004 (a copy of which is attached hereto as "Exhibit C"); and WHEREAS, approved funds in the amount of $2,447,000.00 are available in the 2004 Revenue Bond account; and I WHEREAS, it is the recommendation of the Director of Utilities and the Purchasing and Contracts Manager that the appropriate City Officials award Bid No. 04-17B, 2 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements Project to, and execute an agreement with GlobeTec Construction, LLC, in an amount not to exceed $2,447,000.00; and WHEREAS, the City Commission of the City of Tamarac, Florida deems it to be in the best interest of the citizens and residents of the City of Tamarac to approve the award of Bid No. 04-17B, 2 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements Project, to GlobeTec Construction, LLC, and execute an agreement with GlobeTec Construction LLC, in an amount not to exceed $2,447,000.00. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COMMISSION OF THE CITY OF TAMARAC, FLORIDA, THAT: SECTION 1: The foregoing "WHEREAS" clauses are hereby ratified and confirmed as being true and correct and are hereby made a specific part of this resolution upon adoption hereof. Temp. Reso. #10483 June 16, 2004 4 Revision 1, June 30, 2004 SECTION 2: The award of Bid No. 04-17B, 2 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements Project to GlobeTec Construction, LLC, is hereby authorized. SECTION 3: The appropriate City Officials are hereby authorized to execute an agreement between the City of Tamarac and GlobeTec Construction, LLC (a copy of which is attached hereto as "Exhibit D") as part of said award. SECTION 4: An expenditure in the amount of $2,447,000.00 is approved to be funded from the 2004 Revenue Bond account. SECTION 5: The City Manager, or his designee, be authorized to make changes, issue Change Orders not to exceed $10,000 per Section 6-156(b) of the City Code, and close the contract award including, but not limited to, making final payment and releasing bonds when the work has been successfully completed within the terms and conditions of the contract and within the contract price. SECTION 6: All resolutions or parts of resolutions in conflict herewith are hereby repealed to the extent of such conflict. SECTION 7: If any clause, section, other part or application of this Resolution is held by any court of competent jurisdiction to be unconstitutional or invalid, in part or application; it shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions or applications of this Resolution. 11 1 1 1 1 11 SECTION 8: passage and adoption. Temp. Reso. #10483 June 16, 2004 5 Revision 1, June 30, 2004 This Resolution shall become effective immediately upon its PASSED, ADOPTED AND APPROVED this 14th day of July, 2004. JOE SCHREIBER ATTEST: MAYOR RECORD OF COMMISSION VOTE: MARION SWENSON, CM MAYOR SCHREIBER CITY CLERK DIST 1: COMM. PORTNER DIST 2: COMM. FLANSBAUM-TALABISCO DIST 3: VVM SULTANOF ff DIST 4: COMM. ROBERTS I HEREBY CERTIFY that I have approved this RESOLUTION as to form. 1 REG/JM/mg TEMPORARY RESOLUTION 10483 EXHIBIT "A" 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS BID NO 04-17B BID DOCUMENTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR REVIEW IN THE OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK AAL C 4 anarac Fr,,rsOg d Contracts Division !f richaan t; BID FORM EXHIBIT "B" TR 10483 BID NO.04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS The City of Tamarac is hereby requesting Bids, from qualified vendors, for the installation of a new 2.0 MG pre -stressed concrete ground storage tank,. new transfer pumps, new high service pumps, piping; Valves, electrical, instrumentation, site restoration, inspection and cleaning of existing potable water storage tanks and all other incidentals as indicated by the drawings and specifications or as required to properly complete the project as planned. In order to be considered for this project, the Bidder shall possess at time of bid opening one of the following State, County or equivalent licenses: 1. A State Certification as a Certified General Contractor or Engineering Contractor with at least five (5) years of verifiable full-time experience with a minimum of ten (10) tanks built of similar specification and size. OR 2. A Broward County Competency as an Engineering Contractor Class "A" license with at least five (5) years of verifiable full-time experience with a minimum of ten (10) tanks built of similar specification and size. We propose to furnish the following items in conformity.with the. specifications.and at the indicated bid prices. The bid prices quoted have been checked and certified to be correct. Said prices are fixed and firm and shall be paid to Bidder for the successful completion of its obligation as specified in the contract documents. In the event of obvious mathematical errors, the Bidder recognizes that these are - -- --clerical in nature and maybe corrected by City: -- For each bid item, Bidder agrees to furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to properly perform the work described herein and on the project drawings. A more detailed description of the Pay Items is located -in Section-!01025 --of, the Technical Specifications. _ . ----._...See Schedule of Bid Prices on the following pages. SCH- t Sio Form & Schedule of Bid Prices City <.'•� !�r,'t31r3C PUr hasav and Contracts Division ......... ....._......_.._........... _........_....... __........... _...... -._..__.._._.._....._..._._.._._......._.._. ., r. SCHEDULE OF BID PRICES BID NO.04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS All bid items shall include costs for furnishing to the City all materials, equipment, supplies and all costs incurred in providing all work shown on the plans and specifications for 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements. Said costs shall be complete and inclusive of all labor, permits, inspection, servicing and start-up fees, taxes, insurance, bonds, mobilization, miscellaneous costs, warranty, overhead and profit. BIDDER agrees to accept as full payment for the Lump Sum proposed under this Project as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings, based upon the undersigned's own estimate of quantities and costs, the following total lump sum bid of: CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE ITEM (SECTION 01010) a 75,000.00 ,r TOTAL LUMP SUM BID: (NUMERIC) $ © t) ~' TOTAL LUMP SUM BID: (WRITTEN) $ 1OL J Dopey , 2 t rp Cents Please note that the amount written in words has precedence LUMP SUM BREAKDOWN For the sole purpose of evaluating bids, the general breakdown on the following page of the Total Lump Sum Bid is to be given. The price shall be fairly apportioned to the various parts of the work. If so requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall substantiate any price or prices with additional detailed price breakdown. In the event of _ _„ _ _discrepancy between the written lump sum stated in the TOTAL LUMP SUM BID and the arithmetic total of the following LUMP SUM BID BREAKDOWN, the Total Lump Sum Bid -. - - stated in writing above shall have precedence. SGH-2 Bid Form & Schedule of Bid Prices 4 ' City o" Tamarac Purchas;ng and Contracts Division LUMP SUM BID BREAKDOWN The Bidder must submit the apportioned amounts for the items listed below with this Proposal. Item I Descri ion Total Cost 1. Lump_Sum Base Sid Exclusive of Items 2 through 5 $2 Z S 2 G► t7e , 2. Indemnification Instructions to Bidders, Section 24 Is t p 0 ©0 — 3. Work per FAC 62-555.350 Drawin M-16 : a. 0.06 MG Clearwell OEP site $ 95, 000 b. 1.0 MG GST P site $ S pdO C. 1.0 MG GST Grant's Plaza $ 5: COO d. 2.0 MG GST(TTact 27) oda e. Remove & dispose of 610 cu.Yards of accumulated sediment @ $_ :nb!,lcu.yd- $ 4. Security Devices for Exist Finished Water Storage Facilities Drawin M-16 : a. 1.0 MG GST P site b. 1.0 MG GST Grant's Plaza c. 2.0 MG GST(Tract 27 $ 56)0 Contingency Allowance Item Section 01010 $ 76 000.00 -- - ------ - TOTAL LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT --$ 1. W The CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed price breakdown to the ENGINEER at the preconstruction conference.. The price 'breakdown as reviewed and agreed upon by. CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and OWNER shall be used for preparing future estimates for partial payments to CONTRACTOR, and shall list the major items of work and a price for each item. Price breakdown shall be by Specification. Section.for each area .of project.. Overhead, other general. cost, and profit shall be prorated to each itemso that the total of the prices for all items equal the lump _.sum . price.. The._price_breakdown-shall.-be-subject-to-the review-of-the--ENGINEER,-and CONTRACTOR may be required to verify the prices for any or all items. BIDDER NAME: G jo �ereG .. Co v► e, 3 r u. G � i 0p) SCH-3 Bid Fomi & Schedule of Bid Prices 0 Cit,y _,.._.... ... ._...... . -__._. e ­PUtr.h,ash7g sand Conti acts (division BID FORM (continued) BID NOI.04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORIAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS II Submitted by: (5� 10 b e I eG Co n sl ru - �+oh (Bidder) .5 Z7 d 5� (Date) THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: City of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Manager 7525 Northwest 88th Avenue Tamarac, Florida 33321 1. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this bid is accepted, to enter into a contract with the City to perform and furnish all Work as specified herein for the Contract Price and within the Contract Period indicated in this bid. 2. This bid will remain subject to acceptance for ninety (90) days after the day of bid opening. Bidder will sign and submit the necessary documents required by the City within fifteen (15) days prior to the date of the City's Award. a) Bidder has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the contract documents, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. b) Bidder has given the City written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that it has discovered in the contract documents and the written resolution thereof by the City is acceptable to Bidder. c) This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity - ---with -any agreement -or rules of any group, -association, —organization or ------ corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any.. other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over the City. 3. Bidder will complete the Work for the prices shown in the "Bid Form". 4. Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially performed and complete in accordance with the schedules established herein. {i City of Tanoara-"' ...... BID FORM (continued) BID NO.04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS (continued) The City reserves the right to reject any bid, if it deems that a vendor has deliberately provided erroneous information. The undersigned declare to have specific and legal authorization to obligate their firm to the terms of this bid, and further, that they have examined the Invitation to Bid, the instructions to Bidders, the Specifications, and other documents included in this bid request, and hereby promises and agrees that, if this bid is accepted, they will faithfully fulfill the terms of this bid together with all guarantees and warranties thereto. The undersigned bidding firm further certifies the product and/or equipment meets or exceeds the specification as stated in the bid package; and also agrees that products and/or equipment to be delivered which fail to meet bid specifications will be rejected by the City within thirty (30) days of delivery. Return of rejection will be at the expense of the bidder. (� (� � P ��G lip v► S� V'v G—�� O �► Company Name Address a „v -�C�, �L, 33 D73 City, State, ZIP -._Cosn us,. Contractor's License Number rc Aut fized Wna!gm' fln40710 A"110*1 G Typed/Printed Name Telephone & Frumber Federal Tax ID# City of %/i�tr1 arw Put-hasing and t::onbacts Division , BID FORM (continued) ' BID NO.04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS (continued) Bidders Name: G'I °Logic co 7 s4r,,c4r'ah TERMS: 0 % DAYS: 3 C To be considered eligible for award, one (1) original of this bid form MUST be _ submitted with the Bid. Two (2) photocopies of this bid form should accompany the original; however, copies must be provided within 3 business days of the City's request. t• NOTE: Bid submittals without the manual signature of an authorized agent of the Bidder J shall be deemed non -responsive and ineligible for award. IF "NO BID" IS OFFERED, PLEASE PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: Please indicate reason(s) why a Bid Proposal is not being submitted at this time. Return the Bid Form to avoid removal of Bidder from the City of Tamarac's vendor listing. z. SCH-6 Bid Form & Scheduie of Bid Prices 1 014, of Tarnaldo F''urcha.sing and C ona acts Division NON -COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT State of County of )ss 4 "J, p A s4 h.�► _ being first duly sworn deposes and says that: 1 1. He/she is the ?e e s1 T (Owner, Partner, Officer, _ Representative or Agent) of 6; eTec 6" s� +;� e�H the Offeror that has submitted the attached Proposal; 2. He/she is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Proposal and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Proposal; 3. Such Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal; 4. Neither the said Offeror nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, have in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Offeror, firm, or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with the Work for which the attached Proposal has been submitted; or to refrain from bidding in connection with such. Work; or have in -any, manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or* communication, or conference with any Offeror, firm, or person 'to "fix the price or prices in the attached Proposal or of any other Offeror, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost elements of the Proposal price or the Proposal price of any other Offeror, on to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or -unlawful -agreement any advantage against (Recipient), or any person interested in the proposed Work; 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement on o the Offeror- or any other --of its agents, representatives, owners; employees or parties in interest, including this affiant. Signed sealed and delivereq in the presence of: 6y Witness - — -- .�.. _ ... _ H" Witness P ed Na��re TreS, Title Page i of 2 ^— Non -Collusive Affidavit 4 Aak 1 City of T91J1di1:,3C Ptr!''n--iv (g and Contacts Division ACKNOWLEDGMENT NON -COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT State of Florida County of arp"Za,,-Q( On this the Z-L day of , 20ga, before me, the undersigned Notary Public of the heState of Florida, personal) appeared `1��1�,. _ e',a� and (Name(s) of individual(s) who'Oppeared before notary) whose name(s) is/are Subscribed to within the instrument, and he/she/they acknowledge that he/she/they executed it. 1, WITNESS my hand and official seal. j NOTARY PUBLIC SEAL OF OFFICE: �.�rp''•y, Karen monico a� sCommix s D> • - > Oct. 2L 2007 A As V—vt.AA.,1!�= Mc�� _ LJ NOTARY PUBLIC, STATE OF FLORIDA r r, (Name of Notary Public: Print, Stamp, or Type as Commissioned) 1-7 IKPersonally known to me, or ❑ Produced identification: (Type of Identification Produced) 1 i_ ❑ DID take an oath, or ❑ DID NOT take an oath ; Page 2 of 2 Non-Gotlusive ArkrJowledgement City of Tarra, ac `^_.... fi. rchasin g�J and Contracts Division CERTIFICATION THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH THE BID We (1), the undersigned, hereby agree to furnish the item(s)/service(s) described in the Invitation to Bid. We (1) certify that we (1) have read the entire document, including the Specifications, Additional Requirements, Supplemental Attachments, Instructions to Bidders, Terms and Conditions, and any addenda issued. We agree to comply with all of the requirements of the entire Invitation To Bid. Indicate which type of organization below: INDIVIDUAL ❑ PARTNERSHIP ❑ If "Other", Explain: L - L ' G onze SII ig J_ re r-e s. 'e n ! Title 61AeT-eC Coi S ruC-Wm Company Namett �...� a a a ?C b' f"r- 3 3o73 City/State/Zip L9Su 594.-. 3 307... Fax Number CORPORATION ❑ OTHER [ C 4o , d 5-5-el Name (Printed Or Typed) Federal Employer I.D./Social Security No. 4ZSD 06y . ev Ili ne Address C 9 S� � 9a'33DS Telephone Ke , '�:o o �. Contact Person page 1 of 1 Certification Diy of Tirnarac Pur-hasing and Contracts Division . .._..................... _._...... ..-.._.._..... _....... -._..._................. _.... ._.._-_._..._.._.__........ __...._.._.._. �..._...__ OFFEROR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT The undersigned certifies under oath the truth and correctness of all statements and of all answers to questions made hereinafter: SUBMITTED TO: City of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Manager 7525 NW 88th Avenue Tamarac, Florida 33321 I Check One Submitted By: Flo b-cTec CO n s f r � c Pa y ❑ Corporation Name: a -e o-z-;�, ❑ Partnership Address: H z 5 0 a 7�oCa-e r ll n e F-L ❑ Individual Principal Office: flow Pa h o 3 r-�, FL 33073 ['Other Telephone No. (4 5y) Sow `3305 Fax No. 1. State the true, exact, correct and complete name of the partnership, corporation, trade or fictitious name under which you do business and the address of the place of business. The correct name of the Offeror is: CiIo�eTT— Coh54rvC "0 [-C, The address of the principal place of business is: Kt jr, 0-7_5-> q If Offeror is a corporation, answer the following: a) ----Date- b) State of Incorporation:- c) President's name: .1Aoh4o 5•ehZ., d) - Vice President's name: ° "` e r',, ._.._ . _ .. __ - , . _ - - to se e) -- Secretary s n_ame: -f) Treasu(er's name:xart��"r* __ W g) Name and address of Resident Agent:.C�r��r� �L 3Z3a� Page 1 of 5 — Oferor's Qualification Statement City of T,srn3taC ............ ......_____.._. _.-_.._.__.._..._..__.. !! uLhasir7 and Contacts Division .........__._._.__..._..._.._..... 3. If Offeror is an individual or a partnership, answer the following: a) Date of organization: b) Name, address and ownership units of all partners: c) State whether general or limited partnership: 4.. If Offeror is other than an individual, corporation or partnership, describe the organization and give the name and address of Vncip Is: 5. If Offeror is operating under a fictitious name, submit evidence of compliance with the Florida Fictitious Name Statute. 6. How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name? / 7 Under what other former names has your organization operated? • . 7. Indicate registration, license numbers or certificate numbers for the businesses or professions, which are the subject of this Bid. Please attach certificate of competency and/or state registration. j 8. Have you personally inspected the site of the proposed.work? ,/YES NO 8. Do you have a complete set of documents, including drawings and addenda? []1YES ❑ NO 10. Did you attend the Pre -Proposal Conference if any such conference was held? [YES ❑ NO Page 2 of 5 dfferor's Qualification Statement C"ty �.ara� Purrhasiog and Contracts Division _._..,............... 11. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, state when, where and why: 12 State the names, telephone numbers and last known addresses of three (3) owners, individuals or representatives of owners with the most knowledge of work which you have performed and to which you refer (government owners are preferred as references). Name Address Telephone S�e e Ate,C e 13. List the pertinent experience of the key individuals of your organization (continue on insert sheet, if necessary). Se C at�aC �ec 14. State the name of the individual who will have personal supervision of the work: %e �• ©© V1 le . 15. State the name and address of attorney, if any, for the business of the Offeror: 16. State the names and addresses of all businesses and/or individuals who own an interest of more than five percent (5%) of the Offeror's business and indicate the percentage owned of each such business and/or individual: 17. 8co !)'ZU.. ..n-\ ...lzi y �So �3 . i i we(I• -� k State the names, addresses and the type of business of all firms that are partially ��' �' or wholly owned by. Offeror: Page 3 of 5 Offer'or's Qualification Statement City of Tarmac ... •.___........__._......__._-....__.___--Forchasing and Contracts Division 18. State the name of Surety Company which will be providing the bond, and name and address of agent: it 1-13 1. - . �Ir ►isl• _._wi i r E a M■ . M 19. Bank References: AddressBank y 20. Attach a financial statement including Proposees latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items: a) Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials, real estate,. stocks and bonds, equipment, furniture and fixtures, inventory and prepaid expenses): b) Net Fixed Assets c) Other Assets _ d) 'Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries, real estate encumbrances and accrued payroll taxes). e) Other Liabilities (e.g., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus, and retained earnings): 21. State the name of the firm preparing the financial statement and date thereof: 1 L 22. Is this financial statement for the identical organization named on page one? 23. If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.g., parent -subsidiary). �- Fake 4 of 5 Offeror's Qualification Statement L.a MASTEC, INC. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS (In thousands) (Unaudited) Assets Current assets: Cash and cash equivalents........................................................... Accounts receivable, unbilled revenue and retairnage, net ............. Inventories................................................................... :.......... Income tax refund receivable....................................................... Prepaid expenses and other current assets ........................ I............ Total current assets............................................................:..... Property and equipment, net............................................................ Goodwill......................................................................................... Deferred taxes................................................................................ Otherassets..................................................................................... Totalassets.............................................................................. Liabilities and Shareholders' Equity Current liabilities: Current maturities of debt..............:............................................. Accounts payable................................................................ Other current liabilities................................................................ Total current liabilities............................................................. Otherliabilities•.............................................................................. Long-term debt............................................................................... Shareholders' equity. Preferred stock, no par value; authorized shares - 5,000,000; issued and outstanding shares - none Common stock, $0.10 par value; authorized shares -- 100,000,000; issued and outstanding shares - 48,127,678 and 48,006,234 shares, respectively ........... Capitalsurplus............................................................................ Retaineddeficit ......................................................... ......... Foreign currency translation adjustments ..................................... Total shareholders' equity........................................................ Total liabilities and shareholders' equity ................................... 4 September 30, �nnz $ 15,183 231,458 28,492 263 36,691 312,087 90,298 150,987 30,890 43.850 $ 628,112 $ 3,514 79,809 41.887 125,210 20,741 197,003 4,813 348,836 (47,383) (21,10D_ 285,158 $ , „ 6281112_ (Audited) December 31, 2002 $ 8,730 185,235 23,736 24,598 32,873 275,172 118,475 150,984 40,271 38,890 $ 623,792 $ 1,207 63,492 65.696 130,395 22,214 197,435 4,801 348,319 (54,810) (24,562) 273,748 $ 623,792 City of Tamarac AML _._._......_.-. ..._................... ...._....... __..._........ _._..._._.__............. Rurchasirg and Contracts Division THE OFFEROR ACKNOWLEDGES AND UNDERSTANDS THAT THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN RESPONSE TO THIS QUALIFICATIONS -STATEMENT SHALL BE RELIED UPON BY OWNER IN AWARDING THE CONTRACT AND SUCH INFORMATION IS WARRANTED BY OFFEROR TO BE TRUE. THE DISCOVERY OF ANY OMISSION OR MISSTATEMENT THAT MATERIALLY AFFECTS THE OFFEROR'S QUALIFICATIONS TO PERFORM UNDER THE CONTRACT SHALL CAUSE THE OWNER TO REJECT THE PROPOSAL, AND IF AFTER THE AWARD TO CANCEL AND TERMINATE THE AWARD AND/OR CONTRACT. 76at6rey ...: ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OFFEROR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT State of Florida County of On this the z7 day of ZL4 o1. , 20r , before me, the undersigned Notary Public of the State of Florida, personally appeared and (Name(s) of individual(s) who appeared Ia renotary) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to within the instrument, and he/she/they acknowledge that he/she/they executed it. WITNESS my hand and official seal. NOTARY PUBLIC, STATE OF FLORIDA --NOTARY PUBLIC SEAL OF OFFICE, �s,�np .g j" 2L (Name of Notary Public: Print, co4mc. TM Stamp, ar Type as Commissioned) 9?Personally known to me, or _-- - -...-- __ _.___ _; ...❑ Produced identification: (Type of Identification Produced) ❑ DID take an oath, or ❑ DID NOT take an oath pagv 5, of 5 Offeror"s Qualification Statement C.Itv o rafnivac Purchasing and Contracts Division .. . ............. . . ..... I ..... .......... . ................ ... . ........... ........ . .. . ....... - ..... ................ ... . ............. . . ... . 7 Please list government agencies and/or private firms with whom you have done business during the last five years: Your Company Name S.e e cT#izc h PC( Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Agency/Firm Name: Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Contact Name Agency/Firm Name: Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Contact Name Agency/Firm Name: Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Contact Name Agency/Firm Name: Address City State Zip . .. ..... .... . . Phone/Fax Contact Name Agency/Firm Name: Address City State Zip Contact Name Page I of 1 Raferences City «r Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Division VENDOR DRUG -FREE WORKPLACE Preference may be given to vendors submitting a certification with their bid/proposal certifying they have a drug -free workplace in accordance with Section 287.087, Florida Statutes. This requirement affects all public entities of the State and becomes effective January 1, 1991. The special condition is as follows: IDENTICAL TIE _BIDS - Preference may be given to businesses with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids that are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the State or by any political subdivision for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none of the tied vendors have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a business shall: 1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any, available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893 or of any controlled substance law of the United States or _..----..____ --- _.._ any state, for a violation occurring in the -workplace --no-later --that-five -(5) -days------ after each conviction. 5. Impose a section on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available -In.. the employee's.;... community, by any employee who is so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through -- -- implementation of this section. -As the -person authorized -to sign the -statement, I certify that this form complies fully with the above requirements. c e iPc. C©hs fV W 461. A dnat Company Name 'ror _ page •I of 1 Dram -Free Workplace City of 7'ai a.7rac Purchasing and Ccr,b acts Division LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS The Bidder shall list below the names and business address of each subcontractor who will perform Work under this Bid in excess of one-half of one percent of the Contractor's Total Bid Price, and shall also list the portion of the Work that will be done by such subcontractor. After the opening of bids, no changes of substitutions will be allowed except as otherwise provided by law. The listing of more than one subcontractor for each item of Work to be performed with the words "and/or" will not be permitted. Failure to comply with this requirement will render the Bid as non -responsive and may cause its rejection. Work to Be performed % Total Contractor Subcontractor Contract License No. Name/Address �c Pie ..�� Page i of 1 List of Subcontractors 05/12/2004 13: 31 9545903307 GLOSETEC rwur. u.ri v • `�A1..nr 7r+n7:i"�1 �..., . . �.. ._. �' l,Y 11 ��;1: r 43i). r. _�.t r•�C �%Wtyi%ry/7 BID BOND STATE OF FLORIDA) ) ss: COUNTY OF BROWARD) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, GlobeTec Construction, LLC as Principal, and Arch Insurance Com an as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Tamarac, a municipal corporation of the State of Florida'in the'penal sum of: Five Percent of Amount Bid Dollars ($ 5% ) lawful money on the United States, for the payment of which sum well. and truly to be made, we bind I ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the Principal' has submitted the accompanying Bid, dated 20041 for: 2.OMG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements.- Bid No. 04-17B BID NO. 0 -17 rNOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate. (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall properly execute and deliver to said City the appropriate Contract Documents, and shall in all respects fulfill all terms and conditions attributable to the acceptance of -� - said Bid, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall remain in force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event exceed. the amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety, -for value received, hereby agrees that the obligations of the said Surety and M its bond shall be in no way impaired or.affected by•any extension of time within which —said CITY_may accept such.Bid; and said Suretyb extension. _doesherey .waive _notice ..of.. any _..___...._ ULUDGIr-� 06/12/2004 13,31 g545903307 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT HID BOND Signed and sealed this 13th day of May 20 04 IN PRESENCE OF: (AFFIX SEAL) ATTEST: as'per attached Power of Attorne Secretary ATTEST: as per attached Power of Attorney Secretary Princ' al }vv�' %ssrrl�a,, re ai�eK .4250 N Powerline Rd. Business Address Pompano Beach, FL 33073 City/State/Zip 954-590-3305 Business Phone Arch Insurance Company Sure ey ar es J. fRelson, Attorney -in -Fact Title Attorney -In -Fact" By.. Charles J. Nielson, Attorney -in -Fact `Impress Corporate Seal POWER OF ATTORNEY Know All Men By These Presents: That the Arch Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Missouri, having its principal office in Kansas City, Missouri (hereinafter referred to as the "Company") does hereby appoint Mary C. Aceves, Warren M. Alter, Charles D. Nielson, Charles J. Nielson and Laura Clymer of Miami Lakes, EL (EACH) its true and lawful Attomey(s)4n-Fact, to make, execute, seal, and deliver from the date of issuance of this power for and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: Any and all bonds and undertakings EXCEPTION: NO AUTHORITY is granted to make, execute, seal and deliver bonds or undertakings that guarantee the payment or collection of any promissory note, check, draft or letter of credit. This authority does not permit the same obligation to be split into two or more bonds to order to bring each such bond within the dollar limit of authority as set forth herein. The Company may revoke this appointment at any time The execution of such bonds and undertakings to pursuance of these presents shall be as : binding upon the said Company as fully and amply to all intents and purposes, as if the same had"b"d duiv executed and acknowledged by its regularly elected officers at its principal office in Kansas City, Missouri. This Power of Attorney is executed by authority of resolutions adopted by unanimous consent of the Board of Directors of the Company on March 3, 2003, true and accurate copies of which are hereinafter set forth and are hereby certified to by the undersigned Secretary as being in full force and effect: "VOTED, That the Chairman of the Board, the President, or any Vice President, or their appointees designated in writing and filed with the Secretary, or the Secretary shall have the power and authority to appoint agents and attomeys-in-fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings, obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such officers of the Company may appoint agents for acceptance of process' This Power of Attorney is signed, sealed and certified by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the unanimous. consent of the Board of Directors of the. Company on March 3, 2003: VOTED, That the .signature of the Cbairman of the Board, the President, or any Vice President, or their appointees designated in writing and flied with the Secretary, and the. signature of the. Secretary, the seal of the Company, and certifications by the Secretary, may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney or bond executed pursuant to the resolution adopted by the Board of Directors on March 3, 2003, and any such power so executed, sealed and certified with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, shall continue to be valid and binding upon the Company. OOMLO013 00 03 03 Page 1 of 2 Printed in U.B.A. In Testimony Whereof, the Company has caused this Instrument to be signed and its corporate seal to be affixed by their authorized officers, this 24th day of November , 20 03 Arch Insurance Company Attested and Certified Y� m�laRgY sw Nb1Wd Joseph S. L I, Corporate Secretary STATE OF CONNECTICUT SS COUNTY OF FAIRFIELD SS Thomas P. Luckstone, Vice President I Melissa B. Gilligan, a Notary Public, do hereby certify that Thomas P. Luckstone and Joseph S. Labeli personally known to me to be the' same persons whose names are respectively as Vice President and Corporate Secretary of the Arch Insurance Company, a Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Missouri, subscribed to the foregoing instrument, appeared before me this day In person and severally acknowledged that they being thereunto duly authorized signed, sealed with the corporate seal and delivered the said Instrument as the free and voluntary act of said corporation and as their own free and voluntary acts for the uses and purposes therein set forth. OFFICIAL SEAL. MEX& BB.. GIUXM, Nolay PU* at CaMbi M Comma M Fetxu 28.201 CERTIFICATION Melissa . it gan, Notary Public My commission expires 2-28-05 I, Joseph S. Labell, Corporate Secretary of the Arch Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the attached Power of Attorney dated November 24, 2003 on behalf of the person(s) as listed above is a true and correct copy and that the same has been In full force and effect since the date thereof and is In full force and effect on the date of this errtificate; and 1 do further certify that the said Thomas P. Luckstone, who executed the Power of Attorney as Vice President, was on the date of execution of the attached Power of Attorney the duly elected Vice President of the Arch Insurance Company. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF. I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the Arch Insurance Company on this 13 b day of May , 20 04. Joseph S,Sell, &porate Secretary This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named therein to the bonds and undertakings specifically named therein and they have no authority to bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein stated. Home Office: Kansas City, MO OOML0013 00 03 03 Page 2 of 2 Printed In U.S.A. Oty of T_am......._.-a.r:ac nur%acrj and �, rr, cts Division . . . ... .......... . . ­­ ... . . . ... . . . . . ......................... 11 .... . . . . ... ................ . ...... ­....­ V. ­...­ ..... CERTIFIED RESOLUTION 1�0s e e 144 s (Name), the duly elected Secretary of 6-, ►mac �� (Corporate Title), a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of F to e:1 >4 , do hereby certify that the following Resolution was unanimously adopted and passed by a quorum of the Board of Directors of the said corporation at a meeting held in accordance with law and the by-laws of the said corporation. "IT IS HEREBY RESOLV Tres'l THAT r< o h o �1 S h`� (Name)", the duly elected a e il(Title of Officer) of c (Corporate Title) . be and is hereby authorized to execute and submit a Bid and/or Bid Bond, if such bond is required, to the City of Tamarac and such other Instruments In writing as may be necessary on behalf of the said corporation; and that the Bid, Bid Bond, and other such instruments signed by him/her shall be binding. upon the said corporation as its own acts and deeds. The secretary shall certify the names and signatures of those authorized to act by the foregoing resolution. The City of Tamarac shall be fully protected in relying upon such certification of the secretary and shall be indemnified and saved harmless from any and all claims, demands, expenses, . loss or damage resulting from or growing out of honoring, the signature of any person so certified or for. refusing to honor any signature not so certified. I further certify that the above resolution is in force and effect and has not been revised, revoked or rescinded. I further certify that the following are the name, titles and official signatures of those persons authorized to act by the foregoing resolution. 11 NAME TITLE -------Given under my hand and the Seal of the said corporation this Z. ? day c (SEAL) By: NOTE: SIGNATURE Y"O 4 Secretary . rLd n �. Corporate Title The above is a suggested form of the type of Corporate Resolution desired. Such form need not be followed explicitly, but the Certified Resolution submitted must clearly show to the satisfaction of the City of Tamarac that the person signing the Bid and Bid Bond for the corporation has been properly empowered by the corporation to do so in its behalf. Puge t of t Certified Resolution Purchasing ofir(: Contiacbs Division _...1. , . ......... _._........... _-.__.�.. TRENCH SAFETY Bidder acknowledges that included in the appropriate. bid items of the proposal and in the Total Bid Price are costs for complying with the Florida Trench Safety Act (90-96, Laws of Florida) effective October 1, 1990. The bidder further identifies the costs of such compliance to be summarized below: TRENCH SAFETY MEASURE (Descriotion) UNITS OF MEASURE (LF/SF) UNIT (Qty) UNIT -COST EXTENDED COST r A. S �J (: x C s S. ' $/ O D $ B. $ $ C. $ $ D. $ $ TOTAL $ /dam If applicable, the Contractor certifies that all trench excavation done within his control in excess of five feet (6) in depth shall be in accordance with the Florida Department of Transportation's Special Provisions Article 125-1 and Subarticle 125-4.1 (TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEM AND SHORING, SPECIAL -TRENCH EXCAVATION). Failure to complete the above may result in the bid being declared non -responsive. DATE: Z 7/ (Signs e ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATE OF: _ - COUNTY OF: � ►-D . _ _ __. _ . ...._ __...._... __ _ ....._ . . PERSONALLY APPEARED BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, - F As s e-Ir,j_-�g,: , who, after first being duly sworn by me, (Name of individual Signing affixed his/her signature in the space provided above on this day of , 20W NOTARY PUBLIC - ra''�, K=n Monico My Cam occ 3 2 Mdea Thin AtJAA* saod�ns ca mc. Page 1 of 1 TMOGh Safety Form GlobeTec C0N5TRU[T10N Limited Liability Company Ownership: Mastec North America, Inc. Antonio Assenza Jorge Fonte AJB Globetech Cons. Sylvester Lukis Officers: 51 % 800 Douglas Road, Coral Gables, FL 31% 4250 N. Powerline Road, Pompano Beach, FL 8% 4250 N. Powerline Road, Pompano Beach, FL 5% 3663 SW 8 Street, Miami, FL 5% 3663 SW 8 Street, Miami, FL President Antonio Assenza 4250 N. Powerline Road, Pompano Beach, FL Vice President Jorge Fonte 4250 N. Powerline Road, Pompano Beach, FL Secretary Jose Mas 800 Douglas Road, Coral Gables, FL Treasurer Donald Weinstein 800 Douglas Road, Corral Gables, FL G1obeTec Construction, LLC 4250 N. Powerline Road, Pompano Beach, FL 33073 Phone (954) 590-3305 Fax (954) 590-3307 . Licensing Portal - Licensee Details ry �1 d Log On Public Services Search for a Licensee Apply for a License View Application Status Apply to Retake Exam Find Exam Information Find a CE Course File a Complaint AB&T Delinquent Invoice & Activity List Search User Services Renew a License Change License Status Maintain Account Change My Address View Messages Change My PIN View Continuing Ed Term Glossary Online Help Page 1 of 1 DBPR Home i Online Services Home I Help 1 Site Map .. Licensee Details Licensee Information Name: Main Address: Lic. Location: License Information License Type: Rank: License Number: Status: Licensure Date: Expires: Special Qualifications 10:27:29 f FERNANDEZ, GUILLERMO (Primary Name) GLOBETEC CONSTRUCTION LLC (DBA Name, 7003 N WATERWAY DRIVE MIAMI, Florida 33172 4250 N POWERLINE ROAD POMPANO BEACH, FL 33073 United State Broward Certified General Contractor Cert General CGCO59565 Current, Active 01/14/1998 08/31/2004 Bldg Code Core Course Credit Qualified Business License Required View Related Licgnsg Information View License Com taint Effective Date 12/15/2003 L I Terms of Use I I Privacy Statement I https://www.myfloridalicense.comllicensing/w113.jspjsessionid=JOPMMAFEHONAkKj9f - 1/5/2004 0 AC# 12 Q Q 19 9 STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD SEQ#L0312150118 =030292231 CUC057203 The UNDERGROUND UTILITY & EXCAVATION CO Named below IS CERTIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter`48.9 FS.. Expiration date: AUG 31, 2004 GLOBETEC CCONSTRUCTION LLC 4250 NORTH POWERLINE RD POMPANO BEACH FL 33073 JEB BUSH GOVERNOR DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW DIANE CARR SECRETARY AC# 1199135 STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT `OF. BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL. REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD SEQ#L0312150012! 2/15/20031030292224 1OB28039 The BUSINESS ORGANIZATION Named below IS QUALIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter 489 FS. Expiration date: AUG 31, 2005 (THIS 'IS NOT A LICENSE TO PERFORM WORK. THIS ALLOWS COMPANY TO DO BUSINESS ONLY IF'IT.HAS A;QUALIFIER.) GLOBETEC CONSTRUCTION LLC 4250 N. POWERLINE RD POMPANO BEACH FL 33073 i JEB BUSH DIANE CARR GOVERNOR DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW SECRETARY 9 GlobeTec CONSTRUCTION CLIENT REFERENCES Florida Keys Aqueduct Authority 1100 Kennedy Drive Key West, FL 33041 James Reynolds, Executive Director (305) 296-2454 Miami Dade Water & Sewer 3071 SW 38 Avenue Miami, FL 33146 Nelson Cespedes, Construction Manager (305) 607-0799. TY Lin International / HJ Ross 201 Alhambra Circle, Suite 900 Coral Gables, FL 33134 Polidoro Africano, Project Manager (305) 567-1888 Palm Beach County 2065 Prairie Road, Building K West Palm Beach, FL 33406 Gary Dernlan, Director (561) 641-3402 South Florida Water Mgmt District 3301 Gun Club Road West Palm Beach, FL 33406 Michael Curley, Engineer (561) 686-8800 Nordarse & Associates 2448 Metro County Blvd. West Palm Beach, FL 33407 Patrick Burke, Construction Manager (561) 261-1927 GlobeTec Construction, LLC 4250 N. Powerline Road, Pompano Beach, FL 33073 Phone (954) 590-3305 Fax (954) 590-3307 ANTONIO ASSENZA PRESIDENT Antonio J. Assenza began his career over sixteen years ago as a project engineer for Construction NASE Venezuela. While at Construction NASE he was involved in the construction of major petroleum, gas and water pipelines, construction of petroleum heating stations and construction of gas processing plants. Additionally, he developed his skills in design for miscellaneous structural and hydraulic elements. He later served as a staff engineer for Dayco-Astaldi Construction handling estimating for diverse general, underground, road and bridge construction projects. His responsibilities included setup of job cost progress and claim preparation and submittal. In 1993, Mr. Assenza joined Felix Equities as General Manager -Florida Division. There he handled the setup and start up of their Florida operations. He was responsible for the Florida operations performance and handled approximately $160,000,000 in work volume. From 1999 to 2003, As President of United Engineering Corp. he was responsible for daily operations and maintaining client relations. He worked closely on the preparation of all estimates, contract management and overseeing the completion of projects in a timely manner. He is currently the President of GlobeTec Construction, LLC. EDUCATION: Universidad Rafael Urdaneta Bachelor of Science, Civil Engineering with a major in Structural and Hydraulic Design REGISTRATIONS: Registered Professional Engineer in Venezuela and Europe Member in good standing with the Florida Engineering Society and the National Society of Civil Engineers LANGUAGES: Speak, read and write English, Spanish and Italian KENNETH BOONE MANAGER -MECHANICAL DIVISION Kenneth Boone began his career over fifteen years ago as an Assistant Project Manager for The Poole and Kent Company. He progressed to position of Vice President with Poole and Kent, where his responsibilities included direct management of process systems, water and wastewater facilities, commercial and mechanical/plumbing installations and jet fuel distribution systems. Ken's responsibilities also included executive management oversight of Municipal wastewater projects in North Carolina, GMP specialty jet fuel system contract in Anchorage, Alaska and direct field construction management. His knowledge and experience has enabled him to master complex details of a project. His personal management skills include estimating, planning, CPM schedule development,' cost control, subcontractor coordination and general construction administration. In 2000, he joined United Engineering Corp. as Division Manager for the Mechanical Division. In 2003 he became Division Manager for GlobeTec Construction, LLC. PROJECT EXPERIENCE: MDW&S John E. Preston WTP Softener Conversions $24.OMM MDAD Miami International Airport, North Side Utility Corridor $ 7.OMM MDW&S Central District Waste Water Treatment Plant Effluent Pump Station Modifications $ 7.OMM MDAD Miami International Airport Concourse A Apron, Ph 1,2,3 Jet Fuel Systems $18.OMM Florida Power & Light Co. Miami Energy Systems Downtown Chiller Plant $12.OMM City of Gastonia, NC Multi Prime Long Creek Waste Water Treatment Plant $17.OMM FEMA Hurricane Andrew Emergency Projects, Miami $ 8.0MM EDUCATION: Florida International University, Miami Bachelor of Science, Mechanical Engineering REGISTRATIONS: Member in good standing with the American Welding Society JORGE FONTE MANAGER -PIPE DIVISION Jorge Fonte began his career over twelve years ago as a field engineer for Western Atlas International Co. While at Western Atlas International Co. he was involved in the well logging services including electric logs, radioactive logs, lateral cores sampling, formation multi -tester, cement evaluation, casing evaluation, perforating, production packers setting etc. Additionally he was responsible for scheduling all personnel and equipment. After earning his degree in electrical engineering in Venezuela in 1989 and his degree in industrial engineering in Spain in 1992, he moved to South Florida and began his career in the construction industry. In 1995, Mr. Fonte joined Felix Equities as a Project Manager. His main responsibilities were for the overall management of various projects. His daily responsibilities include project scheduling, coordination of all vendors, procurement of materials, review of submitted data, monthly invoicing and reporting to owners on the progress of the project. In 1999, Mr. Fonte joined United Engineering Corp. as Pipeline Division Manager where he was responsible for the overall management of various projects including bidding, overseeing all daily job site operations and project management, with a staff of approximately 75 pipeline division employees. He worked closely with engineers and owners for the successful completion of many projects during his tenure at United Engineering Corp. Mr. Fonte is currently the Vice President and Pipeline Division Manager of GlobeTec Construction. PROJECT EXPERIENCE: South Dixie Highway — Water and Sewer Improvements $ 4.1MM Gould Water Improvements $ 1.OMM 54" PCCP FM SW 137 Avenue, Miami $ 3.6MM NW 31 Avenue 48 PCCP Transmission Main, Broward $ 4.9MM City of Port St. Lucie Water and Sewer Improvements Ph I $ 7.5MM City of Port St. Lucie Water and Sewer Improvements Ph II $20.OMM Central District Wastewater Oxygenation System, Miami $18.0MM Central District Wastewater Digester Cluster No. 2 $ 9.OMM Central District Wastewater Rehabilitation of Grit Chambers $ 1.8MM Bid Package C Digester Improvements, Broward $10.OMM SDWWTP Re -Use of Reclaimed Water $ 2.3MM WTP #9 Transmission Mains, Palm Beach County $10AMM S. Dixie Highway Water & Sewer Improvements $ 3.8MM Reclaimed Water Mains, Pompano Beach $ 2.0MM Water Transmission Mains, Brandon $ 9.2MM Water & Sewer Improvements, Key Largo $ 5.5MM Sanitary Sewer Improvements, Sanibel $ 6.OMM Drainage & Paving, Miami Dade County $ .5.OMM CARLOMILTON AGUILERA SUPERINTENDENT -PIPE DIVISION Carlomilton Aguilera began his career over thirty years ago supervising construction projects including underground utility construction ranging from $500,000 to over $30 million in value and requiring supervision of up to 80 crew members and several contractors. Prior to joining GlobeTec in 2004, Mr. Aguilera spent five years with Transflorida Developement as a Superintendent. His work included supervision of multimillion water, sewer, drainage & sitework development projects within the tri-county area. From 1998 to 1999: Lij o Inc, Miami, Florida Superintendent Several water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1993 to 1998: Resol Inc, Miami, Florida Superintendent Water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. ROBERT HOLDEN SUPERINTENDENT -PIPE DIVISION Robert Holden began his career over twenty years ago supervising construction projects including underground utility construction ranging from $500,000 to over $12 million in value and requiring supervision of up to 60 crew members and multiple contractors. Prior to joining G1obeTec in 2004, Mr. Holden spent three years with. United Engineering Corporation as a Superintendent. His work included supervision of the following projects: Palm Beach County WTP#9 Transmission Mains $10mm City of Pompano Beach Reclaimed Water Mains $2mm Florida Keys Aqueduct Authority -Ocean Reef Club Water & Sewer Imp. $5.5mm Miami Dade County Drainage & Paving blanket contract $5mm Several other water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1998 to 2000: Mancon Incorporated, Deerfield Beach, Florida Superintendent/Foreman Projects included: City of West Palm Beach Reclaimed Water Transmission Main $2mm Several other water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1996 to 1998: Felix Group, Coral Springs, Florida Superintendent/Foreman Projects included: Broward County Office of Environmental Services Hallandale Neighborhood Improvements Project $4.5mm Several other water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1993 to 1996 SI Nicholas, Fort Lauderdale, Florida Foreman Projects included: City of Miami Beach Lincoln Road Mall Water & Sewer Improvements $8mm City of Miami Beach North Shore Water, Sewer & Drainage Improvements $12mm Several other water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1991 to 1993 Youngquist Brothers/Rocket, Miami, Florida Miami Dade Water & Sewer 96/72/42" PCCP Force Main at Opa Locka $4mm Several other water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1983 to 1991 Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Crew Leader Installation of 42" and smaller diameter steel pipe throughout the State of Pennsylvania WALTER RODRIGUEZ SUPERINTENDENT -PIPE DIVISION Walter Rodriguez began his career over 'fifteen years ago supervising construction projects including underground utility construction ranging from $300,000 to over $10 million in value and requiring supervision of up to 50 crew members and several contractors. Prior to joining GlobeTec in 2003, Mr. Rodriguez spent four years with United Engineering Corporation as a Superintendent. His work included supervision of the following projects: City of Miami Springs Force Main & Pump Station Rehabilitation $1.5mm Miami International Airport UPS Facility Water, Sewer Drainage & Sitework $1.6mm Miami Dade Water & Sewer South Dixie Highway Water & Sewer Imp. Ph III $3.8mm Florida Keys Aqueduct Authority Little Venice Wastewater System $8.8mm Several other water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1996 to 1999: Felix Group, Coral Springs, Florida S uperintendent/Foreman Projects included: Miami Dade Water & Sewer Virginia Key Wastewater Treatment Plant $20mm Miami Dade Water & Sewer Goulds Water Improvements $lmm Several other water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1993 to 1996: Florida Utilities, Miami, Florida Foreman Water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. From 1989 to 1993 Lao & Sons Development, Miami, Florida Foreman Water, sewer, drainage & sitework projects within the tri-county area. KAREN MONICO CONTROLLER Karen Monico began her career over fifteen years ago as an accounting clerk for Adler Group, Inc. During her nine years with this company she worked her way up to Assistant Controller with a staff of six. She was responsible for approximately thirty companies with revenues of over $40 million including a 2 million square foot industrial park with revenues of approximately $20 million. Her duties included payroll processing, monthly financial reporting, job cost progress reports, construction draw requests, assisting with preparation of development budgets and year end accounting. She also handled project insurance, notice to owner and release of liens requirements. In 1996 she went to work for The Langhorne Company as their Controller. She handled property management accounting for a 400,000 square foot commercial property including tax appeals, common area maintenance reconciliation and year-end accounting. She was a consultant to a California based family owned real estate company, which included preparation of reports for refinancing a 1 million square foot, $60 million. portfolio, and various cost effectiveness analysis. As controller for United Engineering Corp. she was responsible for overseeing all daily operations 'including accounts payable, accounts receivable, cash management, job costing, payroll and human resources. In addition, she was responsible for monthly reporting to the CFO, preparation of year end accounting reports and significantly involved in audits. She also handled contract review for procurement of insurance and bonds, and acted as assistant to the President. She is currently the controller of GlobeTec Construction, LLC. EDUCATION: Cumbria, England Upper level business and accounting courses for technical degree Ar-04o CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE CSR I PRODUCE GLbBE - InBUC: ]Cnc . THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MA 9500 South Dadeland Blvd. , #Z00 ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON 9 � . Soar h Daa HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY 1 31 FL 33256-1567 Puone:305-670-6111 Fax:305-670-9699 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED INSURER A: Landmark American ins. INSURERS; Rarttord Vndarvrritars Iz►s. Co. Ct].obeTec COnstrA ion LL INSURERC: bridget'.iald Casualty Yns, Co. Pompano�th Beac )i1133073O-3026 INSURERD: INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE SEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POL ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO W HICJ MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BA' THE-POL• MCIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS -SUBJECT TO•ALL TI1& TERM4 POLICIES, AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. .TR NSRr INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER D T MM D ATE D� GETY A COMMERCIAL GENERAL LHA10195]. 11/26/03 11/26/0 MADE ®OCCUR GEN-L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER; POLICY X JEGaf M LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY B I X ANY AUTO 21UECW8559 10/16/03 10/16/04 ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS GARAGE UABIUTY ANY auro EXCESS/UMBREUA UABIUTY A X OCCUR ❑ CLAIMSMADE LHA024734 02/12/04 11/26/04 DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND G, FMPLOYEW UABIUTY ANY PROPRIETOWPARTNER/EXECUTIVE 0196-03857 11/10/03 11/10/0z OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? It yesdescribe under I SPECIAL PROVISIONS bNow OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS *10 days notice issued for non payment of premium: anivEI CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION TAMAC11 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATH DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILD. ENDEAVOR TO MAIL * 3 0 DAYS WRITTEN City O f Tamarac NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL. Building & Zoning Department 7525 N.W. 8 8 th Avenue IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABIUTY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR Tamarac FL 3 3 3 21- 2 4 01 REPROSENTATIVES. DATE (MMIDD/YYYY) NAIC # 30104 ICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH i LIMITS CCURRENCE $ 10 0 0 0 0 0 ES a oecrssnce $50 0 0 0P (Arty one person) $ExcludedNAL & AOV INJURY $10 0 0 0 0 0AL AGGREGATE $2000000CT$ 1`02PUCTL COMP/OP AGG $ 2 0 0 0 0 0 0ED SINGLE LIMIT deru) $ 10 0 0 0 0 0 INJURYon) $ DILY INjURY (POerr accident) ) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per aceldent) $ AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGO S S $ 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 $4000000 =OCCURRENCE I DER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 5 0 0 0 0 0 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 5 0 0 0 0 0 E.L. DISEASE • POLICY LIMIT I S 5 0 0 0 0 0 APR y LUQ-1 25 (2001/08) ® ACORD CORPORATION 1 Purchasing and Contracts Division City of Tamarac "Committed to Excellence... Always" ADDENDUM NO.2 2 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS BID NO.04-17B DATE OF ADDENDUM: MAY 21, 2004 TO ALL PLAN HOLDERS: The following clarifications, changes, additions and/or deletions are hereby made part of the Contract Documents for the construction of the 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements project as fully and completely as if this same were fully set forth therein: 1. BIDDING/CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS A. Bid Form, Page SCH-3, Lump Sum Bid Breakdown, CLARIFICATION, "Contingency Allowance Item (Section 01010) is Item No. 5". II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls, page 8, Article 2.04, paragraph A, CHANGE "FMX 160" TO "DB 52A". B. Section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls, page 8, Article 2.04, DELETE "F. Provide Deltapoint "S" Hydrostatic Pressure Sensor". C. Section 13720 - Variable Frequency Drive, page 2, Article 2.01, paragraph A, DELETE "Robicon". NOTE: THE BID OPENING DATE HAS BEEN CHANGED. THE NEW OPENING DATE IS THURSDAY, MAY 27,2004 AT 4:00 PM. ALL BIDS MUST BE DELIVERED ON OR BEFORE 4:00 PM LOCAL TIME TO THE PURCHASING OFFICE, ROOM 108. LATE BIDS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. All other terms, conditions and specifications remain unchanged for Bid No. 04-17B. All Bidders must acknowledge receipt and acceptance of Addendum No. 2 by submitting the signed Addendum. This addendum should be signed below and returned with your bid. NAME OF BIDDER: Ci+Lc��Q �fC Ce y, 7525 NW 88th Avenue K Tamarac, Florida 33321-2401 ■ (954) 724-2450 ■ Fox (954) 724-2408 m www.tomarac.org Equal Opportunity Employer Purchasing and Contracts Division City of Tamarac "Committed to Excellence ... Alwoys" ADDENDUM NO.1 2 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANTIMPROVEMENTS BID NO.04-17B DATE OF ADDENDUM: MAY 18, 2004 TO ALL PLAN HOLDERS: The following clarifications, changes, additions and/or deletions are hereby made part of the Contract Documents for the construction of the 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements project as fully and completely as if this same were fully set forth therein: I. BIDDING/CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS A. Instructions to Bidders, page 5, Article 8 Delivery, CHANGE "Project Final Completion shall be within 210 calendar days..." TO "Project Substantial Completion shall be within 210 calendar days...". B. Special Conditions, page 12, Article 6, Site Inspection - City, 2nd paragraph, DELETE AND REPLACE WITH THE FOLLOWING: "Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the hours of 7:00 P.M. and 700 A.M., or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Holidays. If the proper and efficient prosecution of the work requires operations during these hours, written permission of the OWNER/ENGINEER shall be obtained before starting such items of the work." C. Special Conditions, page 29, Article 19, Tests and Inspections, paragraph 19.1, CLARIFICATION "OWNER is responsible for all costs associated with materials testing and inspection as specified in technical specifications, Sections 01005, 1.1, and 01400, 1.06". D. Special Conditions, page 34, Article 26, Final Application for Payment, paragraph 26.2, DELETE AND REPLACE WITH THE FOLLOWING: "Prior to submittal of final application for payment, all CONTRACTOR closeout submittals per technical specification Section 01700, Article 1.06, must have been made and approved by ENGINEER." 7525 NW 88th Avenue ■ Tamarac, Florida 33321-2401 ■ (954) 724-2450 ■ Fax (954) 724-2408 ■ www.tamarac.org Equal Opportunity Employer -by Page 2 E. Bid Form, page SCH-1, 2od paragraph, REVISE AS FOLLOWS: In order to be considered for this project, the Bidder shall possess at time of bid opening one of the following State, County or equivalent licenses: 1. "A State Certification as a Certified General Contractor or Engineering Contractor with at least five (5) verifiable projects of similar scope and complexity of which a minimum of two (2) of the projects involved the construction of a prestressed concrete tank with a minimum volume of 500,000 gallons". OR "A Broward County Competency as an Engineering Contractor Class "A" license with at least five (5) verifiable projects of similar scope and complexity of which a minimum of two (2) of the projects involved the construction of a prestressed concrete tank with a minimum volume of 500,000 gallons". II. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 10999 - Miscellaneous Building Specialties, ADD THE ATTACHED COPY OF SECTION 10999. B. Section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls, page 6, Article 2.01, paragraph D, ADD THE FOLLOWING: 6. Scandia Technologies Division 12340 66th Street North Largo, Florida 33733 Contact: Gary Shamel 727/531-2828 7. Rocha Controls 8918 Sabal Industrial Boulevard Tampa, Florida 33619 Contact: Bob Quid 813/728-5584 Ill. DRAWINGS A. Drawing No. A-4 - Finish Schedules, Interior. Finish Schedule, Pump Room, Remarks, ADD "See Notes 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, and 10". B. Drawing No. A-4 - Finish Schedules, Finish Notes, REMOVE NOTE 8 AND REPLACE WITH THE FOLLOWING: PM Page 3 "Filter effluent transfer pumps, motors, manifold piping and valves shall be coated per System No. 4E. C. Drawing No. A-4 - Finish Schedules, Finish Notes, ADD THE FOLLOWING: "10) Existing two (2) backwash pumps and one (1) remaining high service pump inclusive of all associated piping and valves shall be coated per System No. 4E." D. Drawing No. M-14, Storage Tank Illustrative Elevation and Sections, Sections A, B and C, CHANGE "Detail 408" TO "Detail 407". E. Drawing No. E-6, New High Service Pump Station Lighting and Receptacle Plan, Electrical Equipment Grounding Plan, CHANGE "Detail E, E-20 TO "Detail E, E-21 ". F. Drawings EA E-5, E-12, E-13, E-14, E-15 and E-17 REMOVE AND REPLACE WITH ATTACHED DRAWINGS. All other terms, conditions and specifications remain unchanged for Bid No. 04-17B. All Bidders must acknowledge receipt and acceptance of Addendum No. 1 by submitting the signed Addendum. This addendum should be signed below and returned with your bid. NAME OF BIDD s 7525 N.W. 88th Avenue ■ Tamarac, Florida 33321-2401 ■ (954) 724-1230 ■ Fax (954) 724-2454 ■ jeffm@tamarac.org Equal Opportunity Employer m City of T,irrr% ac _................................._....._... PUnchasing and Contracts Division COMPANY NAME: (Please Print): G4Qhe ec 61o""5+ry C,41 an Phone: cRy 4 q D Fax: (_q5 LI� S Ra - 3 3 D 7 S _S, _ - _ BEFORE SUBMITTING YOUR BID, MAKE SURE YOU... Carefully read the General Terms & Conditions, Special Conditions and the General Requirements. [2 2. Properly fill out the Bid Forms and Schedule of Bid Prices. 3• Fill out and sign the Non -Collusive Affidavit and have it properly notarized. [�'4. Sign the Certification page. Failure to do so will result in your Bid being deemed non -responsive. Y5. Fill out the Offeror's Qualification Statement. L�15 Fill out the References page. Ej7. Sign the Vendor Drug Free Workplace Form. ff8. Fill out the List of Subcontractors. Eg9. Include a 5% Bid Guaranty. Failure to provide the stipulated bond or guaranty will result in automatic rejection of your bid. Payment and Performance Bonds will be required and must be submitted on the City's forms. 10. Fill out and sign the Certified Resolution. ff11. Complete and return the Trench Safety form EX1 2. Include proof of Insurance. Submit ONE (1) Original AND TWO (2) Photocopies of your bid, clearly marked with the BID NUMBER AND BID NAME on the outside of the package. Make sure your Bid is submitted PRIOR to the deadline. Late Bids will nQt'be4cce0ted: Failure to provide the requested attachments may result in your bid being deemed non -responsive. THIS SHOULD BE THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR BID. 42 CITY OF TAMARAC INTEROFFICE MEMORANDUM ENT Tu TR 10483 FINANCE DEPARTMENT PURCHASING DIVISION TO: JAMES MOORE, ASSISTANT DATE: MAY 28, 2004 DIRECTOR, UTILITIES DEPARTMENT FROM: JAMES NICOTRA, SENIOR RE: 2 MG WATER STORAGE TANK PROCUREMENT SPECIALIST, & WATER TREATMENT PLANT PURCHASING DIVISION IMPROVEMENTS Recommendation: To Award to the low responsive/responsible bidder, Globe Tec Construction LLC, for the 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank & Water Treatment Plant Improvements project, Bid No. 04-17B, for the Utilities Department, in the Total Base Bid amount of $2,447,000.00. v After careful review of the low r s onsive/resp nsible b'gder's submittal, the Utilities Department concurs t award to:�7;e— til!z+a.k , in the amount of $ v� The Utilities Department does not concur to award to the low responsive/responsible bidder. Reason(s) for rejection Note: Return this signed concur memo back to Purchasing. Authorized Signer: "7 Signature: 7. Date: ECKLER ENGINEERING, INC. CONSUL NG CIVIL ENGINEERS June 17, 2004 442.E1 Mr. James Moore, P.E. Assistant Director of Utilities Cit of Tamarac 6001 Nab Hill Road Tamarac, FL 33321 Dear Mr. Moore: Reference: Recommendation of Award 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements Tamarac Bid No. 04-17B The City of Tamarac Purchasing Division received, opened and read aloud bids for the 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements on Thursday, May 27, 2004 at 4:00 P.M. Four (4). bids were received ranging in price from $2,447,000 to $2,540,000. The apparent low bid was submitted by Globetec Construction, LLC of Pompano Beach, Florida. Globetec Construction formed their corporation in October 2003 and is in the process of constructing various underground projects at this time. They have a very competent staff of experienced professionals from project managers through field superintendents. We have interviewed the team which will be involved in the construction of the Water Treatment Plant and believe that they have a plan which will be successful for the completion of this project. We have reviewed their references on various projects and all have indicated above average performance. Therefore, Eckler Engineering recommends the award of this construction contract to Globetec Construction L.I.0 in the amount of $2,447,000. This amount is approximately 4.89% higher than the Engineer's Opinion of Probable Construction Cost of $2,333,000. The latest Engineer's Opinion of Probable Construction Cost was prepared in January 2004. Since the time of this cost opinion preparation, there has been significant escalations of cost of construction of materials on a nationwide scale. Cost of construction related materials and equipment constructed of iron, steel, and concrete have seen significant increases in price since January of this year. These materials have seen cost increases in the range of 10-50% since January. As a result of this price escalation, the contingency allowance contained in the Engineer's. Opinion of f'ro ;able Construction Cost was fully utilized. A certified bid cabuiation is attached for your files. The bid tabulation lists the documents which were required to be submitted by the apparent low bidder and the bid amount. An "X" indicates that the necessary documents were submitted and found to be in compliance with the bidding phase requirements of this project. If you have any questions or require additional information pertaining to this recommendation of award or the project in general, please do not hesitate to contact me. Sincere) , Aaul� Douglas K. Hammann, P.E. Encl. YA0ocuments\Tamarac\442.E1 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank\Recommendation of Award.wpd Celebrating our 18th Year of Service to South Florida 4700 RIVERSIDE DRIVE, SUITE 110 9541510.4700 CORAL SPRINGS. FL 33M7 Printed an Recycled Paper FAX 9541755-2741 r on wti v z°z 5m 0 U a� w w0 H F- z w W 7 a a z w �4 W V 0 J m 4~ $O C O� M Z a o 0 0 a CO A a o ti .- 00 o Csi � 60 u x Z z z c d m � R U. o, CD ig x z z pr z 2o 0 H x z z z m c o d x Z Z Z C e x z z z City of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Division AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY OF TAMARAC AND GLOBETEC CONSTRUCTION L.L.C. THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into this A day of �ul 2004 by and between the City of Tamarac, a municipal corporation, with i5rincipal offices located at 7525 N.W. 88th Ave., Tamarac, FL 33321 (the "CITY") and Globetec Construction L.L.C., a Florida Limited Liability corporation with principal offices located at 4250 N. Powerline Rd., Pompano Beach FL 33073, (the "Contractor") to install a new 2.0 MG pre -stressed concrete ground storage tank, new transfer pumps, new high service pumps, piping, valves, electrical, instrumentation, site restoration, inspection and cleaning of existing potable water storage tanks and all other incidentals as indicated by the drawings and specifications or as required to properly complete the project as specified in Bid No. 04-17B. Now therefore, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, the City and Contractor agree as follows: 1) The Contract Documents The contract documents consist of this Agreement, conditions of Bid No. 04-17B bid documents, (General, Special and other Conditions), drawings and specifications, all addenda issued prior to, and all modifications issued after, execution of this Agreement. These contract documents form the Agreement, and all are as fully a part of the Agreement if attached to this Agreement or repeated therein. 2) The Work The Contractor shall perform all work for the City required by the contract documents and Bid No. 04-17B, as set forth below: a) Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary as indicated in the specifications herein. b) Contractor shall supervise the work force to ensure that all workers conduct themselves and perform their work in a safe and professional manner. Contractor shall comply with all OSHA safety rules and regulations in the operation of equipment and in the performance of the work. Contractor shall at all times have a competent field supervisor on the job site to enforce these policies and procedures at the Contractor's expense. c) Contractor shall provide the City with seventy-two (72) hours written notice prior to the beginning of work under this Agrleement and prior to any schedule change with the exception of changes caused by inclement weather. d) Contractor shall comply with any and all Federal, State, and local laws and regulations now in effect, or hereinafter enacted during the term of this Agreement, which are applicable to the Contractor, its employees, agents or subcontractors, if any, with respect to the work and services described herein. Page 1 of 7 of Tamarac P.achasing and Contracts Division 3) Insurance Contractor shall obtain at Contractor's expense all necessary insurance in such form and amount as required by the City's Risk and Safety Manager before beginning work under this Agreement including, but not limited to, Workers' Compensation, Commercial General Liability, and all other insurance as required by the City, including Professional Liability when appropriate. Contractor shall maintain such insurance in full force and effect during the life of this Agreement. Contractor shall provide to the City's Risk and Safety Manager certificates of all insurances required under this section prior to beginning any work under this Agreement. The Contractor will ensure that all subcontractors comply with the above guidelines and will retain all necessary insurance in force throughout the term of this agreement. Contractor shall indemnify and hold the City harmless for any damages resulting from failure of the Contractor to take out and maintain such insurance. Contractor's Liability Insurance policies shall be endorsed to add the City as an additional insured. Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all deductibles and self-insurance retentions on Contractor's Liability Insurance policies. 4) Time of Commencement and Substantial Completion The work to be performed under this Agreement shall be commenced after execution of the Agreement and not later than 14 days after the date that Contractor receives Notice to Proceed and Purchase Order. Project shall be substantially complete within two hundred ten (210) calendar days from receipt of the Notice to Proceed. Final completion shall be thirty (30) calendar days from date of substantial completion. 5) Contract Sum The Contract Sum for the above work is Two Million Four Hundred Forty-seven Thousand Dollars and zero cents ($2,447,000.00). 6) Payments Payments will be made in accordance with contract documents and Bid No. 04- 17B. Payment will be made monthly for work that has been completed, inspected and properly invoiced. A retainage of 10% will be deducted from monthly payment. Retainage monies will be released upon satisfactory completion and final inspection of this project. 7) Waiver of Liens Prior to final payment of the Contract Sum, a final waiver of lien shall be submitted by all suppliers, subcontractors, and/or Contractors who worked on the project that is the subject of this Agreement. 8) Warranty Contractor warrants the work against defect for a period of one year(s) from the date of completion of work. In the event that defect occurs during this time, Contractor shall perform such steps as required in Technical Specifications and Terms and Conditions. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages caused by defect to affected area or to interior structure. Page 2 of 7 of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Division All portions of the Project are to be completed according to the schedule. Once all work has been completed on a grouping of roadway segments, and the City has indicated, in writing, the final acceptance of landscaping, irrigation, brick paving, and electrical work within said grouping, maintenance of the said roadways will be entirely the responsibility of the City. Contractor will be responsible for the coordination of all work to complete specific grouping of roadways before other groupings are commenced. The one (1) year warranty period for the Project does not begin until substantial completion of the entire project and the Payment and Performance Bonds are released. 9) Indemnification The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City, its elected and appointed officials, employees, and agents from any and all claims, suits, actions, damages, liability, and expenses (including attorneys' fees) in connection with loss of life, bodily or personal injury, or property damage, including loss of use thereof, directly or indirectly caused by, resulting from, arising out of or occurring in connection with the operations of the Contractor or its officers, employees, agents, subcontractors, or independent Contractors, excepting only such loss of life, bodily or personal injury, or property damage solely attributable to the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the City or its elected or appointed officials and employees. The above provisions shall survive the termination of this Agreement and shall pertain to any occurrence during the term of this Agreement, even though the claim may be made after the termination hereof. Nothing contained herein is intended nor shall be construed to waive City's rights and immunities under the common law or Florida Statutes 768.28, as amended from time to time. 10) Non -Discrimination The Contractor agrees that it shall not discriminate against any of its employees or applicants for employment because of their age, handicap, race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, and to abide by all federal and State laws regarding non- discrimination. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all subcontracts hereunder except subcontracts for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. Any violation of such provisions shall constitute a material breach of this Agreement. 11) Independent Contractor Contractor is an independent Contractor under this Agreement. Personal services provided by the Contractor shall be by employees of the Contractor and subject to supervision by the Contractor, and not as officers, employees, or agents of the City. Personnel policies, tax responsibilities, social security and health insurance, employee benefits, purchasing policies and other similar administrative procedures applicable to services rendered under this Agreement shall be those of the Contractor. Page 3of7. City of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Division 12) Assignment and Subcontracting Contractor shall not transfer or assign the performance required by this Agreement without the prior consent of the City. This Agreement, or any portion thereof, shall not be subcontracted without the prior written consent of the city. 13) Notice Whenever either party desires or is required under this Agreement to give notice to any other party, it must be given by written notice, sent by registered United States mail, with return receipt requested, addressed to the party for whom it is intended at the following addresses. CITY City Manager City of Tamarac 7525 N.W. 88th Avenue Tamarac, FL 33321 With a copy to City Attorney at the same address. CONTRACTOR Antonio Assenza, President Globetec Construction L.L.C. 4250 N. Powerline Rd. Pompano Beach FL 33073 PH: 954-590-3305 14) Termination This Agreement may be terminated by City or Contractor for cause or by the City for convenience, upon seven (7) days of written notice by the terminating party to the other party for such termination in which event the Contractor shall be paid its compensation for services performed to termination date, including services reasonably related to termination. In the event that the Contractor abandons this Agreement or causes it to be terminated, Contractor shall indemnify the city against loss pertaining to this termination. Default by Contractor: In addition to all other remedies available to the City, this Agreement shall be subject to cancellation by the City should the Contractor neglect or fail to perform or observe any of the terms, provisions, conditions, or requirements herein contained, if such neglect or failure shall continue for a period of thirty (30) days after receipt by Contractor of written notice of such neglect or failure. 15) Agreement Subject to Funding This agreement shall remain in full force and effect only as long as the expenditures provided for in the Agreement have been appropriated by the City Page 4 of 7 of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Division ­...__..'--­.­­ 0 .... . ... . . . Commission of the City of Tamarac in the annual budget for each fiscal year of this Agreement, and is subject to termination based on lack of funding. 16) Venue This Agreement shall be governed byI the laws of the State of Florida as now and hereafter in force. The venue for actions arising out of this agreement is fixed in Broward County, Florida. 17) Signatory Authority The Contractor shall provide the City with copies of requisite documentation evidencing that the signatory for Contractor has the authority to enter into this Agreement. 18) Severability; Waiver of Provisions Any provision in this Agreement that is prohibited or unenforceable in any jurisdiction shall, as to such jurisdiction, be ineffective to the extent of such prohibition or unenforceability without invalidating the remaining provisions hereof or affecting the validity or enforceability of such provisions in any other jurisdiction. The non- enforcement of any provision by either party shall not constitute a waiver of that provision nor shall it affect the enforceability'of that provision or of the remainder of this Agreement. 19) Merger; Amendment This Agreement constitutes the entire Agreement between the Contractor and the City, and negotiations and oral understandings between the parties are merged herein. This Agreement can be supplemented and/or amended only by a written document executed by both the Contractor and the City. Page 5 of 7 of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Division IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have made and executed this Agreement on the respective dates under each signature. CITY OF TAMARAC, signing by and through its Mayor and City Manager, and Globetec Construction L.L.C., signing by and through its President, duly authorized to execute same. CITY OF TAMARAC oe Schreiber, Mayor "7 L a Date ATTEST: ��',kJeffreyll Milf4r, City Manager Marion Swenso , CIVIC City Clerk D ATTEST: (Corpor ecretary) Jose R. Mas Type/Print Name of Corporate Secy (�RfOlf1TE SEAL) i ! y O— Date to ym/and l,9gal sufiency: Mitchell S. Date Globetec Construction L.L.C. Company Name Signat6 of Prpeide Antonio Assenza Type/Print Name of President Date Page 6 of 7 of Tamarac and Contracts Division CORPORATE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATE OF FLORIDA SS COUNTY OF BROWARD I HEREBY CERTIFY that on this day, before me, an Officer duly authorized in the State aforesaid and in the County aforesaid to take acknowledgments, personally appeared Antonio Assenza, President of Globetec Construction L.L.C., a Florida Limited Liability Corporation, to me known to be the person(s) described in and who executed the foregoing instrument and acknowledged before me that he/she executed the same. WITNESS my hand and official seal this '21 day of -aLAJ�,1,,,Q. 2004. LA 4 (" AA0341a�, ign t of taryPublic State of Florida at Large Karen Monico `apr aV'. o� s� Commission # DDMM P F"p or Stamp Ad >14010y Public 2'� Personally known to me or ❑ Produced Identification Type of I.D. Produced ❑ DID take an oath, or ❑ DID NOT take an oath, Page 7 of 7 AWM CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE awIt� Cs��tic� g 6araarrs� TH1S CiRTIFICATt IS ISSti#,IC AS A MATTER OF IXFCAMATtm ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFCATE mW South 0*401*" 01 .. 0200 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICAT9 DOES NOT AMEND. EX19ND OR P,a, tax $04SO ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORD80 BY THE POLIC10 GEI.01N: ,alarm rL 11254w1$47 vbongi 30S•00 61;13 raw 10SWffi?0.9ffi!•0 . .«.«. .,k..«...:...«..«..,•«.«,..«.««.,,..«.w.«WM,«.,....««..www».ww,..,«,.�..,..«. NtSClRMAFFOPJXNGCOVERAGE NAICS awir0 ,, wrwMate► i+NiPt+iC ik�1kCClkh�5. >,...w...�.,« 0-74 ly1NR1G •r r Glaboft a COAI7uuctiort .Z&C i259 Novt4 1t worliru► ilgsd +wNPtrR �•.� ' cv rw wa,,�rr of ww+w� iarHatap.wr Nattrawtorr 1w(wrRAW'a•aANpArrgw ewr ArAipM+Kitl•wi'R-rJM+�eyitwpq �w.1RhL.rlrf•.[K•u17r•C41iP/N6'/�r NNCM1WrdfaArApCYt�,a rw(Na ONO 0/K mW" ft"Iar rr•errw,r 101 04rWUft.AVp. p.wl waR"c+r r1A. qll r4•?A µNip, NMG1yw MM'+.�(wlrA �1(WlApMrMarYrrw►. ...•-.-. w.nwwwa+n rM 6A•N NMrL MY11W`4*0"0 �` M'#�+C1xy 9h/•' •w iMr4 aurw.arwr+r A 9t x osrlw.wiurM e.,rarww aaeua 8 .taraAw.w�.w. gelv#rd X 8rard PC= ""40%.r•ar-loop ��r r IDOOtlQO X Nr at�tAr.�s r 70000OYM , ��� woaanao >3 ? 1aon Ar.w.1.«rr . l0anoea x��xcru�lasa /� �a/aa,'at .�,.���.�...��. «�rN►d,w 1-0 I X i drw•�wACYaMh4Arn( dtirrA.tr � � r�KRIAA�Idar,4µ•iNy�. � a �•��. R 400aonQ ?� h GMC-214734 /1'./01 " ?' f 11/26/04 �rw ,� 400000a J1ritot fw 1 llwR t x ��+� w �� t' wAt6i9aNAcMrckrwyA ++e+A('+t* +Me•e« ns�arlDS1<d� LL/2.0/03 1 11/20/04 («""1 ` .,,n...,,. $66806 �YI�R �AtN'r1...Ht�Adplp i +A aaR.�r�uµt SDOA00 lvsxN rrr..A�prRrwrw + e: p�•r!. w5iwrrwa � R 600ROp �w t a i r 1rRL*+rwtr a �RwAwy�+r�,akA�4aM►+�aaa «� rarr Raaanar•,.semwa � "i F891"t ti , it:-It^Krttir Stotayr Tank timed Water Treatment PImt 1f07r6w++p%*4ta - lhlwr 09 SufrtegatSon 1v pz6vlded under t11a Workers* ccopb06ki4o policy. "rltxdrlrralaw> Gdl2apea, vudsrgiraund. Contractual Liab. rra L»Cird City qS leszeraC Xttxwa Its. K*Atb X, 016tx, CPPQ 7%25 :COI 6a Av*%ur TOOAr44 tL M21 CXTVOFi "� awR.wwraRaawrava�crsuwa-e manneaoeep*aanar aMItT [A+..r«�r-O+ WOwO«..rMcMm[AwOP.. ro MAL. 10 aw 000ww rarw w r w.tsuArc+trrAwti wwr M 1M'�Yw1. Nurruwa ro Nr •N rwaa rrRau re annrrwran wr u*r r *rr Kwo wsr t� �; n r +w �+► w� nr+wrnwLwrr f 11 IMPORTANT It the MtKC444 f or a 40n ACOMNAL, INSURED. the polcy(40 runt to caftmad, A tmt+ wr4 on fNS ceA4,4410 d063 n01 QonNt W ft CW"C,* (raft? 0% tW of % rYWAMgS). r SUBROGATION tS WANC-0, su od to ft lamu and =04ni 0(ft ' cy. O*OW pdwos mo fr",wAv sA andotu ment A sttfhf xrNN on Ws Coft loW does W cwhr tots to ft wd#mtc t0QW& !n kV of 3UCh ttO). The Cone of tnsaranec on ft to me spa 01 I tin Wm d&s nd a comW tom. thV as^ l6surertta,. auftfil*d MWOSMU04 W prodoW. Old the o"S=te hO s'9L►c�t, W MMS it ortroti+or or rt tt r JMW4 eftrW of *0 Go-M48 001dod OY the ockitt SMS ftibm S This E' d=ftont Cirdnges rho Policy, Pleaso Road it Cara fully . ADDITIONAL INSURED -13Y" CONTRA Tt AGREEMENT OR PIT This enftaement modifes insumne 13:ovwed under Me fbHowing• CCOMERCX 0990Al LIAEILMY COVERAGE FMM The fovowino is added to SECt ION 11- WHO IS AN INSURED, & >al. Any terms or "*n1xaUW YOU tM r*rtrad by writiarl =WwA agroerlr o t or permit to name as en irk Is an Insured but * Wth respasct to Amt.A{ity wWnq oa It of: 9. oYour worse performsd for that insured et the bWort destr-lated to he corstn�ct;, agrrstrmag jVperms'; 2. rirmiisas 0AMod or used by you. b. This nice does not aWy Wou its a hd. agroomcet or pean)t Is made pdoi to the "bodtty Injuay' at 1waperty darrrege". c. Ttft ,4umnce does not apply to them, o1 OrWAure to render any.prn!"cm4loM sw*os, d. This invjm= is pfWvy V that is ieq*44 byte tdritrw.. agreement or parToft. This endorsement effbe6 a, I IM,103 fo•' S part of Policy K ribar LHA101961 issve4" to Globn'% CoWruotitrw, ,;LC by Endaor" m►ant No.: 01 RSG 1SM6 0903 No Text CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS for the CITY OF TAMARAC CONSISTING OF: BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT FORMS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS/DRAWINGS ECKLER ENGINEERING, INC. 4700 Riverside Drive Coral Springs, Florida 33067 License Numbers EB7803 February 2004 Douglas K. Hammann, P.E., 50589 Architectural, Mechanical, Process Donald A. ECkler, P.E., 18934 General, Civil Dale G. Walker, P.B., 36914 Electrical Gene S. Sanders, P.B., 26590 Structural 1 11 1� 11 F 1 I 1 rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr-rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr r r r r r r r r r r INVITATION TO DID r r r r r r r r f TA r r r r t: r r •.,,, rR r r „y y r r r r r rr. r r r r r r. r R r. r r r r r r r BID NO. 04-17B r. r r r r r 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank and rr r r Water Treatment Plant Improvements r r-. r71 - Issue l r r e Utilities Department � r r. r r,. r City of Tamarac r r Purchasing Division r r- 7525 NW 88t" Avenue r r Room 108 r''. r r Tamarac, Florida 33321-2401 r �. r (954) 724-2450 r r rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr_rrrrrrrr-rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr L� Invitationto Bid..................................................................................................................2 Instructions to Bidders.......................................................................................................3 SpecialConditions...........................................................................................................11 SpecialProvisions...........................................................................................................18 Bid Coversheet Checklist................................................................................................42 Bid Form and Schedule of Bid Prices ..................................................... SCH-1 TO SCH-6 Non -Collusive Affidavit................................................................................................ 1 - 2 Certification................................................................................................................1 of 1 Offeror's Qualification Statement................................................................................ 1 - 5 References.................................................................................................................1 of 1 Vendor Drug -Free Workplace....................................................................................1 of 1 List of Subcontractors.................................................................................................1 of 1 BidBond...................................................................................................................... 1 - 2 CertifiedResolution....................................................................................................1 of 1 TrenchSafety Act Form.............................................................................................1 of 1 FormPayment Bond................................................................................................... 1 - 3 Form Performance Bond............................................................................................. 1 - 4 Application for Payment.............................................................................................1 of 1 ChangeOrder............................................................................................................1 of 1 Final Release of Lien by Contractor............................................................................ 1 - 2 SampleForm of Agreement........................................................................................ 1 - 8 11 I Cl 11 ©F rAM City of Tamarac "Committed to Excellence... Always" Purchasing and Contracts Division INVITATION TO BID BID 04-17B TO ALL INTERESTED BIDDERS: Sealed bids, addressed to the Senior Procurement Specialist of the City of Tamarac, Broward County, Florida, will be received in the Purchasing Office, 7525 NW 88th Avenue, Tamarac, Florida 33321-2401 until 4:00 p.m. local time, Wednesday, May 26, 2004, at which time bids will be publicly opened and announced for: 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK & WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS All bids received after the date and time stated above will be returned unopened to the Bidder. All Bidders are invited to attend the opening. The work to be performed consists of the Contractor furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary, as indicated in the specifications herein and generally to include installation of new high service pumps, piping, valves, electrical, instrumentation and site restoration and all other incidentals as indicated by the drawings and specifications or as required to properly complete the project as planned. Submit one (1) original document, marked "Original" on its exterior, prior to the bid opening deadline. Two (2) photocopies should accompany your original. Bids shall be submitted on the official Bid Forms furnished with this bid package; and those submitted otherwise will not be considered responsive. The submittal should be plainly marked "Bid 04-17B, 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements " on the outside of the envelope. Late bids will not be accepted. Bid Security: Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier's check, or a Bid Bond, in an amount not less than 5% of the total bid price, payable to the City of Tamarac, as guarantee that the Bidder, if its Bid is accepted, will promptly execute r ee the�Agreement. „r A Pre -Bid Conference will be heiu �n%�_�+, ,ay ), Luu4 at 10:00 a.m. at Tamarac City Hall, Conference Room 107, 7525 NW 88t" Avenue, Tamarac, Florida. All parties interested in bidding on this project should attend this meeting. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, or any part of any bid, to waive any informalities, and to award in the best interest of the City of Tamarac. Bid documents will be available for review in the Purchasing Office and may be purchased at a cost of $160.00 per set. Payment must be made to the City of Tamarac. For non -technical inquiries, contact the Purchasing Office at (954) 724-2450. For technical issues, contact Doug Hammann, P.E., Eckler Engineering, 4700 Riverside Dr., Suite 110, Coral Springs, FL 33067, (954) 510-4700, fax (954) 755-2741. include the Pratecr Warne and Bid Nurnber un all correspondence._ James S. Nicotra, CPPB 1 Senior Procurement Specialist Publish Sun Sentinel: Sunday, April 25 and May 2, 2004 7525 NW 88th Avenue a Tamarac, Florida 33321-2401 a (954) 724-2450 9 Fax (954) 724-2408 2 www.tomarac.org Equal Opportunity Employer 1 1 f dl J3 f rJtJ t 7d ( 1PP acts i iwsiun INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID NO. 04-17B It is the intent of the City to award this bid to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder for either the base bid or base bid plus any/or all alternates, as the City determines is in its best interest. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive any informality concerning the bids when such rejection or waiver is deemed to be in the best interest of The City of Tamarac. DESCRIPTION OF WORK The City of Tamarac is interested in obtaining proposals from qualified Contractors for installation of a new 2.0 MG pre -stressed concrete ground storage tank, new transfer pumps, new high service pumps, piping, valves, electrical, instrumentation, site restoration, inspection and cleaning of existing potable water storage tanks and all other incidentals as indicated by the drawings and specifications or as required to properly complete the project as planned. The work consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, tools, service and supervision. Bidder shall, at time of bid opening, possess a State Certified General Contractor or Engineering Contractor or a County Class "A" Engineering Contractor license. GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS These general terms and conditions apply to all offers made to the City of Tamarac by all prospective Bidders including but not limited to Request for Quotes, Request for Bids and Request for Proposals. As such the words "bid" and "proposal" are used interchangeably in reference to all offers submitted by prospective bidders. 1. - SUBMISSION OF THE BID p The Bidder is directed to deliver sealed bids to the Purchasing Office, Room 108, City of Tamarac, 7525 NW 88th Avenue, Tamarac, Florida 33321, at the date and time specified on the Invitation to Bid sheet. At this time the bids will be opened, the names of all Bidders will be announced and all bids shall be a matter of public - - record. --All Bidders and their representatives are invited -to -attend. The Bidder must - --- -___ show the bid name and number on the outside of the sealed bid package. Delivery of the sealed bids to the Purchasing Office on or before the above date is solely and strictly the responsibility of the Bidder. Late bids will be returned unopened to _ �. ,.. ... _.the Bidder. - -- understand the requirements of this- bid:- __ _ - ---- __ he bid Unless otherwise responsibility 'the Bidder must use the bid form furnished in t package. If requests for clarifications are not submifted rn writing to the City s Engineer/Project Manager within seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, it shall be construed that the Bidder fully understands and does comply with all terms, conditions and specifications identified in this bid. The Bidder shall submit one (1) original bid document, marked "Original" prior to the bid opening deadline. Two (2) photocopies should accompany your original; however, copies must be made available within 3 business days of City's request. .............. The original bid must be manually and duly signed in ink by a Corporate Officer, Principal, or Partner with the authority to bind the bidding company or firm by his/her signature. All quotations must be typewritten or filled in with pen and ink. Bids having erasures or corrections should be initialed in ink by the Bidder. All prices, terms and conditions quoted in the submitted bid will be firm for acceptance for ninety (90) days from the date of the bid opening unless otherwise stated by the City. 2. BID GUARANTY An acceptable Bid Bond, Cashier's Check, or Certified Check payable to the City of Tamarac in amount not less than 5. % (five percent) -of the bid,, must accompany the bid. Additional bonding may be required in the Special Terms and Conditions of this invitation. The Bond must be executed by a surety company authorized to do business in the State of Florida or secured in a manner satisfactory to the City of Tamarac. 3. WITHDRAWAL OF BID Any Bidder may withdraw its bid prior to the indicated opening .time. The request for withdrawal must be submitted in writing to the City Purchasing Office. 4. PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for public entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to public entity, may, not be awarded: or perform work as a Contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or `consultant under a contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017, for Category Two for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. 5. NON -COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT 1 I 1 Each Contractor shall complete the Non -Collusive Affidavit and should submit the form with the Proposal. The City considers failure of the Contractor to submit this document to be a major irregularity and -maybe cause for rejection- of the Proposal � :­--- - if not. received within three 3 business days of_City's.request. 6: --QUANTITIES —.-..- Quantities if shown are estimates only. No guarantee or warranty is given or implied by the City as to the total amount that may or may not be purchased from any resulting contract. The City reserves the right to decrease or increase quantities or add or delete any item from the contract if it is determined that it best serves the interests of the City. C� <', "" a!r'i:_'r ,c F't.;r'+ hasim,.y ,god i"r, afrac is L ivr�iar'r 7. PRICES, PAYMENTS AND DISCOUNTS Bid prices shall be fixed and firm to the extent required under Special Conditions. Payment will be made only after receipt and acceptance of materials/services. Cash discounts may be offered for prompt payment; however, such discounts shall not be considered in determining the lowest net cost for bid evaluation. Bidders are encouraged to provide prompt payment terms in the space provided on the Bid Form. If no payment discount is offered, the Bidder should enter zero (0) for the percentage discount to indicate net '30 days. If the Bidder does not enter a percentage discount, it is understood and agreed that the payment terms shall be 2% 10 days, net 30 days effective on the date that the City receives an accurate invoice or accepts the product, whichever is the later date.,. Payment is. -deemed to be made on the date of the mailing of the check. 8DELIVERY All items shall be delivered F.O.B. destination to a specific City of Tamarac ess. All delivery cost and charges must be included in the bid price. Project A._-�finarcompletion shall be within 2101 calendar days from receipt of Notice to eed. Final completion shall be 30 calendar days from substantial completion. 9. BRAND NAMES Manufacturers' name, brand name, model number or make are used in these specifications for the sole purpose of establishing minimum requirements of quality, performance and design. The City through Consultant will endeavor to name at least three (3) such references. Any such reference is intended merely to establish a standard; and, unless it is followed by the words "no substitution is permitted", approved equal is added to the specifications to avoid ruling out qualified competition. `Where' equal is bid, the Bidder should 'submit brochures, ``r specifications and/or samples to the City's Consultant or Engineer/Project Manager seven (7) days prior to bid opening, however, such must be provided within three (3) days upon request of City. The City or City's Consultant for the project shall be the sole judge of equality relative to substance, quality and function. -----10.- SAMPLES AND DEMONSTRATIONS When requested, samples, are to be furnished free of charge to the City. If a sample is requested it should be delivered within seven (7) days prior to bid .. ---- opening, however, such must be provided within three days it is requested b City- p g, , unless otherwise stated in the bid. Each sample must be marked with the bidder's samples. The C , name and manufact re's brand name. full demo will not be responsible for returning " nstration of any product_ qr service before the award of a contract. All demonstrations will be done at the expense of the Bidder. .11. CONDITIONS OF MATERIALS All materials and products supplied by the Bidder in conjunction with this bid shall be new, warranted for their merchantability, fit for a particular purpose, free from defects and consistent with industry standards. The products shall be delivered to ................................. ..... .__...... ... ................ ............. ...... ....... ..._............................................... _.......... ...._............................................ ......... .............. -- ........ ... ................... ....................... ..... .......................... ... _............ ...................................... 11 "f=:y %-( ? fbrt3 :if'c: Flwchasmq and Crnlncls Division .......... ...... ................ . .,..._. .,.......... the City in excellent condition. In the event that any of the products supplied to the City are found to be defective or do not conform to the specifications, the City reserves the right to return the product to the Bidder at no cost to the City. 12. COPYRIGHTS OR PATENT RIGHTS The Bidder warrants that there has been no violation of copyrights or patent rights in manufacturing, producing or selling the goods shipped or ordered as a result of this bid. The seller agrees to hold the City harmless from all liability, loss or expense occasioned by any such violation. 13. SAFETY STANDARDS The Bidder warrants that the product(s) supplied to the City conforms in all respects to the standards set forth in the Occupational Safety and Health Act and its amendments to any industry standards if applicable. In compliance with Chapter. 442, Florida Statutes, any toxic substance delivered from a contract resulting from this bid must be accompanied by a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). A Material. Safety Data Sheet should also be submitted to the City of Tamarac Risk �. Management Division, 7525 NW 88th Avenue, Tamarac FL 33321-2401. 14. PERFORMANCE Failure on the part of the Bidder to comply with the conditions, terms, specifications and requirement of the bid shall be just cause for the cancellation of the bid award. The City may, by written notice to the Bidder, terminate the contract for failure to perform. The date of termination shall be stated in the notice. The City shall be the sole judge of nonperformance. 15. DEFAULT In the event that the Bidder defaults on the contract or the contract is terminated for cause due to performance, the City reserves the right to obtain the materials or services from the next lowest Bidder or other source during the remaining term of the contract. Under this arrangement the City will charge the Bidder any excess cost occasioned or incurred thereby and shall apply to any bid bond required. _-_...._. 16. TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF CITY Upon seven (7) calendar days written notice, delivered by certified mail, return receipt requested, to the Bidder, the CITY may without'Cause"'and`without prejudice to any. other right or remedy, terminate the.agreement for the CITY's convenience-_ _ T whenever the CITY determines that such'termination is` n' the best interest of the ° --CITY., Where _the agreement- is - terminated- for- the convenience-of-the-CITY--the-----------,-- notice of termination to the Bidder must state that the contract is being terminated for the convenience of the CITY under the termination clause and the extent of termination. Upon receipt of the notice of termination for convenience, the Bidder shall promptly discontinue all work at the time and to the extent indicated on the notice of termination, terminate all outstanding sub -Contractors and purchase orders to the extent that they relate to the terminated portion of the Contract and refrain from placing further orders and sub -contracts except as they may be 1 1 r I i rit � (�t.dPs;{?? Yid :1f1d 77.P aci s.%1lvl,ymn y Tam,.if ..t. necessary, and complete any continued portions of the work. In the event that the Contractor abandons this Agreement or causes it to be terminated, Contractor shall indemnify the City against loss pertaining to this termination. Default by Contractor: In addition to all other remedies available to the City, this Agreement shall be subject to cancellation by the City should the Contractor neglect or fail to perform or observe any of the terms, provisions, conditions, or requirements herein contained, if such neglect or failure shall continue for a period of thirty (30) days after receipt by Contractor of written notice of such neglect or failure. 17. ASSIGNMENT The Bidder shall not transfer or assign the performance nce required by this bid without the. prior written consent of the City. Any award issued pursuant to this bid and monies that may become due hereunder are not assignable except with prior written approval of the City. 18. EMPLOYEES Employees of the Bidder shall at all times be under its sole direction and not an employee or agent of the City. The Bidder shall supply competent and physically capable employees. The City may require the Bidder to remove an employee it deems careless, incompetent, insubordinate or otherwise objectionable. Bidder shall be responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of all employees working under its directions. 19. TAXES The City of Tamarac ,is exempt from all Federal, State,,'. and Local, taxes. An . exemption `certifrcatewill be provided where applicable upon 'requ.e 20. BID PREPARATION EXPENSE 21 The Bidder preparing a bid in response to this bid shall bear all expenses associated with its preparation. The Bidder shall prepare a bid with the understanding that no claim -for -reimbursement shall - a submitted to the--City-for the expense of bid preparation and/or presentation. SITE INSPECTION - It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to inspect the site before submission of bids:. No plea of ignorance' by the Bidden of conditions that exist or that, may. _ this contract will be hereafter exist- as a result of failure., to fulfill the requirements of this _ _ accepted as the basis for varying the requirements of the City or the compensation to the Bidder. 22. OMISSION OF DETAILS Omission of any essential details from these specifications will not relieve the Bidder of supplying such product(s) as'specified. 1 I c% y of rilt;li=rFC; �" 1:7'u1O} asi0q etrx Coil lids Division ......., . , ..,.. _ . .... _...,. _. . ,,.... 23. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS Bidder agrees to, in the performance of work and services under this Agreement, comply with all federal, state, and local laws and regulations now in effect, or hereinafter enacted during the term of this agreement that are applicable to Contractor, its employees, agents, or subcontractors, if any, with respect to the work and services described herein. Bidder shall obtain at Bidder's expense all necessary insurance in such form and amount as required by the City's Risk & Safety Manager before beginning work under this Agreement. Bidder shall maintain such insurance in full force and effect during the life of this Agreement. Bidder shall provide to the City's Risk & Safety Manager, certificates of all -insurance, required °under°this L section prior�to beginning any work under this Agreement. Bidder shall indemnify and save the City harmless from any damage resulting to it for failure of either Bidder or any subcontractor to obtain or maintain such insurance. The following are required types and minimum limits of insurance coverage that the Bidder agrees to maintain during the term of this contract: Limps Line of Business/ Coverage Occurrence Aggregate Commercial General Liability $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Including: Premises/Operations Contractual Liability Personal Injury Explosion, Collapse, Underground Hazard Products/Completed Operations Broad Form Property Damage \ Cross Liability and Severability of Interest Claus' e Automobile Liability $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Workers' Compensation & Employer's Liability Statutory Builder's Risk Insurance is required in an amount not less than the replacement cost for the construction of the work. Coverage shall be "All Risk" coverage for one hundred (100%) of the completed value. The City reserves the right to require higher limits depending upon the scope of work under this Agreement. Neither Bidder nor any subcontractor shall commence work under this contract until they have obtained all insurance required under this section and have �� supplied the' City with---eVidence-of such -coverage in tile16rm of an insurance certificate and endorsement. The Bidder will ensure that all subcontractors will comply with the above guidelines and will maintain the necessary coverages throughout the term of this Agreement. All insurance carriers shall be rated at least A-VII per Best's Key Rating Guide and be licensed to do business in Florida. Policies shall be "Occurrence" form. Each carrier will give the City sixty (60) days notice prior to cancellation. The Bidder's liability insurance policies shall be 1 "additional endorsed to add the City of Tamarac and Eckler Engineering, Inc. as an insured". The Bidder's Worker's Compensation carrier will provide a Waiver of Subrogation to the City. The Bidder shall be responsible for the payment of all deductibles and self -insured retentions. The City may require that the Bidder purchase a bond to cover the full amount of the deductible or self -insured retention. If the Bidder is to provide professional services under this Agreement, the Bidder must provide the City with evidence of Professional Liability insurance with, at a minimum, a limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate. "Claims -Made" forms are acceptable for Professional Liability insurance. 24. INDEMNIFICATION xb The Bidder shall indem.nify and hold harmiess the City of Tamarac, 'itsYelecte d and appointed officials and employees from any and all claims, suits, actions, damages, liability, and expenses (including attorneys' fees) in connection with loss of life, bodily or personal injury, or property damage, including loss of use thereof, directly or indirectly caused by, resulting from, arising out of or occurring in connection with the operations of the Bidder or his Subcontractors, agents, officers, employees or independent Contractors, excepting only such loss of life, bodily or personal injury, or property damage solely attributable to the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the City of Tamarac or its elected or appointed officials and employees. 25. CLARIFICATION TO TERMS AND CONDITIONS Where there appears to be variances or conflicts between the General Terms and Conditions and the Special Conditions and/or Detailed Specifications outlined in this bid, the Special Conditions and/or the Detailed Specifications shall prevail. The Bidder shall examine all bid documents and shall judge all matters' relating to the adequacy and accuracy of such documents. Any inquires, suggestions, requests for clarification or solicitation for additional information should be submitted in writing to the Consultant within ten (10) days prior to bid opening. The City shall not be responsible for oral interpretations given by any City employee or its representative. 26. BID TABULATION Bidders whowish to receivethe bid tabulation can submit an e-mail to a eacopy purchay- also. rdownload bid :results-from,,the City's - = sin -Bidders may-, website at hft ://www.tamarac.or /De t/fin/ urch/resuIts.html Bid results will not given; telephone. The City does not notify unsuccessful bidders of,' out bY. __ contract _awards_. _, 27. RECORDS/AUDITS The Contractor shall maintain during the term of the contract all books, reports and records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and standards for records directly related to this contract. The form of all records and reports shall be subject to the approval of the City's Auditor. The Contractor agrees to make u 1 ry ,f Tara c ;,a •' inJtasa g a, rtj C:.onbacfs Division available to the City"s Auditor; during normal business hours and in Broward, Dade or Palm Beach Counties, all books of account, reports and records relating to this contract for the duration of the contract and retain them for a minimum period of one (1) year beyond the last day or the contract term. 28. LICENSES To be eligible for award of this project, the Contractor must possess at time of bid opening, one of the following State Certified and/or County Competency licenses; State: Engil 000 ing,.Contracio Certified General, Contractor. or. Certlifaad . r KO County: Class "A" Engineering Contractor t 1 1 1 ........................... ................... . ................ 10 .. .................. ........................ ......... . ... 1 M a( 0c,n r a t s Division �1 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT Neither this contract, nor any portion thereof, shall be assigned, except by formal approval of the City Commission. No such approval will be construed as making the City a part of or to such assignment, or subjecting the City to liability of any kind to any assignee. No subcontract or assignment shall, under any circumstances, relieve the Contractor of his liability and obligation under this contract, and despite any such assignment, the City shall deal through the Contractor only. However, if the company is sold during the:,life of the contract, the buying agent must provide the City -with aJetter signed..by an officer of the new owner that can legally bind the company, stating that they will continue to perform the requirements of the contract under all the terms, conditions, and specifications so stated in the contract. 2. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY Contractor shall provide sufficient manpower so as to perform work safely and expeditiously with all equipment plainly marked with the company name. All equipment provided pursuant to this agreement shall be in good and proper working order. No work shall be performed before 8:00 AM. Exceptions to this schedule can only be made with the prior approval of the City in writing. The Contractor shall provide a qualified superintendent present on the site at all times, as a fully authorized agent of the Contractor, and capable of making on -site decisions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to remove from the job site and properly dispose of all residues at the end of each and every workday. Any materials;o�,equipment left . on site shall be secured by the Contractor, who is fully and totally responsible for security. Loss of materials or equipment due to theft, vandalism, etc. shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any material left on site overnight shall be properly marked and identified in order to ensure _public -safety. _ _- ----- ___. 3. DAMAGE TO PUBLIC AND/OR PRIVATE PROPERTY Extreme icare shall be systems,- to safeguard all existing facilities, site amenities, utilities,--- irrigation y ,rand vehicles---orr-or -around =the job -site.- Damage, p lic , and/or private property shall be ;the responsibility of the :.o u . _ Contractor and shall be repaired and/or replaced in equal'or better condition at no .--.—additional, cost .to..the..City.-The-Contractor-shall _use all means_ to. protect -existing------_ __.._ objects, structures and vegetation designated to remain. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs, replacements and dressings to damaged materials, to the approval of the City, at no additional cost to the City. In the event of damage to public and/or private property, the Contractor shall immediately contact the City's Utilities Department by telephone at (954) 724-2400 and inform the appropriate staff member about the location and extent of the damages. 1 I of Ta'artpa: ac Ptirchasfray and i;on!racis Division _ ...... 1... . 4. PERMITS AND LICENSES The Contractor shall be responsible for securing all City permits. However, all City permit fees are waived. The Contractor shall submit copies of all permits required for this work. The Contractor shall be responsible to secure the necessary construction permits from other agencies as identified in the Technical Specifications. Cost of permits from agencies other than the City, will be reimbursed by City without markup, for properly submitted invoices. Permit fees shall be reimbursed by payment through the Contingency Allowance, if applicable. 5. SITE INSPECTION — CONTRACTOR It shall be•the full responsibility �of,the°bidder to visit and inspect the proposed construction site as shown on the Construction Plans prior to the submission of a bid. No variation in price or conditions shall be permitted based on a claim of ignorance: Submission of the bid is evidence that the bidder has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the work, and the equipment, materials, and labor requirements. Should the bidder see any problem, the bidder is to bring the problem to the attention of the City immediately. 6. SITE INSPECTION — CITY i All work will be conducted under the general direction of the Utilities Department, and Building Department of the City of Tamarac, and is subject to inspection by the appointed inspectors to ensure compliance with the terms of the contract. No inspector is authorized to change any provision of the specifications without written authorization from the aforementioned agencies nor shall the presence or absence of an inspector relieve the Contractor from anyj requirements of the contract. Any work performed past City of Tamarac's normal working hours (M-F, 8:00 AM — 4:00 PM) must be inspected. If any work is done outside of normal working hours, the City inspector is to be compensated by the Contractor at a rate of $55.00/hour. However, if a City contract/consultant inspector is used, the Contractor will _. _.. _ _._._._._compensate that...inspector at,.the...same cost. as- the City's-cost.-..I.n addition, the City..,-.,, inspector must be onsite at least one (1) hour prior to closing site for,each day. If site closure has taken place after 4:30 PM, the City inspector will be compensated at the above provision. _ --- 7. SUBMITTALS q q ": � _ .rig_, Contractor shall submit all re u�red forms, , and documents as re uired by this contract..including..bu,t not..-Iimited_.to_-bo.nds,insurance-certificates.-and_-any-required___._ drawings within 15 days from the Award. Additionally, Contractor shall apply for all applicable licenses or permits within 15 days of the Award. 8. - -WAIVER OF LIENS Prior to Final Payment of the Contract Sum, a final waiver of lien shall be submitted by all suppliers, subcontractors, and/or Contractors who worked on the project that .12 1 ---- x : r r� 5 t c9 < r t;' C-r.. r.?; ...... is subject of the Agreement. Payment of the invoice and acceptance of such 1 9 payment by the Contractor shall release the CITY from all claims of liability to the Contractor in connection with the Agreement. 9. PAYMENT Payment will be made monthly for work that has been completed, inspected and properly invoiced. A retainage of 10% will be deducted from monthly payment. Retainage monies will be released upon satisfactory completion and final inspection of this project. Invoices must bear the project name, project number, bid number and purchase order number. The City has up to thirty (30) days to review, approve ,and pay all invoices after receipt. The Contractor shall invoice the City and provide a written request to the City to commence the one-year warranty period. All necessary Release of Liens and Affidavits shall be processed before the warranty period. 10. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract documents shall consist'' of the Standard Form Of Agreement, Bid Proposal executed and submitted by the Contractor, project specifications, plans and specifications (where applicable), any addendums or change orders, bond(s), insurance certificate(s), and the City Resolution awarding the bid. 11. CHANGE ORDERS Without invalidating the contract, without any monetary compensation, and without notice to any surety, the City reserves and shall have -the right to make increases, decreases or other changes to the work as may be considered necessary or desirable to complete the proposed construction in a satisfactory manner. The Contractor shall not start work pursuant to the change order until a'. change order setting forth the adjustments is approved by the City, and executed by the City and Contractor. Once the change order is so approved, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the work. CHANGES IN THE WORK/CONTRACT PRICE 12. CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments, if applicable) payable to the Contractor for performing the work. All - --- - = duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by the Contractor - -- shall be at his expense without change in ;the Contract Price or Time except as approved in writing by the Engineer/Project (Manager. 12.1 Change Order The Contract Price and/or Time may only be changed by a Change Order. A fully executed change order for any extra work must exist before such extra work is begun. Any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party promptly (but in no event later than 15 days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. The 13 .Ge..rttr.3c:.i,� ........................;r<art amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered (unless the Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the amount claimed covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph. CHANGES IN CONTRACT TIME 13. CHANGE ORDER The Contract Time may only be changed by,,,a ,Change Order.,:A fully executed change order must exist prior., to, extension of the -contract time. 13.1 Notice Any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Time shall be,based on ..� written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party promptly (but in no event later than 15 days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Contractor hereby agrees to waive rights to recover any lost time or incurred costs from delays unless Contractor has given the notice and the supporting data required by this Paragraph. 13.2 Basis for Extension Extensions of time shall be considered and will be based solely upon the effect of delays to the work as a whole. Extensions of time shall not be granted for delays to the work, unless the Contractor can clearly demonstrate that such delays did or will, in fact, delay the progress of work as a whole. Time extensions shall not be allowed for delays to parts of the work,that are not on the critical path. of the project schedule. Time extensions shall not be granted until all float or contingency time, at the time of delay, available to absorb specific delays and associated impacts is used 14. CITY'S OPTION -- -Inthe event satisfactoryadjustment cannot be reached b. the City .. and � y y the Contractor for any item requiring a change in the contract, and a change order has not been issued, the City reserves the right at its sole option to terminate the contract as it applies to these items in question and make such arrangements as " the City deems necessary to complete the work. The cost of any work covered by" -- -- change.price shall be ecrease m - ontract pri --- - =-- _the,,c determined bmutual of a y p lump sum by the City and Contractor. If given "to. -a � -------nofice- -of any -change in.the contract-or-contrcttsIn suretyb the provisions of the bond, thegiving of such notice shall be the Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable bond shall be adjusted accordingly. The Contractor shall furnish proof of such adjustment to the CITY. Failure of the Contractor to obtain such approval from the Surety may be a basis for termination of this Contract by the CITY. iV :.;r ivl11C.'fl"I 15. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Upon failure of Contractor to complete the work within the time specified for completions, (plus approved extensions if any), Contractor shall pay City the sum of 5500.O9 for each calendar day that the completion of the work is delayed beyond the time specified in the contract for completion, as fixed and agreed liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Liquidated damages are hereby fixed and agreed upon between the parties, recognizing the impossibility of precisely ascertaining the amount of damages that will be sustained by City as a consequence of such delay and both parties desiring to obviate any question of dispute concerning the amount of..,said damages and the cost and effect of the failure of Contractor to, complete the contract, an time..Regerdle s,of whether, or not a single Contract is involved, the above -stated liquidated damages shall apply separately to each portion of the work for which a time of completion is given. City shall have the right to deduct from and retain out moneys which may be due or which may become due and payable to Contractor, the amount of such liquidated damages and if the amount retained by City is insufficient to pay in full such liquidated damages, Contractor shall pay in full such liquidated damages. Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursing City, in addition to liquidated damages or other per day damages for delay, for all costs of engineering, architectural fees, and inspection and other costs incurred in administering the construction of the project beyond the completion date specified or beyond an approved extension of time granted to Contractor whichever is later. These liquidated damages will not prohibit City from recovering ascertainable actual damages incurred as a result :of the same delay to which the liquidated damages apply. Contractor may be liable for both liquidated damages as stated herein, and for excess completion costs of this project. In the event Contractor has been either terminated from or has abandoned the project prior, to completion, this-" liquidated damages clause is still applicable to hold Contractor liable for the liquidated damages. 16. BONDS The Contractor shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds in the amount f 100°�of the total- bid paward amount as security, -for the faithful project —^ performance and payment of all of the. Contractor's obligations under the contract documents, per City Code Section 10-,156. At the completion and formal approval and acceptance of all work associated with the project, a one year warranty period will begin. AHN6 time, a warranty bond in°an amount'notless than 25%`ofthe final contract. amountrnust be submitted _ If_the Wsurety„ on any, -bond by -_ the ..Contractor is..- decl..ared._bankrupt or becomesinsolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in Florida, the Contractor shall, within seven (7) days, thereafter, substitute another bond meeting the requirements outlined above, which must also be acceptable to the City. _ 17. PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND WARRANTY BONDS Within fifteen (15) calendar days after the contract award, but in any event prior to commencing work, the Successful Bidder shall execute and furnish the CITY a ........ 11...... .......... ....... _ ... ...... 1. _ .... ..............................................._ ........ ........ 1 P{+pi:'he:xsu)g and ( ontrad's Div%tiff' o Performance Bond and Payment Bond, each written by a corporate surety, having a resident agent in the State of Florida and having been in business with a record of successful continuous operation for at least five (5) years. The surety shall hold a current certificate of authority from the Secretary of Treasury of the United States as an acceptable surety on federal bonds in accordance with United States Department of Treasury Circular No. 570. The Contractor shall be required to provide acceptable, separate Performance and Payment Bonds in the amount of 100% of the bid award. The Performance Bond shall be conditioned that the Successful Bidder performs the contract in the time and manner prescribed in the contract. The Payment Bond shall be conditioned that the Successful. Bidder promptly make payments to all persons who. supply the Successful Bidder in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract and shall provide that the surety shall pay the same in the amount not exceeding the sum provided in such bonds, together with interest at the maximum rate allowed by law and that they shall indemnify and save harmless the CITY to the extent of any and all payments in connection with the carrying out of said contract which the CITY may be required to make under the law. Payment and Performance Bonds must be submitted on City forms, included herein. Such bonds shall continue in effect for one (1) year after final payment becomes due except as otherwise provided by law or regulation or by the Contract Documents with the final sum of said bonds reduced after final payment to an amount equal to twenty five percent (25%) of the Contract price, or an additional bond shall be conditioned that the Successful Bidder correct any defective of faulty work or material which appear within one (1) year after final completion of the Contract, upon notification by CITY. The Warranty Bond shall cover the cost of labor as well as materials. 1`8. LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES F1 fl 1 1 I 1 1 r Existing utilities may be shown on the drawings. Such information is shown for design purposes and the existing and detail given is information that is obtained during the design period and is not necessarily complete, correct or current. Prior to commencement of construction, the Contractor is responsible for locating - -----existing city utilities affected by the construction in the field.- Such -utilities -Include --- but are not limited to water mains, force mains, gravity sewers, pump stations, storm sewers and drain systems. The City will provide to the Contractor available construction drawings for locating existing city utilities. However, the City cannot guarantee the accuracy of drawings or any information related to existing utilities -- and the City will not assume responsibility or liability for damage resulting from the Contractor incorrectly locating existing utilities. ���-Damage to any of tKi§---City's -utilities incorrectly locafecrby-he -Contractor or -his—� agents shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be repaired and or replaced to equal or better condition at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall also be liable for all damages and claims against or by the City arising in any way from damage or interference with such utilities. .... __...... _.............. .... ._... ..... ...... . ... ....... .......... ............. i6 -,r,r{�ha's"'09 i100 !.-00,ffaufs Division .. ....... . . ... .... . .... ................ . . .. ............ . . .. 11 1 11 11 n 1 1 [l .-- I - - I -... 1 No additional compensation shall be allowed to the Contractor for any delays, inconvenience or damage sustained by him due to interference and/or incorrectly locating such utilities or appurtenances',. Numerous utilities not owned by the City exist within the project area that may or may not have been depicted on the drawings. The Contractor shall exercise care in digging and other work so as to not damage existing utilities including overhead utilities and underground cables and pipes. The Contractor is also responsible for contacting the Sunshine State One Call Center of Florida (Sunshine) at 1-800-432- 4770 to determine location of underground utilities. Calls to Sunshine must be made at least 48 hours before digging but not more than five {5); days prior. Contractor is responsible for renewing locates if, job extends : beyond marking period established by Sunshine. Any utility in the vicinity that is not a member of the Sunshine Service must be notified directly. Should any underground( obstructions be encountered which interfere with the work, the City shall be notified at once.. The Contractor shall be responsible for the immediate repair of any damage caused by the work, and shall be responsible for any disruption of service caused by this damage. 19. CONFLICT WITH EXISTING UTILITIES Upon completion of locating existing utilities affected by the proposed construction by the Contractor, and prior to commencement of construction, the Contractor shall examine the alignment of proposed work to be constructed and identify any conflicts with existing utilities. If such conflicts exist, the Contractor shall undertake accurate surveys to determine elevations of utilities and shall notify the Engineer/Project Manager in writing seven (7) working days prior to the scheduled construction. The Engineer/Project Manager may revise the proposed design or recommend ways and means to avoid such conflicts. The Contractor may re schedule his work so that the construction can be completed on time. No claim for down times by the Contractor shall be allowed. 20. CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE' -A contingency allowance may -have been allowed for this- project in the amount f - identified in the Bid Schedule. If a contingency allowance is stipulated in the bid, the Contractor is not to use this contingency allowance without permission from the City and upon written justification to the City for such use. Any payment for such usage will be limited to the extent of the actual value of, the usage as justified and permitted by theaCity. t-f� - • - I Gf f 13roatr-,, Y�i,l77 mashie and Cot Pacts Division SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1 1. PURPOSE OF BID The City of Tamarac is hereby requesting Bids, from qualified Contractors, to install a new 2.0 MG pre -stressed concrete ground storage tank, new transfer pumps, new high service pumps, piping, valves, electrical, instrumentation, site restoration, inspection and cleaning of existing potable water storage tanks and all other incidentals as indicated by the drawings and specifications or as required to properly complete the project as planned. 2. BASIC DEFINITIONS Wherever used in the Agreement or in other Contract Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: 2.1 Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the bidding requirements or the contract document. 2.2 Agreement - The written agreement between the City and the Contractor covering the Work to be performed including other Contract Documents that are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof. 2.3 Application for Payment - the form acceptable to the Engineer/Project Manager which is used by the Contractor during the course of the work in requesting progress or final payments and which is accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 2.4 Change Order - A document that is signed by the Contractor and the City and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work within the general scope of this Agreement, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 2.5 City - The City of Tamarac, Florida. 2.6 tract documents consist of this Agreement, conditions of the contract (Gene ContractDocuments - e contract Supplementary and. other Conditions), drawings, specifications of Bid No. 04.17B, all addenda issued prior to, all modifi Notice toProceed,Certificate(s) ciodeUtion of this Agreement, Notice of Award, of Insurance, Bonds and any additional modifications and supplements, Change Orders and Work directive changes issued on 4or after the effective - date r of the Contract. These contract - documents form the Agreement, and all are as fully a part of the Agreement if attached to this Agreement -or repeated- therein.- -.._ - 2.7 Contract Times -- the number of days or dates stated in the Contract Documents to achieve substantial completion and/or complete the Work so that it is ready - for final payment as evidenced by the - Engineer's/Engineer/Project Managers written recommendation of final payment. I 1 ..�. ......... (!f.i) 35iY7 )!7(x (e la of i5!V!StC)f7 2.8 Defective - An adjective which when modifying the Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to final payment. 2.9 Drawings - The drawings that show the character and scope of the Work to 2.10 be performed and which are referred to in the Contract Documents. Effective Date of the Agreement - The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is �ig,ned and delivered, by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 2.11 Engineer/Project Manager - The City's authorized project representative. The words "Engineer" and "Engineer/Project Manager" are used interchangeably. 2.12 Field Order - A written order issued by the Engineer/Project Manager that requires minor changes in the Work but does not involve a change in Contract Price or Contract Time. ■ 2.13 2.14 FDOT - the State of Florida Department of Transportation Milestone - A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate complete date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 2.15 Notice to Proceed - A written notice given by the City to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which the Contractor shall start to perform the Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. 2.16 Project - the total construction for which the Contractor is responitile under this agreement, including all labor, materials, equipment and transportation used or incorporated in such construction. 2.17 Specifications - Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, ---------------- standards ---and._-Workmanshi P -as applied _.,to ---,the Work........ and.......... certain administrative details applicable thereto. 2.18 Subcontractor - An individual, firm or corporation having a direct Contract with the Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a __ -----« 219 part of the Work at the site: Substantial Completion -- Substantial Gom n,, means the finishing or -. Completion".- pletio _. accomplishing of substantial performance of -the -.-Work as proscribed in the T_____Contract-Documents:_" SUbstanti6I Performance means that there Eras been no willful departure from the terms of the Contract Documents and the Work has been honestly and faithfully performed in its material and substantial particulars.. The term "Final Completion" means the City's acceptance of the job. 2.20 Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor. 19 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 U, f rid7?e.i?:3t; i`'t.;f ch�3swy and �.^41f,�t'eic,,ts Division 2.21 Unit Price Work -- Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 2.22 Work — The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, specifically, including but not limited to construction, furnishing labor, testing, documentation, equipment and materials used for incorporated in the construction of the entire Contract Documents. The words "Project' and "Work" are used interchangeably. 2.23 Work Change Directive — A written directive to the Contractor issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement and signed by the City and recommended by the Engineer/Project. Manager ordering: an addition, deletion or revision in the Work. A Work Change Directive shall not change the Contract price or time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work. Change. Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Time. 2.24 Written Amendment — A written amendment of the Contract Documents, signed by the CITY and the Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the non -Engineering, or non -technical aspects rather than strictly Work related aspects of the Contract Documents. 3. ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS If any portion of the Contract Documents appears to be in conflict with any other portion, the various documents comprising the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order of precedence: 1. The Technical Specifications 2. The Contract Drawings 3. The Special Provisions 4. The Instructions to Bidders and General Terms and Conditions 5. The Agreement As between schedules and information given on Drawings, the schedules shall govern; as between figures given on Drawings and the scale measurements, the figures shall govern; as between large-scale drawings and small-scale drawings, the larger scale drawings shall govern. .._..�.._ ..,......_.-..:..:..:. _ - Y�...................,.....�......._.._.. ,... __... ..._.,. . ..t.: F .i....,w...ew1...y+++i.w.,__.....,..........—,. ..,.. .a. .w...._.. ..�ti.z�..�:..._..,. _...E 4. INTENT It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Any Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents as being required to produce the intended result will be supplied whether or not specifically called for. When words that have a well-known technical or trade meaning are used to describe Work, materials or equipment such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals or 20 1 ci+y it..f.<�rrta?r: c Pi..iry haswg and C;€ n tz.mts Division ........ . ........ ........ _.... ....... I codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implications, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code or laws or regulations in effect at the time of contract award, except as may be otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the City, the Contractor, or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. 5. SUPPLEMENTS, MINOR+'VA'RIATIONS ORS DEVIATIONS In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized in one or more of the following ways: 5.1 The Engineer/Project Manager's approval of a shop drawing or sample; or 5.2 The Engineer/Project Manager's written interpretation or clarification. S. CONTRACT TIME B virtue of the submission of its bid Bidder agrees and full understands that the Y � g Y completion time of the work of the Contract is an essential and material condition of the Contract and that time is of the essence. The successful Bidder agrees that all work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently and uninterrupted at such rate of progress as will ensure full completion thereof, within the time specified. Substantial completion shall be within 210 calendar days from the City's Notice to .y , a Proceed. Final completion shall be 30 calendar da s.fram,substantial gampleti.,n. 7. CONTRACTOR'S ADDITIONAL RESPONSIBILITY 7.1 The Contractor shall provide sufficient manpower so as to perform work safely and expeditiously with all equipment plainly marked with the company _.....---- ----- -----name.--All--equipment provided pursuant to this agreement shall be in good _ and proper working order. 7.2 The Contractor shall provide a qualified, English speaking, superintendent present on the site at all times. The superintendent shall be a fully authorized agent of the Contractor, and have full authority to make on -site decisions -and commitments regarding the Contractors,yVprk _- 9 9 1 _' 7.3 The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the City and shall not be changed except with- consent of the_Engineer/ProjedtIManager.—mm- 7.4 The Contractor shall assign to the work site at least one (1) supervisor at all time capable of making field decisions, interpreting plans, etc. The -Contractor shall also provide suitable personnel who shall be available after work hour emergencies and capable of making appropriate decisions. The Contractor shall supply competent and physically capable employees having the requisite skill and experience to perform the work in a workmanlike .. _............................ _... _.. ............................ ................... ......... ... ......... _............ 21 r liilll,.r'"a.. ..................�.... ... ......,.....) i, manner. The City may require the Contractor to remove any employee working for or under the Contractor that the City deems careless, incompetent, insubordinate or otherwise objectionable. The Contractor shall be responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of all subcontractors and personnel working under the Contractor. 7.6 The Contractor shall be aware that the job may be subject to vehicular and pedestrian traffic at all times of the day and night. 7.6 Loss of materials or equipment due to theft, vandalism, etc. shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any material left on site overnight shall be properly marked and identified in order to ensure public safety. 7.7 The Contractor is responsible for familiarizing itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, the Work, the locality, and with all local conditions, verifying all pertinent figures and applicable field measurements, and federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work. The Contractor is responsible for making or causing to be made any examinations, investigations, tests and studies as it deems necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time, and in accordance with other terms and conditions of the Contract Document. 7.8 Before beginning the Work or undertaking each component part of the Work, The Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, Special Conditions, Technical Specification, all pertinent figures and site conditions. The Contractor shall promptly 'report in writing to the Engineer/Project Manager and the City any conflict, error or discrepancy which the Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from the Engineer/Project Manager before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 7.9 The Contractor shall assist the City and the Engineer/Project Manager in filing documents required to obtain necessary approvals of governmental authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. 7.10 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall --------provide or cause--to--be-- provided and ---shall a for -labor, materials, ---- equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the work, whether temporary or permanent and - whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. -_ 7.1.1 -The-- Contractor. shall. be, .responsible Jor.and shall coordinate all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures.. 7.12_ftie-_Ciinfrac or sF�alT -keep the City and fhe-ngineei/I roject anageF R- informed of the progress and quality of the Work. 7.13 If requested in writing by the Contractor, the City, with reasonable promptness and in accordance with time limits agreed upon, shall interpret the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall decide (subject to other provisions in the Contract documents governing claims, disputes and r _. 2 r rat.l..as;r,., and ..z"rrtrart,5C7rvlsr I other matters in question) matters relating to performance. Such interpretations and decisions shall be in writing. 7.14 The Contractor shall correct all Work, which does not conform to the 7.16 Contract Documents. The Contractor warrants to the City that materials and equipment incorporated in the work will be new unless otherwise specified, and that the Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 7.16 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and similar taxes, and shall.smre and pay far permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and, completion of the Work. The Contractor shall identify all governmental authorities and agencies having jurisdiction to approve the construction, and obtain all permits and approvals with such -governmental authorities as have jurisdiction, and assist the City in consultations with appropriate governmental authorities and agencies in obtaining all permits and approvals. i 7.17 Without limiting the foregoing, the Contractor shall pay all fees, costs, and expenses in connection with the applications, processing, and securing of approvals or permits from all governmental authorities which have jurisdiction over all aspects of this Work except City permits and fees which shall be waived except for so much of said fees as the City is required to remit to other governmental agencies. 7.18 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities relating to the Project. 7.19 The Contractor shall b. responsible to the, City for acts and ornissions of the Contractor's employee s and parties in privity of contract with the Contractor to perform any portion of the Work, including their agents and employees. 7.20 The Contractor shall prepare Change Orders for the City's approval and execution in accordance with the Contract Documents Any work, which is commenced without a Change Order or Work Directive being approved, shall r constitute a waiver of any claim of compensation for ' such-- work. All_Work Directives must be approved by the City Manager or designee identified as such in writing. ..7.21 The Contractor shall maintain in goad order when present at the site one record copy of the drawings, specifications, product data, samples, shop Y -drawings, Change g Orders and other Modifications ''Marked currently, to record changes made during construction. These shall be delivered to the City upon completion of the construction and prior,fo final_payment. 7.22 Contractor must repair any pavement, concrete, brick pavers, etc., disturbed as a result of any work within the scope of this contract to all applicable codes and City standards. 23 H '7' r Pr2 '«G ' rra +_ , �i a �tx C t)t,t acts [ vision 1 8. FAMILIARITY WITH THE TOTAL SCOPE OF THE PROJECT 8.1 The Contractor shall be familiar with the total scope of the project prior to commencement of any work. In case of any questions or conflict, they must be brought to the attention of the Engineer/Project Manager prior to any ' work. If further assistance is' needed, the Contractor may contact the Director of Utilities. The City shall not be responsible for the Contractors failure to comply with this requirement. 8.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for repair and restoration of all utilities or any other items damaged during the Work. 8.3. By execution of the Agreement, The Contractor acknowledges that all requirements and conditions necessary to fulfill this Contract have been met. No contract adjustments shall be allowed for concealed site conditions. 9. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 9.1 The Contractor shall submit to The Engineer/Project Manager for review and approval five (5) copies of all Shop Drawings for all equipment, apparatus, ' machinery, fixtures, piping, wiring, fabricated structures and manufactured articles. The purpose of the Shop Drawing is to show the suitability, efficiency, technique -of -manufacture, installation requirements, detail of the item and evidence of compliance with the Contract Documents. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to enable the Engineer/Project Manager to review the information as required. 1-1 1 9.2 The Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer/Project Manager for review and approval with such promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples required by the Contract Documents and each sample shall be identified clearly as to material; Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers -and the use for which intended. �__�_ Before submission of each Shop Drawing or sample, the Contractor shall determinedhave d all quantities, dimensions, specified perfor ancecriteriaa installation' requirements;`materials;-catalog numbers- - and. similaudata with respect thereto and'.reviewed -or coordinated each -Shop Drawing or sample with other Shop Drawings and samples and with the -requirements of the Work -and -the Contract Documents. 9A At the time of each submission, the Contractor shall give the - Engineer/Project Manager specific written notice of each variation that the Shop Drawings or samples may (have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing submitted to the Engineer/Project Manager for review and approval of each such variation. Failure to point out such departures r.. ......................._..............~_..w......................................_..... _.............................................._.._..._..........._....................._............_...........1._................ ...._.... ............ _.... _w 4 r C' i.y cai '' trrt ?r,•3i; Ptvrh,a.smg and ("ontf'6 ch; Division .................................. ...... ..................... I ........................ shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to comply with the Contract Documents. 9.6 Approval of the Shop Drawings by the Engineer/Project Manager shall be general and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings nor for the proper fittings and construction of the Work, nor for the furnishing of material or Work required by the Contract Documents and not indicated on the drawings. No Work called for by any Shop Drawing shall be done until the Engineer/Project Manager has approved the drawings. The costs incurred for the City Engineer/Project Manager's review of shop drawings, substitutes, "or equal" items, or change orders shall be , paid by the Contractor. 10. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 10.1 The Contractor shall furnish, in writing on the form included, the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the City makes reasonable objection to such change. 10.2 The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the City for all acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers and other persons directly or indirectly employed by his subcontractors, suppliers and of persons whose acts any of them may be liable and any other persons and organizations .performing or furnishing of the Work under a direct or ' indirect contract With, the Contractor: Nothing in ;the Contract. Documents shall create any Contractual relationship between the City and any such subcontractor, supplier, or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of the City to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such subcontractor, supplier, or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required bylaws and regulations. . 11. CITY'S RESPONSIBILITIES 11.1 The Cityshall designate a representative authorized to act on the Ci 's g P h/ behalf with respect to the Project':..`:- The- City-__ or -such � authorized _. representative shall examine documents,_submitted: by the -Contractor and -- . shall promptly render decisions pertaining thereto to avoid delay in the — .-orderly progress of the Work.- ... 11.2 The City may appoint an on -site Project representative to observe the Work J P and to have such other responsibilities as the City and the Contractor agree in writing prior to execution of this Agreement. 11.3 The City shall cooperate with the Contractor in securing building and other permits, licenses and inspections. ........... ..... ....... ... ......... _... ._............... ......................... _..................... ...._.._.................> r Cav o; T;u 3tac pi.drehas g Fnd,0 (.f11'7rt°acts, Division 1 11.4 If the City observes or otherwise becomes aware of a fault or defect in the Work or nonconformity with the Contract Documents, the City shall give prompt written notice thereof to the Contractor. 11.6 The City shall furnish required information and services and shall promptly render decisions pertaining thereto to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the design and construction. ' 11.6 The City shall communicate with subcontractors only through the Contractor. 11.7 The City shall furnish data required of the City under the- Contract Documents promptly. 11.8 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor, the City shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. 11.9 If the Work is defective, or the Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled Workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, the City may order', the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of the City to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the City to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other party. 12. ENGINEERIPROJECT MANAGER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 12.1 The Engineer/Project Manager or his designee will be the City's representative during the construction period and until final payment is due. 12.2.' .The -Engineer/Project - Manager --:Will W make visits- --to _the site_at interva s appropriate to the various stages of construction to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Engineer/Pfoject Manager's efforts will be directed toward providing for the City a greeter degree. of confidence: that. the completed Work will. conform. to=.:w.:. the Contract Documents. On the: basis of such visits and on�site inspections, - - - the Engineer/Project Manager -shall keep the -City -informed -of the progress of --- the Work and shall endeavor to guard the City against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 12.3 The Engineer/Project Manager will issue technical clarifications and interpretations, with reasonable promptness. Should the Contractor fail to request interpretation of items the Contractor determines to be questionable in the Contract - Documents neither the City nor the Engineer/Project r.............._._ .' ... .._.......................... ._..... .... ........ ........................ _._. 6 �i L r- f 7 tr' ra; P ,;rc Irx�Srrrc� and C t)rttfa is 1,109h."n Manager would thereafter entertain any excuse for failure to execute the Work in a satisfactory manner based upon such a reason or claim. 12.4 The Engineer/Project Manager may authorize minor variations in the Work from the technical requirements of the Contract Documents, which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These shall be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on the City, and also on , the Contractor who shall perform the Work involved promptly. 12.6 The Engineer/Project- Manager will have the authority to disapprove or reject Work that the Engineer/Project Manager believes to be defective, and will also have authority to require special inspections or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 13. AVAILABILITY OF AREA TO STORE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL City will make every effort to provide suitable areas within plant site. Restoration of all storage areas shall be Contractor's responsibility. 14. CLEANUP AND RESTORATION 14.1 During and after completion of all work, the Contractor shall be responsible for all cleanup including but not limited to sweeping, cleaning and removal of loose material. Leftover or excessive material, debris, etc. must be completely removed from the work area and other affected areas at no expense to the City at the end of work. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility, to -protect any debris from obstructing or getting into any wastewater, water or stormwater conveyance system. If any grassed area is disturbed, it shall be promptly restored at the Contractor's expense. 14.2 Cleanup shall be performed on a routine basis in order to facilitate the maintenance of all work areas. Any damage to public or private property ....resulting from improper or incomplete cleanup-shalt^t5e tFie sole responsibility . Proert of the a Contractor as per Section 16 Damage e To Publi And Or Private. 14.3.__.The Contractor shall be responsible for':the�: proper4hd legal"removal and-'_-'- ......... disposal of all. construction 4.4.--The project site -shall- be--maintained-in-a-neat-and--cleart-manner,-andl-upon - final cleanup, the project site shall be left clear of all surplus material and debris. Paved areas shall be swept clean. 14.5 If the Contractor fails to properly maintain the site or perform required clean- ups and debris removal the City shall place the Contractor on written notice to perform required clean up. Contractor shall perform required clean up within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of the City's written notice. Oi: Fi.w7 al(ac t" l•'?.?t"�:Jt�: ;;111�f f��,i' i i'Ontiacts Divi5ion 14.6 In the event that the Contractor does not comply, the City may correct such deficiencies. In such case, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor costs of correcting such deficiencies. If, the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover the amount of the deduction, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. 15. DAMAGE TO PUBLIC AND/OR PRIVATE PROPERTY 15.1 Extreme care shall'be taken to safeguard all existing•facHittes site amenities, utilities, irrigation systems; ' windows, and vehicles on or around the job site. Damage to public and/or private property shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be repaired and/or replaced in equal or better condition at no additional cost to the City. 16.2 The Contractor shall use all means to protect existing objects, structures and vegetation designated to remain. 16.3 In the event of damage, Contractor shall immediately make all repairs, ' replacements and dressings to damaged materials, to the approval of the City, at not additional cost to the City. 15.4 In the event of damage to public and/or private property, the Contractor shall immediately contact the City's Utilities Department by telephone at (954) 724-2400 and inform the appropriate staff member about the location and extent of the damages. 16.6 In the event that the Contractor does not immediately repair to the ' satisfaction of the City damage', to public and/or private property, the City may correct such damage. In such case, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor costs of correcting such damage. If the payments then or -- _thereafter due the Contractor art not sufficientt-l-o cover the amount of the ------ deduction, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. ' 16. CONNECTION TO CITY WATER Building Department requirements, ' all City of Tamarac. Utility Department and . _T contractor rqust also comply with The Y tY g p q and -contact these departments 'at least 48 -- ----hours prior to inspection--of-work: 1 17. BASIS OF PAYMENT, UNIT PRICES AND RIGHT TO CHANGE QUANTITIES Payment at the contract unit price shall be inclusive of all labor, materials, ' equipment and incidental items. 1 1 ,7f � h'1...... r3C!lr.l !(7 crl.F�"1td5.i.V.,Sit?/i 18. ACCEPTANCE OF WORK Acceptance shall be based upon satisfactory completion, material test results, performance and appearance of the Work after the materials have established, been placed or found to be in good operating order. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall remove and replace, satisfactory to the City, all defective areas. Any adjusted area that is found to be of an unsatisfactory condition shall be rejected and shall be removed and restored by the Contractor at no expense to the City. 19. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 19.1 The Contractor shall give the City timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility, pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish the City the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval for all materials, equipment for the Work and any part thereof unless otherwise specified herein. 20 19.2 The City inspectors shall have no authority to permit deviations from or to relax any of the provisions of the Contract Documents, or to delay the Agreement by failure to inspect the materials and Work with reasonable promptness. 19.3 The payment of any compensation in any form, or the giving of any gratuity or the granting of any favor by the Contractor to any inspectors, directly or indirectly is strictly prohibited and any such action on the part of the Contractor will constitute a breach of this Agreement. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 20.1 The Contractor shall correct Work rejected by the City or known by the Contractor to be defective or failing to conform to the Construction Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, and all work found to be defective in the one-year period from the date of Substantial Completion (the Warranty Period) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, or within such longer period provided by any applicable special warranty in 11 L� 11 1 [1 U 1 I 1 the Contract Documents. _.. 20.2 The City shall provide the Contractor with written notice regarding, F --defective--or rejected work:--Within-seven days--after,-receipt-of-such-written----____-_--.._._ notice from the City the Contractor shall commence with corrective action to remove and replace it with Work that is not defective or rejected. 20.3 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work as required or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the City, by written order may stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however the City's right to stop 29 1 r ity r)f r,'lr,•1cPit?l t'P.!n',hasinC3 �J1;f7l.t:at)(t:zC`t5 Division .. ... ...... ... .... .. ................. ...... . .. .1 ............................. . .... .. ...... ............ . it-__ ...... .... I ................ ........ .. .. .............r the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the City to exercise the right for benefit of the Contractor or other persons or entities. 20.4 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents within seven days after receipt of written notice from the City to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect, the City may give a second written notice to the Contractor. If within seven days following receipt of the second notice, the Contractor ' fails to correct such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the City may correct such deficiencies. In such case, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payment&therr: or thereafter due the ' Contractor costs of correcting such deficiencies. If the payments then or' thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover the amount of the deduction, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. ' 21. PROGRESS PAYMENTS ' 21.1 The Contractor shall deliver to the City itemized Applications for Payment for Payment. The Contractor may requisition payments for Work completed during the Project at intervals of not more than once a month. The Contractor's requisition shall show a complete breakdown of the Project components, the quantities completed and the amount due, together with a certification by the Contractor that the Contractor has ' disbursed to all Subcontractors and Suppliers their pro-rata shares of the payment out of previous progress payments received by the Contractor for all Work completed and materials furnished in the previous period and that ' properly executed releases of liens by all Subcontractors, Suppliers and materialmen were provided and included . ,in the Contractor's previous applications for payment, and any other supporting documentation as may ' be required by the Engineer/Project Manager or Contract Documents. Each requisition shall be submitted in triplicate to the Engineer/Project Manager for approval. The City shall make payment to the Contractor within thirty (30) calendar days after approval by the Engineer/Project --_Manager of the Contractor's requisition for payment.--- 21.2 Within thirty (30) days of the City's receipt of a properly submitted and Contractor.. _ Y � y .. correct Application for Payment, the City shall make payment to the 21.3 The City shall retain Ten percent 10 /o of all monies"earned by' the' - — — — Contractor --until the -Work is totally -completed --as specified land --accepted by the City. The parties hereto agree that 255.052, Florida Statutes, does not apply to this Agreement, or to any underlying agreements and obligations to which this Agreement pertains. ' 21.4 The Application for Payment shall constitute a representation by the Contractor to the City that, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, the design and construction have progressed to the r........_.. .._... _._ r LJ GWYof 7 ann alai: t-t.a±'chast„ g and Conbacts Division. .. ........... ........... ................. . ............................. .... . .... ............... ... ........ . . .. . . . ... .. ....... It . .......... .... . 11.1 ................ ..... ...... . .. . ...... .... . ........ ................................................ .... . ­­.­, . ........ ....................... .............. , point indicated, the quality of the Work covered by the application is in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Contractor is entitled to ' payment in the amount requested. 21.5 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment ' from the City, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled in accordance with the terms of the Contractor's contract with such , Subcontractor. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to sub - Subcontractors in similar manner. �. 21.6 The City shall have no obligation to pay or to be responsible in any way for payment to a Subcontractor of the Contractor except as may otherwise be ' required by law: 21.7 No progress payment or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project ' by the City shall constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 21.8 The Contractor warrants that: (1) title to Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the City either by incorporation in construction or upon receipt of payment by the Contractor, whichever occurs first; (2) Work, materials and equipment covered by , previous Applications for Payment are free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, hereinafter referred to as "liens"; and (3) no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for ' Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or any other person performing Work at the site or furnishing Materials or equipment for the Project, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Contractor or such other person. The Contractor may apply for the return of. the retainage..held....pursuant-to-----------�--- Section 22.3, if the Contractor has satisfied the requirements of the Contract relating to retainage. The City shall pay the Contractor the ' amount retained for the Work, less the reasonable value of incorrect or incomplete Work, liquidated damages or both. Final, payment of .such withheld sum shall be made upon correction or completion of such Work ---_--.----------- _.____..__.and resolution of all issues regarding liquidated dsimage:, The release of -. retainage shall not become due until all Work is 100% completed. The requirements of retainage include the following: 21.9.1 Repair and/or replacement of faulty or defective Work. 21.9.2 As -built drawings are submitted to and accepted by the City. 21.9.3 All Code requirements, inspections, testing and certificates of r approval are conformed with, submitted and accepted by the City. ........ I :..+' 7"., tr7?c:3rac Pvr.1 as'S ,7,g i-:nd �. on rk�?u 5 Division 11 1 C: 1 21.9.4 The City is satisfied all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the City might in anyway be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the City. 21.9.5 Release of Lien is submitted and accepted by the City. 21.9.6 The Contractor's completion of Punch List. 21.9.7 Warranties are submitted to and accepted by the City. 22. CHANGE QUANTITIES/CHANGE ORDERS 22.1 The City, without "invalidating 'this Agreement,' ''may order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work. A written Amendment, Change Order or Work Change Directive shall authorize such additions, deletions or revisions. 22.2 All Change Orders which, individually or when cumulatively added to amounts authorized pursuant to prior Change Orders for this Project, increase the cost of the Work to the City or which extend the time for completion, must be formally authorized and approved by the Tamarac City Commission prior to their issuance and before Work may begin. 22.3 No claim against the City for extra Work In furtherance of a Change Order shall be allowed unless prior written City approval: pursuant to this section has been obtained. 22.4 The Contract Price and Contract Time shall be changed only by Change Order or written Amendment. ' 22.5 The Engineer/Project Manager shall prepare Proposed Change Orders on forms provided by the City. When submitted for approval, they shall carry the signature of the Utilities Director, the City Manager, and the Contractor. 22.5 If the City and the Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract ' times that should be allowed As a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore. _....... 22.7 The Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension -of --the Contract times -with-respect-to--any--Work-performed �-- ' that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented. 22.8 If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents is required by the provisions of any bond to be given to a surety,' the giving of any such notice will be the r _ _ _ ;"? Ll Fun1 ,hasS fv and Contracts Division , ......... ......... ......... Contractor's responsibility and the amount of each applicable bond shall be adjusted accordingly. ' 22.9 Any claim for adjustment in the Contract Price or time shall be based upon written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other parties , and to the Engineer/Project Manager not later than, three (3) calendar days after the occurrence or event giving rise to the claims and stating the general nature of the claim. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract , Price or an extension of the contract time will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph. 1 22.10 The cost or credit to the City from a change in the Work shall be determined by one or more of the following ways: ' 22.10.1 By mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation where unit prices do not exist in the contract documents; 22.10.2 By unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently ' agreed upon; or 22.10.3 By cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee. 23. REGULATORY CHANGES The Contractor shall be compensated for changes in the Work necessitated by the enactment or revision of codes, laws, or regulations subsequent to the submission of the Contractor's proposal, 24. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ' The specified warrant period r p y pe od for the Protect do not begin until substantial completion of the entire project has been given and the Payment and Performance Bonds are released. 25. FINAL INSPECTION , Upon written notice from the Contractor that the Work is or an agreed portion p g thereof is 'complete, the City and the Engineer/Project'-Manager °v vill---make `a- inspection- and will . notify the. Contractor. in writing of- all' ,particulars _._in which. this.___ T .____ inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Contractor shall --- immediately, take such--measrures-as, -are necessary-to--remedy-sueh-deficiencieg: ' 26. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 26.1 After the Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of the City and the Engineer/Project Manager and delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, marked up record documents and other ... .............. ....... ................................. ...... ..............._....._.................. _........ ......... ...,....._,...... ................ I ..... .... ... ... :............... _...... ........... .,..._ ....,...,.......,_..............................,.,...... .................................. ...�.............. _.... f'OrrhFi Wr .j 8nd COnttads Division documents required by the Contract Documents, and after the Engineer/Project Manager has indicated that the Work is acceptable, the Contractor may make application for final payment. The final application for payment shall be accompanied by (1) complete and legally effective releases or waivers of all liensarising out of or filed in connection with the ' Work and a final affidavit; or (2) the Contractor's receipts in full covering all labor, materials and equipment for which a lien could be filed; or (3) a final affidavit stating that all laborers, materialmen, Suppliers and ' Subcontractors who Worked for the Contractor under this Contract have been paid in full or if the fact be otherwise, identifying the name of each lienor whd has not been paid in full and the amount due "or10 become due each for labor, services or materials furnished and" the" reason (s)'why the same remains unpaid. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish a release or receipt in full, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to ' the City to indemnify the City against any such lien. 26.2 The Contractor shall also submit with the final application for payment, the completed set of "As -Built" drawings for review and approval. The "As - Built" drawings shall be prepared, sealed and certified by a professional registered land surveyor licensed by the State of Florida. The Contractor shall deliver mylar sepias of the as -built project, signed, sealed and dated by the responsible professional. In addition, plans are to be submitted in a digital format in AutoCAD latest version. The Digital File is to be ' compatible with the City's G18 system. Final payment to the Contractor shall not be made until said drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer/Project Manager. Prior to approval, if necessary, the drawings may be returned to the Contractor for changes or modifications if �. in the opinion of the Engineer/Project Manager they do not,.: represent, correct or accurate "As -built" drawings. ' 27. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE TT during --construction and fin Engineer/Project Manager's observation of the Work g .__arrd_...the..-Engineer/Project.__ 27. , on a basis o e n ineer �I .......inspection; Manager's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the Engineer/Project Manager is satisfied that the Work ' has been completed p and the Contractor's other obligations under the - ---Contract, Documents have been fulfilled;'the 'Engineer/Project Manager will, within ten (10) days after receipt of the final Application for. indicate Ain writing the Engineer/Project 'Manager"s recommendation 'of - - payment - and- present- the -Applicationto the City for payment: —Thereupon the Engineer/Project Manager will give written notice to the City and the ' Contractor that the Work is acceptable. Otherwise, the Engineer/Project Manager will return the Application to the Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty (30) days after presentation to the City of the Application and accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and _ ............................_._................................ ..................... ...................................................... .............. ..............._............._........__.. 34 ... ......... ........ ......... et:.......... _ tip' S CJrvi51t�t7 ' rt �Yt is P ,rrhasin and G,o .. _on substance, and with the Engineer/Project Manager's recommendation and notice of acceptability, the amount recommended by the Engineer/Project ' Manager will become due and will be paid by the City to the Contractor. 27.2 If, through no fault of the Contractor, final completion of the Work is ' significantly delayed and if the Engineer/Project Manager so confirms, the City shall, upon receipt of the Contractor's final Application for Payment and recommendation of the Engineer/Project Manager, and without ' terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the City for -Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainagestipulated in the Agreement, and, if bonds have ' been furnished as required, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for than portion of the Work fully completed ' and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer/Project Manager with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions goveming final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. , 27.3 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, ' shall be paid by the City to the Contractor when the Work has been completed, the Contract fully performed, and a final certificate for payment has been issued by the Engineer/Project Manager. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the City except those ' arising from: 27.3.1 Liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of this°Agreement and -unsettled: 27.3.2 Faulty or defective Work and latent defects discovered after acceptance. ' 27.3.3 Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the contract documents. 27.3.4 Terms of special warranties required by the contract documents. 27.3.5---An -of the_ Contractor's--continuiry obli ations-under--this— Y J-g Agreement. , 27.4 The acceptance of final payment Y ment b the Contractor shall constitute a Y P Y p �p y g'_._ -waiver of claims b that payee exce tlhoser- reviousl made--in=writin an identified. a.s unsett a _at t...e, time _o_ na _a . .... _ ....._. �.. ; ._. pp. payment. MIGHT -TO WITHHOLD PAYMENT- - - - 28.1 The City may withhold in whole or in part, final payment or any progress payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: .. 28.1.1 Defective Work not remedied. ............................. _............ .........._...._.............._............. .......... ................. .......................... ....................... _.......... *... .. ,.............._............................................_....................,..,.....,.......,._................................ 1 1 7 1 F Cqy ;t T arr ' i'LM.,has,;ng <and Cor"itiac.ls Division 28.1.2 Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating the probable filing of claims by other parties against the Contractor. 28.1.3 Failure of the Contractor to make payments to Subcontractors or Suppliers for materials or labor. 28.1.4 Damage to another Contractor not remedied. 28.1.6 The Contractor has incurred liability for liquidated damages. 28.1.6 Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the contract sum. 28.1.7 Reasonable evidences that the Work will not be completed within the Contract time. 28.178, Failure `to carry out the Work in accordance�:with--: the. Contract Documents. ., . 28.2 When the above grounds provides a Surety Bond or which will protect the City in in whole or in part. 29. WARRANTIES are removed or resolved or the Contractor Consent of Surety satisfactory to the City, the amount withheld, payment may be made ' 29.1 Not withstanding any provisions of the Technical Specifications the Contractor shall warranty the soundness of all work as noted in the Technical Specifications from the date of final acceptance of work. The Contractor shall submit a warranty bond acceptable to the City and prior to final payment to the Contractor. 29.2 The Contractor warrants that all equipment, materials and Workmanship furnished, whether furnished by the Contractor or its subcontractors.and Suppliers, will comply with the Technical Specifications, drawings and ' other descriptions supplied or adopted and that all services will be performed in a Workmanlike manner. 29.3 The Contractor warrants to the City that it will comply with all applicable _..-----federal,- state and local laws,': regulations and orders- in carrying - out its obligations under the Contract. 29.4 The Contractor warrants to the City that it is not insolvent, it is not in bankruptcy proceedings or receivership ­nor is it engaged" in --or threatened - with any litigation, arbitration brother legal or administrative proceedings or investigations of any kind which would have'aii adverse''effect'on its _—.__.ability to perform its -obligations unCier the -'Contract. — 1 30. CORRECTION PERIOD ' 30.1 The Contractor warrants all material and Workmanship as noted in the Technical Specifications from date of acceptance by the City. If within the period of warranty from the date of final completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by laws or regulations or by the terms of any _._....... .............................._.........................................................................._..........._. .................................................................. ...................... ........... _........ ...................... ........ ..._... _..._...__ 1 £ rof Tam tac Pu :l;,iswg and ('c�nP acts Division applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, whether observed before or after ' acceptance by the City, the Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the City and in accordance with the City's written instructions, either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the City, remove it from , the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and satisfactorily correct and remove and replace any damage to other Work or the Work of others resulting therefrom. If the Contractor does not promptly comply , with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the City may have the defective Workmanship corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and , all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such removal and replacement (including but not limited to fees and charges of the Engineer/Project Manager, attorneys and other professionals) will be paid , by the Contractor. 30.2 Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) ' has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period as noted in the Technical Specifications after such ' correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 30.3 Nothing contained in this Article shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that the Contractor might have ' under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period as described in Section 32.1 relates only to the specific obligation of the ' Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may, be. sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the , Contractor's obligation other than specifically to correct the Work. 31. CONTRACT TIME 31.1 Time is of the Essence for Work performed under the Contract. The Work, as identified in the construction plans Section shall be commenced , upon the date of "Notice to Proceed" and, subject to authorized adjustments, shall be completed as within the. calendar days` listed below. __^Failure ,„to achieve timely, substantial and/or final completion shall be .regarded as a breach of this contract end -subject to appedpriate remedies including -but not-limited--to---liability-for- liquidated --damages- in-- accordance with the Liquidated Damages provisions as specified under the General ' Terms and Conditions of this bid/solicitation. 31.2 - The Contractor shall provide services as expeditiously as is consistent , with reasonable skill and care and the orderly progress of design and construction. .........._.................................. ........ ............... .......... .......... ._.._ ... 37 n 1 1 r, r 1 [l 0 doi�:Fr ha7)? rContracts Division 31.3 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents shall be strictly adhered to. The Work to be performed under this Agreement shall commence as directed in the Notice to Proceed unless otherwise agreed in writing. 31.4 Contract Time may only be changed by a properly and fully executed change order that shall exist prior to the extension of the Contract Time. 31.6 Any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party promptly (but in no event later than 15 days) after the occurrence of the eventgiving -rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim... 31.6 Extension of time shall be considered and will be based solely upon the effect of delays to work as a whole. Extensions of time shall not be granted for delays to work, unless the Contractor can clearly demonstrate that such delays did or will, in fact, delay the progress of the work as a whole. Time extensions shall not be allowed for delays to parts of the work that are not on the critical path of the Construction Schedule. Time extensions shall not be granted until all float or contingency time, resulting from the early completion of work on the critical path, available to absorb specific delays and associated' impacts is used. 31.7 The Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or payment or compensation of any kind from the City for direct, indirect, consequential, impact or other costs, expenses or damages including but not limited to costs of acceleration or inefficiency, or extended overhead arising because of delay, disruption, interference or hindrance from any cause whatsoever, whether such delay, disruption, interference be reasonable or unreasonable, foreseeable or unforeseeable, or avoidable or unavoidable; provided, however, that this provision shall not preclude recovery of damages by the Contractor for hindrances or delays due solely to fraud, bad faith or active malicious interference on the part of the City or its agents. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be entitled only to extensions- of the Contract -Time -as the -sole-and exclusive —remedy for- _--- - excusable events of delay. The following shall constitute "Excusable Events of Delay": An act, delay, or order of the -City obstructing or delaying the u Contractor in the commencemen.-L prosecution or completion„pf.,,._ .',, , a Project activity other than an act, delay or order issued by the City -reasonably in —good- good -faith —in ---its - role -a" -Government --regulator or actions reasonably taken by the City in good faith, in the enforcement of its ordinances, laws, executive orders or rules of general applicability. Nothing under this subsection shall be deemed an Excusable Event of Delay to the extent that performance would have been suspended, delayed or interrupted by any other cause, including but not limited to the fault or negligence of the Contractor or for which an adjustment 38 1 0- 11-1 ''I'll ... I . 11 .. .... ..... .. .. ....... ­.I.I......."1111.11 . ... . . .. ........ ......... ......... .. . ................. or extension to the Project Schedule is made or provided for, or excluded under any other term or condition of this Contract. 31.7.2 Acts of God, wars, fires (other than those resulting from the negligence or willful misconduct of the Contractor or attributable to the Contractor), floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions and freight embargoes. 31.7.3 Strikes which are unforeseeable or beyond the control of the Contractor to prevent and which are not the result of any or negligence of the Contractor, but only if the Contractor takes reasonable action to perform notwithstanding the strike. Failure to perform because of additional cost shall not be deemed compliance. 31.7.4 Weather conditions exceeding normal weather conditions prevailing in the area as defined by the average of the last ten (10) years of weather data as recorded by the United States Department of Commerce, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration at the Fort Lauderdale weather station. 31.7.5 The City acting reasonably, will determine the number of days, if any, that the Contractor has been delayed. Any disputes over the number of days, if any, that the Contractor has been delayed shall be resolved in accordance with the Dispute Resolution provisions. In addition, the Contractor shall continue performance of the Contract Documents. 31.8 When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents in days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. A calendar day of twenty- four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight shall constitute a day. 32. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ..............:........... ..... 32.1 The construction schedule shall be in the form of a tabulation, chart or graph (MS Project 98) and shall be in sufficient detail to show the critical. path and the chronological relationship of all activities contained in the project. These include, but are not limited to: estimated starting and completion dates of various activities,_ submittals required to the Engineer/Project Manager for approval, procurement of material and --- - *cheduling of -equipment.. 32.2 The Construction Schedule shall allow for a maximum turnaround time by the Engineer/Project Manager of fourteen calendar days on all submittals, shop drawings and all requests for information. 1 1 1 n L �I L 1 30 y' f>� ' erll)a 7C �'lo"(';�)�:3;>t,'?g and G:f`?1?;d'!�CLs Dvistorl .. ......... .............. .............. ........ ' .................. ......... ._...... ...,,.... 32.3 The construction schedule shall reflect the completion of all Work to be performed within the specified time and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 32.4 The construction schedule shall be thoroughly reviewed and updated on a monthly basis. The revised schedule shall be submitted to the City at least every 30 days during the term of this Agreement and shall reflect a current schedule of activities, percent complete and remaining durations for all tasks. 32.5 Float, slack or contingency time derived from'the early completion of tasks on the critical path" is hot W the LixdWW dse6 or 'behe f it of the Contractor.' The Contractor shall not utilize such time without the prior written consent of the City. 32.6 If the Contractor desires to make changes in the method of operation after g p the construction approval of the construction schedule, or if the Engineering/Engineer/Project Manager determines that the schedule fails to reflect the actual progress, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineering/Engineer/Project Manager a revised construction schedule for approval. 33. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 33.1 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and providing supervision for compliance with Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 33.2 The Contractor shall take reasonableprecautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to (1) employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; (2) the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein; and (3) other property at or adjacent to the site. 33.3 The Contractor shall comply, with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of. public authoritiesbearing on the safety of persons and property and their protection from damage, injury or loss. 33.4 The Contractor shall be liable far damage or loss other than damage or g ( g - ._..__.._.. ..___...._ . _ _ loss to property insured under',the property insurance provided or required. -- --- - by the Contract Documents to be provided by the- City) to property at the site caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Sub -Contractor of the anyone -directly or -indirectly emp1byed by -either of them, -or--- by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 33.5 All unit prices provided by the Contractor as a part of this Bid shall include the cost of all safety equipment necessary for the performance of the Work. 40 c Flwuhasiog and ('ootaicts Division 33.6 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act and all applicable OSHA Regulations pertaining to excavation. 33.7 The Contractor shall comply with Florida Statutes, Chapter 556, Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act and secure the underground locations and obtain a. Sunshine State One Call Certification number prior to beginning any excavation. 34. HURRICANE AND SEVERE WEATHER PRECAUTIONS 34.1 The Contractor shall immediately take all protective actions necessary to secure the construction site, materials, debris and equipment. 34.2 All construction materials or equipment will be secured against displacement by wind forces. 35. WORK BY THE CITY OR CITY'S CONTRACTORS 36.1 The City reserves the right to perform Work related to, but not part of, the Project and to award separate contracts in connection with other Work at the site. 36.2 The Contractor shall afford the City's separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment for execution of their work. The Contractor shall incorporate and coordinate the Contractor's work with the work of the City's separate contractors as required by the Contract Documents. 35.3 Costs caused by defective or ill-timed Work shall be borne by the party responsible. 41 1 1 M City ci f r,,w 4t a'(: l-(!!1:' 7;35t7",tj° F),7 ; G'ontract ' Dvisi n ......... ......... COMPANY NAME: (Please Print): Phone: Fax: IBEFORE SUBMITTING YOUR BID, MAKE SURE YOU... ❑ 1, Carefully read the General Terms & Conditions, Special Conditions and the General Requirements. ❑.2. Properly fill out the Bid Forms and Schedule of Bid Prices. 0 ❑ 3. fill out and sign the, Nonl°Collusive Affidavit"and'have-it properly notarized. ❑ 4. Sign the Certification page. Failure to do so will result in your Bid being deemed non -responsive. CL►kir P�iD`l"�r�pc�,i"�Q,�1 J ❑ 5. Fill out the Offeror's Qualification Statement. ❑ 6. Fill out the References page. ❑ 7. Sign the Vendor Drug Free Workplace Form. ❑ 8. Fill out the List of Subcontractors. ❑ 9. Include a 5% Bid Guaranty. Failure to provide the stipulated bond or guaranty will result in automatic rejection of your bid. Payment and Performance Bonds will be required and must be submitted on the City's forms. ❑ 10. ❑ 11. Fill out and sign the Certified Resolution. Complete Trench Sooty form.\ 1 and return the 1 ❑ 12. Include proof of insurance. O Submit ONE (1) Original AND TWO (2) Photocopies of your bid, clearly marked �y with the BID NUMBER AND BID NAME on the outside of the package. Make sure your Bid is submitted. PRIOR to the deadline. ...:......... Late Bids will of be accepted. Failure to provide the requested attachments may result in your bid being deemed hon-responsive. THIS SHOULD BE THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR BID. 42 1 BID FORM BID NO., 04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS The City of Tamarac is hereby requesting Bids, from qualified vendors, for the installation of a new 2.0 MG pre -stressed concrete ground storage tank, new transfer pumps, new high service pumps, piping, valves, electrical, instrumentation, site restoration, inspection and cleaning of existing potable water storage tanks and all other incidentals as indicated by the drawings and specifications or as required to properly complete the project as planned. In order to be considered for this project, the Bidder shall possess at time of bid opening one of the following State, County or equivalent licenses: 1. A State Certification as a Certified General Contractor or Engineering Contractor with at least five (5) years of verifiable full-time experience with a i minimum of ten (10) tanks built of similar specification and size. t I _� K7 2. A Broward County Competency as an Engineering Contractor Class "A" license with at least five (5) years of verifiable full-time experience with a minimum of ten (10) tanks built of similar specification and size. We propose to furnish the following items in conformity with the specifications and at the indicated bid prices. The bid prices quoted have been checked and certified to be correct. Said prices are fixed and firm and shall be paid to Bidder for the successful completion of its obligation as specified in the contract documents. In the event of obvious mathematical errors, the Bidder recognizes that these are clerical in nature and may be corrected by City. For necessary to item, Bidder agrees to furnishall labor, materials, tools and equipment ry properly p erform the work described herein and on the project drawings. A more detailed description of the Pay Items is° located° in Section--01025 of the Technical Specifications. -..— See Schedule of Bid-Prices-ort.the following -pages,- - i1 J Fomr & Schedule of Bid Prices i i t � :"... and G ontracts Division ....I ... 3/. 3C rLDt aS Pit7 ...,. SCHEDULE OF BID PRICES BID NO.04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS All bid items shall include costs for furnishing to the City all materials, equipment, supplies and all costs incurred in providing all work shown on the plans and specifications for 2.0 MG Water Storage Tank and Water Treatment Plant Improvements. Said costs shall be complete and inclusive of all: labor, permits, inspection, servicing and start-up fees, taxes, insurance, bonds, mobilization, miscellaneous costs, warranty, overhead and profit. BIDDER agrees to accept as full payment for the Lump Sum proposed under. this Project as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings, based upon the undersigned's own estimate of quantities and costs, the following total lump sum bid of: CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE ITEM $ 75,000.00 (SECTION 01010) TOTAL LUMP SUM BID: NUMERIC TOTAL LUMP SUM BID: (WRITTEN) $ Dollars Gents Please note that the amount written in words has precedence LUMP SUM BREAKDOWN For the sole purpose of evaluating bids, the general breakdown on the following page of the Total Lump Sum Bid is to be given. The price shall be fairly apportioned to the various parts of the work. If so requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall substantiate any price or prices with additional detailed price breakdown. In the event of discrepancy between the written lump sum stated in the TOTAL LUMP SUM BID and the arithmetic total of the following LUMP SUM BID BREAKDOWN, the Total Lump Sum Bid stated in writing above shall have precedence,, SCH-2 Bid Form & Schedule (:>f Bid Prices I 1 I I. 1 F w(,,h,asio,,,, �)od (,,o ?1�!'�"BC..'t.s Ciyisworl LUMP SUM BID BREAKDOWN The Bidder must submit the apportioned amounts for the items listed below with this Proposal. Item Description Total Cost 1. Lump Sum Base Bid Exclusive of Items 2 through 5 $ 2. Indemnification Instructions to Bidders, Section 24 3. Work per FAC 62-565.350(Drawing M-16 : a. 0.06 MG Clearwell WTP site $ b. 1.0 MG GST WTP site $ c. 1.0 MG GST Grant's Plaza $ d. 2.0 MG GST(Tract 27 $ e. Remove & dispose of 610 cu.Yards of accumulated sediment @ $ /cu.yd. $ 4. Security Devices for Exist Finished Water Storage Facilities(Drawing M-16 : a. 1.0 MG GST WTP site $ b. 1.0 MG GST Grant's Plaza $ c. 2.0 MG GST Tract 27 $ Contingency Allowance Item Section 01010 $ 75 000.00 -----------TOTAL LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT $ -- --- The CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed price breakdown to the ENGINEER at the preconstruction conference. The price breakdown as reviewed and agreed upon by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and OWNER shall be used for preparing future estimates for partial payments to CONTRACTOR, and shall list the major items of work and a price for each item. Price p p Specification Section foreach area of project...Overhead,- other general cost, _. breakdown shall be by and profit shall be rorated to each item so that the total of the prices for all items equal the lump ----sum price.. -The:--price-.breakdown-shall- be..-subject.-.to---the—review -of- the. --ENGINEER,.- and---- . - CONTRACTOR may be required to verify the prices for any or all items. BIDDER NAME: SC H-3 130 Form & Schedule of Bits ! nci os 1 r City ()f f un.,ifac Flur( has g and a i'2f•7YtE.�3cN Division . .... ....... ................ .. ...... ............ .. .............. ............... ..... .... . I . ............... . . ............... ......... 0.1 .1-1.1111.1 ....... ..... .................................. ....... ............ ........ IBID FORM (continued) BID NO. 04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORIAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS Submitted by: (Bidder) (Date) THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: City of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Manager 7525 Northwest $$t' Avenue Tamarac, Florida 33321 1. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this bid is accepted, to enter into a contract with the City to perform and furnish all Work as specified herein for the Contract Price and within the. Contract Period indicated in this bid. 2. This bid will remain subject to acceptance for ninety 90) days after the day f Y Y of bid opening. Bidder will sign and submit the necessary documents required by the City within fifteen (15) days prior to the date of the City's Award. a) Bidder has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the contract documents, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 3 4. b) Bidder has given the City written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that it has discovered in the contract documents and the written resolution thereof by the City is acceptable to Bidder. c) This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity -with - any --agreement or rules of any group, association,- or-----_ . corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over the City. ----- Bidder will complete the Work for the prices shown in the "Bid Form". Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially performed and complete in accordance with the schedules established herein. Cl I t)f i ��I11 F31 El!' BID FORM (continued) BID NO.04-17B 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS (continued) The City reserves the right to reject any bid, if it deems that a vendor has deliberately provided erroneous information. The undersigned declare to have specific and legal authorization to obligate their firm to the terms of this bid, and further, that they have examined the Invitation to Bid, the instructions to Bidders, ,the Specifications, and other documents included in this bid request, and hereby promises and agrees that, if this bid is accepted, they will faithfully fulfill the terms of this bid together with all guarantees and warranties thereto: The undersigned bidding firm further certifies .the product and/or equipment meets or exceeds the specification as stated in the bid package; and also agrees that products and/or equipment to be delivered which fail to meet bid specifications will be rejected by the City within thirty (30) days of delivery. Return of rejection will be at the expense of the bidder. Company Name Address City, State, ZIP Contractor's License Number SCH-5 Authorized Signature Typed/Printed Name Telephone & Fax Number Federal Tax ID# Bid Form & Schedule of Bid Prices 1 citv of rt�iinati1-1 AML .. .... .. ... . IV. BID FORM (continued) BID NO. 04-17B PorO)asioa and Contrpats Division 2.0 MG WATER STORAGE TANK AND WATER TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS (continued) Bidders Name: TERMS: % DAYS: To be considered eligible for award, one (1) original of this bid form MUST be submitted with the Bid. Two (2) photocopies of this bid form should accompany the original; however, copies must be provided within 3 business days of the City's request. NOTE: Bid submittals without the manual signature of an authorized agent of the Bidder shall be deemed non -responsive and ineligible for award. IF "NO BID" IS OFFERED, PLEASE PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: Please indicate reason(s) why a Bid Proposal is not being submitted at this time. Return the Bid Form to avoid removal of Bidder from the City of Tamarac's vendor listing. 1 1 (f y tit rr ME NON -COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT State of )Ss. County of ) F=1.7rr,:1a, i;as'; rmdC;fin0ac:tsDivision being first duly sworn, _ deposes and says that: 1. He/she is the (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative or Agent) of , the Offeror that has submitted the attached. Proposal;. 2. He/she is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Proposal and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Proposal; 3, Such Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal; 4. Neither the said Offeror nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, have in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Offeror, firm, or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with the Work for which the attached Proposal has been submitted; or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Work; or have in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication, or conference with any Offeror, firm, or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Proposal or of any other Offeror, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost elements of the Proposal price or the Proposal price of any other Offeror, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance; or unlawful agreement any advantage against (Recipient), or any person interested in the proposed Work; 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement on ----- - -- --.. the -part of the Offeror or any other of its -agents, representatives, owners, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant. Signed, seated and delivered in the presence of; Page 7 of 2 Y Printed Name Title Nara-CaPusivE .Affidavit 11 11 LI C";ty "" r,�:�lTla"a(: . ................ ... . . . . . .. .. ........................... ...... ... I .. .............. it . ...... . .... . .... ..... ....... ........ I ........ ... .....F='t.li'chasmo and �:or?ttacts Dvisdon ACKNOWLEDGMENT NON -COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT State of Florida County of On this the day of , 20—, before me, the undersigned Notary Public of the State of Florida, personally appeared and (Name(s) of individual(s) who appeared before notary) whose name(s) is/are Subscribed to within the instrument, and he/she/they acknowledge that he/she/they executed it. WITNESS my hand and official seal. NOTARY PUBLIC, STATE OF FLORIDA NOTARY PUBLIC SEAL OF OFFICE: ---- --- (Name of Notary � _ ( ry Public: Print, Stamp, or Type as Commissioned) ❑ Personally known to me, or ❑ Produced identification: (Type of Identification Produced) ❑ DID take an oath, or ❑ DID NOT take an oath Page 2 of 2 Non-Col'us=vex Acknowledgement 1 1 (,. ly uf T,'1Ir7 3r ,i(: i�tlYC'17.aStti( r2t;(� t (lYiidelC't? ..... ....... ... . . . .................. .. I ..... ........ 1-1.1.11 .. lfSit)r? .... . ........... CERTIFICATION THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE 'SUBMITTED WITH THE BID We (1), the undersigned, hereby agree to furnish the items)/service(s) described in the Invitation to Bid. We (1) certify that we (1) have read the entire document, including the Specifications, Additional Requirements, Supplemental Attachments, Instructions to Bidders, Terms and Conditions, and any addenda issued. We agree to comply with all of the requirements of the entire Invitation To Bid. Indicate which type of organization below: INDIVIDUAL ❑ PARTNERSHIP ❑ CORPORATION ❑ OTHER ❑ If "Other", , Explain: Authorized Signature Title Company Name City/State/Zip Fax Number Name (Printed Or Typed) Federal Employer I.D./Social Security No. Address Telephone Contact Person R-'.) pe t of 1 Cettification "Al �� - .+1 r i 'i;'rt.'3t,zf; F rrrr.;h �s ng and Contracts Division OFFEROR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT The undersigned certifies under oath the truth and correctness of all statements and of all answers to questions made hereinafter: SUBMITTED TO: City of Tamarac Purchasing and Contracts Manager 7525 NW 88th Avenue Tamarac, Florida 33321 Submitted By: Name: Address: Principal Office: Telephone No. Fax No. Check One ❑ Corporation ❑ Partnership ❑ Individual ❑ Other 1. State the true, exact, correct and complete name of the partnership, corporation, trade or fictitious name under which you do business and the address of the place of business. The correct name of the Offeror is: The address of the principal place of business is: 2. If Offeror is a corporation, answer the following: _-_ ...-..a)____ Date of Incorporation: b) State of Incorporation: c) President's name: d) Vice President's name: e) -----Secretary's name: Treasurer s name: g) Name and address of Resident Agent: C,oft0ror's Qualification st<atemeot I ty of Tama,, a Pgrchas;ng and Cont+acts Division ...... ......... ... ... ...... 3. If. Offeror is an individual or a partnership, answer the following: . a) Date of organization: b) Name, address and ownership units of all partners: 4 �1 A 7 c) State whether general or limited partnership: If Offeror is other than an individual corporation or partnership, describe the , p p p, organization and give the name and address of principals: If Offeror is operating under a fictitious name, submit evidence of compliance with the Florida Fictitious Name Statute. How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name? Under what other former names has your organization operated? Indicate registration, license numbers or certificate numbers for the businesses or professions, which are the subject of this Bid. Please attach certificate of - -comps ency and/or state registration. 8. Have you personally inspected the site of the proposed work? YES NO 9. Do you have a complete set of documents, including drawings and addenda? ❑ YES ❑ NO 10. Did you attend the Pre -Proposal Conference if,any such conference was held? ❑ YES []NO Fags 2 of 5 Offeror"", (; ual icatkan Statement I Purr.Itjs r g =)nti t ra *i> its Division ....... 11. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, state when, where and why: 12. State the names, telephone numbers and last known addresses of three (3) owners, individuals or representatives of owners with the most knowledge of work which you have performed and to which you refer (government owners are preferred as references). Name Address Telephone 13. List the pertinent experience of the key individuals of your organization (continue on insert sheet, if necessary). 14. State the name of the individual who will have personal supervision of the work: 15. State the name and address of attorney, if any, for the business of the Offeror: 16. State the names and addresses of all businesses and/or individuals who own an interest of more than five percent (5%) of the Offeror's business and indicate the percentage owned of each such business and/or individual: City of i "rn< lw. rchaling Cenci Conhac s Division ..... .... 18. State the name of Surety Company which will be providing the bond, and name and address of agent: 19. Bank References:, Bank Address Telephone 20. Attach a financial statement including Proposer's latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items: a) Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials, real estate, stocks and bonds, equipment, furniture and fixtures, inventory and prepaid expenses): b) Net Fixed Assets c) Other Assets d) Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries, real estate encumbrances and accrued payroll taxes). e) Other Liabilities (e.g., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus, and retained earnings): 21. State the name of the firm r i p spar ng the financial statement and date thereof: 22. Is this financial statement for the identical organization named on page one? -- - — .....YES... NO------ 23. If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.g., parent -subsidiary). offer""? S Qualification Statement I� , THE OFFEROR ACKNOWLEDGES AND UNDERSTANDS THAT THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN RESPONSE TO THIS QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT SHALL BE RELIED UPON BY OWNER IN AWARDING THE CONTRACT AND SUCH INFORMATION IS WARRANTED BY OFFEROR TO BE TRUE. THE DISCOVERY OF ANY OMISSION OR MISSTATEMENT THAT MATERIALLY AFFECTS THE OFFEROR'S QUALIFICATIONS TO PERFORM UNDER THE CONTRACT SHALL CAUSE THE OWNER TO REJECT THE PROPOSAL, AND IF AFTER THE AWARD TO CANCEL AND TERMINATE THE AWARD AND/OR CONTRACT. (Signature) ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OFFEROR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT State of Florida County of On this the day of , 20, before me, the undersigned Notary Public of the State of Florida, personally appeared and (Name(s) of individual(s) who appeared before notary) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to within the instrument, and he/she/they acknowledge that he/she/they executed it. WITNESS my hand and official seal. NOTARY PUBLIC, STATE OF FLORIDA --- NOTARY PUBLIC.___ ----- —. _ _ -----_.. - ------ --- _ _. . SEAL OF OFFICE: (Name of Notary Public: Print, Stamp, or Type as Commissioned) ❑ Personally known to me, or _ __ ❑Produced identification: _ (Type of Identification Produced) ❑ DID take an oath, or ❑ DID NOT take an oath Page a of 5 C)frbror:s Qu," diod""'On statement Ofv uf pw(:,t�asi?1g,�n (.ontractsDivis;(.)n Please list government agencies REFERENCES and/or private firms with whom you have done business during the last five years: Your Company Name Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Agency/Firm Name; Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Contact Name Agency/Firm Name: Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Contact Name Agency/Firm Name: Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Contact Name Name: Agency/Firm Address City State Zip Phone/Fax Contact Name Agency/Firm Name: Address City State. Zip, ---- --- . Contact Name _.......................................................... _........ _.._....__.. g :es w 'r %ar;l.ir.i.. F ifrr, l,r, ar?d Gr>ottact Division 1 1 1 [l L� ---. 1 11 VENDOR DRUG -FREE .WORKPLACE Preference may be given to vendors submitting a certification with their bid/proposal certifying they have a drug -free workplace in accordance with Section 287.087, Florida Statutes. This requirement affects all public 'entities of the State and becomes effective January 1, 1991. The special condition is as follows: IDENTICAL TIE BIDS - Preference may be given to businesses with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids that are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the State or by any political subdivision for the procurement of commodities or contractual.service% a, bid received,,from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none of the tied vendors have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a business shall: Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that -.will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893 or of any controlled substance law of the United States or -------any state for a violation occurring in the workplace no later that --five (5) days - after each conviction. 5. Impose a section on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. 6 Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through --implementation -of-this--section: As -the -person authorized to -sign -the statement; --- -- I certify that this form complies fully with the above requirements. Authorized Signature Company Name Page 9 r tr 1 Dwf,.�-F=rev Workplace 1 No Text STATE OF FLORIDA) ss: COUNTY OF BROWARD) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, as Principal, and as Surety, are held and' firmly bound unto the City of Tamarac, a'municipal corporation of the State of Florida in the penal sum of: Dollars ($,- ) lawful money on the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we, -bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying Bid, dated , 20^, for: BID NO. 04-17B NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate. (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall properly execute and deliver to said City the appropriate Contract Documents, and shall in all respects fulfill all terms and conditions attributable to the acceptance of __----said Bid, then this obligation -shall-be void;- otherwise, -it-shall remain in — force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event exceed the amount of this obligation as herein stated. - The Surety, for value received, hereby agree s that the obligations of the said Surety and - its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of time within which said Sure does hereb waive notice of said CITY may accept suchBid; and s... _ .h+__ .. _._ .._ ...--- _y__. _..M_..._.. _ _.._.. extension. ........... 1 City y t , rn ar at Pun f ,sing zar.0 C nnt,',wts Division .........i ACKNOWLEDGEMENT BID BOND Signed and sealed this day of , 20_. IN PRESENCE OF: Principal Business Address (AFFIX SEAL): City/State/Zip ATTEST: Business Phone Secretary Surety* ATTEST: By Secretary Title Attorney -In -Fact* By ____�-�-.ram-.....�..�..�.�...�. __��..........�.-,.............,.�..�...�......,_....���... ._-__--.-.-_._..__„�.'--^'.�.........'......�.�...:............�.�..��....�.�.�,..�.r..�..�.�...�., w.,.....�..�.��, .. �,...�. *Impress Corporate Seal ....... _.......... ........_.._ .... ... ........ .......... .._........... .......... ... _.... ......... .......... ... . f, __._..... ',R „ o 1d Ac.�ti7ovvledgp ent I i?f Tar3t<ac .i ... ............ ............... ...... ..................... ..... ........ ....... ..... ......... ........ ' ........,., i 11 i,] CERTIFIED RESOLUTION � ( tt'?C ' ,P "� - Division t iX I (Name), the duly elected Secretary of (Corporate Title), a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of , do hereby certify that the following Resolution was unanimously adopted and passed by a quorum of the Board of Directors of the said corporation at a meeting held in accordance with law and the by-laws of the said corporation. "IT IS HEREBY RESOLVED THAT (Name)", the duly elected (Title of Officer) of _ (Corporate Title) be and is hereby authorized to execute and submit a Bid and/or Bid Bond, if such bond is required, to the City of Tamarac and such other Instruments in writing as may be necessary on behalf of the said corporation; and that the Bid, Bid Bond, and other such instruments signed by him/her shall be binding upon the said corporation as its own acts and deeds. The secretary shall certify the names and signatures of those authorized to act by the foregoing resolution. The City of Tamarac shall be fully protected in relying upon such certification of the secretary and shall be indemnified and saved harmless from any and all claims, demands, expenses, loss or damage resulting from or growing out of honoring, the signature of any person so certified or for refusing to honor any signature not so certified. I further certify that the above resolution is in force and effect and has not been revised, revoked or rescinded. I further certify that the following are the name, titles and official signatures of those persons authorized to act by the foregoing resolution. NAME TITLE SIGNATURE - Given under my hand and the Seal of the said corporation this (SEAL) 13 day of 2Q -- Secretary Corporate Title The above is a suggested form of the type of Corporate Resolution desired. Such form need not be followed explicitly, but the Certified Resolution submitted must clearly show to the satisfaction of the City of Tamarac that the person signing the Bid and Bid Bond for the corporation has been properly empowered by the corporation to do so in its behalf. a F c;eriffied Resolution �a{t f of 7 1 t 1 [l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 t c 7'lar1P xt a : flti f7asitay rarrc< Contracts Divisinn .... 41, Bidder acknowledges that included in the appropriate bid items of the proposal and in the Total Bid Price are costs for complying with the Florida Trench Safety Act (90-96, Laws of Florida) effective October 1, 1990. The bidder further identifies the costs of such compliance to be summarized below: TRENCH SAFETY MEASURE (Descrig_tion) UNITS OF MEASURE (LF/SF) UNIT (Qty) UNIT -COST EXTENDED COST A. $ $ B. $ $ C. $ $ D. $ $ TOTAL $ If applicable, the Contractor certifies that all trench excavation done within his control in excess of live feet (5') in depth shall be in accordance with the Florida Department of Transportation's Special Provisions Article 125-1 and Subarticle 125-4.1 (TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEM AND SHORING, SPECIAL -TRENCH EXCAVATION). Failure to complete the above may result in the bid being declared non -responsive. DATE: (Signature) ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATE OF COUNTY OF: PERSONALLY. APPEARED BEFORE ME, the undersigned,authofity,,. who, after first being.duly sworn by me, (Name of individual Signing) affixed his/her signature in the space provided above on this day of , 20—. NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: pay(. ? of 7 Trench Safety Form I i.fty Cd .{.if{a7 ,?' (; {-'Idr':'?,as nq .f!�!a a t t'F Af.„ir tS Dios t l FORM PAYMENT BOND [I KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: t the requirements of Florida Statute 2 5.05 we That, pursuant o5 , as Principal, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, and, as Surety, are bound to the City of Tamarac, Florida, as Obligee, hereinafter called OWNER, in the amount of CONTRACTOR and Surety bindollars thems$ heirs,) for the payment whereof elves, their , executrs, oadministrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has entered into a Contract, Bid/Contract/Project No.: awarded the _day of , 20_, with OWNER for which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereafter referred to as the Contract; THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if the CONTRACTOR: 1. Indemnifies and pays OWNER all losses, damages (specifically including, but not limited to, damages for delay and other consequential damages caused by or arising out of the acts, omissions or negligence of CONTRACTOR), expenses, costs and attorney's fees including attorney's fees incurred in appellate proceedings, that OWNER sustains because of default by CONTRACTOR under the Contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants as defined by Florida Statute 713.01 supplying CONTRACTOR with all labor, materials and supplies used directly or indirectly by CONTRACTOR in the prosecution of the Work provided for in the Contract, then his obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force —___and effect subject, however, to the following conditions: -- A. 2.1 A claimant, except a laborer, who is not in privity with the CONTRACTOR and who has not received payment for his labor, materials, or supplies shall, within forty five (45) days after beginning to furnish labor, materials, or supplies for the prosecution of the work, furnish to the CONTRACTORanotice that he protection. intends to look to the Bond for _ 2.2 A claimant who is not in privity with the C_ ONTRACTOR and who hass not received payment for his labor, materials, or supplies shall, within ninety (90) days after performance of the labor or after complete delivery of the materials or supplies, deliver to the CONTRACTOR and to the Surety, written notice of the performance of the labor or delivery of the materials or supplies and of the non-payment. P"'ig W 1 6,3 3 Form Payment ent Rond of 7fxrt rtac Purrhasung and C.'ontiac:fs Division - 2.3 Any action under this Bond must be instituted in accordance with the Notice and Time Limitations provisions prescribed in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. The Surety hereby waives notice of and agrees that any changes in or under the Contract Documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the Contract or the changes do not affect the Surety's obligation under this Bond. Signed and sealed this day of , 20_. WITNESSES Secretary Principal By (AFFIX SEAL) - Signature and Title Type Name and Title signed above WITNESSES Surety Secretary By (AFFIX SEAL) Signature and Title Type Name and Title signed above IN THE PRESENCE OF.. _.._ .. - .._.._—.. INSURANCE COMPANY: By Agent and Attorney -in -Fact Address City/State/Zip Code Telephone _.._................ ..... _....._....._............ ................... ........ .... _........... Page 2 of 3 Form Payment Bond 1 C 1 1 .. i(. . . ... State of County of min ACKNOWLEDGMENT FORM PAYMENT BOND 6 tjr°, asmcr iiml Cxntaic:ts Divisx,.n On this the day of , 20_, before me, the undersigned Notary Public of the State of Florida, the foregoing instrument was acknowledged by: of . (Name of Corporate Officer) (Title) ,a (Name of Corporation) corporation, on behalf of the corporation. WITNESS my hand and official seal. (State of Corporation) NOTARY PUBLIC, STATE OF NOTARY PUBLIC SEAL OF OFFICE: (Name of Notary Public: Print, Stamp, or Type as Commissioned) t, ❑ Personally known to me, or ❑ Produced identification: (Type of Identification Produced) - - --- ❑ DID take an oath, or ❑-DID NOT take an oath-- CERTIFICATE AS TO PRINCIPAL .......... I, certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation named as Principal in the foregoing Payment Bond; that s __.-__.__.._._...._who signed -the -Bond on behalf of the Principal, was -then------ - -- ----of said Corporation; that I know his/her signature; and his/her signature thereto is genuine; and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed and attested to on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (AFFIX SEAL) (Name of Corporation) Iriz"g, 3 of � form F'ayrr)errt Bond r (�. v i-� ?ri h?6 Sr!3(J r1; 1f?� U ","b,?!�t.5 Vivis! In FORM PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: rThat, pursuant to the requirement of Florida Statute 255.05, we, as Principal, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, and, as Surety, are bound to the City of Tamarac, Florida, as Obligee, hereinafter called OWNER, in the amount of Dollars, ($ ) for the payment whereof CONTRACTOR and Surety, bind. , , themselves,. their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has entered into a Contract, Bid/Contract/Project No.: awarded the day of 20_, with OWNER for which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if the CONTRACTOR: 1. Fully performs the Contract between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER dated ,20 for the within calendar days after the date of contract commencement as specified in the Notice to Proceed and in the manner prescribed in the Contract; and 2. Indemnifies and pays OWNER all losses, damages (specifically including, but not limited to, damages for delay and other consequential damages. caused by or arising out of the acts, omissions or negligence of CONTRACTOR), expenses, costs and attorney's fees and costs, including attorney's fees incurred in appellate proceedings, that OWNER sustains because of default by CONTRACTOR under the Contract; and _._..�. _..... .. 3. Upon notification by.the OWNER, corrects- any .and all defective -or faulty work or.. materials, which appear within one (1) year after final acceptance of the work. 4. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the Contract for the time specified in the Contract, then this Bond is void, otherwise it remains in full force. C. Whenever CONTRACTOR shall be, and declared by OWNER to be, in under -the -Contracts -the -OWNER-having performed -OWNER'S---- obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 4.1 Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions; or IJ I tr 4 ...... ......... ........ 1? ;y t! 7 i (.. rrTr,a�t5 Division 4.2 Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by Surety of the best, lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder, or, if the OWNER elects, upon determination by the OWNER and Surety jointly of the best, lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder, arrange for a contract between such Bidder and OWNER, and make available as work progresses (even though there should be a default or a succession of defaults under the Contract or, Contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to'pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price; but not exceeding,. including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. No right of action shall, accrue on this Bond to or for the use. of any person or corporation other than the OWNER named herein and those persons or corporations provided for in Section 255.05, Florida Statues, or their heirs, executors, administrators or successors. Any action under this Bond must be instituted in accordance with the Notice and Time Limitations provisions prescribed in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. The Surety hereby waives notice of and agrees that any changes in or under the Contract Documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the Contract or the changes do not affect Surety's obligation under this Bond. Signed and sealed this day of , 20_. WITNESSES Secretary (AFFIX SEAL) Principal By Signature and Title Type a and Title signed above WITNE SSES _ T e Nam..... Secretary By (AFFIX SEAL) Signature and Title 1-1 1 Cl I I G 1 I 1 Type Name and Title signed above I Page 2 of 4 fit?rm Petformame Bond I C:.'fy of IN THE PRESENCE OF: r"'cart.}t; sir t and C ontt acts Div:sican INSURANCE COMPANY: By Agent and Attorney -in -Fact Address City/State/Zip Code Telephone ACKNOWLEDGMENT FORM PERFORMANCE BOND State of County of On this the day of , 20—, before me, the undersigned Notary Public of the State of Florida, the foregoing instrument was acknowledged by: of (Name of Corporate Officer) (Title) ,a (Name of Corporation) (State of. Corporation) corporation, on behalf of the corporation. WITNESS my hand and official seal. ........... ............ ......... OTARY PUBLIC, STATE OF NOTARY PUBLIC SEAL OF OFFICE: (Name of Notary Public: Print, Stamp, or Type as Commissioned) -. ❑ Personally known to me, or ,rr --- — - T— ---- ❑-Produced identification. — (Type of Identification Produced) ❑ DID take an oath or ❑ DID NOT take an oath F:...�ge 3o, 4 r ev forn7 �r�r e Bond .Acknovvlet�get ent f :.Ir 4..f..d..q �`r i S1:tC(771A;1S DtVP5tCrr ... .... ....... ............ .......... ............. ........ �._................ .. .... CERTIFICATE AS TO PRINCIPAL I, , certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation named as Principal in the foregoing Payment Bond; that who signed the Bond on behalf of the Principal, was then of said Corporation; that I know his/her signature; and his/her signature thereto is genuine; and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed and attested to on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (AFFIX SEAL) (Name of Corporation) ...... ..............' ii;Fr :r oft t�f'I fJrrl7rartt k? BondC.f>rtrfrc +�rJf�rinGrp al 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Git'v TjwfldlW, APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT purr'hai ";Iriy and C:ontlacts Division Agreement Title: Contract No.: Original Contract Value: Contract Change Order Value: Current Contract Value: Cumulative No. Change Orders: Application for Payment is mado;'aa shown below: ' 1. Original Contract Sum 2. Net Change by Change Orders 3. Contract Sum to Date (line 1 (+) or (-) line 2) 4. Total Completed and Stored to Date 5. Retainage a. 1 Q% of Completed Work b. Total Retainage (line 5a + line 5b) 6. Total Earned less Retainage (line 4 — line 5b) 7. Less Previous Application For Payment (subtract line 6 from prior A.F.P.) _ 67 Current Payment Due 9. Balance to Finish, plus Retainage $ (line 37 line 6) $ ....... . .... . ....... ...... F:>,;we r of I Application for Payrrrent yF'r.rr;. i; tira f rar;cx C".o r l "icti owlsion CHANGE ORDER DATE OF ISSUANCE: NO. OWNER: CITY OF TAMARAC PROJECT NAME: 7525 NW Wh Avenue Tamarac, FL 33321-2401 CONTRACTOR: BID NO. 04-17B IN COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS IN THE ABOVE REFERENCED CONTRACT, THE CONTRACTOR AND THE CITY DO BOTH HEREBY, AGREE THAT THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE THE FOLLOWING CHANGES, ADDITIONS OR» 6ELE—TIONS TO THE WORK, SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. DESCRIPTION: PURPOSE OF CHANGE ORDER: CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE G IN CONTRACT TIME Original Contract Price Original Contract Time Previous Change Order No. to No. Net change from previous change orders prior ___._ ------ .__ Contract rice to thisChange Order Contract Time prior to this Change Order Net (Increase) of this Change Order Net (Increase) of this Change Order Contract Price with all approved Change Orders. Contract Time with all approved .Change Orders BY Date RECOMMENDED APPROVED BY BY Director City Manager Date Date ........................ F'atge 4 of I APPROVED Contractor ._...._..__..._......... L� 1 1 1 .::1 ..f 7'.'r�t �r<xc .. ............. .... 6 �!1! b)! FINAL RELEASE OF LIEN BY CONTRACTOR STATE OF FLORIDA: COUNTY OF BROWARD: The undersigned contractor, under a certain contract with the City of Tamarac, dated 20____, in connection with the following public work: PROJECT: CONTRACT NO..:. does hereby acknowledge receipt of the full contract price of $ , as modified by change order, addenda, etc., and hereby releases and discharges'all liens, lien rights, claims or demands of any kind whatsoever which the undersigned contractor now has or might have against the City of Tamarac arising out of said contract or in connection with the aforesaid public improvement. That all claims, liens or other entitlements for labor, services, materials or supplies furnished, in connection with the aforesaid improvement have been fully paid. That an affidavit on behalf of the contractor, signed by , has been furnished to the City of Tamarac, as well as final releases of lien executed by all materialmen and subcontractor regardless of their tier. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the contractor has caused this release to be executed in its name and under its seal by its proper officers, this day of , 20_. Page 1 of 2 Final Relelase of ben City of Tr:3i:)w at; � � 'r�utGl7�7.sloy ar?"i �.%t�nt1'!'.Ids Division ACKNOWLEDGMENT FINAL RELEASE OF LIEN State of Florida County of On this the day of , 20—, before me, the undersigned Notary Public of the State of Florida, personally appeared .and (Name(s) of individual(s) who appeared before notary) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to within the instrument, and he/she/they acknowledge that he/she/they executed it. WITNESS my hand and official seal. NOTARY PUBLIC, STATE OF FLORIDA NOTARY PUBLIC SEAL OF OFFICE: (Name of Notary Public: Print, Stamp, or Type as Commissioned) ❑ Personally known to me, or ❑ Produced identification: (Type of Identification Produced) ❑ DID take an oath, or ❑ DID NOT take an oath ------------- .... (;f 1'rimafar c f yi.... rKiC'!- R..S14f 1%art 1 I 1 iJ In 1 fl SAMPLE AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY OF TAMARAC AND THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into this _ day of 20_ by and between the City of Tamarac, a municipal corporation, with principal offices located at 7525 N.W. 88th Ave., Tamarac., FL - r33321 (the !'CITY") and a, corporation- with,principal-,,offices . located - at (the "Contractor") to install a new 2.0 MG pre -stressed concrete ground storage tank, new transfer pumps, new high service pumps, piping, valves, electrical, instrumentation, site restoration, inspection and cleaning of existing potable water storage tanks and all other incidentals as indicated by the drawings and specifications or as required to properly complete the project as specified in Bid No. 04-17B. Now therefore, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, the City and Contractor agree as follows: 1) The Contract Documents The contract documents consist of this Agreement, conditions of Bid No. 04-17B bid documents, (General, Special and other Conditions), drawings and specifications, all addenda issued prior to, and all modifications issued after, execution of this Agreement. These contract documents form the Agreement, and all are as fully a part of the Agreement if attached to this Agreement or repeated therein. 2) The Work The Contractor shall perform all work for the City required by the contract documents and Bid No. 04-17B, as set forth below: _------ a)_..Contractor- shall . furnish..__.all.__ labor,.. materials,__and __.equipment__._.necessary. as. indicated in the specifications herein. - - - b) Contractor shall supervise the work force to ensure that all workers conduct themselves and perform their work in a safe and professional manner. ..... Contractor shall 'comply with all OSHA safety rules and regulations in the ...... _ p equipment performance of the work. Contractor shall at operation of a ui merit and in the erForm all times have a competent field supervisor on the ' job site fo enforce these I" d d t th C t t po ides an prose ores a - e on rae or s expense. c) Contractor shall provide the City with seventy-two (72) hours written notice prior to the beginning of work under this Agreement and prior to any schedule change with the exception of changes caused by inclement weather. - d) Contractor shall comply with any and all Federal, State, and local laws and regulations now in effect, or hereinafter enacted during the term of this ....... _ ............ _ .. ._.....- f' :3 vrnp lv C;onti actor Agreement t r .'>f 1 ; r zt 6'trt l� �5 ,y ur��l i �rttrac�ts O vrsrzrn Agreement, which are applicable to the Contractor, its employees, agents or subcontractors, if any, with respect to the work and services described herein. 3) Insurance Contractor shall obtain at Contractor's expense all necessary insurance in such form and amount as required by the City's Risk and Safety Manager before beginning work under this Agreement including, but not limited to, Workers' Compensation, Commercial General Liability, and all other insurance as required by the City, including Professional Liability when appropriate. Contractor shall maintain such insurance in full force and effect during the life of this Agreement. Contractor shall provide to the City's Risk and, Safety Manager certificates of all insurances required under this section prior to beginning any work under this Agreement. The 'Contractor will ensure 'that all subcontractors comply with the above guidelines and will retain all necessary insurance in force throughout the term of this agreement. Contractor shall indemnify and hold the City harmless for any damages resulting from failure of the Contractor to take out and maintain such insurance. Contractor's Liability Insurance policies shall be endorsed to add the City as an additional insured. Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all deductibles and self-insurance retentions on Contractor's Liability Insurance policies. 4) Time of Commencement and Substantial Comp letion The work to be performed under this Agreement shall be commenced after execution of the Agreement and not later than 14 days after the date that Contractor receives Notice to Proceed and Purchase Order. Project shall be substantially complete within two hundred ten (210) calendar days from receipt of the Notice to Proceed. Final completion shall be thirty (30) calendar days from date of substantial completion. 5) ., .°Contract>Sum The Contract Sum for the above work is Dollars and cents ( ). 6) Payments _ .._.. --Payments will be made in -accordance -with contract documents and Bid -No. 04-- -- - 17B. Payment will be made monthly for work that has been completed, inspected and properly invoiced. A retainage of 10% will be deducted from monthly payment. Retainage monies will be released upon satisfactory completion and final inspection of this project. .,. _ ._ .---- 7) _. Waiver of Liens ... r_, _ ; ... . ,. ...,>_ y -- - w ....... .... Prior.__.to._final._.payment__.of__the-Contract_S-um,--_a_finaLwaiuer af_lien_shalLb submitted by all suppliers, subcontractors, and/or Contractors who worked on the project that is the subject of this Agreement. 8) Warranty Contractor warrants the work against defect for a period of one year(s) from the date of completion of work. In the event that defect occurs during this time, Contractor shall perform such steps as required in Technical Specifications and Terms and ........... _:............._._..... _................................ ..................................... .................. _............. ........ ..... ._............... .......... ........... ........ ........... ­............................................... .. ..._.._....._ Page 2 of <" Sample ply, Agreement y ::f °?<.;r a ar :�, t'rrr 1r r,r ?y ro ' a is Division Conditions. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages caused by defect to affected area or to interior structure. All portions of the Project are to be completed according to the schedule. Once all work has been completed on a grouping of roadway segments, and the City has indicated, in writing, the final acceptance of landscaping, irrigation, brick paving, and electrical work within said grouping, maintenance of the said roadways will be entirely the responsibility of the City. Contractor will be responsible for the coordination of all work to complete specific grouping of roadways before other groupings are commenced. The one (1) year warranty period for the Project does not begin until substantial compietion of the entire project and the Payment and Performance Bonds are released. 9) Indemnification The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City; its elected and appointed officials, employees, and agents from any and all claims, suits, actions,. damages, liability, and expenses (including attorneys' fees) in connection with loss of life, bodily or personal injury, or property damage, including loss of use thereof, directly or indirectly caused by, resulting from, arising out of or occurring in connection with the operations of the Contractor or its officers, employees, agents, subcontractors, or independent Contractors, excepting only such loss of life, bodily or personal injury, or property damage solely attributable to the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the City or its elected or appointed officials and employees. The above provisions shall survive the termination of this Agreement and shall pertain to any occurrence during the term of this Agreement, even though the claim may be made after the termination hereof. Nothing contained herein is intended nor shall be construed to waive City's.rights and immunities under the common law 'or Florida Statutes 768.28, as amended from time to time. 10) Non -Discrimination ContractorThe t discriminate against any of its employees _ or applicants for employment because of their age, handicap, race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, and to abide by all 'federal and State laws regarding non- discrimination. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all subcontracts hereunder except subcontracts for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. Any violation of such provisions shall constitute a material breach of this r Agreement. 11) Independent Contractor Contractor -is --an -"independent--Contractor-under--this—Agreement:��� PersonaI.-- services provided by the Contractor shall be by employees of the Contractor and subject to supervision by the Contractor, and not as officers, employees, or agents of the City. Personnel policies, tax responsibilities, social security and health insurance, employee benefits, purchasing policies and other similar administrative procedures applicable to services rendered under this Agreement shall be those of the Contractor. ;3 r;f y 5 rt' ���it C't�rtFr rric�r r+�reerrtE?nt City of za a f 0I'Ct7rasrny <r d C r,,r tta3ct� O vrsfcw _ ..... _.,.... .._ _. _ _._..... _............... 12) Assignment and Subcontracting Contractor shall not transfer or assign the performance required by this Agreement without the prior consent of the City, This Agreement, or any portion thereof, shall not be subcontracted without the prior written consent of the city. 13) Notice Whenever either party desires or is required under this Agreement to give notice to any other party, it must be given by written notice, sent by registered United States mail, with return receipt requested, addressed to the party, for whom it is intended at the following addresses. CITY City Manager City of Tamarac 7525 N.W. 88th Avenue Tamarac, FL 33321 With .a copy to City Attorney at the same address. CONTRACTOR' 14) Termination This Agreement may be terminated by City or Contractor for cause or by the City for convenience, upon seven (7) days of written notice by the terminating party to the other party for such termination in which event the Contractor shall be paid its compensation for services performed to termination date, including services reasonably related to termination -In--the -event that'the Contractor-abandane- this -Agreement-or causes it to be terminated, Contractor shall indemnify the city against loss pertaining to this termination. 1 y remedies available to the.City, this ... Default b Contractor: In addition to all other ould the Contractor..neglect or. ._ . _......__�__ Agreement aperformsb or observe to cancellation b -the City sh A rcement shall be s serve any of the terms, provisions, conditions, or requirements _---.___herein contained; if such -neglect -or failure -shall continue-for-a-period-oFthirty-(3Q)-days_-- after receipt by Contractor of written notice of such neglect or failure. 15) Agreement Subject to Funding This agreement shall remain in fu11 force and effect only as long as the expenditures provided for in the Agreement have been appropriated by the City ............. ._.......... ........... ._w........ .............. ........................ _ _ P11('cha) ',,? g and Gor,,V:acts i VIS1Qf7 Commission of the City of Tamarac in the annual budget for each fiscal year of this Agreement, and is subject to termination based on lack of funding. 16) Venue This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Florida as now and hereafter in force. The venue for actions arising out of this agreement is fixed in Broward County, Florida. 17) Signatory Authority The Contractor shall provide the City with copies of requisite documentation ' evidencing that the, signatory for Contractor has the authority to enter into this Agreement. 18) Severability; Waiver of Provisions. Any provision in this Agreement that is prohibited or unenforceable in any jurisdiction shall, as to such jurisdiction, be ineffective to the extent of such prohibition or unenforceability without invalidating the remaining provisions hereof or affecting the validity or enforceability of such provisions in any other jurisdiction. The non- enforcement of any provision by either party shall not constitute a waiver of that provision nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Agreement. 19) Merger; Amendment This Agreement constitutes the entire Agreement between the Contractor and the City, and negotiations and oral understandings between the parties are merged herein. This Agreement can be supplemented and/or amended only by a written document executed by both the Contractor and the City. 1 IL� C cy rid ! 3rr v� a ..._.... pt. rcl'?aSiny and coottacds Divisiol) . . .......... IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have made and executed this Agreement on the respective dates under each signature. CITY OF TAMARAC, signing by and through its'Mayor and City Manager, and signing by and through its duly authorized to execute same. CITY OF TAMARAC Joe Schreiber, Mayor Date+ City Manager ATTEST: Jeffrey L. Miller, . Marion. Swenson, CIVIC Date City Clerk Date ATTEST: (Corporate Secretary) Signature of President/Owner C y of i <3t '^i,�if 6 !Jf 7�1 tg Fj, !! ! t °r� cls �7JVf5jon ....I,.�....._......_....._....—.....w______. CORPORATE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATE OF FLORIDA: :SS . COUNTY OF I HEREBY CERTIFY that on this day, before me, an Officer duly authorized in the State aforesaid and in the County aforesaid to take acknowledgments, personally appeared of a Corporation, to me known to be the person(s) described in and who executed the foregoing instrument and acknowledged before me that he/she executed the same. WITNESS my hand and official seal this day of , 20 Signature of Notary Public State of Florida at Large Print, Type or Stamp Name of Notary Public ❑ Personally known to me or ❑ Produced Identification Type of I.D. Produced ❑ DID take an oath, or --- --DID NOT take anoath. 1 1 L' u F 1 1 1 I Cl 1 1 I�i 1 1 u 1 I 1 SECTION 00020 TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT NO. TITLE PART 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Division 1 - General Requirements 01005 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 01010 Summary of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . 01050 Field Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . 01200 Project Meetings . . . . . . . . . 0,,.1300, Submittals . . . • . • . . . . 01400 Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01505 Mobilizat Qn/D;emobilization . . . . . . 01700 Contract Closeout . . . • . . 01720 Project Record Documents . . . . . . . . 01730 Operation and Maintenance Data . 01740 Warranties and Bonds . . . . . . . . . . Division 2 - Sitswork PAGES PAGES . 1-B . . . . . 1-2 . . . . . 1-3 1-3 . . . . . 1-4 1-2 02072 Demolition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02200 Earthwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02340 Jacking and Baring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02500 Restoration and Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02510 Asphaltic Pavement and Base . . . . . . . . . . . 02630 Concrete Sidewalks, Drives & Curbs . . . . . . . . Division 3 - Concrete 03100 Formwork . . . . . . 1-5 03200 Concrete Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 nk. . . . . . . . 03251 Expansion and Construction Joints . . . . . . . . 1-4 03300 Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 03315 Prestressed Composite 'Ta. . . . 1-11 03410 Structural Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks 1-4 03600 Grout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Division 4 - Masonry 04100 Mortar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' - 04220 Concrete Unit Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Division 5 - Metals 05500 Fabricated Metalwork and Castings . . . . . . . . 1-9 Division 6 - Not Used Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07230 Vapor Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 07533 Thermoplastic Single -Ply Membrane Roofing System . 1-8 07650 Metal Fascia and Gutter System . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 07900 Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 2/20/04 00020 442.E1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 8 - Doors and Windows 08120 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08710 Finish Hardware . . . . . Division 9 - Finishes 09200 Lath and Plaster . . . . . 09900 Protective Coatings . . . 09901 Logo Painting . . . . . . Division 10 - Not used Division 11 - Equipment . . . . . . 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 1.1037 Vertical'Turbine Pumps -General . . . 11637-1 Vertical Turbine Pumps -Specific 11037-2 vertical Turbine Pumps -Specific 11315 Submersible Grinder Pump Station 11315-1 Grinder Pump Station Specific . . . Division, 12 - Not Used 1-3 1-16 1-3 1-10 1-1 1-1 Division 13 - Specialty Construction 13700 Process Instrumentation and Controls . . . . . 1-18 13711 Existing SCADA System Modifications . . . . . . . 1-10 13720 Variable Frequency Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Division 14 - Not Used Division 15 - Mechanical 15005 Ductile Iron Pipe (Wastewater) . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 15029 Pressure Pipeline Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 15100 Manually Operated Valves . . . • • • . • • • • • 1-9 15105 Self -Contained Automatic P.ropess,Valves:;. ... 1 3 . - 15400 Plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Division 16 - Electrical 16000 Electrical General Requirements . . . . . . . . . 1-5 16001 Electrical Demolition . . . . . . . . 1-2 16050 Basic Materials .and.. Methods __ ..._ ._ ....__ . _ ..... ...... 1-,10...._ .. ..._. 16110 Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 16160 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 16426 Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 16921 480-Volt Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 PART 3 APPENDICES Appendix A - Geotechnical Exploration ..._.... -------------------Appendix, B . - ..Vacuum..... Test. Hole _....(-Soft _..Digs). -Reports Appendix C - Copies of Existing HSP Screens 1 1 00020 2/20/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 442.El SECTION 01005 ' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, ' plant, power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, and other means of construction necessary or proper for performance and completion of all work included in this Contract. The Summary of Work can be found in Section 01010 - Summary of Work. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all required permits. The Contractor shall perform and complete the work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and OWNER, and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall clean up the work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs incidental thereto. The CONTRACTOR shall repair or restore all structures and property that disturbed during of the work. may be damaged or performance B. The cost of incidental work described in these GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, for which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as be included in the part of the general cost of doing the work and shall Lump Sum Bid. No additional payment will be made therefor. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials and equipment, prior review of the ENGINEER notwithstanding. 1.02 WORK TO BE PERrORMED BY OTHERS A. During the construction period for this project, the OWNER (either with his own forces or under a separate contract) may be performing work that will require the cooperation of the CONTRACTORS in scheduling and coordination to avoid conflicts. 1.03._.. PUBLIC UTILITY INSTALLATIONS AND STRUCTURES A. Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to ' include all pales, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults, manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the OWNER, other governmental bodies or privately owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public_ with transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work shall be deemed included hereunder. B. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. These data are not guaranteed as to their completeness or accuracy and it is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to make his own investigations to inform himself fully of the character, condition and extent of all such installations and structures as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations. 2/20/04 01005 442.E1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS C. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all public utility installations and structures from damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation or structure shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. All existing public utilities damaged by the CONTRACTOR which are shown on the Plans or have been located in the field by the utility shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR, at his expense, as directed by the ENGINEER. No separate payment shall be made for such protective measures or repairs to public utility installations or structures. D. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely and directly responsible to the OWNER and operators of such properties for any damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay,, suits, actions or claims of any character brought because of any injuries or damage which may result from the construction operations under this Contract. E. Neither the OWNER nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the CONTRACTOR for damages as a result of the Contractor's failure to protect utilities encountered in the work. 1.04 TEMPORARY SHDTDOWN OF EXISTING OPERATIONS AND NTILITTSS A. Connections to existing services or utilities, or other work that requires the temporary shutdown of any existing operations or utilities shall be planned in detail with appropriate scheduling of the Work and coordinated with the OWNER and/or ENGINEER. The approved schedule for shutdown or restart shall be indicated on the CONTRACTOR's Progress Schedule, and advance notice shall be given in order that the OWNER or ENGINEER may witness the shutdown, tie-in and startup and coordinate with affected people. B. All materials and equipment (including emergency equipment) necessary to expedite the tie-in shall be on hand prior to the shutdown of existing services or utilities. 1.05 INTERFERING STRUCTURES A. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to existing structures whether on the surface, aboveground or underground. An attempt has been made to show major structures on the Drawings. The completeness and accuracy of information shown cannot be guaranteed, and it is presented -simply as a guide to avoid known possible difficulties. B. Protect underground and above ground existing structures from damage, ' whether or not they lie within the limits of the existing right-of-way and/or additional right-of-way and easements obtained by the OWNER. Where such existing fences, gates, -barns, sheds, buildings or any other structure must be removed during construction, restore to their original condition to the satisfaction of the property OWNER involved--_ at the CONTRACTOR's own expense. Notify the ENGINEER of any damaged -- - ------underground _--structure ---and —make ---repairs --or--replacements—,_bef�sre--_ backfilling. C. Without additional compensation, the CONTRACTOR may remove and replace in a condition good as or better than original, such small miscellaneous structures as fences, mailboxes and signposts that interfere with the CONTRACTOR's operations. 01005 2/20/04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2 442.El 1.06 FIELD RELOCATION ' A. During the progress of construction, it is expected that minor relocations of the work may be necessary. Such relocations shall be made only by direction of the ENGINEER. If existing structures or utilities are encountered which prevent the construction, and which are not properly shown on the drawings, notify the ENGINEER before continuing with the construction in order that the ENGINEER my make such field revisions as necessary to avoid conflict with the existing structures or utilities. If a structure or utility is encountered, and the CONTRACTOR proceeds with the construction despite this interference, he shall do so at his own risk. 1 1.07 EASEMENTS 1 LJI FJ �1 A. Where portions of the work are located on public or private property, easements will be obtained by the OWNER. Easements will provide for the use of property for construction purposes to the extent indicated on the easements. Copies of these easements are available upon request to the OWNER. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to determine the adequacy of the easement obtained; in, every•case�and to abide by all requirements and provisions of the easement. The CONTRACTOR shall confine his construction operations to within the easement limits or make special arrangements with the property owners or appropriate public agency for the additional area required. Any damage to property, either inside or outside -the limits of the easements provided by the OWNER, shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as specified herein. The CONTRACTOR shall remove, protect and replace all fences or other items encountered on public or private property. Before final payment will be authorized by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR will be required to furnish the. OWNER with written releases from property owners or public agencies where side agreements or special easements have been made by the CONTRACTOR of where the CONTRACTOR's operations, for any reason, have not been kept within the construction easements obtained by the OWNER. B. It is anticipated that the required easements will be obtained before construction is started: However should the procurement v of any easement be delayed, the CONTRACTOR shall schedule and perform the work around these areas until such time as the easement has been secured. 1.08 LAND MONUMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of any existing federal, state; -county, city --and private land -monuments encountered.--- Private--_.... monuments that are within 5 feet of the trench centerline shall be preserved, or replaced by a licensed surveyor at the CONTRACTOR's expense. When government monuments are encountered the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least 2 weeks in advance of the proposed construction in order -that the ENGINEER will have ample opportunity to notify the proper authority and reference these monuments for later replacement. - 1 09 __ DRAWINGS- AND- SPECIFICATIONS—-- • _. A 2/20/04 442.E1 Drawings The Drawings referred to in the Contract Documents bear the general project name and number as shown in the Invitation to Bid. When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to small scale drawings. 3. 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 S. Copies Furnished to CONTRACTOR After the Contract has been executed, the Contractor will be furnished with three (3) sets of paper prints, the same size as the original drawings and three (3) copies of the Specifications. Additional copies of the Plans and Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the CONTRACTOR at cost of reproduction. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish each of the subcontractors, manufacturers, and material men such copies of the Contract Documents as may be required for their work. C. Supplementary Drawings When, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the work to be done or to illustrate...the work -further or to show any changes which may be required, drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the ENGINEER and five (5) paper prints thereof will be given to the CONTRACTOR. aI The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the CONTRACTOR with the same force as the Drawings. where such Supplementary Drawings require either less or more than the estimated quantities of work, credit to the OWNER or compensation therefor to the CONTRACTOR shall be subject to the terms of the Agreement. D. CONTRACTOR To Check Drawings and Data Verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, schedules, Specifications or other data received from the ENGINEER, and shall notify him of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts or discrepancies shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work, faulty construction or improper operation resulting therefrom nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense. He will not be allowed to take, advantage,'-of;any errors or omi;ssions,;as;full instructions will be furnished by the ENGINEER, should such errors or omissions be discovered. All schedules are given for the convenience of the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR and are not guaranteed to be complete. The CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility for the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract. E. Specifications Each Technical Specification Section consists of three parts: General, Products and Execution. The General part contains General Requirements which govern -the work. Products :and. Execution modifyand supplement . these by detailed requirements for the work and shall always govern _..-._. ...whenever there appears... to -be a.. conflict. :.. All work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as though it were specifically delineated or described. 01005 2/20/04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4 442.E1 Cl 1 1 ri 11 1 1 IJ I -1 t I The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. 1.10 HATER MS AND EQUIPMENT A. General All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be new. The use of reconditioned or refurbished materials and equipment will not be allowed. B. Manufacturer The names of proposed manufacturers, material men, suppliers and dealers who are to furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review as early as possible, to afford proper investigation and checking. Such review must be obtained before Shop Drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be acceptable to furnish any materials under this Contract unless it shall be of good reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. Manufacturers shall, upon the request of the ENGINEER, be required to submit evidence that it has manufactured a similar product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory performance. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the CONTRACTOR, unless the contractor shall request, in writing to the ENGINEER, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the ENGINEER. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the CONTRACTOR from his full responsibility under this Contract. Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or classification, -:and being used for identical types,, of service shall be made by the same manufacturer. C. Delivery Deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work within ----the allotted --time.- Also coordinate -deliveries in order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any related CONTRACTOR. D. Tools and Accessories .. .... ... - ..- ... . Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, furnish with each type, kind or -size of equipment, one complete set -of suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, —operate,--. maintain -or --repair- the .equipment- -.--. Such-.tools--.-.and-appliances _ ..----_..-- shall be furnished in painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 2/20/04 442.E1 Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturers name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data. 5 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS F�l E. Installation of Equipment Have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally encountered in work of this character. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings. All equipment shall be correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for ' satisfactory operation and shall be installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily between the various units. F. Service of Manufacturer's ENGINEER The Contract prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer and shall assist the CONTRACTOR, when required, to install, adjust, test and place in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the OWNER, such engineer or superintendent.. shall make all adjustments and tests required by the ENGINEER to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory operating condition, and shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the OWNER in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. 1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General Inspection and testing of materials will be performed by a representative of the OWNER unless otherwise specified. , For tests specified to be made by the CONTRACTOR, the testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine , compliance with the Contract Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and authoritative certification thereof mustbe furnished to the ENGINEER as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment. , If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by the ENGINEER that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract, the CONTRACTOR will be notified thereof and he will -be- directed to --refrain from- delivering-- said -material--or. equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without cost to the OWNER. , Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be ...._..conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of —_. --equipment-- during ..tests and .-instruction ---periods....- and .-.- shall- neither ._]nave _: _........ -.-. nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the OWNER formally takes over the operation thereof. B. Costs All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be performed by the OWNER or duly authorized inspection engineers or inspection bureaus without cost to the CONTRACTOR, unless otherwise expressly specified. 1 F1 L 01005 2/20/04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6 442.E1 F 7' The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price. ' Materials and equipment submitted by the CONTRACTOR as the equivalent to those specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the OWNER for compliance. The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for the expenditures incurred in making such tests on materials and equipment ' which are rejected for non-compliance. C. Inspection of Materials ' Give notice in writing to the ENGINEER, sufficiently in advance of intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection, the date of commencement and the expected date of comple- tion of the manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the ENGINEER will arrange to have a representative present ' at such times during the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify the CONTRACTOR that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point of manufacture, or he will notify the CONTRACTOR that inspection will be waived. The CONTRACTOR must comply with these provisions before shipping any material. Such inspection shall not release the CONTRACTOR from the responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Certificate of Manufacture When inspection is waived or when the ENGINEER so requires, the ' CONTRACTOR shall furnish to him authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture that the materials to be used in the work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Docu- ments. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results ,of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly .on :.the, .product or on similar products of the manufacturer. ' E. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function or special requirements are specified �.. _-._ ._....... ... shall be tested .in the shop .of -...-the maker - in- .a manner which , shall _.... _..._ conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract documents. No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the ENGINEER notifies the CONTRACTOR, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable. 1 1 Five copies of the manufacturer's actual ptest data and interpreted results accompaniedthereof,,b a certificate ofauthenticity.. sworn. to. by a responsible official of the manufacturing company, shall be to.._..the_.ENGINEER_.f_or__ approval... -___._.._—_ The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. F. Preliminary Field Tests As soon as conditions permit, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the preliminary field tests disclose any equipment 2/20/04 442.E1 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 0 furnished under this Contract which does not comply with the require- ments of the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments and replacements required. The furnishing CONTRACTOR shall assist in the preliminary field tests as applicable. G. Final Field Tests Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials, equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests. Assist in the final field tests as applicable. H. Failure of Tests Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests, guarantees or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly corrected by the CONTRACTOR by replacements or otherwise. The decision of the ENGINEER as to whether or not the CONTRACTOR has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the CONTRACTOR fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the OWNER, notwith- standing its partial payment for work, and materials and equipment, may reject the materials and equipment and may order the CONTRACTOR to remove them from the site at his own expense. If the failure during testing is fully or partly due to the equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, as determined by the ENGINEER, the Furnishing CONTRACTOR shall make all required improvements at no cost to the OWNER. In case the OWNER rejects any materials and equipment, then the CONTRACTOR shall replace the;.rejected.materials and equipment.within a reasonable time. If he fails to do so, the OWNER may, after the expiration of a period of thirty (30) calendar days after giving him notice in writing, proceed to replace such rejected materials and equipment, and the cost thereof shall be deducted from any compensation due or which may become due the CONTRACTOR under his Contract. The OWNER agrees to obtain other equipment within a .reasonable time and_ .-.-_.-.- the CONTRACTOR agrees that the OWNER may use the equipment furnished by him without rental or other charges until the new equipment is obtained. �7 I 1 1 L� J 1 I. Final Inspection _... _..._During such final .inspections, the work .shall.._ be -clean ..and ..free.. fram._ water. In no case will the final estimate be prepared until the CONTRAC.TOR.-..-has ..._complied .with ._all__-_requi_remen.ts-__ _set -- forth __aand._ the ---- - --- -. ENGINEER has made his final inspection of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly and satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract docu- ments. 01005 2/20/04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 8 442.E1 1.12 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES ' A. Responsibility for Temporary Structures In accepting the Contract, the CONTRACTOR assumes full responsibility for the sufficiency and safety of all temporary structures or work and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper. Fy construction, maintenance or operation and will indemnify and save harmless the OWNER and ENGINEER from all claims, suits or actions and damages or costs of every description arising by reason of failure to " comply with the above provisions. 1.13 TEMPORARY SAFETY SERVICES 1 A. Accident Prevention 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 Precautions shall be exercised at all times for thee" tliO ion .of i person and property. The safety provisions of building and construction codes shall be observed ?# r'to comply with the U.S. Department of Labor Safety and T# ns for construction promulgated under the Occupationald.,� 'lth Act of 1970 (PL 910-596), and under Section 107 of th 'ork. Hours and Safety Standards Act (PL 91-54), except where state ocal safety standards exceed the federal requirements and except where state safety standards have been'approved by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with provisions. of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, shall be complied with. B. First Aid Keep at each location where work is in progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and provide ready access thereto at all times when men are employed on the work. 1.14 TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY A. CONTRACTOR to comply with all rules and regulation of the state, county and city authorities regarding -closing or restricting the use of public streets or highways. No public or private road shall be closed, except by express permission of the OWNER. Conduct the work so as to assure the least possible obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits. Protect all obstructions within traveled roadways by installing approved signs, barricades and lights where necessary for the safety of the public. The convenience of the general public and residents adjacent to the project and the protection -of persons- and ---- property are of prime importance and shall be provided for in an - adequate and satisfactory manner. B. Where traffic will pass over trenches after they are backfilled and before they are paved, the top of the trench shall be maintained in a - condition that will allow normal vehicular traffic to pass over. Temporary access driveways must be provided where required. Cleanup operations shall follow immediately behind backfilling and the work __._�..__... site ---shall ...be -kept --in -an --orderly--condition--at--all times.___. _-- ---- C. When flagmen and guards are required By regulation or when deemed necessary for safety, they shall be furnishedwith approved orange wearing apparel and other regulation traffic -control devices. 1.15 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. Protect stored materials, Cultivated trees and crops and other items located adjacent to the proposed work. Notify property owners affected 2/20/04 442.E1 01005 9 ( GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 by the construction at least 48 hours in advance of the time ' construction begins. During, construction operations, construct and maintain such facilities as may be required to provide access by all property owners to their property. No person shall be cut off from �r�"' access to his residence or place of business for a period exceeding 8,p; ' hours, unless the CONTRACTOR has made special arrangements with the n affected persons.fs " 1.16 SITE RESTORATION AND CLEANUP A. At all times during the work, keep the premises clean and orderly and upon completion of the work, repair all damage caused by equipment and leave the project free of rubbish or excess materials of any kind. B Stocl_pile excavated materials in a manner that will cause the least dam ��I'to adjacent lawns, grassed areas, gardens, shrubbery, or fences, ' "} 0 rdless of whether these are on private property or on state, county -0 t,iby rights -of -way. Remove all excavated materials from grassed and. s planted areas and leave these surfaces in a condition equivalent to their original conditions. C. All existing drainage ditches and culverts shall be reopened and graded sir and natural drainage restored. Restore culverts broken or damaged to their original condition and location. , D. Upon completion of work, hand -rake and drag all former grassed and planted areas leaving all disturbed areas free from rocks, gravel, clay or any other foreign materials and ready, in all aspects, for planting. The finished surface shall conform to the original surface and shall be free -draining and free from holes, ruts, rough spots or other surface features detrimental to a seeded area. E. No trees, except those specifically shown on the Drawings to be removed, shall be removed without the express approval of the ENGINEER. Removed trees will be disposed of off the work site by the CONTRACTOR. F. Originally seeded areas outside dedicated rights -of -way or easements shall :be fertilized and reseeded with first -quality seed or planted- , with new sod as approved by the property owner. All ground preparation, reseeding and sodding shall be done in accordance with the best accepted practices for lawn planting. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining a satisfactory grass turf acceptable to the property owner. G. Thoroughly, clean all spilled dirt, -,gravel --- or-- other -foreign-mater-i-al-__--- caused.by the construction operations from all streets and roads at the conclusion of each day's operation. 1.17 A. PRESERVATION OF IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE DITCHES Arrange schedules so that construction will not interfere with the irrigation of cultivated lands or pasturelands • Construction may. _.. _...... proceed during the irrigation season provided the CONTRACTOR _... constructs,at this own expense, .-temporary --irrigation -.ditches,.-.turnouts---._--._-__.__t- and miscellaneous structures acceptable to the owner of the property. S. After backfilling of the trenches, restore all irrigation and storm drain ditches destroyed, damaged or otherwise modified during , construction to a condition equivalent, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, to the condition of the ditch before construction. Ditches to be reconstructed shall be built in their original locations. 01005 2/20/04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 10 I 442.E1 r 1.18 LINES AND GRADES rA. Grade All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Plans, or as given by the ENGINEER. ' The full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the CONTRACTOR. rB. Surveys Furnish and maintain stakes and other such materials, and give such assistance, including qualified helpers, as may be required by the ENGINEER for setting reference marks. Check such reference marks by such means as deemed necessary and, before using them, call the ENGINEER's attention to,any inaccuracies. Establish all working or construction lines and grades as required from the reference marks set ' by the ENGINEER, and be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. Lines and grades are subject to the check and review of the ENGINEER. Keep the ENGINEER informed a reasonable time in advance as to need for line and grade reference marks, in order that they may be furnished and all necessary measurements made for record and payment with the minimum of inconvenience to the ENGINEER or of delay to the CONTRACTOR. ' It is the intention not to delay the Work for the establishment of reference marks but, when necessary, working operations shall be suspended for such reasonable time as the ENGINEER may require for this purpose. C. Safeguarding Marks 1 t M 1 1 Safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of reestablishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes and marks. Safeguard all existing and known property,corners,.monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required, bear the cost of reestablishing them if disturbed or destroyed. D. Datum Plane All elevations indicated or specified refer to the Mean Sea Level Datum -of the U.S.C. & G.S. (N.O.S.) which is-0.80 feet above the Mean Low Water Datum of the U.S. Army Corps of ENGINEERS. E. Refer to Section 01050 - Field Engineering. 1.19 - PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC A,- Barriers.. -and bights._,.._._ .--:_. During.. -.the. -.prosecution... of...the work, put up and .maintain,.at. all-- times, ..__ such barriers and lights as will effectually prevent accidents. B. Noise Eliminate noise to as great as extent compressing plants shall be equipped as practicable with silencers at all times. Air and the exhaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with mufflers. In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall ' 2/20/04 01005 442.El 11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS r r be used to avoid noise or other nuisances. Strictly observe all local regulations and ordinances covering noise control. Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the hours of 5:00 P.M. and 8:00 A.M., or on Saturdays and Sundays. If the proper and efficient prosecution of the work requires operations during these hours, written permission of the ENGINEER shall be obtained before starting such items of the work. C. Access to Public Services Neither the materials or equipment used in the construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire hydrants, valves or manholes. D. Dust Prevention Applicable environmental regulations for dust prevention shall be strictly enforced. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCUING A. Do all cutting, fitting or patching of this portion of the Work that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. The Work must be done by competent workmen skilled in the trade required by the restoration. 1.21 CLEANING A. During construction of the Work, keep the site of the Work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as is practicable and remove same from any portion of the site if, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable. Remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary structures when no further need therefore develops. Clean up all spillage and incur all associated costs including, but not limited to, costs related to repair and maintenance resulting from damages of such spills. H. Final cleaning At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary - structures and materials belonging to the CONTRACTOR shall be promptly taken away, and remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign substances. Thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed and deliver such materials and equipment undamaged -in -.a bright, clean, polished and new operating condition. 1.22 MISCRLLANEOUS A. Protection Against g ion and Bank Erosion 1. Arrange operations to minimize siltation and bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water courses and drainage ditches. 2. Remove any siltation deposits and correct any erosion problems as recommended by the ENGINEER which results from the construction operations. [�I 1 �.l 1 I J C 1 t 01005 2/20/04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 12 442.E1 B. Protection of Wetland Areas Properly dispose of all surplus material, including spoil, in accordance with applicable Local,, State and Federal regulations. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of in wetland areas as defined by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA). C. Existing Facilities The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as described in the Specific Provisions. D. Use of Chemicals All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfection, polymer, reactant, or of other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all such chemicals -••and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with instructions. E. Use of Explosives The use of any type of explosive to carry out any portion of the work is strictly prohibited. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION 13 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 SUMK&RY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORE INCLUDED A. All of the work under this contract is located at the City of Tamarac, Water Treatment Plant, 7803 NW 61at Street, Tamarac, Florida, 33321. B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services and inciden- tals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. C. Perform the work complete,,in place, and ready for continuous service, and include repairs, testing, permits, cleanup, replacements and restoration required as a result of damages caused during this construction. D. All materials, equipment, skills; tools and labor which are reasonably and properly inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work in a substantial manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or implied by these Specifications or Drawings shall be . furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR whether specifically indicated in the Contract Documents or not. E. Comply with all local, County, State, Federal, and other codes which are applicable to the proposed construction work. 1.02 GENERATE DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The project consists of the construction of finished water storage and high service pumping improvements at the existing City Water Treatment Plant. 1.03 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF COMPONENTS A. Demolition of existing facilities and equipment as indicated by the drawings and specifications. B. Structural and architectural improvements. C. Furnish and install five (5) new high service pumps with check valves, isolation valves, and miscellaneous piping. _ D. Furnish and install two (2) new filter effluent transfer pumps with check valves and miscellaneous piping. E. F. 1 Construction of new 2.0 million gallon capacity, prestressed concrete ground storage tank. Furnish and install new plant..... •----._.. _��,,..,:. _ ......_ _,�. —:._ r....... ...... .. ._�:_ site sanitary pump station No. 2. Yard piping and valves. Process instrumentation and controls. Electrical work. J. Coordination and completion of modifications to the CITY's existing SCADA system for the site. 2/20/04 01010 442.E1 1 SUMMARY OF WORK K. Sitework and restoration including but not limited to earthwork, '. grading, sodding and site cleanup. L. Surface preparation and painting of all surfaces as specified. M. Provide all required survey work for layout, construction and record data. N. Provide all required record drawings, photographs, and other record documents. 0. Complete all permitting requirements as specified herein. P. Existing on -site and off -site finished water storage facilities shall be cleaned and inspected for structural integrity by personnel under responsible charge of a Professional Engineer licensed in Florida in accordance with FAC 62-555.350. Impacted facilities are as follows: Facility Location 0.06 MG Clearwell WTP Site 1.0 MG Ground Storage Tank WTP Site 1.0 MG Ground Storage Tank Grant's Plaza, NW Corner of U. S. 441 and Commercial Boulevard 2.0 MG Ground Storage Tank Tract 27, Corner of NW 100rh Avenue and NW 77°h Street. Q. Existing and proposed on -site and off -site ground storage tanks shall be fitted with security devices as specified and shown on the drawings. Impacted facilities are as follows: Facility Location 1.0 MG Ground Storage Tank WTP Site 2.0 MG Ground Storage Tank WTP Site 1.0 MG Ground Storage Tank Grant's Plaza, NW corner of U. S. 441 and Commercial Boulevard 2.0 MG Ground Storage Tank Tract 27, Corner of NW 100°h Avenue and NW 77`h Street R. NPDES Generic Construction Permit Compliance as specified herein Section 01500 and in accordance with project conditions and local. S. All other required work whether implied or incidental to the proper completion of the project. 1.04 CONTRACT TIME A. Contract times as specified in the Bid Form and Agreement are as follows: 1. Substantial Completion = 210 calendar days from Notice to Proceed. 2. Final Completion - 30 calendar days from Date of Substantial Completion. ALLOWANCES 1.05 A. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Lump Sum Bid, the Lump Sum allowances itemized below to establish a fund which shall be used only by the CONTRACTOR with the specific approval of the ENGINEER to pay the cost of items not called for in these Specifications which cannot be anticipated at the time of Bidding. Payment for items of allowance shall be made in accordance with Articles 11, 12 and 13 of the Special 01010 2/20/04 SUMMARY OF WORT{ 2 442.E1 �. Conditions. Any unused balance of allowance shall revert to the OWNER upon completion of the Work. BID ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT $75,000.00 5. Contingency TOTAL $75,000.00 B. Additional contract time for providing miscellaneous work shall be as requested by CONTRACTOR and as approved by OWNER and ENGINEER. 1.06 PERMITS A. The OWNER has obtained permits for the design and construction of these facilities from the following agencies: 1. Broward County Public Health Unit (BCPHU). B. Pursuant to the Public Bid Disclosure Act, the permits and fees which the CONTRACTOR must apply for, obtain and pay prior to or during this project are as follows: I. City of Tamarac Building Permit. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall verify all requirements, obtain and pay for all permits required for the work required by this project. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall verify all requirements, obtain and pay for all permits required for the dewatering Work required by this project. 5. NPDES Generic Construction Permit per Specifications Section 01500. CONTRACTOR shall verify requirements, obtain and pay for all required permit. 6. other permits may also be required for the Work from local, County, State or Federal authorities. C. All associated permit fees shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR. Permit fees shall be reimbursed by payment through the Contingency Allowance. D. ENGINEER shall furnish all required signed/sealed drawings necessary for permit submittals at the CONTRACTOR'S request. 1.07 SPECIAL PROJECT CONSIDERATIONS _.- A.--- Work associated -with this project -must not --adversely impact water service to the City of Tamarac Utility customers. As a result, CONTRACTOR must coordinate his Work connections to the existing system to meet the following conditions: 1. Existing ground storage tank must be kept in service at all times. 2.--Existing high - service pumps must -be kept in service at- all times until the new high service pump station is operational and ---- -- ------ ------ --providing -service.-—_—.—_ 3. Existing transfer pumps must be kept in service at all times until the new high service pump station is operational. Once the new high service pump station is operational, then one (1) new or existing transfer pump must be kept in service at all times. B. Estimated quantity of sediment to be removed from existing finished water tanks. 2/20/04 01010 442.El 3 SUMMARY OF WORK 1. A one (1) foot average depth of accumulated sediment has been assumed for each finished water facility. This equates to an estimated quantity of 610 Cu. Yds. of accumulated sediment removal. 2. Payment for removal and disposal of accumulated pediment shall be made per the unit price cost item contained in the bid. 1.08 ALTERNATE ITEMS A. The OWNER may require the following alternate items in the event they become necessary for the successful completion of this project: 1. Project contains no alternates. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 Not Used. EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED T A. This section covers all work required for the verification of precon- struction conditions, layout of proposed utility improvements, quality control and data gathering for the preparation of post -construction record drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. 1.03 A. SUBMITTALS Submit name, address and telephone number of Florida Registered Land Surveyor before starting work. B. Submit copies of all post -construction record drawings and certificate indicating that signed by the approved Florida Registered Land Surveyor the elevations and locations of the work are as the work was construct- ed. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Location: "As -Built" location (northing, easting coordinate) relative to plant site grid as indicated on Drawings. B. Elevation: "As -Built" elevation relative to the National Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 (NGVD) and bench marks as indicated on drawings. C. Major Deflection: Change in horizontal or vertical alignment greater than 12-inches accomplished without the use of fittings. D. Valve Elevation: "As -Built" elevation of valve operating nut. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land surveyor employed shall be registered in the State of Florida and acceptable to Engineer. B. Where applicable, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific source on project, licensed in the State of Florida. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DATA A. Maintain a complete and' accurate log--of-control -'and- survey data for --- project record documents as project progresses. B. Upon completion of the project or other intervals as requested by ENGINEER, submit certified "as -built" site survey data of the project improvements. Scale shall be same as ENGINEER's drawings and ENGINEER's drawings may be used as a base for surveyor's field data (redline markups). 2/20/04 01050 442.E1 1 FIELD ENGINEERING C. The following data shall be provided as a minimum: 1. Locations of all new structures. 2. Provide "As -Built" information of all .pertinent elevations and coordinates as shown on the Drawings. 3. Locations and elevations of all new yard piping fittings and valves greater than 3 inches in diameter. 4. Provide locations and general elevation of new yard piping less than 3 inches in diameter. 5. Location and elevation of all connections to existing systems. 6. Locations and elevations of all other site improvements, as applicable, such as but not limited to sidewalks, curbs and roadways. 7. Locations and elevations of re-established survey control points. D. Submit final record drawings prior to final pay application at comple- tion of project as specified in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. E. - Record Drawings shall be prepared and submitted as specified in Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. verify locations of survey control points and bench marks prior to starting work. Promptly notify ENGINEER of any discrepancies discov- ered. 3.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. Make no changes without prior written notice to ENGINEER........... B. Promptly report to ENGINEER the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. C. Provide affidavit from approved Florida Registered Surveyor that all survey control points were re-established following Completion of construction. 3.03 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. ENGINEER will furnish CONTRACTOR with horizontal and vertical control information. Responsibility for construction of the work to correct dimensions, alignment and grade shall be CONTRACTOR's. Additional control points, as applicable, shall be provided for and established by CONTRACTOR's surveyor. 01050 2/20/04 FIELD ENGINEERING 2 442.E1 I 1 1 i i fi B. Establish locations and elevations of proposed improvements. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. All utility improvements including locations and elevations. 2. Site improvements including: stakes for grading, fill and pavement. 3. Structure foundations, column locations and structure elevations. 4. Controlling lines and elevations as required for mechanical and electrical improvements. C. Periodically verify layouts by same means indicated above. D. In the event that pipe or other mechanical feature cannot be left exposed for surveyor to obtain "as -built" information, CONTRACTOR shall place PVC pipe at all major changes in horizontal or vertical alignment and at all locations required that will be buried. PVC pipe shall be of a diameter suitable for the insertion of a surveyor's rod and shall extend from finish grade to the top center of pipe, fitting, location, etc. E. PVC pipe for survey data shall be removed by CONTRACTOR after survey data has been obtained. 3.04 SURVZYS FOR MEASURRMT AND PAYMBNT A. Final project record drawings with "as -built" information of the installed utility systems components and structures of completed project shall be submitted and approved by ENGINEER prior to applica- tion for final payment. B. Current "as -built" information shall be available for ENGINEER'S use for evaluation of partial pay requests. Should ENGINEER find that the record drawings are incomplete at the time of partial pay request, then ENGINEER's recommendation of payment may be withheld until record drawing deficiencies are corrected. 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION C7 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING SECTION 01200 PROaZCT MEETINGS An PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The ENGINEER shall schedule and administer pre -construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. ENGINEER shall also: 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Make physical arrangement for meetings. 3. Preside at meetings. 4. Prepare and distribute minutes of the meetings. B. Representatives of CONTRACTORS, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. C. The CONTRACTOR shall attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction sched- 1.02 ules. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSBERE A. Section 01300 - Submittals. C. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. 1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a preconstruction meeting no later than 20 days after date of Contract. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the ENGINEER. C. Attendance: 1. OWNER's Representative. 2. ENGINEER and his Professional Consultants. 3. Resident Project Representative. 4. CONTRACTOR's Superintendent. -.._. .....- --_..5 -Major subcontractors. — 6. Major suppliers. 7. Utilities. B. Others as appropriate. D.--Suggested Agenda: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List major subcontractors and suppliers'., - b. Pro jectedConstruction Schedules. — - -- -- --2.-- Critical . work -• sequencing-.-- 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project Coordination. a. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field orders. b. Requests for Information (RFI). c. Requests for Proposal (RFP). d. Submittals. 2/20/ 04 01200 442.El 1 PROJECT MEETINGS I e. Change Orders. f. Applications for Payment. 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas. b. OWNER's requirements. 9. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 10. Temporary utilities. 11. Housekeeping procedures. 12. Check of required Bond and Insurance certifications. 13. Liquidated damages. 14. Request for a weekly job meeting for all involved. 15. Laboratory testing of material requirements. 16. Inventory of material stored on site provision. 17. Other Items as applicable. 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. ENGINEER will schedule and administer Project meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals, specially called meetings and preinstallation conferences. B. ENGINEER will make physical arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to ENGINEER, participants, and those affected by decisions made at meetings. C. Location: Project field office of CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER, or other agreed upon location. D. Attendance: 1. ENGINEER, and his professional consultants as needed. 2. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 3. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda. 4. Others as appropriate. E. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of workprogress since previous meeting.. 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 5. Review of off -site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.l 7. Revisions. to Construction Schedule... 8. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. __..... . ... ..........._.. 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. �_.._. __--..... .._.-.-1.4..-_Cons.truation.__.chedule. __-_-- 15. Critical/long lead items. 16. Other business. F. The CONTRACTOR is to attend progress meetings and is to study previous meeting minutes and current agenda items, in order to be prepared to discuss pertinent topics such as deliveries of materials and equipment, progress of the work, etc. 01200 2/20/04 PROJECT MEETINGS 2 442.E1 1 G. The CONTRACTOR is to provide a current submittal log at each progress meeting in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. when required in individual specification Section, a preinstallation conference will be arranged. prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, work of the Section. C. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation proce- dures, and coordination with related work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used.. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 3 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORD INCLUDED A. This Section covers the work required to prepare and submit construc- tion progress schedules, proposed products list, shop drawings, product data, samples, manufacturers' instructions and manufacturers' certifi- cates, complete, all in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. B. individual Specification Sections: Additional specific requirements for submitted data. 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with ENGINEER accepted form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate. D. Drawings and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the work of all trades involved, before they are submitted for review by the ENGINEER and shall bear the CONTRACTOR's stamp of approval as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings or schedules submitted without this stamp of approval shall be returned to the CONTRACTOR for resubmission." E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to ENGINEER at Eckler Engineering, Inc., 4700 Riverside Drive, Suite 110, Coral Springs, Florida 33067 and allow 20 days for review. F. If drawings show variations Prom Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, describe such variations in the letter of transmittal. -If acceptable, proper adjustment in the_._.. Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. Failure to describe such variations does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even though such drawings have been reviewed G. Each Shop Drawing shall have a blank area 3-1/2 inches by 3-1/2 inches, located adjacent to the title block. The title block'shall display the following: .,_.--___.__._._.._.1__..__. Number and --title of the drawing.------------- 2. Date of drawing or revision. 3. Name of project building or facility. 4. Name of contractor and subcontractor submitting drawing. 5. Clear identification of contents and location of the work. 6. Specification title and number. 7. Specification Section. V 8. Applicable Drawing Number. 2/20/04 01300 442.E1 1 SUBMITTALS 1 H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required; identify all changes made since previous submittal. I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. J. Requirements in this section are in addition to any specific require- ments for submittals specified in other Divisions and Sections of these Contract Documents. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule in triplicate within 15 days after date established in the Notice to Proceed for ENGINEER review. B. Revise and resubmit as required: C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying`. changes since previous version. D. Submit computer generated network analysis diagram using'. the critical path method, generally as outlined in Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) publication "The Use of CPM in Construction - A Manual for General Contractors and the Construction Industry". E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and rather logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by the OWNER and under Allowances. 1.05 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST F] 11 U A. Within 30 days after date established in the Notice to Proceed, submit a complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer,; trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.----:._ 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which CONTRACTOR requires, plus three copies, which will be retained by ENGINEER (maximum of . eight) . B. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above ..--...-.and for Record Documents- described.-.i.n---.S-ection__D1.7.2.0._.-._Projeat_ Re:C.Ard,__�_�_ Documents. C. When used in the Contract Documents, the term"shop Drawings" shall be considered to mean, in addition to the definition in Section 00705 - GENERAL CONDITIONS, Contractor's drawings plans for material and equipment which become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and detailed. Shop Drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, and wiring and control diagrams. Cuts, 01300 2/20/04 SUBMITTALS 2 442.E1 11 IJ catalogs, pamphlets, descriptive literature, and performance and test data, shall be considered only as supportive to required Shop Drawings as defined above. D. Data on materials and equipment include, without limitation, materials and equipment lists, catalog data sheets, cuts, performance curves, diagrams, materials of construction and similar descriptive material. Materials and equipment lists shall give, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, size, finish and all other pertinent data. E. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, provide a list including the equipment name, address, telephone number of the manufac- turer's representative and service company so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. F. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who proposed to furnish equipment or products shall submit an installation list to the ENGINEER along with the required shop drawings. The installation list shall include at least five installations where identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period of at least one (1) year. G. Only the ENGINEER will utilize the color "red" is marking Shop Drawing submittals. 1.07 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit the number of copies which the CONTRACTOR requires, plus four copies which will be retained by the ENGINEER (with a maximum of eight). B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. C. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide., copies.. for Record Documents described in Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. 1.08 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate - -sample submittalsfor interfacing work. B. submit samples of finishes in custom colors selected, textures, and patterns for ENGINEER's selection. C. ...Include -identification on each -sample, with full .Project -information. ---.... D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification .-.... Sections; one of which will be retained by ENGINEER. �,....E.... Samples....___...._.._ y _—..-s---------�.._ not destroyed in testing be sent to the ENGINEER or stored at the site of the work. Accepted samples of the hardware in good condition will be marked for identification and may be used in the work. Materials and equipment incorporated in the work shall match the accepted samples. samples which failed testing or are not accepted will be returned to the CONTRACTOR at his expense, if so requested at time of submission. 2/20/04 442.E1 3 01300 SUBMITTALS 1 1.09 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. when specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufac- turers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installa- tion, start-up, adjusting,.and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.10 XLMFACTURBR'$ CERTIFICATES A. when specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufac- turers' certificate to ENGINEER for review, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds 'specified require- ments. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifica- tions as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results .on material or Product, but must be acceptable to ENGINEER. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. 01300 2/20/04 SUBMITTALS 4 442.E1 1 r r r i 1 r SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work as required to provide and/or coordinate: 1. Quality assurance and control of installation. 2. References. 3. Field samples. 4. Inspection,and,testing,laboratory services. 5. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE - A. Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standards by date of current issue on date for receiving bids. B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in _ __... sequence. _..._..._...._. _.._. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality- for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanshi - ...—._._�___.W_.__._._._._ E,__Perform-work by-persons--qualified•-to produce -workmanship -of -specified------ quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 2/20/04 01400 442.E1 1 QUALITY CONTROL 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifi- cation sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by ENGINEER. 1.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. OWNER will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing. B. The independent firm will Perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the ENGINEER. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the ENGINEER, in triplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 1. Notify ENGINEER and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for CONTRACTOR's use. E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the ENGINEER. Payment for retesting will be charged to the CONTRACTOR by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract sum/Price. 1.07 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit qualifications of observer to 'ENGINEER 30 'days in advance' `of required observations. Observer subject to acceptance of ENGINEER. B. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, ------------adjust; - and -balance of equipment and place equipment into operation as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions...:,- _...------D.-----Submit..report- -in-triplicate within .30... days -of . observation.. to - .ENGINEER -for review. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01400 2/20/04 QUALITY CONTROL 2 442.E1 1 1 ri 11 1 [1 1 SECTION 01500 1 1 11 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, road closings, traffic control, stormwater management (NPDES) and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, and temporary buildings., D. Some of the items specified herein are not specifically required for the project. however, these items shall be provided as required for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR or as required for proper completion of the Work. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01505 - Mobilization/Demobilization. B. Section 02500 - Restoration and Cleanup. 1.03 TVKPO9ARY ELECTRICITY A. Temporary electrical power service for construction trailers, storage areas and general construction purposes, as required, is available at the site from existing and upgraded electrical services. B. Existing permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction for small power tools and lighting local to Work. C. CONTRACTOR will not be charged for electrical service used. D. Provide connections to existing facilities, sized to provide service required for power and lighting, as required. E. Install circuit and branch wiring, with area distribution boxes located .......so that power and lighting is available --throughout the -Site by use of construction type power cords, as required. F. Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. For connection of power tools and equipment, provide outlets -equipped with ground -fault . G. circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, as required. Provide grounded extension cords. Use "hard -service" cords where -----exposed-.to abrasion --.and traffic.-_.-.. Provide —waterproof...connectors.-to-_:_.---- connect separate lengths of electric cords if more than one length is required. H. Provide general service incandescent lamps as required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. 2/20/04 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 442.E1 1 TEMPORARY CONTROLS I 1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING (AS APPLICABLE) A. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. B. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 1.05 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.06 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide all labor and material to install and maintain suitable quality water service off existing main, as required for the construction trailer and construction area. B. All water used must be metered by OWNER, but CONTRACTOR will not be charged for the metered water use. C. Make arrangements with OWNER for obtaining meter. OWNER will also direct contractor as to where water service may be obtained. D. Provide reduced pressure principle backflow preventer, Watts Series 909, or equal, for all temporary water services. 1.07 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall obtain all entry permits and provide all equipment and. procedures as required to meet confined space entry requirements in accordance with the following: 1.08 A F991111 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), Title 29 CFR 1910.146 "Permit Required Confined Spaces". 2. Florida Statute - Chapter 38 T-20 Section .035. "Hazardous Atmospheres in Confined Spaces". TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES Provide self-contained, single -occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed in a fiberglass or other approved non -absorbent shell. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCING A. Construction Fence: Commercial grade chain link fence or bright orange -colored, high density, polyethylene safety fence. Minimum fence height shall be 4'feet. B.. Provide construction fence and gates to secure entire construction area at all times when CONTRACTOR's personnel are not present. C. Gates shall be provided with padlocks. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: weather -tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, sanitation facilities, and equipped with sturdy furniture. 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 2 2/20/04 442.El 1 1 1 r�. u B. Provide space for project meetings with table and chairs to accommodate 8 persons. C. Provide private space (lockable room), desk, chair, and filing cabinet for ENGINEER'S USE. D. Locate offices and sheds a minimum distance of 30 feet from new structures and proposed underground construction. E. Recommended location for CONTRACTOR's office trailer shall be indicated on drawings. 1.11 WATER CONTROL A. Grade sites to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment, as applicable. 1.12 TELEPHONE/FAX SERVICE A. CONTRACTOR shall provide, maintain and pay for telephone service at project site. Telephone shall be made available for use by ENGINEER. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide, maintain and pay for fax service at project site. Fax shall be made available for use by ENGINEER. 1.13 STORUWATER MANAGEMENT (NPDES) A. Federal law at 40 CFR Part 122 prohibits the point source discharge of pollutants, including the discharge of stormwater associated with large construction activities as defined at 40 CFR 122.26(b)(14)(x) or small construction activities as defined at 40 CFR 122.26(b)(15), to waters of the United States without a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit. Under the State of Florida's authority to administer the NPDES stormwater program at 403.0885, F.S., operators that have stormwater discharge associated with large or small construction activities to surface waters of the State, including through a Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4), must obtain coverage either under a generic permit issued pursuant to Chapter 62- 621, F.A.C., or an individual permit issued pursuant to Chapter 62-620, F.A.C. 1. State of Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) requires a Construction Generic Permit (CGP) for stormwater discharge from large and small construction activities. B. Definitions I. Small Construction Activity: Construction activity that disturbs zl acre and less than 5 acres, or is part of larger common plan of development or sale that will disturb z1 acre and less than 5 acres. 2. Large Construction Activity: Construction activity that disturbs a5 ----.acres.,. or--. is. -part of- larger- commorL...p.l-an.. of...deve.lopment.. or._SAle....that.-. -- ,. will disturb z5 acres. C. CONTRACTOR must complete the following to obtain GCP permit coverage prior to disturbing any soil: 1. Prepare and submit Notice of Intent (NOI) to use generic permit for 11 2/20/04 01S00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 442.El 3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS I stormwater discharge from large and small construction activities (Rule 62-621.300(4), F.A.C.), DEP Form 62-621.300(4)(b). a. Fee schedule is as follows: $150 for Small Construction Activities, per definition $300 for Large Construction Activities, per definition b. Send copy of NOI to MS4 operator and ENGINEER. 2. Permit coverage is not dependent on an ERP or 62-25 permit. 3. Develop and implement a complete Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). Failure to develop, maintain and implement a SWPPP shall be deemed a violation and may result in enforcement action. D. SWPPP must include the following elements as a minimum: 1. Site Description - Site map, description of Construction activity, sequence of major soil disturbing"`activities, total area and area to be disturbed, existing data describing the soil or quality of any stormwater discharge from the site, estimate the drainage area size for each discharge point, latitude and longitude of each discharge point and identify the receiving water or MS4 for each discharge point. 2. Controls - Describe controls, Hest Management Practice's (HMP's) and measures that will be implemented at the construction site; describe temporary and permanent stabilization practices; describe structural controls to divert flows from exposed soils and structural practices to store flows; retain sediments outside or otherwise limit runoff; describe all sediment basins to be implemented for areas that will disturb 10 or more acres at one time; describe all permanent controls that will be installed during the construction process; describe waste disposal (debris, chemicals, litter, sanitary waste);, addressoffsite vehicle tracking of sediments; address proper application of fertilizers, herbicides and pesticides; include the storage, use and disposal of toxic substances. 3. Maintenance - Describe maintenance procedures for structural and non-structural controls so that they remain in good and effective operating condition. 4. Inspection - Provide weekly inspections by a qualified inspector and within 24 hours of the end of 0.50 inches or greater rainfall event, document inspections. 5. Non-Stormwa. er Discharge Identify and describe sources of non- stormwater discharges as.allowed in Part IV A.3.of the permit 6. Certifications - Identify within the SWPPP, the contractor(s) or subcontractor(s) - that will -implement-each measure. All- tor(s) and subcontractor(s) identified in the SWPPP must sign the following certification: ■ "I certify under penalty of law that 2 understand, and shall comply with, the terms and conditions of the State of Florida Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small 01500 2/20/04 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 4 442.E1. 11 1 L [1 1 1 1 1 Construction Activities and this Stormwater Pollution Preven- tion Plan prepared thereunder". E. CGP Requirements: 1. NOI or Acknowledgment Letter from DEP must be posted at the construction site. 2. Keep all documentation for 3 years after final stabilization. 3. Keep a copy of the SWPPP and all reports at the construction site or at the alternate location listed on the NOT until final stabilization. 4. Meet all of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250 F.A.C. 5. .File Notice of Termination (NOT) within 14 days of final stabil- ization of site. a. Prepare and submit. Notice of Termination (NOT) of generic permit coverage (Rule 62-621.300(6), F.A.C.), DEP Form 62- 621.300 (6) . b. Send copy of NOT to MS4 operator and ENGINEER. F. Copies of all required forms, instructions, example SWPPP, and other related information can be found at www.pbco-npdes.org. 1.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.15 ROAD CLOSING1S AND TRAFFIC CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preparation of traffic control plans. Traffic plans shall be submitted to ENGINEER in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. All traffic plans shall contain the following information: 1. All applicable street names 2. All detour routes. 3. All required construction and detour signage. 4. All flag man locations. 5. Locations of all street and lane closings. 6. As applicable, time, day and date street or lane will be closed and time, day and date street or.lane will be reopened to traffic. 7. The following statement shall be included on all traffic plans: "This plan meets all applicable requirements of the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices". B. Traffic plans must be approved by ENGINEER a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to beginning of work in area covered by Traffic Plan. C. All businesses and homeowners affected by road closures shall be notified a minimum of one (1) week in advance of closing. 2/20/04 442.E1 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 5 TEMPORARY CONTROLS D. Provisions must always be maintained for local residential and business traffic. 1.16 ACCESS ROADS A. Temporary rock access drives or roadways shall be provided for all residences that are affected by the work for a period greater than 8 hours. B. Temporary rock access drives or roadways shall be provided for all businesses affected by the work unless other written arrangements are made with business owner. Provide copy of all written arrangements to OWNER. C. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve construction areas, as applicable. D. Extend and relocate as work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. E. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. 1.17 PARKXXQ A. Temporary parking areas for CONTRACTOR's and ENGINEER's project personnel shall be indicated on Drawings. 1.18 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide minimum 6'-6°w x 5'-O"h project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by a professional sign painter to ENGINEER's design and colors. Sign shall withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for the duration of construction. General design as required for the project sign shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. List title of Project, names of OWNER, ENGINEER, professional sub - consultants and CONTRACTOR. C. Erect on site at location established by OWNER and ENGINEER. D. No other signs are allowed without OWNER permission except those required by applicable law. E. Submit sketch of project sign in accordance with Section 01300 - Submitfals. 1.19 PROTECTION OF NXXSTING STRUCTURES A. CONTRACTOR shall provide screens or other such means to prevent splatter of concrete, paint or other such .substance.from._staining or_. damaging the nearby existing structures or equipment. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cleaning and repairing all damages caused by overspray or splatter. 1.20 FUEL STORAGE A. All fuel or other such regulated substances stored on site by CONTRAC- TOR shall be done so in accordance with the rules and regulations of 01500 2/20/04 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 6 442.El the Florida Department of Environmental Protection regarding secondary containment and the Broward County Department of Planning and Environ- mental Protection. 1.21 CONSTRUCTION/EXCAVATION D33WATRRXNG A. CONTRACTOR shall investigate and provide adequate dewatering systems as required to dewater his excavations for pipe laying and similar operations. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all equipment and accessories including but not limited to: well points, pumps, header and discharge piping, drainage gravel, floating silt barriers, erosion control and point jetting equipment. C. Where required, CONTRACTOR shall pre -dig excavations for placement of drainage gravel and use of portable trash pumps. D. As required, CONTRACTOR shall contact all applicable regulatory authorities to determine permitting requirements, if any, related to ., construction dewatering. CONTRACTOR shall apply for and obtain all required permits' E. All dewatering plans shall be submitted to ENGINEER in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. Plans must be approved by ENGINEER minimum of two (2) weeks prior to implementation. F. All costs associated with dewatering shall be appropriately apportioned in the bid. 1.22 FIRS EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide portable UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary and similar spaces. In other locations, provide portable UL- offices rated Class ABC dry chemical extinguishers or a combination of NFPA recommended Classes for the exposure. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure. 1.23 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain sites in a clean and orderly condition. •._ Broom and. vacuum clean interior areas prior to __start of surface __. _. _._.___B . _ finishing and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from sites weekly and dispose of at an approved site. 1.2a REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facili- ties, materials, prior to Final Inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condi- tion. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 2/20/04 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND 442.E1 7 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01500 2/20/04 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 8 442.E1 1 1 PART 1 GENERAL SUCTION 01505 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION T 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Mobilization shall include obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds; moving onto site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, temporary buildings, and other construction facili- ties; all as required for proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include but not be limited to the following principal items: 1. Moving onto site of all CONTRACTOR's workers, plant and equipment required for first month's operation. 2. Providing field office trailers with all specified furnishings and utility services and appurtenances, if required by specifications. 3. Providing on -site sanitary facilities, potable water facilities and electrical service, as specified. 4. Submittal of all required insurance certificates, bonds and work progress schedules. 5. Obtaining all required permits. 6. Posting all OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs. 7. Have CONTRACTOR's superintendent at job site full time. 8. Project identification sign. B. Demobilization shall include but not be limited to the following principle items: 1. Removal of all temporary construction facilities. 2. Removal of all equipment and excess materials. 3. Cleanup and restoration of the site to conditions existing prior to construction. 1.02 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION A. CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that no payment for mobilization/demobilization, or any part -thereof, will be recommended for payment under the Contract until all Mobilization/Demobilization items listed above have been completed as specified. T------ �_.B__..As loan as practitcabld after`receipt-of-Notice to Proceed, CONTRACTOR shall submit a breakdown to ENGINEER for review, which shall show estimated value of each major component of mobilization/demobilization. When reviewed by ENGINEER, breakdown will be basis for initial progress payments in which Mobilization is included. C. It shall be understood that the Mobilization/Demobilization item on Lump Sum Base Bid Breakdown includes a sum paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR 2/20/04 01505 442.E1 1 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION in recognition of CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations. CONTRACTOR shall acknowledge payment of such consideration by letter to OWNER. D. Payment for Mobilization/Demobilization shall be equally distributed for completion of mobilization and demobilization. Payment will constitute as full compensation for the provision of work as listed above plus all other appurtenant or incidental work as required to properly complete the Mobilization/Demobilization phases. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. ,END,OF SECTION 01505 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION 1 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work as related to contract closeout proce- dures, final inspection, CONTRACTOR'S closeout submittals and final application for payment. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. B. Individual Sections - Testing and Closeout Requirements. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When CONTRACTOR considers the Work is substantially complete, he shall submit to the ENGINEER: 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the ENGINEER will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. C. Should the ENGINEER determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, giving the reasons therefor. 2. CONTRACTOR shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written notice of substantial, completion to the ENGINEER. 3. The ENGINEER will reinspect the Work. D. When the ENGINEER finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will: 1. Prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion on NSPE Form 1910-8-D, with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. 2. After consideration of any objections made by the OWNER as provided in GENERAL CONDITIONS, and when the ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or correct- ed. 1.04 FINAL COMPLETION _ ._.. A. When CONTRACTOR considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the OWNER's representative and are operational. 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. 2/20/04 01700 442.E1 1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1 1 1 C1 1 I SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work required to provide and maintain the required record documents and samples for the project, including record drawings, construction photographs, progress aerial photographs and material samples. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01050 - Field Engineering. B. Section 01300 - Submittals.. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout D. Individual Specification Sections: Manufacturer's certificates and certificates of inspections and samples. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. At Contract closeout, deliver Record Documents and samples under provi- sions of Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Submittal quantities shall be as follows: 1. Final Record Drawings - two (2) sets. 2. Construction photographs - two (2) sets. 3. Progress aerial photographs - two (2) sets. C. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 -:.,Submittals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. In addition to requirements in GENERAL CONDITIONS, maintain at the site for OWNER one record copy of: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. ENGINEER's field orders or written instructions. 6. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 7. Field test records. S.-_ Inspection certificates. 9. Manufacturer's certificates. 10. Construction photographs. —_ Store-- Record '-'Documents and— sample s----apart--- from —documents ---used--for- -- construction. Provide organized, dry, secure storage for Record Documents. C. Label Record Documents and samples in accordance with Section number listings in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each docu- ment "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. 2/20/04 01720 442.El 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS I D. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by ENGINEER. 1.05 RECORDING A. Record information on a set of blackline drawings and in a copy of the Contract Documents (Specifications) Book provided by ENGINEER. B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information. C. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. D. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.; Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Also include installed pipe material, class, etc. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by Modifications. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. References to related shop drawings and Modifications. E. Specifications: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalog number of each product actually installed, paying particular attention to optional items and substitute items. 2. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. F. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, and field test records, required by individual Specification sections. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Provide photographs in color showing the preconstruction conditions, construction progress, and the post -construction conditions. B. Photographs shall be taken by an experienced photographer. C. The photographer shall be equipped to take interior/exterior photo- graphs as directed by the ENGINEER. All film negatives shall be 35mm. D. All film handling and development shall be done by commercial laborato- ries. — ---- ---- E. Photographs shall be taken throughout the construction- process .and show--_ __----._.---- excavations, piping details, construction which will ultimately be hidden from view and the final completion. Provide sufficient quantity of photographs to adequately detail construction.. F. Provide two (2) sets of construction photographs. These prints shall measure 3-1/2" x 511. All prints shall be mounted in plastic photo- graphic binders. 01720 2/20/04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2 442.E1 E7 1 U 11 1 1 1 I 1 1 G. Identify each print with the date, orientation of view, and a descrip- tion of the view. H. Deliver all negatives (in plastic sleeves with dates of negatives noted), and two sets of prints, all in three-ring binders and sequen- tially labeled to the ENGINEER upon completion of the project. Binders shall be labeled to indicate project name and number, contractor, owner, engineer and year of project. 1.07 PROGRESS AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS A. Submit double prints of one (1) 8" x 10" progress aerial photograph with each Application and Certificate for Payment. B. Provide additional 81, x 101, aerial photographs - double prints each of pre -mobilization and post final completion project site. C. Photos shall be color 35 mm film (minimum). Scale rectified photos are not required. Flight altitude shall be sufficient to provide clear, legible view of project site. Each successive photo shall be along same flight path. D. Submit the following with each set of progress aerials: 1. 6-8 MB TIFF file of the image. Resolution level shall be 1200 x 1400 dpi. 2. Image shall be provided on CD -Rom. E. Aerial photography shall be by Bird's Eye View, Aerial Photography, Inc., or equal. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. i�91I•Y99W7DIQWC•lrl 01720 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2/20/04 442.E1 Ci SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work required to prepare and submit operation and maintenance manuals for the project, complete all in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED BLSNMMR8 A. Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. C. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. D. Section 01740 - Warranties and`]conds. E. Individual Specification Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to substantial completion of Work. ENGINEER will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during days construction and operated by OWNER, submit documents within ten after acceptance. C. Submit two (2) copies of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior ENGINEER comments. to final inspection.. Copy will be :returned with Revise content of`documents 'as required prior to final submittal. D. Submit four (4) copies of revised volumes of data in final farm within ten days after final inspection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. VOLUME) 1.05 GENERAL FORMAT(EACH A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. B. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; 3 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related --consistent groupings. C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. 2/20/04 01730 442.E1 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1 D. Arrange content by process flow under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS (EACH VOLUME) A. Provide title of Project; owner's name; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of ENGINEER, subconsultants, and CONTRACTOR with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed -.to. content of the volume.. B. Table of Contents: schedule of contents and systems, indexed to each volume. C. For Each Product or system: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. D. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inappli- cable information. E. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. F. Type Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufac- turer's instructions. 1.07 MATERIALS AND FINISHES DATA A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re -ordering custom manufactured Products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommen- dations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimen- tal agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture Protection and weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing -applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, __.._..._�. _.maintenance._.and- repair.- ------- D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specifi- cation sections. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 11 I 1 I-] [i 1 P L 1 r I I 01730 2/20/04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 2 442•El G. Identify each print with the date, orientation of view, and a descrip- tion of the view. H. Deliver all negatives (in plastic sleeves with dates of negatives noted), and two sets of prints, all in three-ring binders and sequen- tially labeled to the ENGINEER upon completion of the project. Binders shall be labeled to indicate project name and number, contractor, owner, engineer and year of project. 1.07 PROGRESS AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS A. Submit double prints of one (1) 8" x 10" progress aerial photograph with each Application and Certificate for Payment. B. Provide additional 811 x 1011 aerial photographs - double prints each of pre -mobilization and post final completion project site. C. Photos shall be color 35 mm film (minimum). Scale rectified photos are not required. Flight altitude shall be sufficient to provide clear, legible view of project site. Each successive photo shall be along same flight path. D. Submit the following with each set of progress aerials: 1. 6-8 MB TIFF file of the image. Resolution level shall be 1200 x 1400 dpi. 2. Image shall be provided on CD -Rom. E. Aerial photography shall be by Bird's Eye View, Aerial Photography, Inc., or equal. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 Not Used. EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 01720 442.E1 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1 11 [1 I 1 1 I I SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work required to prepare and submit operation and maintenance manuals for the project, complete all in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED PORK SPECIFIED ELSZWHERE A. Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. C. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. D. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. E. Individual Specification sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to substantial completion of Work. ENGINEER will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by OWNER, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. C. Submit two (2) copies of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection:. Copy, will be returned with ENGINEER comments. Revise content of'documents `as required prior to final submittal. D. Submit four (4) copies of revised volumes of data in final form within ten days after final inspection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 1.05 GENERAL FORMAT (EACH V'OLU113) A. Prepare data in the form of an'instructional manual. B. Binders: Commercial quality, B-1/2 x 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; 3 inch maximum ring size. When -----multi le binders are used, _.- ._. _. p correlate data into related --consistent groupings. C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. 2/20/04 01730 442.E1 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA D. Arrange content by process flow under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS (EACH VOLUME) A. Provide title of Project; owner's name; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of ENGINEER, subconsultants, and CONTRACTOR with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed'.to content of the volume. B. Table of Contents: schedule of contents and systems, indexed to each volume. C. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. D. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inappli- cable information. E. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. F. Type Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufac- turer's instructions. 1.07 MATERIALS AND FINISHES DATA A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re -ordering custom manufactured Products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommen- dations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimen- tal agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture Protection and weather Exposed Products: Include product data --listing -applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, --maintenance; and repair. D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specifi- cation sections. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.11 01730 2/20/04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 2 442.E1 Cl 1.08 EQUIPMENT ,AND SYSTEMS DATA A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting -conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteris- tics, controls and communications. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements. Include routine procedures and .guide for trouble -shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 4u p H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. Include coded wiring as installed. J. Provide CONTRACTOR's coordination drawings, with coded piping diagrams K. as installed. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. L. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. M. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specifi- cation sections. N. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet. and space for insertion of data. -` - 1.09 A. °- INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL Before final inspection, instruct OWNER's designated personnel in operation; adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 2/20/04 01730 442.E1 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1 C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 RX$CUTZON Not Used. 1 [1 C1 1 [1 I [J 1 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work required to prepare and submit all warranty and bond information required by these Contract Documents. B. Warranties and bonds required shall be as specified in the individual specification sections and GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Individual Specification Sections: Warranties required for specific Products or Work. 1.03 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS A. Bind in commercial quality, B-1/2 x 11 three-ring side binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers. Provide two copies of completed binders. B. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; date; project owner; name, address and telephone number of CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of these Specifications, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of the Product or work item. D. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contentslisting. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. E. Provide dates of beginning and ending of warranty period, bond or service and maintenance contracts. 1.04 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put into use with Owner's` permission," leave date of beginning of time of warranty, blank until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 2/20/04 01740 442.E1 1 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.05 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. B. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Comple- tion, prior to final Application for Payment. C. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial p Y Y Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date. of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 2 2/20/04 442.E1 I 1 1 11 C] 1 1 SECTION 02072 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for demolition, removal and disposal Work as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. B. Work shall include, but not limited to, the demolition and removal of existing structures, equipment, and other existing site improvements as necessary to install the new Work as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Demolition includes structural concrete, foundations, walls, structural steel, metals, masonry, attachments, appurtenances, piping, electrical and mechanical equipment, paving, curbs, walks, and similar, existing facilities. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL'REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Building Codes 1. Florida Building Code, Latest Edition. B. Reference Standards 1. ANSI A10.6 Safety Standards for Demolition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit proposed demolition procedures and schedule of Work. C. Project record Drawings shall show limits of partial demolition as applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. -PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENEI= — —A --Protect existing -structures -and equipment .which -are not. -.to be altered._._-.-. B. All materials and equipment removed from existing Work shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR except for those which the OWNER has identified and marked for OWNER's use. All materials and equipment marked by the OWNER to remain the OWNER's shall be carefully removed by the CONTRACTOR so as not to be damaged, cleaned and stored on or adjacent to the site in a protected place specified by the ENGINEER or OWNER or loaded onto trucks provided by the OWNER. 2/20/04 442E1.El 1 02072 DEMOLITION The OWNER has preliminarily marked the following items to be salvaged: I. As noted on drawings. C. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of all demolition materials, equipment, debris, and all other items not marked by the OWNER to remain as his, off the site and in conformance with all existing applicable laws and regulations. D. Pollution Controls 1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. a. Do not use water when it may .create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as flooding, pollution, and groundwater contamination. b. Clean adjacent structures, facilities and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolition operations. E. Material generated from demolition shall not be used as backfill. 3.02 STRUCTU9AL DEMOLITION (GENERAL) A. The CONTRACTOR shall completely remove all structures as shown on the Contract Drawings unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER. B. All concrete, brick, tile, concrete block, roofing materials, reinforcement, structural or miscellaneous metals, plaster, wire mesh and other items contained in or upon the structure shall be removed and taken from the site, unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. 3.03 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. Electrical demolition requirements shall be as specified in section 16001 - Electrical Demolition. 3.04 MECHANICAL AND EQUIPMENT DEMOLITION GENERAL A. CONTRACTOR shall completely remove all mechanical and/or equipment items as shown on the drawings. B. The general demolition scope shall include the following minimum requirements whether indicated on plans or not: 1. Remove exposed ancillary piping and valves. 2. Remove pipe/equipment hangers and support systems which are not needed as a result of the demolition. 3 . —.._.To the".Fullest `exten.t.- possible_`all required---systems--shall--remain--------- --------- - - --- - operational. CONTRACTOR shall replace and/or repair existing facilities to remain which may be damaged due to equipment removals. 3.05 SPECIFIC DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Specific demolition requirements shall be as indicated on drawings. 02072 2/20/04 DEMOLITION 2 442.E1 1 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL A. CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site all debris resulting from the demolition operations as it accumulates. Upon completion of the Work, all materials, equipment, waste and debris of every sort shall be removed and the premises shall be left clean, neat and orderly. B. All materials and debris resulting from demolition and removal operations shall be disposed of off -site in an authorized, permitted disposal site. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 442.E1 02072 DEMOLITION 1 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this Section includes all earthwork required for con- include, but not be struction of the Project. Such earthwork shall limited to, the loosening, removing, loading, transporting, depositing, and compacting in its final location of all materials, wet and dry, as required for the purposes of completing the work specified in the Contract Documents, which shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing, placing, and removing of sheeting and bracing necessary to safely support the sides' of all excavation; all pumping, ditching, draining, and other required measures for the removal or -exclusion of water from the excavation; the supporting of structures above and below the ground; all backfilling around structures and all backfilling of trenches and pits; the disposal of excess excavated materials; borrow of materials to make up defio,6ncies for fills; and all other inciden- tal earthwork, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01400 - Quality Control. B. Appendix A - Report of Geotechnical Investigation. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards L e't Revision): ASTM D 422 Method for Particle -Size Analysis of Soils. ASTM D 698 Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) hammer and 12-in. (304.8-mm) Drop. ASTM D 1140 -Test-Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method. ASTM D 1557 Test methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb _ (4.54-kg) hammer and 18-in. (457-mm) Drop. _ - .... ASTM D 1633 Test Method for Compressive Strength -of Molded-"--' 4 Soil -Cement Cylinders. ASTM D 2419 Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate. ASTM D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purpos- es. ASTM D 2901 Test Method for Cement Content of Freshly -Mixed Soil -Cement. 2/20/04 02200 442.E1 1 EARTHWORK [7 ASTM D 2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Ag- gregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). ASTM D 4253 Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a vibratory Table. ASTM D 4254 Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. 1.04 TRENCH SAFETY A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the "Florida Trench Safety Act" which mandates the provisions of Subpart P, Section 1926.650 of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction, which require that all trenches of depth greater than 5 feet shall be shored or sloped to the angle of repose: B. Submit,, information in accordance with Section 013.00 Submittals, detailing the method of trench safety to be implemented. Submittal should include geotechnical investigation results if required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ge er All soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory of the OWNER's choice at the OWNER's expense except as specified in Paragraph 1.05C below. B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density, the maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557. Where cohesionless, free draining soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of relative density, the calculation of relative density will be deter- mined in accordance with ASTM D 4253 and D 4254. Field density in - place tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2922, or by such other means acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. In case the tests of the fill or backfill show non-compliance with the required density, the CONTRACTOR shall accomplish such remedy as may be required to insure compliance. Subsequent testing to show compliance shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the OWNER and shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense. D. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D 422. _..... E. Determination of sand equivalent value will be performed using ASTM D 2419. F....Unified SoilClassification System• References in these specifications to soil classification types and standards set forth in ASTM D 2487 - _...._ shall have the meanings and definitions indicated in- the -- chart -- illustrated at the end of this Section. The chart is reproduced herein �^ for- the- "convenience ........of..._. --.the---- CONTRACTOR ---only-, and --no --limitation,— amendment, or modification is intended thereby. The CONTRACTOR shall be bound by all applicable provisions of said ASTM D 2487 in the interpretation of soil classifications. PROJECT SITS CONDITIONS 1.06 A. Appendix "A" contains the report of geotechnical investigation completed for this project. 02200 2/20/04 EARTHWORK 2 442.E1 C PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUITABLE FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Fill backfill, and embankment materials shall be suitable fine earth, rock, or sand, free from selected or processed clean, grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation. B. Fill and backfill materials to be placed within 6 inches of any be free or unbroken masses of earth structure or pipe shall of rocks materials having a maximum dimension larger than 3 inches. C. Suitable Materials: Soils not classified as unsuitable as defined in herein, defined as Paragraph entitled, "Unsuitable Material" are suitable materials and may be used in fills, backfilling, and embank- ment construction subject to the specified limitations. In,addition, when acceptable to the ENGINEER, some of the material listed as unsuitable may be used when thoroughly mixed with suitable material to form a stable composite. D. Suitable materials may be -obtained from on -site excavations, may be processed on -site materials, or may be imported. If imported materials are required to meet the requirements of this Section or to meet the quantity requirements of the project the CONTRACTOR shall provide the imported materials within the scope of the Contract, unless a unit price item is included for imported materials in the bidding schedule. E. The following types of suitable materials are designated and defined as follows: 1. T A: Crushed limerock or sand with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and a sand equivalent value not less than 50. 100 a %-inch 2. TnMe B: Crushed limerock or sand with percent passing sieve and a sand equivalent value not less than 50. 3. Me C: Sand with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, at least 90 percent passing a Number 4 sieve, and a sand equivalent value not less than 30. 4. Tom: Crushed limerock with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a Number 4 sieve. 5. Type E: Crushed limerock with 100 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a Number 4 sieve. 6. Type F: Crushed limerock meeting the following gradation require- ments: sieve size Percentage assin 2-inch _....... .... .. . __.._...... _ _...... . 1-1/2-inch 90 - 100 1-inch 20 - 55 3/4-inch 0 - 15 No. 200 0 - 3 7. ape G: Crushed rock aggregate base material of such nature that be'compacted by watering and -rolling to form a firm, it can readily stable base for pavements. At least 97% of the material shall pass _..__.._.-.__.._.___._-._—._..__—_..____.. ....... a 3_1/2 inch screen and the material --shall be uniformly graded -- uniformly down to the 200 sieve. The liquid limit shall not exceed index exceed 10. For stabilized base, 35 and the plastic shall not the material shall meet all of the above requirements except that 97* shall pass a 1-1/2 inch screen. durable and 8. Tune H: Drainrock shall be crushed rock or gravel, free from slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting or drying. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall meet the following gradation requirements: 2/20/04 02200 442-E1 3 EARTHWORK 1 Sieve Size Percentage Passing 1-inch 100 3/4-inch 90 - 100 3/8-inch 40 - 100 No. 4 25 - 40 Sieve Size Percentage Passing No. 8 18 - 33 No. 30 5 - 15 No. 50 0 - 7 No. 200 0 - 3 The drainrock shall have a sand equivalent value not less than 75. 9. Type I: Any other suitable material as defined in Paragraph 2.01, herein. 10. Tie : Material which consists,of.Type,H material, or any mixture of Types B, C, G, and H materials which has been cement -treated so that the cement content of the material is not less than 5 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2901. The ultimate compressive strength at 28 days shall be not less than 400 psi;•when. tested in accordance with ASTM D1633. 11. TyRe IC: Stockpiled topsoil material which has been obtained at the site by removing soil to a depth not exceeding 2 feet. Removal of the topsoil shall be done after the area has been stripped of vegetation and debris as specified. 2.02 UNSUXTABLE MATERIAL A. Unsuitable soils for fill material shall include soils which, when classified under ASTM D 2487, fall in the classifications of Pt, OH, CH, MH, HL, or SC. B. In addition, any soil which cannot be compacted sufficiently to achieve the percentage of maximum density specified for the intended use, shall be classed as unsuitable material. 2.03 USE OF PILL, BACKFILL, AND BM$ANAMENT MATZRM TYPES' A. Use the types of materials designated herein for all required fill, backfill, and embankment construction hereunder. the requirements of any local B. where these Specifications conflict with Agency having jurisdiction, or with- the - requirements,—of--a---material-- manufacturer, the ENGINEER shall be immediately notified. in case of conflict therewith, the CONTRACTOR shall use the most stringent requirement, as determined by the ENGINEER. C. Fill and backfill types shall be used in accordance with,the following. provisions: 1. Embankment fills shall be constructed of Type- I material, as defined in Paragraph 2.01E, herein, or any mixture of Type I and ..A._through..Type..H materials.-_._ 2. Pipe zone backfill, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Back- fill' herein, shall consist of the following materials for each pipe material listed below. where pipelines are installed on grades exceeding 4 percent, and where backfill materials are graded such that there is less than 10 percent passing a Number 4 sieve, trench plugs of Type J material shall be provided at minimum intervals of 200 feet. a. Mortar coated pipe and concrete pipe, shall be provided Type A, B, C, D, or E pipe zone backfill material. 02200 2/20/04 EARTHWORK 4 442.E1 Cl 1 i] 1 fl 1 L� f] 1 1 i In 1 b. Coal tar enamel coated pipe, polyethylene encased pipe, tape wrapped pipe, and other non -mortar coated pipe shall be backfilled with Type C pipe zone backfill material. C. Plastic pipe and PVC pipe shall be backfilled with Types B, C, or E pipe zone backfill material. 3. Trench zone backfill for pipelines as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type I backfill material or any of Types A through H backfill materials or any mixture thereof. 4. Final backfill material for pipelines under paved areas, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type G backfill material. Final backfill under areas not paved shall be the same materials as that used for trench backfill, except that Type K material shall be used for final backfill in agricultural areas unless otherwise shown or specified. 5. Trench backfill and final, backfill for pipelines under structures shall be the same material as used in the pipe zone, except where concrete encasement is required by the ,Contract Documents. 6. Aggregate base materials under pavements shall be Type G material constructed to the thicknesses shown or specified. 7. Backfill around structures shall be Type I material, or Types A through Type K-:materials, or any mixture thereof.. S. Backfill materials beneath structures shall be as follows: a. Drainrock materials under reservoirs or other water retaining structures with underdrain systems shall be Type H material. b. Under concrete reservoirs or other water retaining structures withoutunderdrain systems, Types G or H materials shall be used. C. Under structures where groundwater must be removed to allow placement of concrete, Type F material shall be used. d. Under all other structures, Type D, E, G, or H material shall be used. 9. Backfill used to replace pipeline trench over -excavation shall be a layer of Type F material with a 6-inch top filter layer of Type E material for wet trench conditions or the same material as used for the pipe zone backfill if the trench conditions are not wet. 10. The top 6 inches of fill on reservoir roofs, embankment fills around reservoirs, and all other embankment fills shall consist of Type K material, topsoil. 11. where specified or shown, pea gravel shall be Type E material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL OF WATER A. Provide and operate equipment adequate to keep all --excavations and ------ trenches free of water. Remove all water during periods when concrete is being deposited, when pipe is being laid, during the placing of backfill, and at such other times as required for efficient and safe execution of the Work. Avoid settlement or damage to adjacent property.. Dispose of water in:a manner that will not••damage adjacent property. When dewatering,open excavations, dewater from outside the structural limits and from a point below the bottom of the excavation when possible. Design dewatering system to prevent removal of fines ....from existing ground. - - B. CONTRACTOR shall determine all requirements, make all necessary arrangements and obtain all permits which may be required for dewatering operations. 3.02 STRUCTURE, ROADWAY, AND MdSAMn= EXCAVATION A.General: Except where specifically provided to the contrary, excava- tion shall include the removal of all materials of whatever nature 2/20/04 442.E1 5 02200 EARTHWORK I encountered, including all obstructions of any nature that would interfere with the proper execution and completion of the work. The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades shown or ordered. Furnish, place, and maintain all supports and shoring that may be required for the sides of the excavations, and all pumping, ditching, or other measures for the removal or exclusion of water. Dispose of storm water, groundwater, and wastewater reaching the site of the Work from any source so as to prevent damage to the Work or adjoining property. Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with applicable State safety require- ments and the requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction (29CFR1926). B. Excavation Beneath Structures and.EMban�ments: Except where otherwise specified for a particular structure or ordered by the ENGINEER, excavation shall be carried to the grade of.the bottom of 'the footing or slab. Where shown or ordered, areas beneath structures or fills shall be over -excavated. The subgrade areas beneath embankments shall be excavated to remove not less than the top 6 inches of original material and where such subgrade is sloped, the original material shall be benched. When such over -excavation is shown, both over -excavation and subsequent backfill to the required grade shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. When such over -excavation is not shown but is ordered by the ENGINEER, such over -excavation and any resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid item has been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with.a negotiated price. After the required excavation or over -excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. C. Excavation Beneath Paved, Areas: Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base, if such base is called for; otherwise it shall extend for the paving thickness. After the required excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. D. Notification of Engineer: Notify the ENGINEER at least 3 days in advance of completion of any structure excavation and allow the ENGINEER a review period of at least one day before the exposed foundation is scarified and compacted or is covered with backfill or with any construction materials. 3.03 PIPELINE AND_..UTILITY..TRSNCH.EXCAVATION ..,. .. A. General: Unless otherwise shown or ordered, excavation for pipelines and utilities shall be open -cut trenches. Trench widths shall be kept as narrow as is practical for the method of pipe zone densification selected by the CONTRACTOR, but shall have a minimum width at'' the bottom of the trench equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24 inches for mechanical compaction methods and` IS - inches ---for -water--- consolidation methods. The maximum width at the top of the pipe shall _.be equal-- to the__outside_ diameter- of —the -.. pipe -plus-_36. inches _ for, pipe .-_.�.......___._._... diameters 18-inches and larger and to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24 inches for pipe diameters less than 18-inches. B. Trench Bottom: Except when pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. The trench bottom shall be given a final trim, using a string line for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the ground along the extreme 02200 2/20/04 EARTHWORK 6 442 . E1 bottom of the pipe. Rounding out the trench to form a cradle for the pipe will not be required. C. Open Trench: The maximum amount of open trench permitted in any one location shall be 500 feet, or the length necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a single day, whichever is less. All trenches shall be fully backfilled at the end of each day or, in lieu thereof, shall be covered by heavy steel plates adequately braced and capable of supporting vehicular traffic in those locations where it is impractical to backfill at the end of each day. The above requirements for backfilling or use of steel plate will be waived in cases where the trench is located further than 100 feet from any traveled roadway or occupied structure. In such cases, however, barricades and warning be and maintained. lights meeting OSHA requirements shall provided D'. Trench Over -Excavation: Where the Drawings indicate that trenches shall be over -excavated, they shall be excavated to the depth shown, and then backfilled to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. E. Over -Excavation: When ordered by the ENGINEER, whether indicated on the Drawings or not, trenches shall be over -excavated beyond the depth shown. Such over -excavation shall be to the depth ordered. The trench shall then be backfilled to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. All work specified in this Section shall be performed within the scope of the Contract when the over -excavation ordered by the ENGINEER is less than 6 inches below the limits shown. When the over -excavation ordered by the ENGINEER is 6 inches or greater below the limits shown, additional payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR for that portion of the work which is located below said 6-inch distance. Said additional payment will be made under separate unit price bid items for over - excavation and bedding if such bid items have been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. F. Where pipelines are to be installed in embankment or structure fills, the fill shall be constructed to a level at least one foot above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. 3.04 OVER -EXCAVATION NOT ORDERED, SPECIFIED, OR SHOWN A. Any over -excavation carried below the grade ordered, specified, or shown, shall be backfilled to the required grade with the specified material and compaction. Such work shall be performed by the CONTRAC- TOR at its own expense. 3.05 EXCAVATION IN VICINITY OF TREES A. Except where trees are shown to be removed, trees shall be protected from injury during construction operations. No tree roots over 2 inches in diameter shall' be' cut 'without express "permission 'of the ENGINEER. Trees shallbe supported during excavation b any means previously reviewed bythe ENGINEER. 1 1 __. 3.06 ROCK $XCAVA A. Rock excavation shall include removal and disposal of the following: (1) all boulders measuring 1/3 of a cubic yard or more in volume; (2) all rock material in ledges, bedding deposits, and unstratified masses which cannot be removed without systematic drilling and blasting; (3) concrete or masonry structures which have been abandoned; and (4) conglomerate deposits which are so firmly cemented that they possess the characteristics of solid rock and which cannot be removed without systematic drilling and blasting. 2/20/04 442.E1 7 02200 EARTHWORK B. said rock excavation shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR; provided, that should the quantity of rock excavation be affected by any change in the scope of the work, an appropriate adjustment of the contract price will be made under a separate bid item if such bid item has been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. C. =losives,and Blasting. Blasting will not be permitted, except by express permission of the ENGINEER on a case -by -case basis. The use of explosives will be subject to the approval and regulations of all agencies having jurisdiction. If blasting is utilized at the site of the WORK. Take all precautions and provide all protective measures necessary to prevent damage to property and structures or injury to person. Prior to blasting, secure all permits required by law for blasting .operations and provide any additional hazard insurance required by the OWNER. Use a fully qualified and experienced blasting foreman in conducting all blasting operations. D. The CONTRACTOR will be held responsible for all and shall make good any damage caused by blasting or resulting from its possession or use of explosives on the work. E. All operations involving the handling, storage, and use of explosives shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the OSHA Standards for Construction, and in accordance with all local laws and regulations. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Remove and dispose of all excess excavated material at a site selected by the OWNER and reviewed by the ENGINEER. 3.08 BACKFILL - GENERAL A. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength ,to::.withstand the loads imposed. Backfill around water retaining',.struct;ures,,shall not ,be. placed until the structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water while backfill is being placed. B. Except for drainrock materials being placed in over -excavated areas or trenches, backfill shall be placed after all water is removed from the excavation. 3.09 PLACING AND SPREADING OF BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Backfill materials shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. When compaction is achieved using mechanical equipment the layers shall be evenly spread so that when compacted each layer shall not exceed 12- inches in thickness. When compaction is achieved using flooding and jetting methods, each layer shall _not-_exceed---3 feet _in thickness after_.. .._...._ _ .. .. compaction. B. During spreading each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary to promote uniformity of material in each layer. Pipe zone backfill materials shall be manually spread around and under the pipe so that when compacted the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform bearing and side support. C. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture content water shall be added before or during spreading until the property moisture content is achieved. 02200 2/20/04 EARTHWORK 8 442.E1 D. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the specified degree of compaction the material shall be dried until the moisture content is satisfactory. 3.10 COMPACTION OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND M BANKMENT MATERIALS A. Each layer of Types A, B, C, G, H, I, and K backfill materials as defined in Paragraph 2.O1E, herein, where the material is graded such that at least 10 percent passes a No. 4 sieve, shall be mechanically compacted to the specified percentage of maximum density. Equipment that is consistently capable of achieving the required degree of compaction shall be used and each layer shall be compacted over its entire area while the material is at the required moisture content. B. Each layer of Type D, E, F, and J backfill materials shall be compacted by means of at least 2 passes from a,flat plate vibratory compactor. When such materials are used for pipe zone backfill, vibratory compaction shall be used at the top of the pipe zone or at vertical intervals of 24 inches, whichever is the least distance from the subgrade- ., C. Flooding, ponding, or jetting shall not be used for fill on roads, backfill around structures, backfill around reservoir walls, for final backfill materials, or aggregate base materials. D. Pipe zone backfill materials that are granular may be compacted by a combination of flooding and 'vibration using concrete vibrators or by jetting, when acceptable to the ENGINEER. E. Pipeline trench zone backfill materials, containing 5 percent or less of material passing a No. 200 sieve, may be compacted using flooding and jetting or vibration if the CONTRACTOR uses effective procedures that yield the specified compaction test results. Flooding and jetting shall not be done in such a manner that the pipe or nearby utilities are damaged, in areas of poorly draining or expansive soils, or where the use of the procedure is prohibited by any agency having jurisdic- or immersible tion over the street or right-of-way. Suitable jet pipes vibrators shall be used so'ithat each backfill layer is saturated and consolidated to its full depth before the next layer is placed. Jet pipes shall be kept at least 6 inches away from the pipe where the backfill is being consolidated and 2 feet away from other pipes or utilities. F. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds shall not be used closer to _.._. __._.._.._walls thann-a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Hand operated power compaction equipment shall be used where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limita- tions. G.-- Comnac ion Rerxuirements: The following compaction test requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1557 for Type A, B, C, G, H, I, an K materials. Where agency or utility company requirements govern, the highest compaction standards shall apply. Location or Use of Fill Pipe zone backfill portion above bedding for flexible pipe. Pipe zone backfill bedding and over -excavated zones under bedding/ pipe for flexible pipe. 2/20/04 442.El 9 Percentage Of Maximum Density 95 Fly 02200 EARTHWORK 1 Pipe zone backfill portion above bedding for rigid pipe. 95 Pipe zone backfill bedding and over -excavated zones under bedding/ pipe for rigid pipe. 95 Final backfill, beneath paved areas or structures. 98 Final backfill, not beneath paved areas or structures. 90 Trench zone backfill. 90 Embankments. 90 Embankments, beneath paved areas of structures. 98 Backfill beneath structures, reservoirs. 98 Backfill around structures, on reservoir or structure roof. 80 Topsoil (Type K material) 80 Aggregate base (Type G material) 98 H. Trench Backfill Req,i-ements: The pipe has been structurally designed based upon the trench configuration specified in section 3.03A, herein. I. Maintain the indicated trench cross section up to a horizontal plane lying 6 inches above the top of the pipe. J. If, at any location under said horizontal plane, the trench walls we sloped or exceed the maximum trench widths indicated in the Contract Documents are exceeded, the pipe zone backfill shall be "improved" or the pipe class increased as specified herein, within the scope of the Contract. "Improved" backfill shall mean sand backfill or other equivalent materials acceptable to the ENGINEER. K. If the allowable deflection specified for the pipe is exceeded, expose ---... ....... .........._....-.and reround or replace the pipe, repair all damaged lining and coating, and reinstall the pipe zone material and trench backfill as specified within the scope of the Contract. 3.11 PIPS AND UTILITY TRSNCH BACKPILL A. Pipe Zone Backfill: The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying between a plane 6 inches below the bottom surface of the pipe, i.e., the trench subgrade, and a plane at _.._..-------�_,._ ...a • paint---6—inches above -the -top surface of the --pipe. -The bedding flexible pipe is defined as that portion of pipe zone backfill material between the trench subgrade and the bottom of the pipe. The bedding for rigid pipe is defined as that portion of the pipe zone backfill material between the trench subgrade and a level line which varies from the bottom of the pipe to the springline as shown. B. Bedding shall be provided for all sewers, drainage pipelines, and other gravity flow pipelines in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and materials specified herein. 02200 2/20/04 EARTHWORK 10 442.El 1 J 1 1 I� 1 CJ 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Where bedding is required after compaction of the bedding, perform a final trim using.a stringline for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe. D. The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the specified backfill material. Exercise care to prevent damage to the pipeline coating, cathodic bonds, or the pipe itself during the installation and backfill operations. E. Trench Zone Backfill; After the pipe zone backfill has been placed as specified above, and after all excess water has completely drained from the trench, backfilling of the trench zone may proceed. The trench zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying between a plane 6 inches above the top surface of the pipe and a plane.at.a point 18 inches below the finished surface grade, or if the trench is under pavement, 18 inches below the roadway subgrade. If flooding, ponding, or jetting is used the pipe shall be filled with water to prevent flotation. F. Final Back_: Final backfill is all backfill in the trench cross - sectional area within 10 inches of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, all backfill to the roadway base restoration. 3.12 FIELD DENSITY AND MOISTURE VESTS A. Notify the ENGINEER to have an independent soil testing company determine the in -place density and moisture content of the subgrade and compacted fill by any one or combination of the following methods: ASTM D 1556, D 3017, or D 2922. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with this testing work by leveling small test areas as designated by the soil testing company. These test results, certified by the soil testing company and reviewed by the ENGINEER, shall indicate that the actual soil compaction found meets these Specifications. Testing will occur as the work progresses and compliance with the Specifications is required prior to final acceptance and payment for the work. B. A minimum of one 'test every''200 cubic yards ef'fili, one test per every 2,000 square feet of subgrade, or 4 tests per lift, whichever is larger in number of tests, shall be conducted. C. The OWNER shall pay for the initial testing. Any retesting required to show compliance with these Specifications shall be within the Scope of the Contract. 3.13 NMBANAMENT CONSTRUCTION A. The area where an embankment is to be constructed shall be cleared of all vegetation, roots and foreign material. Following this, the surface 'shall be moistened, scarified -to a depth of 6 inches, 'and rolled or otherwise mechanically compacted to 95 percent of maximum density -under structures and paved areas,' and- 90 'percent of - maximum density elsewhere. B. Where embankment or structure fills are constructed over pipelines, the first 4 feet of fill over the pipe shall be constructed using light placement and compaction equipment that does not damage the pipe. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 442.E1 11 02200 EARTHWORK 1 SECTION 02340 JACKING AND BORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary for proper Work jacking and boring and installation of carrier within the casing required by the Specifications and as shown on the Drawings using qualified labor and supervision. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELS11W RE A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 1.03 LOCATIONS A. The following installations may utilize jacking and boring. 1. Installation of proposed 30-inch FW piping at location shown on Drawings at CONTRACTOR's option. Should CONTRACTOR elect to use a ' jack and bore casing to facilitate this installation, the cost of this work, complete, shall be included in the lump sum bid. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of pipe casing in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals and the following supplemental requirements as applicable: 1. Casinginstallation schedules which include schedules of excava- tion, carrier pipeline installationand backfill operations. 1 1 1 1 1.05 2. Material list including diameter, thickness and class of steel casing. 3 Detailed gts.cations iand sizes of all jacking and boring and -_ rece QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Jacking and boring operations by a qualified CONTRACTOR with at least 5 years experience involving work of a similar nature. B. Notify ENGINEER and OWNER a minimum of three (3) days in advance of the start of work contained in this Section. C. Perform Work in the presence of the OWNER andJor ENGINEER. D. Perform welding with skilled welders, welding operators, and tackers who have ad adequate experience in the method of materials to be used. Use qualified welders under the provisions -of ANSI/AWS D1.1 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 5 months prior to commencing work on the casing. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. Provide material and bear the expense of qualifying welds. 2/20/04 442.E1 1 02340 JACKING AND BORING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL CASINGS A. Use steel casings meeting the requirements of ASTM A139 for Grade B pipe with welded joints. The minimum dimensions of the pipe shall be as noted on the Drawings. B. The CONTRACTOR may select a larger diameter or greater wall thickness than those specified for the method of work to be employed, site conditions or possible interference, all at no extra cost to the OWNER. 2.02 CARRIER PIPS A. Pipe shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in the applicable specification section. 2.03 ZXCAVATION A. Excavation shall conform to Section 02200 - Earthwork. 8 , 2.04 CASING SPAC$RS A. Band shall be two piece, 14-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel. Band liner shall be PVC with a minimum thickness of 0.90". Risers shall. be 10-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel. B. Studs, nuts and washers shall all be type 304 stainless steel. C. Runners shall be 2-inch glass reinforced plastic. Number and configu- ration of runners required shall be as per manufacturer's standard recommendations. D. Casing spacers shall be as manufactured by Cascade, Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc., or equal. 2.05 BRICK AND MORTAR (END SNAL) A. Clay rick: Clay brick shall comply with ASTM C 32, grade 5S, hard brick, except that the mean of 5 tests for absorption shall not exceed 8 percent by weight. B. Concrete_prick: Concrete brick shall conform to ASTM C 139. C. Cement Mortar: Cement mortar shall consist of a mixture -of Portland cement, sand and water. Cement and sand shall first be combined in the proper proportions and then thoroughly mixed with the required amount of water. Cement mortar shall be proportioned by loose volume in the proportion of one part cement to two parts sand. The quantity of water to be used in the preparation of mortar shall be only that required to produce a mixture sufficiently workable for the purpose intended. Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and shall show no visible signs of setting prior to use. Retempering of mortar will not ---be- permitted.--- Cement Isand, and water for cement ..mortar-sYtall_ Conform-.... ---_...._.-__`__. to the requirements of Section 03300 Concrete. Lime -cement mortar or commercial mortar mixes are not permitted. 1 02340 JACKING AND BORING 2 2/20/04 442.E1 1 IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF STEEL CASING A. jacking Head: The steel casing shall be fitted with a jacking shoe of steel attached to the lead section of the casing extending around the entire outer surface of the steel casing. Shoe shall project at least 18 inches beyond the driving end of the casing. The lead section shall not protrude more than 1/4-inch outside of the outer casing surface. The shoe shall be anchored to prevent any wobble or alignment variation during the jacking or boring operations. To prevent voids outside the casing, excavation shall be carried out entirely within the jacking pipe and not in advance of the shoe. Excavated materials shall be removed from the casing as the jacking or baring operation progresses and no accumulation of excavated materials within the casing shall be permitted.. B. Jack' The excavations for the jacking or boring operations shall be adequately shored to safeguard existing substructures and surface improvements and to ensure against ground movement in the vicinity of the casing portal. Heavy guide timber, structural steel, or concrete cradles of sufficient length shall be provided to assure accurate control of jacking or boring alignment. Provide adequate space within the excavation to permit the insertion of the lengths of casing to be jacked and bored. Timbers and structural steel sections shall be anchored to ensure action of the jacks in line with the axis of the casing. A bearing block, consisting of a timber or structural steel framework, shall be constructed between the jacks and the end of the casing to provide uniform end bearing over the permitter of the casing and distribute the jacking pressure evenly. C. Control of Alignment and Grade: Control the application of the jacking pressure and excavation of materials ahead of the casing as it advances to prevent the casing from becoming earthbound or deviating from the required line and grade. Do not encroach upon the minimum annular space detailed previously. Restrict the excavation of the materials to the least clearance necessary to prevent binding in order to avoid loss of ground clearance necessary to prevent binding in order to avoid loss of ground and consequent settlement or possible damage to overlying ' structures. Allowable grade deviations in horizontal and vertical alignments shall be no greater than 0.2 feet per 100 feet in either direction over the length of the jacking and boring to a maximum deviation of 0.5 feet. D.- Installation: The -installation of the casing shall be in accordance with the Drawings. INSTALLATION OF CARRIER PIPE . 3.02 "- A. The entire length of the casing shall be'in place before the carrier pipe is installed. B. Each joint of carrier pipe shall be fitted with a minimum of two (2) ---..-------_.._..-------------.--- .._., pipe -casing spacers -"as specified herein.- - The spacers and/or casing shall be lubricated with drilling mud or flax soap. Petroleum products are not an acceptable lubricant. C. The carrier pipe can be pushed or pulled through the casing. The pipe bells shall not rest on the casing. Carrier installation shall be approved by ENGINEER. D. Carrier pipe manufacturer's instructions on maintaining joint restraint ' integrity shall be strictly followed. 2/20/04 02340 442.E1 3 JACKING AND BORING 3.03 END SEAL A. After acceptance of casing and carrier pipe installation by ENGINEER, permitter and OWNER, both ends of casing shall be sealed. B. Seals shall be constructed of materials as specified herein and as shown on the Drawing. 3.04 PRESSURE TESTING A. Carrier piping shall be pressure tested and disinfected with the remaining piping system per Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, Structures and Equipment). B. CONTRACTOR shall confirm that pipe joints within casing have been properly expanded prior to pressurizing the pipeline. END OF SECTION 02340 2/20/04 JACKING AND BORING 4 442.E1 SECTION 02500 RESTORATION AND CLEANUP ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work necessary to provide and coordinate the restoration and cleanup of areas disturbed during construction. All areas disturbed or damaged during construction shall be restored to conditions existing prior to the work. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Section 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete Pavement and Base. Curbs. C. Section 02630 - Concrete Sidewalks, Drives and 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submitted construction progress schedule should indicate restoration, by restoration type, specified herein. Final cleanup time should also be referenced to the progress schedule for each street. B. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND EASE A. Materials shall be as specified in Section 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete ' Pavement and Base. 2*02 CONCRETE PAVEMENT MA. ..Materials for concrete pavement,. sidewalks and curbs. shall,_ be_._as.._____._.__..... specified in Section 02630 - Concrete sidewalks, Drives and Curbs. 2.03 SOD A. Sod shall be of firm texture having a compacted growth and good, root development. Sod is to contain no weeds or undesirable native grasses _...._� and be free from fungus, vermin and diseases. . ,9od to be not less than two (2) years old. Provide sod capable of growth and development when planted.. (viable, not _dormant) • .._ _..__. ' B. Sod shall be selected to match the existing varieties and types encountered, as applicable. Sod shall be Bahia for non -irrigated areas and Floratam for irrigated areas. ' C. Sod selection shall be approved in field by resident project representative. 2/20/04 02500 442.E1 1 RESTORATION AND CLEANUP 2.04 SEED AND MULCH MATERIALS I A. Grass seed shall be a mixture of 20 parts Bermuda and 80 parts argentine Bahia seed. Quick -growing type grass seed shall be included which will provide early ground cover during the season in which the planting is done and which will not compete with the permanent grass. The bermuda seed shall be an equal mixture of hulled and unhulled seed. The Argentine Bahia seed shall be scarified seed having a minimum active germination of 40 percent and a total active germination of 85 percent. B. Mulch shall be straw or hay, consisting of oat, rye or wheat straw, or of pangola, peanut, coastal bermuda or bahia grass hay. only undeteriorated mulch which can be readily cut into the soil shall be used. C. Seed•and mulch may be used at locations indicated on drawings only, r or as approved by resident project representative. 2.05 LANDSCAPING , A. All existing landscaping damaged or disturbed by CONTRACTOR shall be replaced in kind by the CONTRACTOR as directed in field by the resident project representative. All such work shall be considered incidental restoration and covered under the work required by this contract. B. Preconstruction video tape or photographs shall be used to assist in landscape restoration requirements. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPING MATERIALS A. Water 1. Water shall be potable from municipal water supplies or from wastewater reuse system (where available). B. Fertilizer fifty , 1. New ground covers: Fertilize with an approved fertilizer of percent (5096) or greater organic 6-6-6 or 8-8-8 with minor elements including, but not limited to, iron, zinc and manganese. 2.07 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or equipment being cleaned. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01� �_ABPTiALTIC CONCR$TR .PAVNT------.---- _____ _ - --- A. Construct new asphaltic concrete pavement as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete Pavement and Base. B. Restore existing asphaltic pavement damaged during construction. �. 02500 2/20/04 RESTORATION AND CLEANUP 2 442.E1 ' 3.02 CONCRETE PAVEMM A. Construct concrete drives, sidewalks and curbs as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 02630 - Concrete Sidewalks, ' Driveways and Curbs. B. Restore existing concrete drives, sidewalks and curbs damaged during construction. 3.03 SODDING A. Sod shall be placed as indicated on Drawings or to the extent to ' achieve the conditions existing prior to the work. General sod limits are as follows: 1. All unpaved areas disturbed within the project site limits shall be prepared and sodded as specified herein. B. Properly prepare subgrade prior to placing sod. Remove excess materials, hand rake and bevel as necessary to place sod evenly and at grades to match adjacent existing surfaces. Finish sod installation shall provide unimpeded sheet flow of surface water drainage. C. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tight -fitting joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips. Do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in courses. Tamp or roll sod lightly to insure uniform contact with subgrade. Fill minor cracks between pieces of sod with sifted soil. D. Where necessary to prevent slippage of new installed sod, peg or pin sod securely using 1" x 1" x 6" wood pegs, driven flush with top of sod. E. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after installation. F. Do not install sod on Friday, Saturday or Sunday, unless provisions are made to water manually or automatically. 3.04 SRBDING AND NULCBING A. Do not use wet, moldy seed. B. Sow seed using mechanical spreader and do not seed unless wind velocity is five (5) mph or less. Distribute seed evenly over all designated areas, sowing equal quantities in two (2)—perpendicular directions. ' 100 C. Apply mixture at a rate of pounds per acre. D. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8-inch of soil, roll lightly and water-------__. with fine spray. E. If erosion areas are identifiable, protect such seeded areas by spreading a continuous blanket- not less than %-inch_ in depth -of measurement of hay, straw or other approved much material. F. Seeding and mulching allowed at areas indicated on drawings only. 3.05 SOD AND LANDSCAPING RESTORATION A. All landscaping that has been disturbed or damaged shall be replaced to match existing. The restoration work shall be as per directions of the resident project representative. 2/20/04 02500 ' 442.E1 3 RESTORATION AND CLEANUP B. Repair existing sprinkler heads, irrigation equipment and piping at the existing site to conditions and coverage existing prior to work. Materials shall be as specified in Section 15400 - Plumbing. 3.06 CLEANING A. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in other sections, clean interior and exterior exposed -to -view surfaces. B. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to remain. C. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, films and other foreign substances. D. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition; remove foreign substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine. E. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication. F. Clean ventilating louvers of dust and debris. G. Maintain cleaning until Final Completion. H. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds; remove stains, spills, and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Rake clean other exterior surfaces. 3.07 SOD AND LANDSCAPING MAINTENANCE A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining all newly sodded areas and. new landscaping through final completion of the project. Maintenance shall include but not be limited to irrigation and mowing. B. CONTRACTOR may make arrangements with the individual property owners to complete landscaping maintenance. However, CONTRACTOR shall remain responsible for landscaping maintenance through final completion. C. All sod or, other' -' lands caping improvements found dead ,prior to final completion shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. END OF SECTION 02500 RESTORATION AND CLEANUP 1 SECTION 02510 ASPHALTIC PAVEMENT AND BASE I PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' A. Perform all work associated with Asphaltic Concrete Pavement and Base as shown and as specified herein including all labor, materials, equipment supplies, and facilities associated with providing a finished product satisfying all the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A. Section 01400 - Quality Control. B. Section 02200 - Earthwork. ' 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Stgaddrds: References in these specifications to "Standard Specifications" shall mean the "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction," Florida Department of Transportation, latest edition. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in writing, materials testing reports, job -mix formulas, and other pertinent information acceptable to the ENGINEER demonstrating that materials and methods proposed for use will comply with the provisions of this Section in accordance with Section 01300 - Submitt- als. B. Suitability Tests of proposed Materials: Tests for conformance with the Specifications shall be performed prior to start of the work. The samples shall be identified to show the name of the material, aggregate source, name of the supplier, contract number, and the segment of the WORK where the material represented by the sample is to be used. Results be submitted to the ENGINEER for review. �tolbe _. -.-------- -..-..__......_....__.__.--_.-._.Materials tested shall include aggregate base, coarse and fine aggregate for paving mixtures, mineral filler, and asphalt cement. ' C. Trial Batch: Before placing any paving material, a testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER shall prepare a trial batch of asphalt concrete for each job -mix formula to`be used for the Work. The trial' batch shall be prepared using the aggregates and asphalt cement proposed," and acceptable to the ENGINEER. The compacted trial batch shall provide a basis for computing the voids ratio, provide an --;-- — - -- -----------indication- of -the optimum asphalt content, and establish a basis for --_.._ ..._ ....,. controlling compaction during construction. The cost of not more than two laboratory trial batch tests will be borne by the TRIBE but the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the materials at no cost. Any additional trial batch testing required shall be performed at the expense of the CONTRACTOR within the Scope of the Contract. t 2/20/04 02510 ' 442.E1 1 ASPHALTIC PAVEMENT AND BASE 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing by an independent testing firm will be required to verify proper placement and compaction of the subbase, base and pavement ' sections. B. Inspection and testing laboratory services shall be as specified in Section 01400 - Quality Control. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIMEROCX BASS ' A. Materials for limerock base shall be as specified in Section 911 of the Standard Specifications. 2.02 PRIME COAT A. Prime coat material shall be RC-70 liquid asphalt applied to the pavement base at a uniform rate of 0.25 gallons per square yard. Sand ' cover shall be applied overrprime coats°if traffic will be using area before final paving is laid. 2.03 TACK COAT ' A. Tack coat material shall be as specified in Section 300-2.3 of the Standard Specifications. 2.04 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE A. Type S-I Asphaltic Concrete conforming to all applicable requirements ' of Sections 320, 330 and 331 of the Standard Specifications. B. Substitute asphaltic concrete types may be used providing they meet or exceed the stability of Type S-I and the cost does not exceed that of ' Type S-I. C. Where indicated by drawings, Type S-III'Asphaltic Concrete conforming to all applicable requirements of Sections 320, 330 and 333 of the , Standard Specifications, may be used for overlay purposes. 2.05 TRAFFIC CONTROL MARKINGS A. Thermoplastic stripes and markings shall be as specified in Section 711 of the. -Standard Specifications. . B. Reflective pavement markers shall be as specified in Section 706 of the , Standard Specifications. C. Signing shall be as specified in Section 700 of the Standard Specifica- tions PART 3 EXECUTION .0-1-- SUBGRADS .PREPARATION A. The subgrade shall be prepared as specified in the Section 02200 - Earthwork as applicable to roadways and embankments. The surface of ' the subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth and true to grade and cross-section. Subgrade for pavement shall not vary more than 0.02 foot from the specified grade and cross section. Subgrade for base material shall not vary more than 0.04 foot from the specified 02510 2/20/04 ASPHALTIC PAVEMENT AND BASE 2 442 . E1 ' 1 grade and cross section. Compaction on Subgrade shall be 98% of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T180 in the upper 12 inches. 3.02 LI7AEROCK BASS ' A. Aggregate base shall be provided where shown and to the thickness shown. Imported aggregate bases shall be delivered to the -job site as uniform mixtures and each layer shall be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be avoided and the base shall be free of pockets of coarse or fine material. Where the required thickness is 6 inches or less, the base materials may be spread and compacted in one course. Where the required thickness is more than 6 inches, the base material shall be spread and compacted in two or more courses of approximately ' equal thickness and the maximum compacted thickness of any one course shall not exceed 8 inches. The relative compaction of each course of aggregate base shall be not less than 98 percent of maximum density at ' optimum moisture content when measured in accordance with ASTM D 1557. The compacted surface of the finished aggregate shall be hard, uniform, smooth and at any point skull not vary more than 0.02 feet from the specified grade or cross section. B. Requirements for limerock base other than those above shall be as specified by Section 200 of the Standard Specifications. 3.03 PRIME COAT A. Prime coat shall be applied when the limerock base meets the specified density requirements and the moisture content of the top half of the base does not exceed 90 percent of the optimum moisture of the base material. At the time of priming, the limerock base shall be firm, unyielding and in such a condition that no undue distortion will occur. ' B. Prime coat shall be applied according to Section 300 of the Standard Specifications. 3.04 TACK COAT A. A tack coat shall be applied to the base and to the contact surfaces of ' all cold pavement joints, curbs, gutters, manholes and the like before the asphalt pavement is placed. Care shall be taken to prevent the application of tack coat material to surfaces that will not be in contact with the new asphaltic concrete pavement. B. Tack coat shall be a ce with Section 300-7 of the applied in accordance _... __._ ._. _._..... Standard Specifications. ' 3.05 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE A. Paving shall be as specified in Section 330 of the Standard Specific- ations and the specifications herein. ' B. At the time of delivery to the work site, the temperature of mixture shall be within +250 F of the mix temperature. C. Asphalt concrete shall not be placed when the atmospheric temperature ' is below 40 degrees F or during unsuitable weather. D. The asphaltic concrete shall be evenly spread upon the subgrade or base ' to such a depth that, after rolling, it will be of the specified cross section and grade of the course being constructed. E. The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the asphalt concrete 2/20/04 02510 ' 442.El 3 ASPHALTIC PAVEMENT AND BASE r shall be accomplished in a single, continuous operation by means of a ' self-propelled mechanical spreading and finishing machine designed specially for that purpose. The machine shall be equipped with a screed or strike -off assembly capable of being accurately regulated and ' adjusted to distribute a layer of the material to a definite pre- determined thickness. when paving is of a size or in a location that use of a self-propelled machine is impractical the ENGINEER may waive the self-propelled requirement. ' F. Spreading, once commenced, must be continuous without interruption. G. The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial rolling with a steel -wheeled tandem roller, steel three -wheeled roller, ' vibratory roller, or a pneumatic -tired roller shall fallow the paver as closely as possible. If needed, intermediate rolling with a pneumatic - tired roller shall. be done immediately behind.,.,the initial rolling. Final rolling .shall eliminate marks from previous rolling. In areas too small for the roller a vibrating plate compactor or a hand tamper shall be used to achieve thorough compaction. H. Upon completion, the-pa-vement shall,,,be true to grade and cross-section. , when a 10-foot straightedge is laid on the finished surface parallel to the center of the roadway, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/8 inch except at intersections or changes ' of grade. In the transverse direction, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/4 inch. I. The relative density after compaction shall be 98 percent of the density obtained by using ASTM D 1188 or D 2726. A properly calibrated nuclear asphalt testing device may be used for determining the field density of compacted asphalt concrete, or slabs or cores shall be laboratory tested in accordance with ASTM D 1188. , 3.06 TRAFFIC CONTROL MARKING RESTORATION A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for restoring all traffic striping, reflective -.markers and signing which are damaged or disturbed during construction.. B. The intent is to restore traffic control to the plan and markings ' existing prior to construction. C. Restoration shall conform with all applicable requirements of Sections 706, 710 and 711 of the standard specifications. ' D. where a roadway section will be reopened prior to application of traffic markings, the following conditions must be met: , 1. Temporary traffic markings must be in place prior to reopening road. -..--.. -- _ .. ,. ,, 2. Temporary traffic markings are allowableforthe nines...... p rY g y -(90) day _ - waiting period prior to overlay. END OF SECTION 1 02510 ASPHALTIC PAVEMENT AND BASE 4 2/20/04 442.E1 ' SECTION 02630 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVES AND CURBS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers work necessary to construct, replace or repair ' concrete sidewalks, drives/roadways and curbs as required for this project. B. Removed or damaged sidewalks, drives and curbs shall be replaced in the ' same location and to the same dimensions as were the originals unless instructed differently by OWNER or ENGINEER. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, (GENERAL REQUIREMENTS), which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. ' B. Section 03300 - Concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMS A. Materials for forms shall be 2-inch dressed lumber straight and free from defects or standard metal forms may be used. Where short -radius ' forms are required, 1-inch dressed lumber or plywood may be used. Provide stakes and bracing materials as required to hold forms securely in place. ' 2.02 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER A. Expansion joint filler shall be M-inch thick, preformed asphalt - impregnated, expansion joint material conforming to ASTM D 994. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185 and be sized as indicated on the Drawings. ' B. Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615 and be sized as indicated on the Drawings. 1 Grade:_ 60 . 2. Minimum yield strength: _ ..... 60, 000 psi 2.04 CONCRETE A. Concrete for sidewalks, drive/roadways and curbs shall be a specified in Section. 03300 - Concrete. 2.05 CURING COMPOUND ' A. Liquid membrane -forming curing compound shall be clear or translucent, suitable for spray application and shall conform to ASTM C 309, Type 1. ' 2/20/04 02630 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, 442.E1 1 DRIVES AND CURBS 1 PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. Bring the areas on which sidewalks, drives and curbs are to be ' constructed to required grade and compact by sprinkling and rolling or mechanical tamping. As depressions occur, refill with suitable material and recompact until the surface is at the proper grade. The , upper 12 inches of subgrade or fill shall be compacted to 98 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 1557. 3.02 SETTING FORXS ' A. Construct forms to the shape, lines, grades, and dimensions called for on the Drawings. Stake wood or steel forms;7securely in place, true to line and grade. B. Brace forms to prevent change of shape or movement in any direction resulting from the weight of the concrete during placement. Construct short -radius curved. forms. to .,exact radius. Tops of farms shall not depart from gradeline more than 1/8 inch when checked with a 10-foot straightedge. Alignment of straight sections shall not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. , 3.03 SIDEWALX CONSTRUCTION A. Sidewalks shall be 4 inches thick except where shown otherwise on the Drawings. B. At locations where the new sidewalk is to abut existing concrete, saw concrete for a depth of 2 inches and chip the old concrete back to ' sound material on a straight line, clean the surface, and apply a neat cement paste just prior to pouring the new sidewalk. C. Place preformed asphalt expansion joints at intervals not exceeding 45 ' feet and around posts, poles, valve boxes, manholes or other objects protruding through the sidewalk. D. Provide expansion and contraction joints transversely to the walks at ' intervals as shown on the drawings. Expansion and contraction joints shall be straight and at right angles to the surface of the walk. E. Place, process, finish and cure concrete in conformance with the , — — --applicable requirements of ACI 614 and this Specification. Where .the requirements differ, the high shall govern. F. Broom the surface with a fine -hair broom at right angles to the length ' of the walk and tool at all edges, joints and markings. Mark the walks transversely at 5-foot intervals with a jointing tool. Upon completion of the finishing, apply an approved curing compound to exposed surfaces. -Protect thesidewalkfromdamagefor -a period of 7 days. ' __ 3-,.04RIVE/ROADWAY-CONSTRUCT A. Drives/roadways shall be constructed and reinforced as indicated on the Drawings. B. Place reinforcement as required by Drawings. C. Place pre -formed expansion joint material where new drive/roadway will abut existing drive/roadway and around valve boxes, manholes or other 02630 2/20/04 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVES AND CURBS 2 442.E1 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 _I 1 1 1 objects protruding through the drive/roadway. D. Broom the surface. with a fine -hair broom at right angles to the length of the drive/roadway and tool all edges and joints. Upon completion of finishing, apply an approved curing compound to exposed surfaces. E. Provide saw cut contraction joints as per standard details. 3.05 CURB CONSTRUCTION A. Construct curbs to the dimensions and cross section as shown on the Drawings. B. Provide saw cut contraction joints as per standard details. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 02630 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, 442.E1 3 DRIVES AND CURBS 1 1 1 11 F1, Cl 1 1 SECTION 03100 FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the work necessary to construct and remove the formwork for the east -in -place concrete structures, complete. B. Like Stems of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03300 - Concrete. C. Section 03600 - Grout. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS (LATEST REVISION SHALL GOVERN) A. ACI 347 "FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE" 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals, and shall include but not be limited to: 1. Formwork, shoring and bracing drawings. 2. Form ties sample. 3. Manufacturer's data information indicating that form release agent is recommended for this project, or specific applications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 _ ._..... GENERAL _ A. Plywood, hard plastic finished plywood and steel of sufficient strength and surface smoothness to produce the specified finish shall be used. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain, in writing, the ENGINEER'S acceptance of panel sixes and patterns prior to fabricating, purchasing. of wall forms, and beginning work on the concrete of the project. B. All joints, gaps, and apertures in forms shall be taped, gasketed, plugged, and/or caulked with an approved material so that the joint will remain watertight and withstand placing pressures without bulging outward or creating surface patterns. C. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all form tie requirements included in the various sections of this Specification and shall submit shop drawing information for review by ENGINEER and obtain acceptance prior to purchase of forms. 2/20/04 03100 442.El 1 FORMWORK i D. Concrete surfaces which are to be coated with paint or cementitious coating shall be formed with plywood using form release agent specified herein. Surface preparation shall be as specified herein. E. Water retaining structures shall be formed with plywood using form release agent specified herein. 2.02 COLUMN REINFORCING SPACERS A. Provide a positive spacer between column reinforcing and column forms to ensure adequate cover. When using one-piece seamless circular column forms, where it is impractical to place permanent spacers, the spacers shall be removed as the concrete is placed, consolidated, and proper support and spacing is achieved. Any permanent spacers that are designed to be left in place shall conform to CRSI and shall, in addition, be plastic coated to prevent corrosion on exposed edges. 2.03 WALL SPACERS A. Provide positive spacers for all wall forms. 2.04 FORM TIES A. Form ties on exposed surfaces shall be located in a uniform pattern or as indicated on the Drawings. Form ties shall be constructed so that the tie remains embedded in the wall, except for a removable portion at each end. Form ties shall have conical or spherical type inserts and shall be constructed so that no metal is within 1 inch of the concrete surface when the forms, inserts, and tie ends are removed. Wire ties will not be permitted. Ties shall withstand all pressures and limit deflection of forms to acceptable limits. B. Flat bar ties for panel forms shall have plastic or rubber inserts having a minimum depth of 1 inch and sufficient dimensions to permit proper patching of the tie hole. C. Ties for water -holding structures or dry structures with access such as basements, or pipe galleries, etc., that are below finish grade shall have an integral steel water stop that is tightly and continuously welded to the tie. The water stop shall be considerably larger in area than the tie cross sectional area and shall be oriented perpendicular to the tie and symmetrical about the center of the tie. The ties shall be constructed to provide a positive means of preventing rotation or disturbance of the center portion of the tie during removal of the ends. . 2.05 FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Form release agent shall be a non -staining type, which will provide a positive bond prevention such as Rhea Finish -as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc.'' or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORM DESIGN, WINDOWS, AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. The CONTRACTOR shall design and submit shop drawings of his forming systems to the. ENGINEER for review prior to fabrication, placing his order, or use on the job. Forms shall contain windows or shall be staged to allow visual observation at all times of the fresh concrete to ensure correct placement and vibration. Provide a formwork and placement design that will limit free fall of concrete in walls 8-inch 03100 2/20/04 FORMWORK 2 442.E1 1 11, I 1 1 or less in width to 5 feet, and for walls wider than 8 inches, limit this fall to 8 feet. Review methods with ENGINEER prior to start of Shop drawings shall show placement devices, such as "elephant trunks", chutes, etc. B. Reuse of wooden forms for other than rough finish will be permitted only if a "like new" condition is maintained. The ENGINEER shall be notified prior to concrete placement (24 hours minimum) so that the forms can be inspected. The CONTRACTOR shall correct any defective work, found in the ENGINEER'S inspection, prior to delivery of concrete to the project. C. All forms shall be structurally designed by the CONTRACTOR or CONTRACT- OR'S Engineer and the design and Drawings shall comply with all applicable regulations and codes. Comply with applicable portions of ACI 34.7 and these Specifications. 3.02 FORM TOLERANCES A. Forms shall be surfaced, designed, and constructed to meet ACI 347 and the following minimum requirements for the specified finishes. Failure of the forms to produce the specified requirements will be grounds for rejection of the concrete work. Rejected work shall be repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. All repair or replacement shall be subject to these Specifications and the review of the ENGINEER. B. Wall Tolerances 1. Wall Type W-A a. Depressions in a wall surface shall not be more than 5/16-inch when a 10-foot straightedge is placed upon high points in any location. Wall thicknesses shall not be direction or at any more than 1/4-inch minus nor %-inch plus from dimension shown. Walls shall be plumb within 1/4-inch in any 10 feet or within 1-inch in its entire height from top to bottom for walls over 40 feet high. 2. Wall Type W-S a. Depressions in a wall surface shall not be more than 1/8-inch when a 10-foot straightedge is placed upon high points in any direction or at any location. wall thicknesses shall not be ---- more than 1/4-inch minus nor %-inch plus from dimension shown. walls shall be plumb within 1/4-inch in any 10 feet or within %-inch in its entire height from top to bottom for walls over 20 feet high. C. Slab Tolerances 1...Slab Type S-A _ _ ..__.a..__Depres_sion .. in_. a`_s.lab.__sh.a1I .. not . be..._more-than. 5 / 16 -.inch - when a--- 10-foot straightedge is placed upon the high points in any direction or at any location of a single plane of a given slab. 2/20/04 03100 442.E1 3 FORMWORK 2. Slab Type S-B a. Depression in a slab shall not be more than 1/8-inch when a 10-foot straightedge is placed upon the high points in any direction or at any location of a single plane of a given slab. 3. Slab Type S-A and S-B a. Finish slab elevation shall be within %-inch of elevation specified except that slabs which are designed and detailed to drain to a floor drain or gutter shall in face adequately drain regardless of tolerances and the CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to achieve this important function in the finished structure. Repair floor slopes in an approved manner if necessary to provide complete drainage. Slabs shall not be more than 1/4-inch minus nor %-inch plus from the thickness shown and shall also satisfy the above requirements. D. Beams and Columns 1. Beam Type B-A a. Beams' physical dimensions shall not be more than 1/4-inch minus nor M-inch plus from dimension shown. Elevations shall be within %-inch plus or minus except where the tops of beams become part of a finished slab and in this case refer to slab tolerances also. 2. Column 'Type C-A a. Column physical dimensions shall not be more than 1/4-inch minus nor 34-inch plus from dimension shown. Columns shall be plumb within 1/4-inch in any 10 feet with a maximum out -of - plumb of M-inch at the top with respect to the bottom. 3.03. ORDINARY WALL FINISH A. Surface deflections shall be limited to 1/16 inch at any point, and the variation in wall deflection shall not exceed 1/8 inch per 10 feet. Form panels shall be arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. 3.04 FORK SURFACE PREPARATION A. All form surfaces to be in contact with the concrete shall be thorough- ly cleaned of all previous concrete, dirt, and other surface contami- nants prior to preparing by the applicable method below. B. All wood surfaces in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an effective release agent prior to form installation. The release agent shall be nonstaining and nontoxic after 30 days. C.-.-..-..Mill-- scale ...and..other .ferrous. depositsshallbe sandbl.asted.or otherwise. ---- ---_-_---- removed from the contact surface of forms. All forms shall have the contact surfaces coated with a release agent. The release agent shall be effective in preventing discoloration of the concrete from rust, and shall be nontoxic after 30 days. 03100 2/20/04 FORMWORK 4 442.E1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.05 BEVELED EDGES (CHAMFER) A. Form 3/4-inch bevels at all concrete edges, except those on top of walls and elevated slabs and beams. Where beveled edges on existing adjacent structures are other than 3/4• inch, obtain ENGINEER'S acceptance of size prior to placement of bevel form strip. 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage resulting from removal of farms. B. Forms and shoring shall remain in place in accordance with ACI 347 and until the concrete has reached a compressive strength equal to two- thirds (2/3) of the specified 28-day compressive strength as determined by test cylinders, unless an earlier time is approved in writing by the ENGINEER. Removal of all supports and reshoring shall not be permit- ted. 3.07 BACKFILL AGAINST WALLS A. Do not place earth backfill against walls until the concrete has obtained a compressive strength equal to the specified 28-day compres- sive strength. Where backfill is to be placed on both sides of the wall the backfill shall be placed uniformly on both sides. B. Since the walls of some structures are laterally restrained or supported by suspended slabs and/or slabs on grade, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule of wall shoring and backfilling that is coordinated with the concrete curing and test cylinder reports and obtain a review from the ENGINEER prior to proceeding. 3.08 SAFETY AND STRUCTURE A. Safety of any all persons is solely the responsibility of the CONTRAC- TOR. B. Structural design and construction of all formwork is solely the responsibility of the concrete work CONTRACTOR. 2/20/04 442.El 5 03100 FORMWORK 1 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary for furnishing and placing, complete, the reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03300 - Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS (LATEST REVISIONS SHALL GOVERN) A. ACT 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Struc- tures". B. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". C. ASTM A185 "Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement". D. ASTM A615 "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". E. CRSI 63 "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. 1..05 QUALITY CONTROL A. If foreign steel reinforcement is used, it is required to meet all specified standards; written certification from the CONTRACTOR is ._required.._._Lack._of certification of .compliance will. -require. test... results by an engineering laboratory.. Cost of such tests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DEFORMED REINFORCING BARS A. Sizes shall be as noted on Drawings. B. ASTM A615: "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". 1. Grade: 60 2. Minimum yield strength: 60,000 p.s.i. 2/20/04 03200 442.E1 1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 2.02 WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. Welded wire fabric shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. A. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Tie wires shall be 16-gauge, black, soft -annealed wire. B. Steel bar supports shall be of proper type for use intended. Bar supports in beams and slabs exposed to view after stripping shall be galvanized or plastic coated. Concrete supports may be substituted for reinforcing support in concrete placed on grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING A. Prior to placement:, clean all'reinforcement of loose flaky rust, oil, mud, or any deleterious materials that might affect bond. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Tolerances:- 1. Where total thickness "D" is 24 inches or less: +/- 1/4" 2. Longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars: Except do not reduce cover at ends of members where specified. B. Splices and laps of deformed bars: 1. Minimum lap 40 diameters (s #6) and 50 diameters #6). 2. Tension laps in accordance with ACI 318. 3. Other lap distances as indicated by Drawings. 3.03 SUPPORTS A. Accurately place and adequately support reinforcement by concrete brick, metal, or other approved chairs, spacers, or ties, secured against displacement within the tolerances permitted. B. Use non -staining type where support touches forms. 3.04 INSTALLATION OVER WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Exercise extreme care when placing reinforcement over any waterproofing membrane; repair and patch all punctures as per the manufacturer's specifications. 3.05 WELDINGREINFORCEMENT P.._ .m Welding `shall not be_ portntted . _1f��ie—ConErac�or �`ias�a -need—f-or--------- welding, he shall submit detailed shop drawings, qualifications, and nondestructive testing procedures for review by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain the results of this review prior to proceeding. The basis for the Contractor submittals shall be the Reinforcing Steel Welding Code, AWS D12.1-75, published by the American Welding Society. 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 2 2/20/04 442.E1 3.06 PLACING WILDED WIRE FABRIC A. Extend fabric to within 2 inches of the edges of the slab, and lap splices at least 1-1/2 courses of the fabric and a minimum of 6 inches. Tie laps and splices securely at ends and at least every 24 inches with 16-gauge black annealed steel wire. Pull the fabric into position as concrete under the the concrete is placed by means of hooks, and work steel to insure that it is placed at the proper distance above the bottom of the slab. 3.07 FIELD BENDING A. Field bending of reinforcing steel bars is not permitted where rebend- ing will later be required to straighten bars. Rebending of bars at the same place where strain hardening has taken place due to the original bend will damage the bar. Consult with, the Engineer prior to any field bending. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 03200 442 E1 3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT B. Alternate waterstop shall be Volclay waterstop-RX as manufactured by American Colloid Company, or equal. 2.03 PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER A. Bituminous Type: Bituminous type conforming to ASTM D 994 or D 1751, unless otherwise shown or specified. 2.04 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINT A. Preformed control joint shall be a one-piece steel strip with preformed groove, such as Keyed Kold Retained Kap, manufactured by Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc., San Mateo, CA; or equal. The preformed control joint material shall be furnished and installed in full-length unspliced pieces, unless otherwise accepted by the ENGINEER. 2.05 CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Contraction joints shall be as indicated on the drawings. Material components for contraction joints shall be as specified in Section 07900 - Sealants. 2.06 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Construction joint types shall be as indicated on the drawings. 1. Type "A" shall be used for vertical walls of water retaining structures or walls that will experience groundwater. 2. Type "B" shall be as an alternative to Type "A" where noted on drawing. 3. Type "C" shall be used for vertical walls of non -water retaining structures. 4. Type "D" shall be used for slabs of water retaining structures. 5. Type "E" shall be used for slabs of non -water retaining structures and slabs subject to light traffic loads. B. Construction joint locations shall be selected by CONTRACTOR and approved by ENGINEER. PART 3 _SXSCUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WATER STOPS A. Join water stops at all intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. Center the water stop on the joint. Hold water stop positively in correct position. In the event of damage to the water stop, repair the water stop in an acceptable manner. Vibrate concrete to obtain impervious concrete in the vicinity of all joints. ....._.�.�....�__._. B. In horizontal oints ............._... ... ---.. ---- _....... ...._.. j ensure that the areas below the plastic water stop are completely filled with concrete. Make a visual inspection of the entire water stop area during the concrete placement. Limit concrete placement to top of water stop in first pass, vibrate the concrete under the water stop, lift the water stop to confirm full consolidation without voids, then place remaining concrete to full height of slab. Procedure shall apply to full length of plastic water stops. 03251 2/20/04 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 2 442.E1 3.06 PLACING WELDED WIRE FABRIC inches the of the slab, and lap A. Extend fabric to within 2 of edges splices at least 1-1/2 courses of the fabric and a minimum of 6 inches. Tie laps and splices securely at ends and at least every 24 inches with 16-gauge black annealed steel wire. Pull the fabric into position as under the the concrete is placed by means of hooks, and work concrete steel to insure that it is placed at the proper distance above the bottom of the slab. 3.07 FIELD BENDING A. Field bending of reinforcing steel bars is not permitted where rebend- ing will later be required to straighten bars. Rebending of bars at the same place where strain hardening has taken place due to the original bend will damage the bar. Consult with, the Engineer prior to any field bending. SECTION 03251 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS PART 1 GENERATE 1.01 STORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the expansion and construction joints. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED AND PERFORMED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submit- tals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER SWOPS A. Plastic Water Stop shall be the center bulb type, extruded from an elastomeric plastic compound, the basic resin of which shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC). The size shall be as shown. Specific gravity shall be approximately 1.37 and the shore durometer Type A hardness, approximately 80. No reclaimed PVC shall be used in the compound. Meet the performance requirements of the Corps of En- gineers, Specification CRD-C-572. Water stop shall have a constant thickness from the edge of the bulb to the outside edge. All water stops shall have a number of parallel ribs or protrusions on each side of the center of the strip. Corrugated type or tapered water stops are not acceptable. The minimum weight per foot for water stop shall be 0.90 pound for 3/16-inch by 6-inch, 1.62 pounds for 3/8-inch by 6- inch, and 2.30 pounds for 3/8-inch by 9-inch. B. Manufacturers and suppliers who have products meeting the specified geometry and who have the specified,water stop readily available are__—..__. listed below. other products shall not be used without prior review and acceptance by the ENGINEER: 1. Vinylex Corporation, 2636 Byington- Solway Road, Knoxville, TN 37921, phone: 615/690-2211; Catalog No. RB6-38H for the 6-inch _ by 3/8-inch and Catalog No. RB9-38H for the 9-inch by 3/8-inch. . 2. Greenstreak Plastic ,Products, Box 7139, St. Louis, MO 63177, phone: 800/325-9504. These products are also distributed by the Co., San Mateo, CA. Style 732 for the 6-inch by 3/8-inch ..Burke and Style 735 for the 9-inch by 3/8-inch 2.02 ALTERNATE WATERSTOP A. Bentonite type waterstop shall be used only where indicated on the drawings or as approved by ENGINEER, ONLY. 2/20/04 03251 442.E1 1 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 1 B. Alternate waterstop shall be Volclay Waterstop-RX as manufactured by American Colloid Company, or equal. 2.03 PREMOLARD JOINT FILLER A. Bituminous Type: Bituminous type conforming to ASTM D 994 or D 1751, unless otherwise shown or specified. 2.04 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINT' A. Preformed control joint shall be a one-piece steel strip with preformed groove, such as Keyed Kold Retained Kap, manufactured by Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc., San Mateo, CA; or equal. The preformed control joint material shall be furnished and installed in full-length unspliced pieces, unless otherwise accepted by the ENGINEER. 2.05 CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Contraction joints shall be as indicated on the drawings. Material components for contraction joints shall be as specified in Section 07900 - Sealants. 2.06 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Construction joint types shall be as indicated on the drawings. 1. Type "A" shall be used for vertical walls of water retaining structures or walls that will experience groundwater. 2. Type "B" shall be as an alternative to Type "A" where noted on drawing. 3. Type "C" shall be used for vertical walls of non -water retaining structures. 4. Type "D" shall be used for slabs of water retaining structures. 5. Type "E" shall be used for slabs of non -water retaining structures and slabs subject to light traffic loads. B. Construction joint locations shall be selected by CONTRACTOR and approved by ENGINEER. PART .3 .._ EXECUTION _.,. _...._._ _ _...__._ .___...._._. ._.._ 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WATER STOPS A. Join water stops at all intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. Center the water stop on the joint. Hold water stop positively in correct position. In the event of damage to the water stop, repair the water stop in an acceptable manner. Vibrate concrete to obtain impervious concrete in the vicinity of all joints. B. —....----........ ---- .- --- -------.._..-- -- -- --------._.—�. In horizontal joints, ensure that the areas below the plastic water _ —- stop are completely filled with concrete. Make a visual inspection of the entire water stop area during the concrete placement. Limit concrete placement to top of water stop in first pass, vibrate the. concrete under the water stop, lift the water stop to confirm full consolidation without voids, then place remaining concrete to full height of slab. Procedure shall apply to full length of plastic water stops. 03251 2/20/04 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 2 442.B1 L�, C. Provide water stops in all construction joints. Place horizontal water stops immediately after the pour is completed and before concrete has begun to set. Puddle each side to level the concrete and assure that the water stop is properly embedded. Where stops are spliced, they shall be lapped at least 12 inches and secured together with sheet metal screws. After the concrete has set to the point where the surface can be cut with a broom or a stream of water, cut off the surface to a rough finish, minimum roughness of 1/4-inch amplitude, with all laitance removed and the concrete left clean. Place vertical water stop and secure in forms prior to placing concrete. D. Submit shop drawings of all types of construction joints. Show, in sufficient detail, the supports for the water stop prior to both pours to demonstrate that the plastic water stop will remain in its proper location until completely encased. E. Plastic Water Stop: Install in accordance with the details shown and the instructions of the manufacturer. At least 10 minutes shall be allowed before the new splice shall be pulled or strained in any way. The finished splices shall provide a cross section that is dense and free of porosity with tensile strength of not less than 80 percent of the unspliced materials. F. Splices and Joints: Prior to use of the water stop material in the fabricated constructed of each size or field, a sample of a cross shape of material to be used shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. These samples shall be fabricated so that the material and workmanship represent in all respects the fittings to be furnished under this Specification. Field splices and joints shall be made in accordance with the water stop manufacturer's instructions using a thermostatically controlled heating iron. 3.02 JOINT PREPARATION A. The joints shall be accurately located and constructed to produce t straight joints; and shall be vertical or horizontal, where walls intersect sloping floors. H. The concrete pour shall not commence until after the joint preparation has been inspected and accepted by the ENGINEER. C. Prior to placing the abutting concrete for all construction joints, the contact surface shall be cleaned by sandblasting or other approved to all laitance, expose the aggregate, and roughen means remove surface to a minimum of 1/4-inch amplitude. The exposed portion of the reinforcing steel shall be cleaned of all concrete. The cleaning method shall be conducted so as not to damage the water stop, if one is present. Grout for horizontal construction joints shall be as specified in Section 03300-Concrete.-... D. Roughen the surface of the hardened concrete by one of the -following methods: Sandblasting the - foundation and reinforcing-- dowels..-.after- -the.-.. concrete has fully cured to remove all laitance and spillage, and to expose sound aggregate. 2. Water blasting the foundation and reinforcing dowels after the concrete has partially cured to remove all laitance and spillage, and to expose sound aggregate. 3. Green cutting fresh concrete with high pressure water and hand tools to remove all laitance and spillage from the foundation and reinforcing dowels, and to expose sound aggregate. 2/20/04 03251 442.E1 3 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS I E. Location: Joints as shown on the Drawings, or as accepted by the EN- GINEER. F. Time Between Pours: At least 2 hours must elapse after depositing concrete in long or high columns and/or heavy walls before depositing in beams, girders, or slabs supported thereon. For short columns and low height walls, 10 feet or less, wait at least 45 minutes prior to depositing concrete in beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, or slabs supported thereon. Beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, and haunches shall be considered as part of the floor or roof system and shall be placed monolithically therewith. Where cold joints will result and this joint will be below the finished water surface, provide and install a water stop in the joint. 3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS A. The premolded joint filler shall be of sufficient width to completely fill the joint space. If a water stop is in the joint, the premolded joint -filler shall be accurately cut to butt tightly against the water stop and the side forms. B. At locations where joint sealant or filler is to be applied, the premolded joint filler shall be precut to the required depth, see details on Drawings. C. Cavities for joint sealant shall be formed with either precut, premolded joint filler; or smooth, accurately- shaped material that can be removed. D. Concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated along the joint form to produce a dense, smooth surface. Surface irregularities along the joint sealant cavity, due to improper concrete consolidation or faulty form removal, shall be repaired with an approved compound compatible with the joint sealant in a manner that is satisfactory to the sealant manufacturer. E. Bituminous type premolded joint filler shall be installed by driving nails at about 1 foot on center through the filler to provide anchors into the concrete when it is placed. Place premolded joint filler in the forms in the proper position before concrete is poured. Install premolded joint filler in all walks (to provide intervals), at all changes in direction at intersections, and at each side of driveway entrances. 3.04 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINTS A. The preformed control joints shall be installed straight, flush, or slightly below the top of the slab, and with equipment and methods approved by the manufacturer of the, joint material. B. Steel preformed tongue -and -groove type shall be adequately braced to withstand pressure of wet concrete. END OF SECTION 03251 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 4 2/20/04 442.E1 CI t 11 1 1 . .... . , - . . 1_1 I 1 t 1 SECTION 03300 CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers all work necessary for providing, testing and placing ready mix concrete. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements which apply to the work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.O2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEMORR A. Section 03100 - Formwork. B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03251 - Expansion and Construction Joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS (AS REFERENCED IN FLORIDA BUILDING CODR) A. ACI 214 "Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compressive Test Results of Field Concrete". B. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirement for Reinforced Concrete". C. ASTM C31 "Standard Method for Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flexure Test Specimens in the Field". D. ASTM C33 "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates". E. ASTM C94 "Standard Specification for Ready -Mix Concrete". 1.04 SUBXITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals and shall include the following: 1. Concrete mix designs and trial mix laboratory reports._ 2. Manufacturer's certification of admixtures. 3. Contractor's schedule and sequence of placement. 4. All Test Results. 5. Drawings showing locations of construction joints. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE p ; A. - "Submit certificates of mill reports on all foreign cements for review by_ ENGINEER before batching concrete. B. Secure the services of a reputable manufacturer for counseling regarding the use of any specified admixture. C. The ENGINEER shall have access to and have the right to inspect all batch plants, cement mills, and supply facilities of suppliers, manufacturers, subcontractors, and contractors providing products included in these Specifications. Batch plants shall have current certification that all weighing scales have been tested and are within 2/20/04 03300 442.El 1 CONCRETE it the tolerances as set forth in the National Bureau of Standards Handbook No. 44. 1.06 CERTIFICATION A. Submit batch delivery tickets to the ENGINEER in compliance with and in accordance to ASTM C94. 1.07 TESTING A. Performed by an acceptable Engineering Laboratory at OWNER's expense. CONTRACTOR shall assist in the collection of samples. Any retests shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense within the Scope of the Contract. B. Criteria: I. Each test: not less than 5 cylinders; retain one after 28 days. . 2. One test for every 50.consecutive cubic yards of concrete cast. 3. Furnish ENGINEER with 4 certified copies of tests made of 2 prior to form removal, 2 at 28 days and l hold. C. Questionable strength of in -place concrete: 1. Additional tests may be ordered by the ENGINEER. 2. Execute the core tests in accordance with ASTM C42 procedure. 3. Costs of additional tests showing strength of in -place concrete conforming to design criteria are the responsibility of the OWNER. 4. Costs of additional tests showing noncompliance with the design criteria are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. 5. Additional items at CONTRACTOR's expense: a. Provide load tests as directed by the ENGINEER. b. Reinforce structure as directed or remove and replace all under strength concrete structure in place. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement 1. Portland cement Type I or Type II conforming to ASTM C 150. In addition, the tricalcium aluminate content of Type I cement shall not exceed 12 percent. 2. Type I or Type II cement, at the Contractor's option, may be used for nonhydraulic structures. 3. Type II cement or Type I cement, in combination with pozzolan (fly ash) as hereinafter specified, shall be used for all hydraulic structures and sanitary sewer structures. B. Water: potable, salt free conforming to ASTM C94 1 ri 1 I I 1 ... _.. _. .1. -] C Fine Aggregate 1Re-xular) : salt free °and clean -conforming to ASTM C33 , . g Fine-Aggre_rate _(Pumu) : -salt-- free and- clean,--conforming---to--FDOT--902- D. Coarse Aggregat 1_Re lam: salt free and clean, conforming to ASTM C33, maximum size 1 %-inch (3/4-inch for water retaining structures). Coarse Agglega.te (Sump):_ Salt free and clean, size #89, FDOT 901. E. All a re t s: quarried/mined in fresh water only. 03300 2/20/04 CONCRETE 2 442.E1 1 I t F. Screenings: Screenings meeting the requirements of FDOT 902-5 may be substituted for fine aggregates. 2.02 NIXES A. Fillets, thrust blocks, sidewalks, and miscellaneous non-structural slabs on grade. 1. 28 day compressive strength: 3000 p.s.i. 2. Admixture: As required below, use only specified product. 3. Slump: 5 inches, t 1 inch. 4. Air content (ASTM C 231): 4 to 6 percent. B. Structural (walls, columns, beams, footings, floor slabs and elevated slabs) and precast concrete: 1. 28 day compressive strength: 4000 p.s,i., minimum, or as indicated on the Drawings or other section.$. a. Strengths noted on the Drawings or other sections take precedence over herein specified amounts. 2. Water -cement ratio: w/c s 0.4. 3. Slump: 5 inches, t 1 inch. 4. Air Content (ASTM C231): 4 to 6 percent. 5. Admixture: As required below, use only specified products. C. Pavement (Drives/Roadways): 1. 28 day compressive strength: 4000 p.s.i. 2. Water -cement ratio: w/c s 0.5. 3. Slump: 5 inches, f 1 inch. 4. Air Content (ASTM C231): 4 to 6 percent _ 5. Admixture: As required below, use only specified products. D. Flowable Fill 1. Cement: 50 to 100 lbs/Cy. (As indicated on drawings.) 2. Pozzolan (Flyash): 0 to 600 lbs/Cy. 3. Fine Aggregate: 2750 lb/Cy. 4. Water: 500 lbs/Cy. (Maximum) E. Curbs 1. 28 day compressive strength: 3000 psi 2. slump: 2-inches, t 1-inch. 3. Air Content (ASTM C231): 5 percent. 4. Admixtures: As required below--use-only specified products. -.__.. 2.03 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining - 1. Provide air -entraining admixture in all concrete. Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 260, except it shall be nontoxic after 30 days and shall contain no chlorides. Furnish manufacturer's compliance ------------------�. ._ ........__�-------.statement---for -these B. Water -Reducing 1. All concrete shall contain a water -reducing admixture. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A or Type D, except it shall contain no chlorides, shall be nontoxic after 30 days, and shall be compatible with the air -entraining admixtures. The amount of admixture added to the concrete shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Furnish a compliance 2/20/04 03300 442.E1 3 CONCRETE I statement that the admixture used satisfies all requirements of this Specification. C. Pozzolan (Fly -Ash) 1. The pozzolan to be used in combination with Type I cement, as previously specified for use in all hydraulic structures and sewers, shall be Class C or Class F fly ash conforming to ASTM C 618-78 and furnish test data confirming that the fly ash in combination with the cement to be used meets all strength requirements, is compatible with air -entraining agents and other additives, and provides increased sulfate resistance equivalent to or better than Type 11 cement. D. Silica Fume (Microsilica) I. Concrete for water retaining structure walls shall have a Silica Fume admixture. Material shall be slurry or densifed form. Material shall be Rheomac SF100 as manufactured by Master Builders Technologies or equal. Use of this product shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommenda- tions. 2. Amount of microsilica required shall be 7$ of cement content or manufacturer's recommendation, whichever is greater. 3. where this material is used, formwork must remain in place and water curing shall be used for a minimum of seven (7) full days from placement of concrete or until concrete has achieved a minimum of 2/3 its specified compressive strength. 4. Use of water -reducing admixture in conjunction with this product shall be as recommended by MANUFACTURER. 2.04 BONDING AGENT A. Product shall be recommended by manufacturer as suitable. to meet job. requirements with regard to surface, pot life, set time,. vertical or; horizontal application, forming restrictions, etc. Furnish manufacturer's specific instructions for this job application, and obtain ENGINEER's review prior to purchase. B. Bondingua ageri or equal. t shall be Epoxy Adhesive 24LPL as manufactured by Thoroc, ._........ _— 2.05 XVAPORATION RETARDANT A. Evaporation retardant shall be used where specified to retard rapid evaporation of bleeding water from exposed concrete. The evaporation retardant may be used with or without fluorescent color tint which shall disappear completely upon drying. It shall be sprayed onto the surface of fresh concrete immediately after screeding to react with surface moisture and shall be reapplied after smoothing the surface - ----- with--a---bull-- float.--to--ensure-.-a—continuousr.—compacted--monomoleculax layer. The evaporation retardant shall be CONFILM, as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., or equal. 2.06 CURING COMPOUNDS A. Normal placement without special finish; approved products: 1. Master Builders Company: "Confilm". 2. Sonneborn-Contech: "Kure-N'Seal". 03300 2/20/04 CONCRETE 4 442.El 1J OU [7 n 1-1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Place no concrete until all reinforcing steel, pipes, inserts, sleeves, conduits, etc., have been set in place and reviewed by the ENGINEER. Notify the ENGINEER of scheduled pours 24 hours prior to placement. 3.02 PLACING A. Placement shall conform to the requirements and recommendations of ACI 304 and ACI 318, except as modified herein. B. Place concrete as soon as possible after leaving mixer, without segregation or loss of ingredients, without splashing forms or steel above, and in layers not over 1.5 feet deep. Thevertical free fall drop to final placement shall not exceed that hereinafter specified. C. Place concrete expeditiously in clean :Forms that are not hot to the touch; spray forms with water just prior to placing concrete. Before placing concrete directly against earth, install vapor barrier to prevent water absorption, secure reinforcement in position, inspect, and approve before placing concrete. Do not rest runways for trans- porting concrete on the reinforcing steel. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in final position; and, do not allow concrete to drop freely more than 5 feet. Place all concrete during daylight, unless otherwise authorized. Where reinforcing steel above the top of the cast is coated with concrete while placing below, remove all concrete from such reinforcing steel after the placing is complete and prior to the next cast. D. Place slabs -on -grade carefully to avoid damages to the vapor barrier. E. When placing concrete, use of aluminum pipe or other aluminum conveying devices will not be permitted. F. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from the space to be occupied by the concrete. Prior to placement of concrete, dampen gravel fill under slabs on ground, dampen sand where vapor barrier is specified, and dampen all wood forms. Reinforcement shall be secured in position and acceptable to the ENGINEER before concrete is placed. Conform to ACI 304 and ACI 318 and to other requirements needed to obtain the finishes specified. 3.03 PUMPING CONCRETE 1A. 1 r 2/20/04 442.E1 Pumping of concrete will be permitted with the ENGINEER's approval. If, in the ENGINEER's opinion, the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the CONTRACTOR shall discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods „ ... Minimum Pumping Equipment Requirements 1. The CONTRACTOR shall have a standby pump, conveyor system, crane and concrete bucket, or other system acceptable to the ENGINEER, on the site during pumping, in order to provide adequate redundan- cy to assure completion of the concrete placement without cold joints in the event of breakdown of the primary placing equipment. 2. The minimum diameter of the hose (conduit) shall be 4 inches. 5 03300 CONCRETE 3. Pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, are not functioning properly, shall be replaced. 4. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete shall not be used. C. Pumped concrete field quality control samples for slump, test cylinders and shrinkage specimens will be taken at the placement (discharge) end of the line. 3.04 RNMOVAL OF WATER A. Unless the tremie method for placing concrete is specified, remove all water from the space to be occupied by the concrete. 3.05 CONSOLIDATION A. Consolidate concrete in layers by internal vibrating equipment, supple- mented by hand rodding and tamping as required. Do not use vibrators to move the concrete laterally inside the forms. B. Maintain internal vibrators at speed of at least 5000 impulses per minute when submerged in concrete. Maintain at least 1 spare vibrator in working condition at site at all times. C. Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. in no case more than 15 seconds per square foot of exposed surface. Move the vibrator constantly and place in each specific spot only once. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE IN HOT WEATHER. A. Prepare concrete aggregates, mixing water, and other ingredients; place concrete; cure; and protect in accordance with the requirements of ACI 305. Provide special admixtures and special curing methods required by other paragraphs in this section even though not required by ACT 305 and ACI 318. Water -reducing and/or set -retarding admixtures shall be used in such quantities as recommended by the manufacturer to assure that the concrete is workable, and placement lift lines will not. be, visible in the architectural concrete finishes. B. Every effort shall be made to maintain a concrete temperature below 90 degrees F at time of placement. Ingredients may be cooled before mixing to prevent excessive concrete temperature. - C. Provisions may be made for windbreaks,.-shading,-fo sprayin s rink- — ling or wet cover, when necessary. D. Apply evaporation retardant as herein specified and in strict confor- mance with manufacturer's written instructions. CONCRETE I 3.07 PLACING N COLD WEATHER...,..... A. Do not place concrete when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees V---or-approaching -40-degrees 1---and -€ all ing,--without. special protection as approved by the ENGINEER. No concrete shall be placed against frozen earth or ice, or against forms and reinforcement with frost or ice present. - 3.08 JOINTS A. Construction joints shall be as specified in Section 03251 - Expansion and Construction Joints. 03300 2/20/04 CONCRETE 6 442.E1 [l fl I 1 3.09 BONDING TO OLD CONCRETE A. Coat the contact surfaces with bond agent specified hereinbefore. The method of preparation and application of the bonding agent shall conform to the manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations for specific application for this project. obtain this recommendation in writing from the manufacturer's representative. 3.10 CURING A. Begin curing of concrete as soon as practicable after placing, but not more than 3 hours thereafter. B. Begin curing of the structural elements immediately after removal of forms. C. Apply curing compounds as specified. D. Water curing methods are preferred for all water retaining structures in lieu of application of curing compounds. Cure concrete by keeping the surface continuously wet for 7 days where normal Portland cement is used, or 3 days where high -early strength Type III cement is used. Subject to approval by the ENGINEER, one of the following methods shall be followed: PALLS 1. Concrete forms shall be left in place and kept sufficiently damp at all times to prevent opening of the joints and drying of the concrete. 2. Exposed surfaces shall be continuously sprinkled. SLABS 8 1. Protect surface by ponding; or 2. Cover with burlap or cotton mats kept continuously wet; or 3. Cover with 1-inch layer of set sand, earth, or sawdust, and keep continuously wet; or 4. Continuously sprinkle the exposed surface; or _..__._... ....... _..--..._._ ...._.._ .... _� 5. Spray surface with curing compound and when hard enough to sustain foot traffic on same day as pour, lay sprinkler hoses and cover with Visqueen sheets. Keep enough water from sprinkler hoses to keep surface of slab under Visqueen wet for full cure period; or 6. Other agreed upon method that will insure that moisture is present -..._._..:.. and°uniform at all times on the entire surface of the slab. A. Immediately after stripping forms, patch all defective areas with non - of shrink non-metallic grout. Grout after curing shall match color adjacent concrete. Patch defects as specified below or as designated by the ENGINEER. Clean, dampen, and fill, all the holes with patching mortar. 1. Major defective areas, as judged by the ENGINEER, including those resulting from the leakage of forms, excessive honeycombs, large 2/20/04 03300 442.E1 7 CONCRETE 1 bulges, and large offsets at form joints: chip away to a depth of at least 1/4 inch; and, the surfaces that are to be patched coat with an epoxy-polysulfide adhesive. Press non -shrink, non- metallic grout in for a complete bond and finish to match adjacent areas. 2. Minor defective areas, as judged by the ENGINEER, including. honeycombs, air bubbles, holes resulting from removal of ties and those resulting from leakage of forms: patch with non -shrink grout without resorting to chipping. Minor bulges and offsets at form joints: finish as specified herein below. 3.12 CONCRETE WALL FINISHES A. Type W-1 1. All snap -tie holes shall be filled with non -shrink, non-metallic grout. All projections shall be KNOCKED OFF. Also all honeycomb areas and rock pockets shall be patched. Small air holes do not require patching. B. Type W-2 1. All snap -tie holes shall be plugged with non -shrink, non-metallic color matched grout that has been approved by ENGINEER. GRIND OFF projections, fins, and rough spots. Repair all other defects such as honeycomb areas, rock pockets, and rough spots which are a result of form release agent failure or other reasons with color matched non -shrink grout. C. Type W-3 I. All snap -tie holes shall be plugged with non -shrink, non-metallic grout that has been approved by ENGINEER. GRIND OFF all projec- tions, fins, and rough spots. Repair all defects as per type W-2. Apply a cementitious coating per Section 09900 - Protective Coatings as scheduled on the Drawings, or as specified in .other sections. 3.13 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES 1 F-1 I I r A. General 1. The excessive use of "jitterbugs" or other special tools designed _.fore the purpose of forcing --the- coarse aggregate away-- --- . y_... from the - surface and allowing a layer of mortar to accumulate will not be permitted on any slab finish. The dusting of surfaces with dry materials will not be permitted. Slabs and floors shall be thoroughly completed by vibration. All edges of slabs and tops of walls shall be rounded off with -a steel -edging tool, except where,: a chamfered edge is indicated on the Drawings. Steel edging tool radius shall be 1/4-inch for all slabs subject to wheeled traffic, ._,. ---T_.. •..._ _....B __Type_g_1__.-(Steel.. -Troweled F 1. Finish by screeding and floating with straightedges to bring the surfaces to the required finish elevation shown on the Drawings. While the concrete is still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear a persons weight without deep imprint, it shall be wood floated to a true, even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. Sufficient pressure shall be used on the wood floats to bring moisture to the surface. After surface moisture has disappeared, the concrete shall be hand troweled to produce a smooth, impervi- 03300 2/20/04 CONCRETE 8 442.E1 i 1 ous surface, free from trowel marks. An additional troweling shall be given the surface for the purpose of burnishing. The final troweling shall produce a ringing sound from the trowel. Dry cement or additional water shall not be used in troweling, nor will excessive troweling be permitted. 2. The slab finish tolerances and slope tolerances and/or repairs shall be as hereinbefore specified. Floor flatness measurements will be made the day after a concrete floor is finished and before the shoring is removed, in order to eliminate any effects of shrinkage, curling, and deflection. The 10-foot long straightedge shall be supported at each end with steel gauge blocks whose thickness are equal to specified tolerance. Floor surface shall not have crowns so high as to prevent 10-foot straightedge from resting on these two end blocks, nor law spots so low that a third block of twice the tolerance in thickness can easily pass under the supported 10-foot straightedge. 3. Compliance with the designated limits in four of five consecutive measurements should generally be satisfactory unless obvious faults are observed. A check for adequate slope and drainage will also be made to confirm compliance with these specifications. C. Type S-2 (Wood float Finish) 1. Slabs to receive fill and mortar setting beds shall be finished by screeding with straightedges to bring the surface to the required finish plane. Slab shall be wood floated to compact and seal surface. All laitance shall be removed and the surface left clean. Subject to approval of the ENGINEER, an acceptable aggregate revealing material may be used and laitance washed off when concrete has seta. D. Type S-3 (Underside of Elevated Slab) 1. When forming is removed, the underside of slab shall have all projection ground off, all rock pockets and honeycomb area defects repaired. E. Type S-4 (Exterior Sroomed Finish) 1. Finish concrete as specified for Type S-1 floor finish above, except the final troweling shall be omitted and the surface shall be finished by drawing a fine -hair broom lightly across the -- surface: All brooming shall be in the same direction and parallel to expansion joints, or, in the case of inclined slabs, perpendic- ular to the slope, except for a round roof slab, broom surface in radial direction. F. Type S-6 (Power Machine Finish) 1. In lieu of hand finishing, the CONTRACTOR may use an approved for finishing concrete floors and slabs in accor- power machine dance -with - the -_ directions - of --the . machine. _manufacturer. -_and -as__.._.... approved by the ENGINEER. The use of a power machine will not be allowed when the concrete has not attained the necessary set to allow finishing without introducing high and low spots in the slab. The first steel troweling for slab Type S-1 finish should be done by hand. 2/20/04 03300 442.E1 9 CONCRETE 1 3.14 BEAN AND COLUMN FINISHES A. Type B-1 1. Knock off all fins and projections. Repair all rock pockets and honeycomb areas. B. Type B-2 I. Beams shall be ground to remove all form marks. Repair all rock pockets. C. Type B-3 1. Beams shall be ground to remove all form marks. Repair all rock pockets. Fill all air voids. Apply finishes as -scheduled on the drawings. D. Type C-1 1. Knock off all fins and projections. Repair all rock pockets and honeycomb areas. E. Type C-2 1. Column shall be ground to remove all form marks. Repair all rock pockets. F. Type C-3 1. Column shall be ground to remove all form marks. Repair all rock pockets. Fill all air pockets. Apply finishes as scheduled on the drawings. 3.15 WATER LEAKAGE TEST A. All water -holding structures shall be subjected to leakage tests after the concrete has been cured and obtained its design strength, and before backfill, stucco, cementitious coating or other work which will cover the exposed faces of the walls is begun. B. All basins to be subjected to leakage tests shall be filled with water to the normal liquid level line. After the basin has been kept full for 48 hours, it will be assumed for the purposes of the test that the absorption of moisture by the concrete in the basin is complete. All valves and gates to the structure shall then be verified in the closed position and the change in water surface measured for a 24-hour period. C. During the test period, all exposed portions of the structure shall be examined, and all visible leaks or damp spots shall be marked andsuch leaks or damp spots shall be later patched or corrected in a manner acceptable to the -ENGINEER. If the drop in water surface in the 24- hour period exceeds 1/10 of 1 percent of the normal volume of liquid -- _._--contained in the basin, ..-the-leakage--shall.be..,considered ..-excess-ive D. if the leakage is excessive, the basin shall be drained, all leaks previously marked shall be patched, and the necessary repairs made. The CONTRACTOR's method of repair shall be subject to the requirements of these specifications and submitted for review by the ENGINEER. E. The basin shall then be refilled and again tested for leakage. This process shall be continued until the drop in water surface in a 13-hour period with the basin full is less than 1/10 of 1 percent of the volume 03300 2/20/04 CONCRETE 10 442.El 1 1 of liquid held in the basin. All repairs of faulty workmanship and materials and additional tests shall be made by the CONTRACTOR in an acceptable manner at no additional cost to the OWNER. Bath the correction for excessive leakage and the removal of the damp or wet spots on walls shall be required to pass the leakage test. 3.16 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER HOLDING STRUCTURES A. Disinfection and associated bacteriological testing shall be completed as specified in Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, structures and equipment). 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Only ready mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C94 will be accepted. B. Place all concrete within 1-1/2 hours after introduction of water to mix. C. Under no circumstances may additional water be added to mix. D. Discard unused concrete older than 1-1/2 hours. Retempering is prohib- ited. 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 11 03300 CONCRETE SECTION 03315 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section, covers the Work necessary for the design, submittal preparation, fabrication, erection, construction and testing of the prestressed composite tank complete with foundation preparation, piping, access hatches, ladders and safety devices, ventilators and overflows, painting and all other appurtenances. B. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, for information and requirements which apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for the project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. B. Section 03100 - Formwork. C. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. D. Section 03300 - Concrete. E. Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. F. Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, Structures and Equipment). 1.03 TANK DESCRIPTION A. The prestressed composite tank shall have a capacity of 2,000,000 have an inside diameter of 115'-011, a side wall depth of 251- gallons, 91, and be constructed at the elevations and with pipe penetrations as shown on the Drawings. -tensile B. All horizontal prestressing shall be done with high strength wire. C. The tank shall be designed in accordance with ACI 344 R-W and constructed with consideration of the following minimum requirements: 1. The floor slab shall be a cast -in -place concrete; minimum of 4 inches thick and with minimum reinforcing steel equal to at least v 0.006 times the concrete cross sectional area. 2. The roof shall be a cast -in -place concrete dome at least 3 inches thick and with minimum reinforcing steel equal to at least 0.0025 times the concrete cross sectional area. 3. The walls shall have a shotcrete core with a continuous internal steel diaphragm. 2/20/04 03315 442.E1 1 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK F1 4. The wall shall be prestressed with 8 gauge wire stressed to an initial stress of 145,000 PSI. 5. Wall openings or wall penetrations for pipes or other accessories except for special manholes shall not be permitted; all piping shall be through the floor slab and under the footing. All piping under the footings shall be encased in concrete a minimum of 12 inches thick. 6. Design Loads and Foundation Criteria: a. Dead Loads. b. Roof live load of 12 psf for dome construction. C. Wind Load: In accordance with the provisions of ASCE 7- 98(Criteria per Florida Building Code Section 1606.1.7 shall be as noted on drawings). d. Allowable soil bearing pressure _ 3,000 psf R (including weight of water); for further information, refer to Appendix A - Report of Geotechnical Exploration. e. Maximum differential settlement - 1 inch across the tank diameter. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Detailed finite element design calculations, signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. A. A sliding waterstop shall be used in the floor/wall joint. Submit load/shear/deflection data to support shear and deflection calculations for base of wall. Tests must have been generated for the particular waterstop Configuration proposed. Actual test data to verify "N" value for sliding friction to be submitted. B. Complete design drawings signed and sealed by a professional engineer, registered in the State of Florida. C. Description of construction method and/or materials. D. Construction Schedule. E. Certificates and test reports on all prestressing steel components. F. Concrete mix designs. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS fl I I El I A. The tank shall be designed and constructed by a company which specializes in this type of construction and is Capable of meeting all of the requirements of these specifications. Companies claiming to meet these specification requirements must provide with the General CONTRACTOR's Bid information proof of their experience in the design and construction of wire -wound circular prestressed composite tanks over the past 5 years. No such company shall be considered qualified unless --it has de's`ignect and built_-n-its own -name not less.. than ten- (10)..-- -- -- ---- . dome covered prestressed composite tanks of 2,000,000 gallon size or larger, which meet these specifications and which are now giving satisfactory service. A complete list of information concerning the referenced tanks along with the names, addresses and phone numbers of the owners should be submitted with the Bid, but must be provided within three (3) days of the CITY's request. These references may be Checked during the review of the Bid. 03315 2/20/04 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK 2 442.E1 B. The tank construction company shall have on its staff a full-time professional engineer, who shall have no less than five years experience in the design and field construction of circular prestressed composite tanks, and who shall be in responsible engineering charge of the Work to be done. All working drawings and design calculations shall carry the seal of such registered professional engineer. A quality control inspector from the tank contractor shall visit the project site a minimum of one (1) time per week for a period of not less than four (4) hours. The inspector shall be present continuously during the base slab pour and at all other critical times as determined by the ENGINEER or OWNER. Failure to satisfy this criteria will result in work stoppage. Any delays induced by the CONTRACTOR'S failure to satisfy this criteria will not be considered as a basis for a contract time extension. C. The tank contractor shall have the following minimum crew on site at the tank: all times during any construction activity on One (1) superintendent with a minimum of 5 years experience and 10 completed tanks as a superintendent on prestressed concrete tank projects. One (1) nozzleman with a minimum of S years experience and 10 completed prestressed concrete tanks as an ACI 506 Certified Nozzleman. (Only required during shotcreting operations.) Two (2) tank builders each with a minimum of 2 years experience and 5 completed prestressed concrete tank project. 1.06 MATERIAL STORAGE A. Tank contractor shall be responsible for the proper handling and storage of the prestressing materials. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The tank construction company shall warrant workmanship and materials on the complete structural portion of the tank for a five (5) year period from date of Substantial Completion. In case leakage or other five (5) the tank construction defects appear within the year period, company shall promptly repair the tank at its own expense upon written notice by the OWNER that such defects have been found. Leakage is defined as a stream flow of liquid appearing on the exterior of the tank, the source of which is- from the inside -of the tank. B. Warranties shall be in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS i7 �1 r�L .- - A.._ 'The use- --ofa-manufacturer's-name and model -or --catalog number, is -f or- t a -.-- purpose of establishingthe standard of quality and general configuration desired. The prestressed composite tank shall be as manufactured by The Crom Corporation, Gainesville, Florida; Precon Corporation, Newberry, Florida; or equal. 2.02 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03300 - Concrete, and as 2/20/04 442.E1 03315 3 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE 'TANK modified below, except that a 3/8-inch maximum size aggregate may be used for dome concrete pump mix, if properly designed. The following minimum design criteria shall be used: Compressive Strength Compressive Strength Allowable Compressive Stress Allowable Compressive Stress Due to Initial Prestressing Force *t - thickness of core wall Concrete fc' 4000 psi at 28 days Shotcrete fg' 4000 psi or greater at 28 days fq 1250 + 75t with 0.45 fg' maximum * fgi 0.50 fgi or less, with a maximum of 2000 psi (where fIgi' is defined as compressive strength at time initial prestressing force is applied) 2.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. ASTM A 82 and A 185. Fabric shall be in sheet form and 6-gauge minimum. Any rolled fabric shall be rejected. All fabric shall be adequately supported with plastic tipped bolsters. The practice of pulling up fabric during placement of concrete instead of providing adequate supports shall not be used. Wire ties shall be galvanized. 2.05 STEEL REINFORCING A. ASTM, A 615, deformed Grade 60 bars with minimum service load design allowable stress - 18,000 psi. 2.06 PRESTRESSING WIRE A. Steel wire used for prestressing shall be eight ''gauge"wire 'and shall meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Diameter of wire - 0.1620 inches (8 gauge). 2. Area of wire - 0.0206 square inches. 3. Ultimate strength - 231,000 psi. 4. Initial stress - 145,600 psi. 5. Working stress - 115,000 psi. (wall) 120,000 psi (dome) 2.07 ANCHORAGE A. Standard anchorage for prestressing normally used by'the prestressing company shall be capable of safely developing the full strength of the units and not be susceptible to galvanic action with the prestressing steel. 2.08 LAMINATE PROPERTIES A. The fiberglass, reinforced, plastic laminate shall have the following .physical properties and, where required, shall be tested in accordance with the ASTM standards indicated: 1 1-1 03315 2/20/04 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK 4 442.E1 1 AST Specific Gravity 1.5 D792 Water Absorption, 24 Hours 0.50% D570 Ultimate Flexural Strength 20,000 psi D790 Ultimate Tensile Strength 20,000 psi D638 Ultimate Compressive Strength 20,000 psi D695 Ultimate Shear Strength 10,000 psi D732 Design of all components shall use a factor of safety of 4.0 based on the ultimate strength.. The average Sarcol hardness of the laminate shall be no less than 30. Barcol Impressor Model GYZJ 934-1 shall be used for determining hardness. Calibration of the Barcol instrument shall be verified by comparing with a blank specimen having a known hardness reading of 85- 87. For each fiberglass component, ten readings on the clean laminate surface shall be made. After eliminating the two high and. two law readings, the average of the remainder shall be the reported hardness reading. The fiberglass, reinforced, plastic laminate shall have a thickness of no less than 1/4-inch. At no point in the laminate shall the thickness be less than this minimum. 2.09 PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS A. Prefabricated structural components used in the manufacture of all fiberglass products shall be made of polyester resin reinforced with by forming process. glass fibers and produced a continuous Prefabricated structural components shall have the following physical properties: Specific Gravity 1.52 Water Absorption, 24 Hours. 0.75% Barcol Hardness 50 Ultimate Tensile Strength 20,000 psi Ultimate Compressive Strength 20,000 psi Ultimate Shear Strength 3,000 psi Design of all components shall use a factory of safety of 4.0 on the ultimate strength. 11 1 2.10 STEEL DIAPHRAGM SHELL The tank diaphragm steel shall conform to ASTM A36 for Commercial Quality cold -rolled sheet. Use a minimum of 26-gauge sheet for form corrugations of a pattern to farm a continuous positive watertight seal and a strong mechanical key between shotcrete and steel. The steel sheet shall be rejected if it contains any openings or hales regardless of size. Steel sheets shall be furnished in one continuous. length - conforming to the full height of the wall. Only vertical joints will -be - permitted -between sheets --- Provide--details..-for_ seal ing—vertical.—...�� Joints. The tank CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples of this vertical joint detail together with integral pumped epoxy material or other acceptable method to show evidence of a satisfactory seal. A 2.11 CURTAIN BAFFLE WALL A. The suspended baffle curtain shall be constructed of 45 mil reinforced polypropylene geomembrane, or equal. A 3/8" diameter polypropylene rope shall be enclosed in a hem around the perimeter. The hem shall 2/20/04 03315 442.E1 5 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK 11 be triple thick, double folded. All hems and splices shall be heat welded with a minimum width of one inch overlap. B. The curtain shall be sized and installed so there is positive contact with the floor and wall. Where the curtain contacts these areas, 2" chafing strip shall be factory installed. A clear gap exceeding M" will not be permitted. The top curtain shall be supported so there is no scalloping or sagging between dome support cables. The hardware used to attach and support the curtain shall be 316 stainless steel. Grommets will not be allowed for main weight bearing supports. Dome support cables shall be a minimum 3/16" diameter with a maximum spacing of 6' on center. 2.12 CONCRETE/SHOTCRETE ADMIXTURES A. Admixtures shall conform to Section 03300 - Concrete. Provide a statement of compliance that the admixtures used, regardless of location in the tank structure, do not contain chlorides or any chemical corrosive to prestressing steel. B. Admixtures must also meet all NSF requirements for contact with potable water. 2.13 TANK ACCESSORIES A. Exterior aluminum tank ladder with safety rail, climbing belt, and ladder security door. 1. All tubular material to be nominal 1-1/2-inch diameter Sch. 40 aluminum pipe 6061-T6 or 6063-T6. 2. Plates and gussets to be structural grade aluminum 6061-T6. B. Interior fiberglass or Type 316 stainless steel tank ladder with rungs fastened to and extending through side rails. Ladder shall be equipped with stainless steel safety :rail with extension and climbing belt. All exposed metal shall be stainless steel including bracket anchorages and fasteners to ensure freedom from corrosion. C. Lockable, aluminum storage box for interior, ,ladder climbing device;. extension rail and belt shall be secured to handrail at top of tank or mounted to the top of the tank dome next to the hatch. D. Roof vent shall be molded of fiberglass 1/4-inch thick. and cover of the 1. Bird screen shall 24 24 mesh316 SS shall throat area as well as the circular rim opening. E. Fiberglass roof hatch shall be 1/4-inch thick laminated fiberglass. 1. A neoprene gasket seals the hatch/curb interface. 2. Hinges, hasps, and all fasteners shall be stainless steel. F. Aluminum handrail :.enclosing roof hatch area.• 1. Rails shall be 1-1/2-inch Sch. 40/6061-T6 aluminum pipe. 2. Fittings shall be Hollaender High Tensile Aluminum Alloy Fittings. 3. Dome anchors shall be 1-1/2-inch x 2-3/4-inch long stainless steel __ -expansion -anchors --to dome -surf ace.._____1._______.___ G. Four (4) precast concrete overflow outlets cast into the roof dome at the high water level line with birdscreen. 1. Screen shall be 24/24 316 SST mesh. H. Influent, effluent, and drain piping and accessories as shown on the Drawings. I. Exterior fiberglass liquid level indicator with precast concrete curb. 03315 2/20/04 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK 6 442.E1 1 Ll 1 1 1 Ci 1 1 1 DA 1 1. The indicator board and target shall be laminated fiberglass at least 1/4-inch thick. 2. Fasteners shall be stainless steel. 3. Indicator graduations shall be in 0.5 foot increments corresponding to the specified sidewall depth (SWD) of the tank. J. Provide one (1) stainless steel wall access manhole. K. Provide precast concrete curb and flange for tank level transmitter. Location and size shall be as indicated on the drawings. L. Provide minimum 2-inch thick concrete bosses, at locations noted on drawings, for tank accessory and/or equipment mounting. M. Provide tank security devices at locations indicated on Drawings. N. Provide tank security devices for three (3) existing tanks at locations indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXEcuTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. verify proper foundation preparation prior to tank construction. Notify ENGINEER of any problems, concerns or need for additional preparation. 3.02 FLOOR SLAB A. Floor slab shall be vibratory screeded to effect consolidation of concrete and proper encasement of floor slab reinforcing steel. B. Floor slab shall be continuously water cured until tank construction is completed. 3.03 STEBL DIAPHRAGM A. All vertical joints in the diaphragm shall be sealed watertight by epoxy injection installed in accordance with U.S. Patent No. 3,822,520. This epoxy injection shall be carried out from bottom of wall to top of wall using a pressure pumping procedure after the steel shell has been fully enclosed, inside and outside, with shotcrete. The epoxy sealant shall be suitable for bonding to concrete, shotcrete, and steel. The sealant shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 881, - Type -III, Grade 1, and - shall be_-a_100 percent solids, moisture insensitive, low modulus epoxy system. When pumped, maximum viscosity of the epoxy shall be 10 poises at 77 degrees F. B. The steel shell design and its epoxy injection procedure shall have been used and proven satisfactory in the -ten tanks required in the tank construction company's experience record. No nail or other holes shall be made in the steel shell for erection or other purposes except for inserting pipe sleeve, reinforcing steel, bolts, or other special - --- ---appurtenances : Such -penetrations--•shal-l--be sealed ---with- an --acceptable---_ _. epoxy sealant. 3.04 SHOTCRBTB A. All shotcrete shall be applied by or under direct supervision of experienced nozzlemen certified in accordance with guidelines by ACT Committee 506. Certification will be accomplished by a recognized authority such as FC&PA*, ACI, or equal. 2/20/04 03315 442.El 7 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK 1 B. Shotcrete mixes shall be: 1. 28 day compressive strength: 4000 psi 2. Water -Cement Ratio: W/C s 0.42 3. Slump: 4 inches, i 1-inch C. Each shotcrete layer shall be broomed prior to final set to effect satisfactory bonding of the following layer. D. Diaphragm and reinforcing steel shall be pressure cleaned prior to application of shotcrete. No shotcrete shall be applied to reinforcing steel or diaphragm which is encrusted with overspray. E. The prestressed composite tank shall be constructed using a wall building system as specified"herein. 1. Tank footer shall be cast to a true radius i 1/4-inch for use as a control surface for tank wall construction. 2. Structure to be used for tank construction shall be positively secured top and bottom to provide constant nozzle -to -wall distance of no greater than six feet. 3. outside core wall and covercoat shotcrete shall be finished to proper radius using a vertical steel blade continuous from top to bottom of tank wall. Interruptions at screed blade for wall protrusions are acceptable. 4. Steel blade shall be capable of producing a shotcrete wall true to within 1/8-inch in 10 feet vertically and t 1/4-inch radially. 5. Steel blade shall be designed to slice shotcrete to the appropriate line and thickness in one pass to eliminate overworking of the shotcrete. 6.. Prestressing wire shall be -located on tank wall using a structure supported vertically on the tank Tooter or ground only. 7. No vertical load or the prestressing operation shall be supported by the tank wall or dome. 8. No horizontal support of the prestressing operation shall be allowed on prestressing -wires or on.. shotcrete--.-encasement----of -----_-_-_--- ---.-. prestressing wire at any time. 9. Other wall systems are acceptable provided the above specified quality control tolerances are met. Alternatives must be submitted for.ENGINEER':s approval. 3.05 DQMIC Roor - A. - The .dome- shall ..-be .-designed as. -a free.-.span,..__spheri.cal-..thin—shell,—with— a one -tenth (1:10) rise. The dome ring girder shall be prestressed with sufficient wire to withstand the dome dead load and design live loads. The ring girder shall have a cross section suitable to accept the applied prestressing forces. All surfaces in the wall/dome ring girder joint shall be coated with an acceptable bonding epoxy. B. The high water level in the tank shall be permitted to encroach on the dome shell no higher than the upper horizontal plane of the dome ring girder. Overflow outlets shall be installed on the dome roof in such 03315 2/20/04 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK 8 442.E1 A I [1 1 1 I [.1 1 1.1 I 1 1 i] I 1 numbers as will provide an overflow open area a minimum of two times the area of the largest tank influent pipe. C. The concrete dome roof shall be water cured until the dome ring girder is prestressed or 7 days, whichever is longer. 3.06 HORIZONTAL PRESTRESSING A. Circumferential prestressing of the tank shall be achieved by the application of cold -drawn, high -carbon steel wire complying with ASTM A648, Class II, or ASTM 821 placed under high tension. A substantial allowance shall be made for prestressing losses due to shrinkage and plastic flow in the shotcrete and due to relaxation in the prestressing steel. B. Placement of the prestressing steel wire shall be electronically controlled and placed in a continuous and uniform helix of such pitch as to provide in each lineal foot of core wall height an initial force and unit compressive stress equivalent to that shown on the drawings. Splicing of the wire shall be permitted only when completing the application of a full coil of wire, or when removing a defective section of wire. C. Areas to be prestressed will contain not less than 10 wires per foot of wall. A maximum of 24 wires per layer per foot will be allowed. shotcrete shall be used to completely encase each individual wire, and protect it from corrosion. To facilitate this encasement, the clear space between adjacent wires is to be no less than one wire diameter. D. Prestressing shall be accomplished by a machine capable of continuously inducing a uniform initial tension in the wire before it is positioned on the tank wall. Tension in the wire shall be generated by methods not dependent on cold working or re -drawing of the wire. In determining compliance with design requirements, the aggregate force of all tensioned wires per foot of wall shall be considered rather than the force per individual wire, and such aggregate force shall be no less than that required by the drawings. 3.07 MASURRNBNT OF 'WIRE STRESS A. The tank construction company shall supply equipment at the construction site to measure tension in the wire after it is positioned on the tank wall. This stress measuring equipment shall include: electronic direct reading stressometer accurate to within 1%; calibrated dynamometers; test stand to field verify the accuracy of the stressometer. The initial tension in each wire shall be recorded. 3.08 CORE WALL - - A. The core wall shall be constructed of shotcrete encasing a steel diaphragm continuous the full wall height without horizontal splices. The thickness of the core wall shall be calculated so as to accept the .--initial-compressive forces applied by prestressing,,backfill-and other. applicable loads. The wall may taper uniformly on the outside face. from top to bottom as required by design computations. In no case shall the core be less than 3-1/2-inches thick. horizontal sections of the wall shall form true circles without flats, excessive bumps, or hollows. 2/20/04 442.El To compensate for bending moments and for shrinkage, differential drying and temperature stresses, the following reinforcing steel shall be incorporated in the core wall: 03315 g PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK �J 1. The top 2-feet of core wall shall have not less than 1 percent circumferential reinforcing. 2. The bottom 3-feet of core wall shall have not less than 1 percent circumferential reinforcing. 3. Inside face: a. 26 gauge steel shell diaphragm continuous the full wall height without horizontal splices. b. Additional vertical and horizontal reinforcing steel bars as required by design computations. 4. Outside Face: a. Vertical reinforcing steel: minimum of #4 bars at 12-inches. center to center. h. Additional vertical and horizontal reinforcing steel bars as required by design computations. The vertical reinforcing steel shall be pressure cleaned.after being set in place and prior to encasing in shotcrete in order to remove any dirt and shotcrete overspray. Interior and exterior surfaces of the core wall shall be continuously water cured until prestressing starts. 3.09 WALL OPENINGS A. When it is necessary for a pipe to pass through the tank wall, the invert of such pipe shall be no less than 18-inches above the floor slab and the prestressing wires required at the pipe elevation shall be distributed above and below the opening leaving an unhanded strip around the entire tank. Ordinarily, unbanded strips shall have a vertical dimension of no more than 36-inches. An axi-symmetric shell analysis will be required for unbanded wall spaces having a vertical dimension greater than 36 inches. All pipe sleeves passing through the wall shall be sealed to the steel shell diaphragm by epoxy injection. 3.10 EXTERIOR COVERCOAT A. After circumferential prestressing wires have been placed, they shall �. be protected by encasement in shotcrete. This shotcrete encasement shall completely encapsulate each wire, and shall permanently bond the wire to the tank wall. The shotcrete cover shall have a thickness of no less than one inch over the wire. when multiple layers of wire are required, shotcrete cover between layers shall be no less than 1/8 inch thick. 3.11 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Exterior surface of the tank shall be coated as specified in Section 09900 -Protective Coatings and as scheduled on the Drawings. B. Exterior base cementitious coat shall have a uniform finish. Rippling and other wave -like imperfections shall not be accepted. C. Interior surface of tank shall not be coated. 03315 2/20/04 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE TANK 10 442.El 3.12 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Tank shall be cleaned and disinfected in accordance with Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, Structures and Equipment). B. General disinfection of tank shall be the use of AWWA C652, Chlorination Method 3 for Disinfection (Section 4.3.3.). END OF SECTION 2/20/04 442.E1 03315 11 PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE.TANK SECTION 03410 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work required to furnish and install the complete. structural precast concrete hollow core planks, B. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for ap- replacement. pearance, maintenance, and C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1,..GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03300 - Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Commercial Standards (Latest Revisions): 1. Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL-116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products". B. Codes 1. Florida Building Code, Latest Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. ShQV Drawin s and Engineering Calculations: Furnish complete shop and including concrete mix casting drawings and engineering calculations, by the designs, for precast concrete hallow core planks, for review ENGINEER in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals, prior to ... fabrication.._.... B. Furnish site specific installation drawings for the precast hollow core planks for review by ENGINEER prior to installation, in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittal. C. ._. drawings, instaNaatt ion drawing and calculations shall be Shop,installation signed/sealed.by Florida Registered Structural Engineer. -- _ �l. 05_ _...QDALITX_ l►SSVRIINC$.. _ _ _�. __ .— __...----------.. A. The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Prestressed Concrete Institute, Plant Certification Program prior to the start of production. A. Fabricator shall have a minimum of ten (10) years successful units similar to units experience in fabrication of precast concrete required for this project. 2/20/04 03410 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 442.E1 1 HOLLOW CORE PLANKS I B. Slabs shall be prestressed, hollow core, machine cast with closely controlled mixing, casting and curing conditions. C. Manufacturer shall be listed in U.L. Fire Resistance Directory. D. Erector shall have a minimum five (5) years of experience in the erection of precast structural concrete similar to the requirement of this project. 1.06 SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. ShiRRina and handling Hollow core slab units shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing, stockpiling, transporting and erection operations only at the lifting or supporting point, or both, as shown on the shop drawings, and with approved lifting devices. Transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed with acceptable equipment and methods, and by qualified personnel. B. to a_e: Store all units off the ground and under cover and so that identification marks are discernible. Separate stacked members by battens across full width of each slab unit. Stack so that lifting devices are accessible and undamaged. 1.07 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Criteria: 1. Minimum Design Loads: a. Dead Load = Actual Member Weight plus weight of insulation and roofing materials. b. Live Load = 30 psf c. Miscellaneous Loads = See Drawings d. Wind Uplift Loads = See Drawings 2. Minimum dimensions shall be as indicated on the structural drawings. 3. Minimum compressive strength of concrete - 5000 psi @ 28 days. 4. Fire resistance ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings per Building Code requirements. Minimum equivalent plank thickness and reinforcing cover Shall be provided to meet Building Cade resistance rating. for the indicated fire res requirements _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Concreste shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300 - Concrete. B. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed reinforcing bars shall be grade 60 steel with a minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi, as per ASTM A615. Cold -drawn steel wire ..._. reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A82. C. Cement Mortar: Cement mortar shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement, sand and water. Cement and sand shall first be combined in the proper proportions, and then thoroughly mixed with the required amount of water. Cement mortar shall be proportioned by loose volume in the proportion of one part cement to three parts sand. The 03410 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS 2 2/20/04 442.E1 1 1 L� n 1 11 L] 1 1 1 1 quantity of water to be used in the preparation of mortar shall be only that required.to produce a mixture sufficiently workable for the purpose intended. Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and shall show no visible signs of setting prior to use. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted. Cement, sand, and water for cement mortar shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300 - Concrete. Lime -cement mortar or commercial mortar mixes are not permitted. D. Ceilinq caulk: Ceiling caulk shall be latex type equivalent to Pecora AC20 or equal. 2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS hollow be manufactured in general A. Precast concrete core planks shall compliance with PCI MNL-116. Manufacturing tolerances shall comply with PCI MNL-116 for structural hollow core products. shall cast rough openings with a minimum dimension B. Manufacturer plant of ten (1011) inches +/- manufacturing tolerances in any direction. Openings to be rectangular or square only. Headered opening sizes may require concrete fill, properly reinforced, to obtain required opening size as shown on the drawings. C. Patching shall not impair the structural adequacy of the hollow core unit. D. Plant cast inserts and weld plates shall be monolithically cast in the manufacturing operation. E. weights of slabs shall not exceed 45 psf for 611, 6o psf for 8" or 82 psf for 10". F. The underside of hollow core slabs shall be manufactured with a for finished surface in accordance with the PCI Guide Specification Precast Prestressed Concrete (PCI Design Handbook, Section 10-8, Paragraph 2.03-C-1). G. Structural precast concrete hollow core planks shall be as manufactured by southeastern Prestressed Concrete, Inc., Pre -Cast Specialties, Inc., Spancrete of Florida or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 .. INSTALLATION- -.... ,. _ ... A. Provide suitable access to the building, proper drainage and firm level bearing for the hauling and erection equipment to operate under their own power. B. Provide true, level bearing surfaces on all field placed bearing walls a other field placed supporting members. C, And 1l pipes, stacks, conduits and other such items shall be stubbed off � --at a--Ievel_-lower than-'the"bearing plane of the prestressed concrete— products until after the latter are set. D. Installation of hollow core slab units shall be performed by the manufacturer or a competent erector with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in erection of hollow core floor and/or roof slabs. Members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided by the manufacturer. Bearing strips shall be set, 2/20/04 03410 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 442.E1 3 HOLLOW CORE PLANKS where required. Temporary shoring and bracing, if necessary, shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Grout keys shall be filled. E. Furnish and install 3000 psi concrete fill at butt ends, ends _and sides of hollow core slabs for the depth of the slabs only, if shown on shop drawings. 3.02 ALIGNMENT A. Members shall be properly aligned and leveled as required by the approved shop drawings. Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonable, leveled out by jacking, loading, or any other feasible method as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Any misalignment of joints will be feathered and are not to exceed 3/16" between adjacent planks unless concrete topping or underlayments are used as shown. C. Finished flooring, such as carpeting with integral pad, resilient type wood parquet, the or other types of flooring will require leveling coat underlayment by the trade installing the finished flooring. 3.03 ATTACHMENTS A. Subject to approval of the Engineer, hollow core slab units may be drilled or "shot" provided no contact is made with the prestressing steel. Should spalling occur, it shall be repaired by the trade doing the drilling or the shooting. END OF SECTION 03410 2/20/04 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS 4 442.E1 1 1 1 I� i 1 SECTION 03600 1 L] j 1 1 n 1 1 GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all materials for grout in accordance with the provisions of this Section and form, mix, place, cure, repair, finish, and do all other work as required to produce finished grout, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The following types of grout shall be covered in this Section: 1. Non -Shrink Grout. 2. Cement Grout. 3. Epoxy Grout. C. All items specified herein this section may not be specifically required for this project. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of this section with the drawings for proper completion of the work. D. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appear- ance, maintenance, replacement and service. E. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, for information and requirements which apply to the Work specified in this Section and that are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03300 - Concrete. 1.03 A. B. 2/20/04 442.E1 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS Specifications, codes, and standards shall be as specified in Section 03300 - Concrete and as referred to herein. Additional Commercial Standards (Latest Revision): CRD-C 621-82B Corps of Engineers Specifications for Non -shrink grout. ASTM C 109-80 Standard test methods for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars (using 2-in or 50-mm cube specimens). ASTM C 531-81 Test method for linear shrinkage and coefficient of thermal expansion of chemical -resistant mortars, grouts and monolithic surfacings. ASTM C 579-82 Test methods for compressive strength of chemical - resistant mortars and monolithic surfacings. ASTM C 827-82 Standard test method for early volume change of cementitious mixtures. ASTM C 696-79 Test method for coefficient of linear thermal expansion of plastics. 03600 1 GROUT 1 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certified test results verifying the compressive strength, shrinkage, and expansion requirements specified herein; and manufacturer's handling, placement and appropriate uses for each type of non -shrink and epoxy grout used in the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENT GROUT A. Ce ent Grout: Cement grout shall be composed of one part cement, three parts sand, and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. Where needed to match the color of adjacent concrete, white Portland cement shall be blended with regular cement as needed. The minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4000 psi. B. Cement grout materials shall be as specified in Section 03300 - Concrete. ■k 2.02 PREPACKAGED GROUTS A. Non -Shrink -Grout 1. Non -shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, non -gas liberating, non-metallic, cement -based grout requiring only the addition of water. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non -shrink grout specified herein shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. 2. Class A non -shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 5000 psi; shall have no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum 4.0 percent expansion in the plastic state when tested in accordance with ASTM C-827; and shall have no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum.of 0.2 percent expansion in the hardened state when tested in accordance with CRD C 621. 3. Class B non -shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 5000 psi and shall meet the requirements of CRD C 621. _.Application... a. Class A non -shrink grout shall be used for the repair of all holes and defects in concrete members which are water bearing or in contact with soil or other fill material, grouting under all equipment base plates, and at all locations where grout.. is-. specified in the. Contract Documents; except for those applications for Class B non - shrink grout and epoxy grout specified herein. Class A non - shrink grout may be used in place of Class B non -shrink grout -_far__a,ll_.applicata,Qne..__ �. -- b. Class B non -shrink grout shall be used for the repair ofall holes and defects in concrete members which are not water - bearing and not in contact with soil or other fill material, grouting under all base plates for structural steel members, and grouting railing posts in place. C. Grouting equipment installations under 25 HP. 03600 2/20/04 GROUT 2 442.E1 5. Material shall be Escoweld 9000 non -shrink, non-metallic high performance cementitious grout, or equal. B. Encxy__Orout 1.. Epoxy grout shall be a pourable, non -shrank, 100 percent solids system. The epoxy grout system shall have three components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, all premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any nonreactive diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. variation of component ratios is not permitted unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are packaged. 2. The chemical formulation of the epoxy grout shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. 3. The mixed epoxy grout system shall have a minimum working life of 45 minutes at 75 degrees F. 4. The epoxy grout shall develop a compressive strength of 5000 psi in 24 hours and 10,000 psi in seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 579, Method B. There shall be no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum 4.0 percent expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C 827. 5. The epoxy grout shall exhibit a minimum effective bearing area of 95 percent. This shall be determined by a test consisting of filling a 2-inch diameter by 4-inch high metal cylinder mold covered with a glass plate coated with a release agent. A weight shall be placed on the glass plate. At 24 hours after casting, the weight and plate shall be removed and the area in plan of all voids measured. The surface of the grout shall be probed with a sharp instrument to locate all voids. 6. The peak exotherm of a 2-inch diameter by 4-inch high cylinder shall not exceed 95 degrees F when tested with 75 degree F material at laboratory temperature. The epoxy grout shall exhibit a maximum thermal coefficient of 30 x 10-6 inches/inch/degree F when tested according to ASTM C 531 or ASTM D 696. . Annlicat on.. a. Epoxy grout shall be used to embed all anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout and for all other applications required in the Contract Documents. b.' Grouting equipment installations 25HP and above. _. B. Material should be Escoweld 7505E/7530, Epoxy machine base grout, or equal. 2.03 CORING MATERIALS A. Curing materials shall be as specified in the Section entitled, 03300. - Concrete, for cement grout and as recommended by the manufacturer of prepackaged grouts. 2/20/04 03600 442.E1 3 GROUT 2.04 CONSISTENCY A. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. Dry pack consistency is such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow. Where "dry pack" is called for in the Contract Documents, it shall mean a grout of that consistency; the type of grout to be used shall be as specified herein for the particular application. 2.05 MEASUREMENT OF INGREDIENTS A. Measurements for cement grout shall be made accurately by volume using containers. Shovel measurement will not be allowed. B. Prepackaged grouts shall have ingredients measured by means recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall be as specified in Section 03300 - Concrete. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete. B. The manufacturer of Class A non -shrink grout and epoxy grout shall provide on -site technical assistance upon request. C. All mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation and other means of execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. 3.02 CONSOLIDATION A. Grout shall be placed in such a manner for the consistency necessary for each application so as to assure that the space to be grouted is completely filled. END OF SECTION SECTION 04100 MORTAR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers work required to furnish and mix masonry mortar. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. ELSEWHERE 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED A. Section 03300 = Concrete. B. Section 04220 Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Commercial Standards (Latest Revisions): ASTM C91 "Standard Specification for Masonry Cement". ASTM C150 "Standard Specification for Portland Cement". ASTM C144 IlStandard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar" ASTM C270 "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry". ASTM C476 "Standard Specification for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry". 1 1 i B. Codes 1. Florida Building Code, 2001. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals and shall include the following: I.--- Mortar mix components and design: 2. Admixtures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement 1.- - Port -land cement - Type I or_ Type II conforming to-ASTM C 150 : B. Water: Potable, salt free, conforming to ASTM C94. C. Fine ASciregate (Sand): Salt free and clean, conforming to ASTM C144. D. Waterproofing and shrinkage control admixtures: 1. W. R. Grace "Hydratite Plus". 2/20/04 04100 442.E1 1 MORTAR 2. Master Builders "Omicron Mortar Proofing". 3. Or equal. Admixture provided shall, not be detrimental to bonding of the mortar. E. Hydrated Lime: Type "M" domestic manufactured, conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification SS-L-351. F. Masonry Cement: Conforming to ASTM C91. 2.O2 MORTAR MIXTURE A. Mortar types: Type "M" or "S", as per local building code requirements and to meet masonry unit prism strength, f'm. B. Thoroughly machine mix for at least 5 minutes after all materials are in mixer. FART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL MORTAR PREPARATION INSTRUCTIONS A. Mortar shall be mixed by placing M the water and aggregate in the operating mixer. Add cement. Add the remaining aggregate and water and mix for at least 2 minutes. Add lime and continue mixing as long as needed to secure a uniform mass, but no less than 3 minutes after the addition of lime. The addition of the admixture shall be timed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the procedure used for adding it to the mix shall provide good dispersion. B. The mortar shall be machine mixed in approved mixers. Mixer drums shall be kept clean and free of debris and dried mortar. The mortar shall be in place before the initial setting of the cement has taken, place. Retempering of mortar in which the cement has started to set will not be permitted. END OF SECTION _ 04100 MORTAR 2 SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL WORK INCLUDED 1.01 A. This section covers the work required to furnish and install the concrete masonry work, complete, with all accessories. B. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for ap- pearance, maintenance, and replacement. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED woRK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERR A. Section 04100 - Mortar. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS (Latest Revisions): A. Commercial Standards ASTM C476 "Standard Specification for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced' Masonry". B. Codes 1. Florida Building Code, 2001. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Samples as requested by ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR shall submit two (2) ' each of the following. I. Concrete masonry units 2. Reinforcements 3. Ties _ ..._ .. __._.... 4. Control Joint Filler S. Miscellaneous Accessories 1.04 ASSURANCE QUALITY A. Submit unit masonry manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance" issued by the Florida Concrete and Products Association for each type of unit masonry. B. Before any masonry is laid, a sample panel shall be constructed for review by the ENGINEER. The sample panel shall be 6-feet wide by 4- feet high, showing the CMU face, reinforcement, grouting, and type, color and tooling of mortar and bond. The reviewed wall sample panel shall remain in place for the duration of all masonry work, to serve as the standard of reference for all masonry. The sample panel shall be removed by the CONTRACTOR at the completion of the project 2/20/04 04220 442.E1 1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.05 SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. All concrete masonry units shall be stored under cover, in a dry place and in a manner to prevent damage, breakage, or staining. Blocks shall be delivered to the site dry, in conformance with the specification limitation for moisture content, and kept dry by storing off the ground and under cover. Blocks which have become wet shall be removed from the site by the CONTRACTOR. B. All accessories shall be delivered to the site and stored in the manufacturers' original packaging. All materials shall be stored above ground and under weatheztight cover. 2.01 LOAD BEARING CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT,' A. Weight: normal. B. Size: 8-inch x 16-inch x thickness indicated on drawings, two cell stretcher type with vertical mortar keys at each end. C. Texture: medium. D. Grade: N-1, ASTM C90, Compressive Strength 1900 psi., amended to allow a maximum moisture content of 50 percent total absorption. E. Unit linear shrinkage: 0.03 percent, ASTM C426. F. Shapes: appropriate to suit conditions. 2.02 NON -LOADING HEARING CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT A. Weight: normal. B. Size: 8-inch x 16-inch x thickness indicated, two cell type. C. Texture: medium'. D. Grade: N-1, ASTM C90, Compressive Strength 1900 psi, amended to allow a maximum moisture content of 50 percent total absorption. E. Unit linear shrinkage: 0.03 percent, ASTM C426-70. F. Shapes: - appropriate to. suit . conditions including partition .-. top _ ..---------__-- closure. 2.03 PRECAST CONCRETE LINTEL , A. Except where other lintel types -.are.. scheduled or shown on. the Drawings, reinforced precast concrete lintels as manufactured by Cast - Crete Corporation of Florida, Tampa, FL, or equal shall be used at openings in hollow concrete masonry unit walls and partitions. -------.Lintel a -.shall.be load -bearing. type in sizes. -to.:- suit .,wall,..or. ,.part,i,ti'm thicknesses. Lintels shall have equal bearing of minimum 8 inches at each end of lintel unless noted otherwise on Drawings. B. Gravity and uplift loads required at each lintel shall be noted on Drawings. �. 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2 2/20/04 442.E1 1 2.04 GROUT 1 1 1 1 1 ri 1 1 1 A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C476, except as hereinafter specified. B. Grout for filling concrete masonry unit cores containing reinforcement. The grout shall be mixed to give the necessary consistency for placing. C. Class F flyash for grout shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C- 618. D. Sand for grout shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C144 or C33. E. Grout mix shall have: 1. 28 day compressive strength: 3000 p.s.i., minimum, or as illus- trated on the Drawings. a. Strengths noted on the Drawings take precedence over herein specified amounts. 2. Water -cement ratio: w/c s 0.7. 3. Slump: 9.5 inches t 1.5 inches. 4. Air Content (ASTM C231): 1.5 percent to 2 percent. F. Grout admixtures 1. SIKA Chemical Company "SIKA Grout Aid GA -II". 2. Master Builders "Pozzolith". 3. Or equal. Amount of admixture and method of introduction shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. All masonry joint reinforcement shall be fabricated from cold -drawn steel wire, conforming to ASTM A 82. B. Reinforcement shall consist of two parallel longitudinal deformed wires, not less than 9 gage, weld -connected with cross -wires, not less than 9 gage, in a triangular pattern. C. Out to out spacing of the longitudinal wires shall be 2 inches less than the nominal width of the wall. D. The distance between the welded contacts of cross wires with each _.. longitudinal -wire shall not exceed 16.inches,..staggered...... E. Cross wires shall be in the same plane with the longitudinal wires. F. Reinforcement shall be provided in minimum 10-foot sections. All corners and .tees shall be provided prefabricated., of the same materials as the joint reinforcement. G. Joint reinforcement shall be Dur-O-Wall, Dur-O-Wall Products; Black- Lok, A.A. Wire Products; Truss -Mesh• Lock,�Hohman Barnard; Key -Wall Truss, Keystone Steel and wire Company; or equal. 2.06 MASONRY ANCHORS AND TIES A. Anchors and ties shall be hot -dip galvanized ferrous metals. B. Wire mesh ties shall be minimum 16-gage, M-inch mesh of steel wire. Ties shall be a minimum of 12-inches in length, and 1-inch less in width than the wall in which they are placed. 2/20/04 04220 442.E1 3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1 1 C. Rigid steel anchors shall be 1-1/2-inch by 1/4-inch with ends turned up 1/4-inch at the outer end. , D. Dovetail anchors shall be minimum 16-gage, 1-inch wide, and turned up 1/4-inch at the outer end. , E. Corrugated or crimped metal ties shall be made of steel sheet not less than 7/8-inch wide, 22 gage in thickness, 6-inches in length. 2.07 MASONRY CAPS i A. Cavity caps shall be provided for all non -filled masonry cells. Metal cavity caps shall be product Cade CC2 as manufactured by Hughes Manufacturing, Inc., or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WEATHER CONDITIONS A. Do not lay masonry when the ambient temperature is below 32 degrees F on a rising temperature or below 40 degrees F on a falling temperature, or when there is a probability of such conditions occurring within 48 hours, unless approval of the ENGINEER is obtained. In such case, make special provisions for heating materials and protecting the finished work. Protect the tops of walls at all times. Cover with Visqueen when rain is imminent and work is discontinued. B. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when ' erected in an ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F (37 degrees C) in the shade with relative humidity less than 5o percent. 3.02 BONDING WALL UNITS A. The foundation shall be prepared for the initial mortar placement by one of the following methods: I. Sandblasting the foundation and reinforcing dowels after the, concrete has fully cured to remove all laitance and spillage and ' to expose sound aggregate. , 2. Water blasting the foundation and reinforcing dowels after the concrete has partially cured to remove all laitance and spillage and to expose sound aggregate. 3. Green cutting fresh concrete with high pressure water hand tools to remove all laitance and spillage from the foundation and the reinforcing dowels and to expose sound aggregate. B. The,foundation shall be cleaned of all loose material prior to the initial mortar placement. C. Corners shall have a standard masonry bond for overlapping units and Reinforcement shal.l—be as shown. D. Intersecting walls shall be bonded with reinforcement as shown. The abutting wall shall not have a masonry bond with the straight wall. 3.03 LAYING REINFORCED MASONRY UNITS A. Masonry construction shall conform to the local Building Code as supplemented by these specifications. Do not start laying masonry 04220 2/20/04 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 4 442.E1 units if the foundation horizontal or vertical alignment does not satisfy the Tolerance Requirement specified herein. B. The maximum permissible variation from plumb of the wall or of a line of joints in the wall shall be 1/16-inch per foot of height, and 1/4- inch in the total height of the wall. The maximum permissible variation from a horizontal line along the base of the wall or for lines of horizontal joints shall be 1/16-inch per block, 1/4-inch per 50 feet of wall with proportionately greater tolerance for longer walls up to X-inch in the total length of wall. Interior surfaces shall be maintained in the plane described above and the dimension tolerances of the units shall be taken up on exterior surfaces. C. Units with chipped edges or corners within permissible ASTM limits shall be placed in the wall such that the chipped area is not exposed to view. D. If it is necessary to move a unit after it has been once set in place, fresh the unit shall be removed from the wall, cleaned, and set in mortar. ' E. Toothing of masonry units will not be permitted unless approval is given by the ENGINEER. F. All masonry work shall be protected from damage until final acceptance of the work. Damaged units will not be accepted. G. Unless otherwise shown, walls shall be laid up in straight, uniform ' courses using a running bond pattern. H. Horizontal mortar joint reinforcement shall be provided in addition to the typical wall reinforcing steel. Joint reinforcement shall be spaced not more than 16 inches apart, vertically. Ends of joint reinforcement shall lap 6 inches minimum, except at control joints where the joint reinforcement shall be discontinuous. I. Provide and place such special units as corner block, door jamb block, lintel block fillers, and similar blocks as may be required. Use the required shapes and sizes to work to corners and openings maintaining ' a proper bond throughout the wall. 3.04 BUILT-IN ITEMS ' A. items required to be built in the wall shall be in position and the _..wall constructed around them.. Standard masonry.anchors shall be used to secure the items to the wall. ' B. All spaces around the items shall be filled with mortar or grout. 3.05 EMBEDDED CONDUITS A. Electrical, instrumentation, or water conduits shall not be placed in a cell containing reinforcement unless approved by the ENGINEER. 3.06 MORTAR JOINTS A. Mortar joints shall be straight, clean, and shall have a uniform thickness of 3/8-inch. B. The horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall have full mortar coverage on the face shells. 2 20 04 04220 442.E1 5 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY i 1 C. vertical head joints shall be buttered well on each unit for a width equal to the face shell of the unit, and these joints shall be shoved , tightly so that the mortar bonds well to both units. Joints shall be solidly filled from the face of the block to at least the depth of the face shell. ' D. All excess mortar shall be removed from the grout space of the cells to be filled as the units are being laid. E. Joints that will be exposed to view after final construction shall be 1 tooled unless otherwise noted or shown. Joints shall be cut flush and, as mortar takes its initial set, shall be tooled to provide a concave joint. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond. All tooling shall be done with a tool which compacts the mortar, pressing the excess mortar out rather than dragging it out. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed, and then tooled. F. Joints at split face surfaces, interior and exterior, shall be raked and tooled. , G. Joints that are not exposed shall be struck flush with no further treatment required. 3.07 REINFORCING 1 A. Reinforcing bars shall be lapped 40 bar -diameters minimum where spliced and shall be wire -tied together. All bars shall have a ' minimum clearance of 1 bar -diameter from the masonry and from additional parallel bars in the same grout space. B. The size, number and location of the foundation dowels shall match the , vertical wall reinforcing unless otherwise noted. When a foundation dowel does not line up as intended with a vertical core, it shall not be sloped more than 1 horizontal to 6 vertical to bring it into alignment. C. Vertical reinforcing steel shall-, be held in position near the ends. of the bars by wire ties to dowels and/or by reinforcing positioners. The bars shall be held in position at intervals not exceeding 160 bar- , diameters by reinforcing positioners. D. All reinforced horizontal joints shall be reinforced continuously with ends lapped 8-inches, and laps staggered vertically. horizontal reinforcing .shall have a vertical.. spacing of..16- inches. _on center. unless noted otherwise. Prefabricated corners and tees shall be provided at all horizontal wall intersections. E. Reinforcing shall be provided in the bed joints immediately above and . below all masonry openings. F. Mortar joints with wire reinforcement shall .be at least twice the,. thickness of the wire. G. Where knock -out openings are indicated - Drawings, no steel or joint reinforcement shall run continuously through the openings. H. Prior to placing metal reinforcing, anchors, and ties, all loose rust, tie wires, tags and all other foreign matter that may reduce bond shall be removed. I. Reinforcing shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings. Place a minimum of two No. 5 bars in each bond beam or lintel and a minimum 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 6 2/20/04 442.El F 1 r of one No. 5 bar at all jambs, corners, intersections and wall ends of concrete block walls, whether indicated or not. J. Lintels shall extend 8-inches past the openings. Lap reinforcing bars 32 diameters or 16 inches minimum at splices. All cells containing reinforcing shall be filled solid with grout. 3.08 BOND AND JOINTS A. All load bearing masonry units shall be laid in running bond by unit. lapping units in successive courses a distance of one-half B. All courses shall be level with joints of uniform width. Units shall ' have full mortar coverage of the face shells in both the horizontal and vertical joints C. All joints shall be painted solid with mortar on both sides and wall ' of block. Joints in exposed work shall be finished concave with finishing tool, to create a dense surface. Interior and exterior joints in non -exposed or plaster covered masonry shall be flush. ' 3.09 CONTROL JOINTS A. Control joints shall be installed as detailed and where shown on the Drawings or needed. B. The maximum horizontal distance between vertical control joints shall be 20 feet, but joints shall be located only as reviewed by the ENGINEER or as shown. C. Joints shall be equal in width to the standard mortar joints. D. Horizontal joint reinforcing shall be discontinuous at control joints. 3.10 GROUTING r A. Grout shall be mixed as specified hereinbefore. Transit -mixed grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 476. The grout admixture shall be added at the site. In accordance with the specified grout admixture manufacturer's recommendations, the admixture shall be ' premixed with water and the resulting solution shall be added to the grout mix and thoroughly mixed. Do not exceed quantity of admixture recommended by the manufacturer. B. Grout shall not be mixed,__conveyed,..—_or_-placed.,..,with,-..,equi.pmentT_._ constructed of aluminum. C. All vertical and horizontal reinforcement, ties, bolts, anchors, and ' other required embedments shall be secured in place, inspected and ..approved before grouting starts... _-..,... _..__... D. Grouting of beams over openings .shall. be, done in one .continuous. operation. E. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment sufficient to maintain a clear, unobstructed, continuous vertical cell measuring not less than 2-inch by 3-inch. F. Grout shall be poured as soon as possible after the mortar has cured ' to reduce shrinkage cracking of the vertical joints. Immediately after the grouting has been completed, the scum and stains on the masonry shall be washed off using clean water and fiber brushes. r 2/20/04 04220 442.E1 7 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Grout and mortar stains shall not be allowed to dry on the face of the I exposed masonry. G. vertical reinforcement may be placed initially and the wall built up around it providing the reinforcing steel is first wire tied to the ' foundation dowels. Reinforcing positioners and/or approved cross bracing must be provided to secure the top of the steel in place. The vertical steel will not be permitted to be dropped in after the block is laid unless reinforcing positioners are provided in the course above the previously grouted course. 3.11 PARTIAL GROUTING REQUIREMENT$ A. Walls which do not require solid grouting shall have all cells ' containing reinforcing steel and others as shown filled with grout. B. Cells to be filled shall be constructed to confine the grout within ' the cell. mope of unfilled vertical cells under a bond beam shall be covered with metal lath or masonry cap to confine the grout fill to the bond beam section. ' C. Grout pours shall be limited in height to mid -depth of the course above the horizontal bond beam, except at the top course. 3.12 LOOP -LIFT GROUTING RRQUIRS I A. Unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER prior to the start of the masonry work, all grouting shall be low -lift grouting. B. When grouting is stopped for 1 hour or longer, horizontal construction joints shall be formed by stopping the pour of grout M-inch below the top of the uppermost unit. Horizontal steel shall be fully embedded ' by grout in an uninterrupted pour. C. Grout pour shall be limited to a maximum height of 6 block courses. The wall shall not be constructed more than one course above the top of the grout pour prior to placing the grout. D. The grout shall be thoroughly consolidated with an internal "pencil', type vibrator. After waiting sufficient time to permit the grout to ' become plastic, but before it has taken any set, the grout shall be reconsolidated. The waiting period will vary depending upon weather conditions and block absorption rates, but under "normal" weather conditions with average masonry units, the waiting period should be ' _...._... _ between.. 30...to 60 _ 3.13 CLEANING , A. Clean all surfaces of excess mortar, grout spillage, dirt and other _....foreign substances. B. Walls ,not requiring painting or sealing shall be cleaned such that.._... .:.. there are no visible stains. Surfaces requiring painting or sealing shall be prepared in accordance with Section 09900 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS. 3.14 TEMPORARY BRACING A. The CONTRACTOR shall adequately brace all walls until the walls and roof are completed. Bracing shall be sufficient to protect the walls against damage from the elements, including wind and snow. END OF SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 8 2/20/04 442.E1 1 �I u 1 SECTION 05500 ' FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, all fabricated metalwork and castings. B. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. C. All items specified herein this section may not be specifically required for this project. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the require- ments of this section with the drawings for proper completion of the Work. D. See CONTRACT, CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein.and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submittal data shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Shop drawings, including calculations where required. 2. Test pieces and samples. 3. Certificates, test reports, etc. 4. color samples of abrasive nosings. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' number is for the A. The use of a manufacturer s'name and model- or catalog purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configura- ' tion desired only. Products of other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials shall conform to the latest � Specifications: issue of the following AST: 9 ' Ite ASTM SRecification Steel Shapes and Plates A36, A501 Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings of Fabricated Steel ASTM A 123 2/20/04 05500 442.E1 1 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS Item Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip Bolts Nuts Aluminum, Structural Shapes ASTM Soeci..fica.tion A 276, Type 316 A 167, Type 316 A 193, Type 316 A 194, Type 316 Alloy 6061-T6; conform to refer- enced specifications and ASTM sections found in the Aluminum Association current Construction Manual Series Connection Bolts for Steel Members A 325-F Galvanized Bolts A 307, A 153 Connection Bolts for Wood Members A307 Connection Bolts for Aluminum A 2024-T4, or use appropriate stainless steel Cast Iron A 48, Class 30 C. The miscellaneous metalwork and castings indicated on the Drawings, or required to secure the various parts together and provide a complete installation, shall be included under this section. The tabulation of items herein is not intended to be all-inclusive, and it shall be the CONTRACTOR'$ responsibility to provide all metalwork and castings shown, specified, or which case reasonably be inferred as necessary to complete the project. 2.02 STEEL ANCHOR BOLTS (NONSUBMERGED USE) ' A. One -half -inch minimum diameter with hex nuts, or as shown. Bolts and nuts shall be steel as specified hereinbefore. 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL ANCHOR BOLTS (SUBMERGED USE) , A. ASTM A 193, Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolt, 34-inch minimum diameter with hex nuts, or size as shown. , S. Submerged use is defined as any connection to concrete from point 1 foot 6 inches above the maximum water surface in a water -holding basin and any connection below that point. ' 2.04 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENERS LUBRICANT (ANTI -SEIZING) A. Where stainless steel nuts and machined bolts, anchor bolts, concrete , anchors, and all other threaded fasteners are used, CONTRACTOR shall ___-- apply_. -an -anti -seizing lubr. cant -._to.- the threads .prior to making connections. The lubricant shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talic, or copper. 2.05 MACHINE ANCHOR BOLTS A. For equipment with motors 3 horsepower or greater, fabricate as shown or as required. Size of fastening stud and anchor bolts as required by equipment manufacturer, stainless. 05500 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 2 2/20/04 442.E1 1 B. All machine anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel. ' 2.06 ADHESIVE ANCHORS A. Adhesive anchors shall be Parabond capsule anchors with 316 stainless steel stud, nuts, and washers, as manufactured by Molly Division, 504 ' Mt. Laurel Avenue, Temple, PA 19560; heavy-duty adhesive anchor with HBP adhesive cartridge and has 316 stainless steel anchor rod assembly y as manufactured by Hilti, Inc., PO Box 45400, Tulsa, OK 74145, or equal. B. Adhesive anchors shall be used for anchoring all metal components at or below a point 1 foot 6 inches above the peak (maximum) water surface elevations in water -holding structures. For embedded anchors refer to stainless steel anchors as hereinbefore specified. ' 2.07 SHELL -TYPE ANCHOR Red Head A. Shell -type anchors shall be self -drilling or non -drilling anchors as manufactured by the Phillips Drill Company, or equal. 2.08 WEDGE ANCHORS A. Wedge anchors shall be Red Head wedge -type anchors as manufactured by the Phillips Drill Company, Parabolt anchors as manufactured by the Molly Division of Emhart Corporation, or equal. 2.09 EXPANSION ANCHORS A. Stainless steel expansion anchors shall be a pre -assembled heavy duty sleeve style undercut anchor with an internal hex head meeting the requirements of ASTM A276 and A493. The stainless steel components shall be manufactured from Type 303 or 304 stainless steel. Anchors ' shall be Kwik Bolt II expansion anchors as manufactured by Hilti, Inc., or equal. 2.10 MASONRY ANCHORS A. 3/1611 or 1/4" Tapcon anchors. Head type and embedment per installation ' requirements. B. Allowed at locations approved by ENGINEER only. 2.11 PIPE SLEEVES A. ASTM A 120 standard weight steel pipe. Where shown, fabricate seepage rings of 1/4-inch steel plate extending 2 inches from pipe and weld continuously to pipe around complete circumference. Galvanize after ' fabrication. Support pipe sleeves by form work to prevent contact with _...._.._reinforcing steel.. Do not weld reinforcing to pipe sleeves. ' 2.12 STRUCTURAL STEEL COMPONENTS _.._._. .—_ ..... ..A—P.rovide__a:ll_._,structural-__s tee l__.components_.of..._ the _..sizes..,._.materials.__and-_--. weights shown. All connections shall be welded, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 2.13 MACHINE BOLTS, INSERTS, AND FASTENERS ' A. Machine bolts, inserts, and fasteners permanently embedded in concrete shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2/20/04 05500 442.E1 3 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS B. Machine bolts, inserts, and fasteners not permanently embedded in con- crete, but located outdoors in well wet floors, walls, and ceilings; chemical handling areas; equipment rooms subject to drainage, leakage, and washdown; and in galleries and trenches, shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Machine bolts, inserts, and fasteners not permanently embedded in con- crete, but located indoors where washdown, leakage, and drainage are not likely to occur (e.g., in personnel buildings excluding laborato- ries, on motor floors, in electrical equipment rooms, and in control rooms), may be galvanized steel, ASTM A 153. 2.14 GRATING A. Grating shall be fabricated of aluminum I -shaped bars, alloy 6063-T6, with swaged cross bars spaced on 41, centers. Bearing bars shall be spaced on 1-3/16" centers. Top surface of bearing barsshall be striated to provide a nonslip surface. B. Grating shall support a uniform load of 200 pounds per square foot with a deflection of not more than 1/411. Maximum fiber stress shall not exceed that allowed by the Aluminum Association, Minimum depth shall be as noted on Drawings. C. Gratings shall be provided with all frames, seat angles, fasteners, and other appropriate accessories as required. Metals to be embedded in concrete shall be Type 316 stainless steel. D. Cutouts for all circular or square obstructions to be at least 211 larger than the obstruction. All cut openings shall be banded with bar the same depth as the bearing bars. The ends of all grating shall be banded. E. Fasteners for anchoring grating to beam and channel flanges shall be stainless steel, Universal clip type with 1/4-inch Type 304 or 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. Fasteners shall be furnished for a minimum spacing of four feet, or as required, for proper support to each panel, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. F. Standard installation clearances and tolerances shall conform to the requirements of the current Metal Bar Grating Manual published by the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. G. Width of any single grating section shall not exceed 3 feet 1 inch, or be less than 2-foot .0-.inches unless. otherwise .shown .on_ reviewed ---shop-------- drawings. H. All support angles and framing shall be provided by the grating manufacturer. Support angles and framing shall be of the size and materials as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. I. Aluminum Grating .,shall be as manufactured by_. Thompson, Fabricating Company, Inc., Alpha Enterprises, or equal. 2.15 ACCESS HATCHS A. Single and double access doors shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings. Door leaf shall be 1/4-inch aluminum floor plate. The frame shall be an extruded aluminum channel (trough frame) section with a - continuous integral anchor flange. Trough frame shall drain water out through a 1-1/2-inch drainage pipe coupling. Hinges shall be all. stainless steel with tamper proof stainless steel nuts and bolts. 05500 2/20/04 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 4 442.E1 -I Where noted, angle type frame shall be provided in lieu of trough f rame . B. Access doors shall be watertight and equipped with stainless steel accessories, cast aluminum drop handle, padlock staple and an automatic hold open arm with vinyl release handle grip. Slam Lock mechanisms shall be provided for all doors equipped with spring -assist opening mechanisms. C. Parts of access door units which will be in contact with concrete shall be coated with one coat of coal tar epoxy (minimum 10 mils). ' D. Loading (H20 or 300 psf) and spring assist requirements shall be as per the following table: ion Location Required) Frame a L Loading Spring Assist Leaf Type 300 PSF Yes SGL ain Vault (1) Trough E. Access doors shall be as manufactured by U. S. Foundry and Manufactur- ing Corp., Miami, Florida, Halliday Products, Orlando, Florida, or equal. 2.16 CAST IRON MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS (SANITARY MANHOLES) A. Frames and covers shall be cast from close -drained, grey cast-iron, ' conforming to ASTM-A48 Class 30, gray cast iron. Castings shall be free from blow holes, shrinkages or other imperfections not true to pattern. Round frames and covers in roadway or traffic areas shall have machined wearing surfaces so that fitting parts will not rattle or rock under traffic. B. Manhole frames and covers shall be USF 420, cover Type C with "SANITARY SEWER" inscribed thereon, as manufactured by U.S. Foundry Manufacturing Corporation, Miami, Florida, or equal. 2.17 A. CAST IRON MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS (STORM SEWER MANHOLES) Frames and covers shall be cast from close -grained, grey cast-iron, conforming to ASTM-A48 Class 30, gray cast iron. Castings shall be free from blow holes, shrinkages or other imperfections not true to pattern.. Round frames and covers in roadway or traffic areas shall have machined wearing surfaces so that fitting parts will not rattle or rock under traffic. Manhole frames and covers shall be USF 420, cover type "C" as manufac- tured by U.S. Foundry Manufacturing Corporation, Miami, Florida, or equal. Cover shall have "STORM SEWER" inscribed thereon. CAST IRON INLET FRAMES AND GRATES (STORM SEWER INLETS) Frames and grates shall b cast from close -grained, grey cast-iron, conforming to ASTM-A48 Class 30, grey cast iron. Castings shall be free from blow holes, shrinkages or other imperfections not true to pattern. Castings shall be as manufactured by U.S. Foundry and Manufacturing Corporation, Miami, Florida, or equal. F. Frame and Grate Schedule: 2/20/04 05500 ' 442.E1 5 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS Cl Location U.S. Foundry Number Type "F" Gutter Inlet USF 5130-6016 Valley Gutter Inlet USF 5112-6143 Swale Inlet USF 4139-6429 2.19 NEOPRENE GASKET A. Unless otherwise indicated, Rubatex No. R-411-N, (ASTM D 1056-RE-41-E), soft, closed -cell, neoprene gasket material, as manufactured by Rubatex Division of Great American Industries, Bedford, VA; equivalent as manufactured by Garlock Manufacturing, San Francisco, CA; or equal. The material shall be suitable for exposure to chlorine, lime and other chemicals typically used in water treatment. Thickness shall be as indicated, but in no case less than 1/4-inch. Gaskets shall be furnished without skin coat on either side. Provided two spare gaskets for each location shown requiring neoprene gaskets: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Workmanship and finish of all metalwork specified under this,section shall be the highest grade and equal to the best practice of modern shops for the respective work. Exposed surfaces shall have smooth finish and sharp, well-defined lines. Provide all necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets to that the work can be assembled in a neat, substantial manner. Conceal fastenings where practical,. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. Fabricate materials as specified weld connections, except where bolting is directed. Items requiring special fabrication methods are mentioned herein. Fabrication of all other items shall be of equal quality. Methods of fabrication not otherwise specified or shown shall be adequate for the stresses and as directed by the ENGINEER. B. Grind all exposed edges of welds smooth on walkways, guardrails, hand- rails, stairways, channel door frames, steel column bases, and where indicated on the Drawings. All sharp edges shall be rounded to a 1/8- inch minimum radius; all burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects shall be ground smooth. C. Welds and adjacent areas shall be prepared such that there is (1) no spatter undercutting or...reverse ridges on the weld bead, (2) no weld on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted, and (3) no _ sharp 'peaks or ridges along the weld bead. All embedded pieces of electrode or wire shall be ground flush with the adjacent surface of the weld bead. D. Aluminum: Fabricate aluminum as shown, `and - in accordance with the Aluminum Association Standards and the manufacturer's recommendations as reviewed. Grind smooth sheared edges exposed in the finished work. 2 WELDING A. The technique or welding employed, appearance, quality of welds made, and the methods of correcting defective Work shall conform to codes for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and AISC. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, rust, grease, paint, and other foreign material, except that mill scale which will withstand vigorous wire brushing may remain. A light film of linseed oil may likewise be disregarded. No welding shall be done when the 05500 2/20/04 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 6 442.El temperature of the base metal is lower than zero degrees F. Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists. B. All welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of current AWS Standard Qualification Procedure D1.1, Chapter 5, and welders of structural and reinforcing steel shall be certified for all positions of welding in accordance with such procedure. Qualification tests shall be run by a recognized testing laboratory at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. C. All welding operators shall be subject to examination for requalifi- cation using the equipment, materials, and electrodes employed in the execution of the Contract Work. Such requalification, if ordered by the ENGINEER, shall be done at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. D. Aluminum: Aluminum shall be welded with Gas Metal Arc (MIG) or Gas Tungsten Arc (TIG) processes in accordance with the manufacturer's in with the recommendations recommendations as approved, and accordance of the American Welding Society contained in the Welding Handbook, as last revised. Grind smooth all exposed aluminum welds. METALWORK 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED A. Install in accordance with the shop drawings, the Drawings, and these Specifications. Perform field welding and erection work by skilled mechanics. Install fabricated metalwork plumb or level as applicable. The completed installations shall, in all cases, be rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance. Erect structural steel in accordance with the applicable portions of RISC Code of Standard Practice, except as modified. Install commercially manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as approved. B. Aluminum: Erection of aluminum shall be in accordance with the from Aluminum Association. Mill markings shall not be removed concealed surfaces. Exposed surfaces not otherwise coated shall have the inked or painted identification marks removed after the material has been inspected and approved by the ENGINEER. 3.04 ANCHOR BOLTS A. All anchor bolts shall be accurately located and held in place with templates at the time the concrete is poured. 3.05 GALVANIZING AND REPAIR A. Galvanizing Of steel plates, shapes, bars (and products fabricated from these items), and strip 1/8-inch thick or thicker, shall conform to ASTM A 123. Pipe, welded or seamless steel, shall conform to ASTM A 120. Material thinner than 1/8 inch shall either be galvanized before fabrication in conformance with the requirements of ASTM A 525, Coating Designation G 1`0; after fabrication, in conformance with the require- ments of ASTM A 123, except that the weight of zinc coating shall average not less than 1.2 ounces per square foot of actual surface area with no individual specimen having -a--weight"...of.__iess- than-1-:0-ounce:- Unless otherwise provided, galvanizing shall be done before or after fabrication, for material which is thinner than 1/8 inch, at the option of the CONTRACTOR. Galvanizing will not be required for stainless steel, monel metal, and similar corrosion -resistant parts. B. In like manner, galvanizing of iron and steel hardware, and nuts and bolts, shall conform to ASTM A 153. Galvanizing shall be performed after fabrication. Galvanizing of tapped holes will not be required. 2/20/04 05500 442.E1 7 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS CJ C. Fabrication shall include all operations such as shearing, cutting, punching, forming, drilling, milling, bending, welding, and riveting. D. Components of bolted assemblies shall be galvanized separately before assembly. E. The minimum pitch diameter of the threaded portion of all bolts, anchor bars, or studs shall conform to ANSI B1.1, having a Class 2A tolerance before galvanizing. After galvanizing, the pit diameter of the nuts or other internally threaded parts may be tapped over ANSI B1.1, Class 2B tolerance, by the following maximum amounts: 3/8-inch through 9/16-inch 0.016-inch oversize 5/8-inch through 1-inch 0.023-inch oversize 1-1/8-inch and larger 0.033-inch oversize F. Galvanized surfaces which are specifically to be painted shall not be chemically treated after galvanizing, and prior to cleaning and painting. G. Except for inlet grates not otherwise required to be welded, all edges of tightly contacting surfaces, where galvanized is required, shall be . completely sealed by welding before galvanizing. H. Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the application of the zinc coating shall be repaired by SP 1) and hand or power tool (Steel Structures Painting Council SP 1 or SP 3) the damaged areas, removing all loose and cracked coating after which the cleaned areas shall be painted with one of the following coatings: 1. One coat of Inorganic Zinc Silicate (MIL-P-23236, Class 3). 2. Two coats of Galvanizing Repair Paint (MIL-P-21035). 3. Two coats of Zinc Dust Paint (MIL-E-15145, Formula 102). I. Paint should be applied to a cleaned surface. Abrasive blasting is required for inorganic zinc silicate. 3.06 ELECTROLYTIC PROTECTION A. Aluminum in contact with or embedded in concrete shall be provided with an electrolysis protective material. the protective material shall be applied to the aluminum surface which will be in contact with the dissimilar material. Protective system shall be System No. 27 as specified in Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. B. Aluminum in contact with steel shall be provided with an electrolysis protective material. The protective material shall be neoprene gasket as specified herein. 3.07 PAINTING A. Thoroughly clean all ferrous metal items not galvanized and give a shop coat of metal primer. Preparation of surfaces and application of primer shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's printed directions and recommendations as reviewed and in accordance with Section 0590 0_W_Protective coatings.utilizing-the-appropriate painting---- _.._.._._ .,_. ... system. 05500 2/20/04 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS 8 442.E1 1 3.08 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT A. Insofar as is practical, the items provided hereunder shall be factory assembled. The parts and assemblies that are of necessity shipped unassembled, shall be packaged and clearly tagged in a manner that will protect the materials from damage, and facilitate the identification and final assembly in the field. 2/20/04 442.El END OF SECTION 05500 9 FABRICATED METALWORK AND CASTINGS SECTION 07230 VAPOR BARRIER PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the Work required to furnish and install the vapor barrier. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03300 - Concrete 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations from the manufacturer of the vapor barrier. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VAPOR BARRIER A. Vapor barrier shall be 10 mil thick polyethylene sheet with a vapor transmission rating of 0.20 perms or less. Provide with approved pressure sensitive tape to seal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. vapor barrier shall be installed under all concrete slabs on grade. Laps between adjacent sheets shall be 10-in minimum. Vapor barrier shall be carefully inspected, by the ENGINEER, prior to concrete placement. Additional polyethylene sheet required for repair and replacement of damaged vapor barrier shall be furnished and installed ...... by the. -CONTRACTOR as directed by.the ENGINEER.at,no additional cost - to the OWNER. Seal joints between sheets or repair material with the approved tape. END OF SECTION . 2/20/04 07230 442.E1 1 VAPOR BARRIER 1 SECTION 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY BRANS ROOFING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the Work required to furnish and install the system. complete membrane roofing B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 07650 - Metal Fascia and Gutter System. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Building Codes: 1. Florida Building Cade, Latest Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations from manufacturers of the various components of the membrane roofing system. C.Samples: Submit 12" square samples of the roof membrane, roof insulation and roof walkway material. D. Engineering: Provide calculations prepared by aF 'Florida registered structural engineer showing that the roof system and installation requirements are designed to sustain the minimum uplift windloading shown on the roof wind pressure diagram of the architectural drawings. E. Provide product approval documentation per Building Code requirements. F. Submit drawings of actual project plan with applicable installation sections and details including product approval requirements as applicable. Drawing shall include the fallowing as a minimum: 1. Roof membrane plan layout.. 2. Tapered insulation plan including slopes.. -----__-._ ..__._.....3.. Project..-specific...install .ati_on.._de-ta 'ls.- 4. Insulation fasteners of each type, length and finish. 5. Insulation distribution plates. 6. Membrane fastener/distribution plates of each type, length and finish. 07533 2/20/04 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY 442.E1 1 MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 1 G. Installer Certificate: Signed by roofing system manufacturer that installer is approved, authorized or licensed by manufacturer to install the specified roofing system. H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance manuals/pamphlets specified in Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. I. Warranty: Final copy of specified roofing system manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions of warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar, to those required for this project and which is acceptable to or licensed by the.manufacturer of the primary roofing materials. B. Pre -Roofing -Con-ference: Prior to installation of roofing and associated work, meet at project site, or other mutually agreed location, with, Installer, roofing manufacturer, installers of related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance, including (where applicable) Owner's insurer, test agencies, governing authorities, Engineer and owner. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening pre -roofing conference. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AM HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. a. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within :;the temperature: range required by the roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid materials from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect --roof insulation materials --from —physical---damage —and -from---- deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 0 7.- PROTECT • CONDIT A. weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 2 2/20/04 442.E1 1 1 1.1 I�J F1 1 n 11 1 1 1 I 1.08 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer's representative shall inspect the finished roof installation and, upon acceptance, provide a fifteen (15) year warranty on the -entire roofing system for materials and labor in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. 1.09 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Criteria: 1. Minimum Design Loads: a. Wind Uplift Load = See Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The roofing system specified herein is based on a mechanically attached single ply PVC membrane and its component parts, equal to the Duro-Last Roofing System by Duro-Last, or equal. Alternate components may not be substituted without the written approval of the prime manufacturer stating that the system is warranted with the approved alternate components. B. Alternate manufacturer's will be considered where evidence is provided that the proposed alternate system is substantially equal to that specified herein. 2.02 MZNBRANE A. Membrane: Polyester reinforced PVC membrane equal to Duro-Last 40 Mil with the following physical properties: 1. Thickness shall be minimum 40 mils and comply with ASTM D-751. 2. Breaking strength shall be minimum 435 x 350 (lbf./in.) and comply with ASTM D-751. 3. Elongation at break shall be minimum 35%, and minimum 90% of, original after heat aging, and comply with ASTM D-751. 4. Seam strength shall be minimum 85% of breaking strength and comply with ASTM D-751. 5. Tensile strength shall be minimum 95% of original after heat aging and comply with ASTM D-751. 6. Puncture resistance shall be minimum 350 lbs and comply with 7 • ASTM D temperature 5 . ..- .. .. flexibility shall pass -40F degrees in conformance with ASTM D-2136. 8. Shall pass 6,000 houraccelerated weathering test, cracking test, discoloration test and crazing test in conformance with ASTM E- 838, 9. Shall have maximum 0.1% linear dimension change in conformance with ASTM D-1204. 10. Shall have maximum 2.5t weight change after immersion in water in --------._..__-.._.conformance--with,-ASTM_.Dy5.7.0- _.— _.-.__.....__._.— �..........._. 11. Shall have acrylic coating to repel dirt. 12. Exposed face color shall be white, tan or gray. Color selection shall be indicated on drawings. 2/20/04 442.El 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY 3 MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 1 2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing material. I. Furnish liquid -type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Auxiliary materials must meet product approval requirements and/or accompanying engineering calculations. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of the same material, type, thickness, and color as sheet membrane. Flashings shall be factory fabricated to each penetration size, per manufacturer's standard details- C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip -sheet of type required for application. ...,, E. Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard bars, approximately 1 to 1.5 inches wide, formed, and prepunched. F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum -zinc -alloy -coated or zinc -coated steel sheet, approximately 1-inch wide by 0.05-inch thick, prepunched. G. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provision of FM4470, designed for fastening sheet to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed pipe sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, seam caulk, termination reglets, and other accessories recommended by roofing manufacturer .for ;intended use: These, accessories are to be covered by the roofing systems manufacturer's system warranty for the warranty period. 2.04 VAPOR RETARDER A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13-perm I. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard roofing adhesive, FM approved or vapor retarded application. B. Provide if noted an drawings. _ 2.05 WALKWAYS A. walkway Pads: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip -resistant, surface -textured walkway pads, approximately 1/8-inch thick, minimum, of materials acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 07533 3 2 20 04 / / THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 4 442.E1 1 2.06 ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate insulation as manufactured by Energy Solutions Insulation, Inc. (EST, Inc.), or equal. B. Panels shall be tapered and minimum thickness as indicated on Drawings and shall be suitable for mechanical attachment. C. Minimum standard size shall be 41 x 41 boards. 2.07 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet roofing material. B. Fasteners: Factory-coatedsteel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provision of FM4470, designed for fastening sheet to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. M B. Verify that roof openings !and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are properly clamped into position. C. Verify that wood nailers are in place and secured and match thickness' of insulation required. D. Do not proceed with installation until the minimum concrete curing p recommended by roofing system manufacturer. ` E. 1 aeriod Do not proceed with insta 1 t til unsatisfactory conditions have an un` 3.02 been corrected. PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no roof work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system —_— ____._.__— and - the end --of --the - workday- or - when- . rain -- is- -forecast. --Remove and _ ....... _. discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.03 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Loosely lay polyethylene -film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2-inches and 6-inches, respectfully. 07533 2/20/04 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY 442.E1 5 MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 1 1. Seal laps with tape or, 2. Seal laps with roofing manufacturer's standard adhesive. B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations. 3.04 INSDLATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the day. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated on drawings and to Shop Drawings. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. whore overall thickness is 2-inches or greater, install required thickness in 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints cif:,; previous .layer a minimum of 6-inches in each direction. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding %-inch with same insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within %-inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. G. Attached Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure through all layers to the deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type indicated. 1. Fasten insulation according to FM's "Approval Guide,, for specified windstorm Resistance Classification and the insulation and roofing manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Fasten insulation according to the insulation and roofing system manufacturer's written instructions to meet specified wind -uplift requirements but not less than 1-fastener for each 5.3 sq.ft. and at least 2-fasteners per board. H. If required, install slip -sheet over insulation and immediately beneath sheet. 3.05 MECHANICALLY FASTRN$D MMORANS SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install thermoplastic sheet over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for a minimum 30 minutes. --- 1 -----Install- sheet --according,. to ASTM D5082 .--------- B. Start installation in the presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and ends laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 07533 2/20/04 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 6 442.E1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 I 1 1 n 1 1 D. Mechanically fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. E. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. F. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing sheet in place with clamping ring. G. In -Seam Attachment: Secure one edge of the sheet using fastening plates or battens centered within the membrane seam and mechanically fasten sheet to roof deck. Field -weld seam according to "Seam Installation" Article. H. Install sheet and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing. 3.06 SEAM INSTALLATION A. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and weld side and end laps of sheets and (lashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Weld seam as follows: A. Weld Method: Hot air or solvent, as standard with roofing system manufacturer. B. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. If required, apply seam edge caulk to seal cut edges of sheet membrane. C. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. 3.07 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and, if required, adhere to substrate to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If required, apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. B. Flash penetrations and field --formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and, if required, firmly roll (lashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation D. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. if required, apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. _ _ E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through'termination bars. - .. _ _ 3.0 8 --- WALKWAY - INSTALLATION A. Walkways: Install walkway pads in locations indicated on Drawings. Heat weld or adhere walkway pads to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 2/20/04 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY 442.El 7 MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, according to manufacturer's written instructions, and repair seam sample areas. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to ENGINEER. I. Notify ENGINEER 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection. 3.10 PROTECTION AND CLEANING B. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report with copies to ENGINEER. C. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing -that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. D. Clean over -sprays and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures required by the manufacturer of affected construction. 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM END OF SECTION 8 2 20 04 442.E1 I I� 1 1 I i I1 1 L� 1 1 F1 I 11 SECTION 07650 METAL FASCIA AND GUTTER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the Work required to furnish and install the complete fascia and gutter system. B. Work of this section shall be coordinated with work specified in Section 07533 - Thermoplastic Single -ply Membrane Roofing System. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 07533 - Thermoplastic Single -Ply Membrane Roofing System. 1.03 REPHRENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Building codes 1. Florida Building Code, Latest Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. Submit specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations from manufacturers of the various components of the fascia and gutter system. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit product approval documentation per local building code requirements, or signed/sealed engineering calculations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FASCIA A. The fascia --system shall be -an extruded aluminum system. ---Fascia shall..... be aluminum with a continuous 24 gauge galvanized steel spring clip, concealed joint covers, spillout scuppers at the downspouts, corner pieces and all necessary fasteners to provide a complete installed system. Fascia finish to be factory applied"Kynar 500" paint, color to be selected by OWNER from manufacturer's.standard colors. B. Fascia face height shall be as indicated on drawings. C.—Fascia-shall--be---product •number--ECX-320.-..as manufactured. by .W..P...._.N .c.kman Company or equal. 2.02 GUTTER A. The gutter shall be formed aluminum, .063 gauge, complete with hangers, fasteners and all necessary items to provide a complete installation. Finish to be factory applied "Kynar 500" paint, color to be selected by OWNER from manufacturer's standard colors. 07650 /20/04 22.E1 1 METAL FASCIA AND GUTTER SYSTEM B. Gutter dimensions shall be as indicated on drawings. C. Gutters shall be custom formed gutter as manufactured by W.P. Hickman Company or equal. 2.03 DOWNSPOUTS A. The downspouts shall be formed aluminum, .063 gauge, complete with starter tubes, straps, fasteners and all items necessary for a complete installation. Finish to be factory applied °Kynar 5001, paint, color to be selected by OWNER from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Downspout dimensions shall be as noted on drawings. C. Downspouts shall be Model D566 as manufactured by W.P. Hickman. Company, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FASCIA SYSTEM A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and product approval documents for installation of system. 3.02 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and product approval documents for installation of all items. 07650 2/20/04 METAL FASCIA AND GUTTER SYSTEM 2 442.El SECTION 07900 SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the work necessary to furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to provide all joint sealants as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. All items specified herein this section may not be specifically required for this project. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of this section with the drawings for proper completion of the Work. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED BLSMMERE A. Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. 1.03 SUBXXTTAL A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. In addition, the following specific information shall be submitted: 1. Manufacturer's product data. for use showing color 2. Submit small sample of materials proposed specified. Samples shall be accompanied by Certificate of Compliance with applicable reference standards. 3. Submit applicator's Affidavit of Qualification Compliance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator shall have a minimum of 5 years experience installing sealants in projects of similar scope. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all sealants to jobsite in sealed containers, each bearing manufacturer's name and product description. B. Provide for storage of sealant materials as recommended by manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The ambient temperature shall be 400 to 100°F, when a sealant is applied.--- B. Allow sealants a minimum curing time of one (1) week prior to total water immersion. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule sealant installation to coincide and expedite work specified in Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. 2/20/04 07900 442.E1 1 SEALANTS 11 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Sealants shall be approved for use in contact with potable water where required by specific application. 2.02 SINGLE COMPONENT SEALANT A. Sealant shall be one -part polyurethane conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-00230C and ASTM C-920, Type 11 Class A, Non -Sag Elastomeric Sealant. B. Color shall be selected from manufacturers standards to match color of adjacent surfaces, where applicable. C. Sealant shall be Sikaflex-1A as manufactured by Sika or equal. 2.03 TWO COMPONENT SEALANT A. Sealant shall be two -component, premium grade, polyurethane -based, conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-00227E and ASTM C-920, Non -Sag (NS) or self -leveling (SL) Elastomeric Sealant. B. Color shall be selected from manufacturers standards to match color of adjacent surfaces, where applicable. C. Sealant shall be Sikaflex-2C, NS/SL as manufactured by Sika or equal. 2.04 JOINT BACKING (BACKER ROD) A. Closed -cell polyethylene foam rod conforming to ASTM D1751 and compatible to specified sealant. Size and use shall be as recommended by manufacturer. 2.05 PRIMER A. Material shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrate, as applicable. 2.06 BOND BREAKER A. Bond breaker shall be polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant to back Ord) surface of joint substrate or joint backing.--- 7 7 g- PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Elastomeric sealants shall be applied in accordance with ASTM C962. B. All surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound and free of dust, loose mortar and -all other foreign material A. Apply sealant materials, bond breaker and primer in strict compliance with the manufacturer's printed instructions as applicable to products and indicated applications. 07900 2/20/04 SEALANTS 2 442.El 1 1 3.03 CLEANUP A. Surfaces adjacent to sealed joints shall be cleaned of smears, excess sealant materials or other soiling resulting from the sealing application. At no additional cost to OWNER, replace or repair to OWNER's satisfaction any damaged surfaces resulting from sealing. 2/20/04 442.El END OF SECTION 3 07900 SEALANTS 1 E 1 1 1 1 �1 1 J 1 I SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install aluminum doors, frames and related items, complete and operable, including all finish hardware and all appurtenant work, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Work of this section shall be coordinated with Section 08710- Finish Hardware. C. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, replacement and service. D. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, for information and requirements which apply to the Work specified in this Section and that are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 05500 - Fabricated Metalwork and Castings. B. Section 03600 - Grout. C. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of the Building Code and the applicable requirements of the following documents to the extent that the provisions of such documents are not in conflict with `the requirements of this Section. B. Products and their installation shall be in accordance with the following standards as applicable: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAMM). 4 Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) _........ 5. Manufacturer's published recommendations and Specifications. C. Building Codes 1. Florida Building Code, 2001. -- 1.04 SUBMITTALS ----- ----- ---.A. Submittals shall --be --in accordance --with--the--requirements-- of-- Section,-. 01300 - Submittals. B. Shop drawings shall show details of the products, systems and connections to adjoining materials. Schedules showing sizes, types and locations of louvers and glass shall be submitted along with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2/20/04 442.El 08120 1 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES [7 C. Manufacturer's literature and any engineering calculations that may be required elsewhere in this Section shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. D. Manufacturer's product approval documentation per building code shall be submitted with the shop drawings. E. In lieu of product approval documentation, calculations by a registered structural engineer shall be submitted showing that doors, frames, and their structural connections are designed to meet code requirements and load transfer to the structure.. 1.05 DESIGN RBQUIR8,1ZNTS A. Aluminum doors and frames provided for this project shall be a complete system consisting of the door (s), frame, finish hardware, threshold, anchorage and hinges. B. Exterior Door Design Wind Pressure Criteria: 1. In accordance with the provisions of ASCE 7-98. (Criteria per Florida Building Code Section 1606.1.7 shall be as noted on Drawings.) 2. Design Wind Pressure: Shall be as scheduled on drawings. 3. Wall Anchorage: Design shall meet requirements of Building Code. Minimum embed depth of 2-inches. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All aluminum doors and frames shall be shop fabricated and shop assembled, where passible. Temporary stiffeners, spacers and other accessories necessary to facilitate handling and accurate erection shall be provided. After fabrication, all tool marks and other surface imperfections shall be filled and ground smooth. B. All doors and frames shall be fabricated entirely of extrudable shapes of the 6063-T5 or T6 alloy of a thickness specified for the item being considered. C. Doors and frames shall be reinforced and drilled or tapped for fully templated mortised hardware; and shall be reinforced with plates for surface -mounted hardware, meeting ANSI Series. A115-•82 requirements. Hardware shall be as specified in Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. D. Aluminum doors and frames shall be as manufactured by Alutech Corporation, Creative Design Doors, Inc., or equal. 2.02 ALUKINUK FRAMES A. -..... ,tall be aluminum Both Extruded frames for doors and other openings sections shall be fabricated from 6063 TS aluminum alloy with a no urinal . thickness of 0.125 inches. Weather stripping shall be elastromer vinyl —. ccnfarming---..to.... Government. Spec ifica.tions.._C3.-2.3.0-_6Q.__:___ B. Door jamb depths, trim profile, and backbends shall be indicated on shop drawings submitted by the Contractor. C. Finish shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. 08120 2/20/04 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 2 442.E1 1 1 LI 2.03 FRAME ANCHORS A. Anchor types shall be as noted on Drawings and/or as specified in Section 05500 - Fabricated Metalwork and Castings. B. Anchorages shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, and approved by ENGINEER. C. The number of anchors provided per interior door jambs and head shall be as follows: 1. ,lambs up to 7-feet 6-inches in height: 3 anchors. 2. ,lambs 7-feet 6-inches to 8-feet 0-inches in height: 4 anchors. 3. Iambs over 8-feet 0-inches in height: 1 anchor for each 2-feet fl- inches of fraction in height. 4. Head shall have a minimum of 3 anchors or 1 anchor per foot whichever is greater. D. number of anchors and type of anchor provided per exterior door frame and head shall be as per the approved shop drawings and calculations. 2.04 ALUMINUM DOORS A. Aluminum doors shall be of 5-ply construction and shall be of a full flush design. Face sheets shall be 0.04-inches thick, 3105 aluminum alloy. Door frames shall be 6063-T5 or T6 extruded aluminum shapes. All doors shall have flush seamless face sheets. Doors shall be rigid and neat in appearance, and shall be free from warpage or buckle. Corner bends shall be true and straight and shall be of not less than the minimum radius for the gauge of metal used. The door top and bottom shall be internally reinforced as needed by additional aluminum members welded in place. Tops of exterior doors shall be provided with flush weather -tight taps. B. Door cores shall be polyisocyanurate foam, 2.0 pounds per cubic foot of pre -stabilized variety to not allow air pockets. C. Replaceable compressible neoprene or molded PVC type gaskets or replaceable wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing as suitable for type of door operation. Finish be on Drawings. D. shall as scheduled 2.05 - A. FINISH HARDWARE Finish hardware shall be provided for each door as scheduled on..the. drawings. B. Provided under Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 2.06 DOOR LIGHTS.(GLASS) A. Clear, polished, tempered glass shall:be 1/4-inch minimum thickness,. shall have a diagonal wire pattern and shall meet the requirements of and safety__codes...-- 2.07 FASTENERS A. Provide all necessary stainless steel or aluminum screws, bolts and other fasteners of suitable size and type to secure frame and louvers into position. Fasteners shall match frame finish. 2/20/04 08120 442.E1 3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES fl B. hardware provided, such as expansion bolts, hex bolts, toggle bolts and other approved anchorages shall be coordinated with job and to each setting condition. 2.08 FINISH A. Aluminum shall be factory finished with an anodized finish with integral color, as selected by ENGINEER from the manufacturer's color chart. The surfaces shall be cleaned and properly treated with a conversion coating prior to finishing to ensure bonding of the finish to the metal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommen- dations and specifications. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. All work shall be coordinated with appropriate related subcontractors work to assure a proper installation. Field conditions and dimensions shall be verified prior to fabrication. 3.03 SHIPPING AND STORAGE A. Doors and frames shall be shipped and stored with temporary stiffeners and spacers in place to prevent distortion. 3.04 FRAME INSTALLATION A. Frames shall be set plumb and square in a true plane. Shims shall be provided and shall be set tight and rigidly attached between frame anchors and structure. All finished aluminum frames shall be strong and rigid; neat in appearance; and square, true and free of defects, warp or buckle. B. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and shall be of a uniform profile throughout their lengths. C. Corner joints shall have all contact edges tightly closed with all trim faces mitered, welded and finished smooth. The use of gussets will not be permitted. . ........ 3.05 DOOR INSTALLATION A. Doors shall be installed plumb and square and level with the frames securely anchored to the adjoining new or existing walls. Doors shall operate freely, but not loosely. They shall be free from rattling while in a closed position. B. The door clearances shall be plus 3/32-inch or minus 1/32-inch and --- — --- - — shall -not-- exceed -the limits specified - in the- manufacturer, s printed --------.- recommendations. C. Any door that becomes warped more than 3/16 inch out -of -plane shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR within the Scope of the Contract. 08120 2/20/04 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 4 442.E1 1 3.06 FINISH HARDWARE A. Finish hardware shall. be installed in accordance with hardware manufacturer's standard templates and printed instructions. Operable parts shall be adjusted for correct function. 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION 08120 5 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 1 1 n 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary for furnishing and installing, complete, the finish hardware. B. The work hereunder shall include all fabrication and mounting templates as needed for fabricators and for control of application of metal items. C. In addition thereto, the CONTRACTORshall provide and install all trim, attachments, and fastenings specified or required for proper and complete installation. The work of this Section shall include all hardware that is not specified in other sections, whether or not such hardware is herein specifically scheduled. D. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, replacement and service. E. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, for information and requirements which apply to the Work specified in this Section and that are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 08120 - Aluminum Doors and Frames. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Hardware products and their installation shall be in accordance with the following trade standards as applicable: 1. Hardware Institute (DHI); RecQmmended Procedure for Prggessing Hardware S ulea and em latex and Architectural Hardware Scheduling and _Format . 2. Federal Specifications. 3. Manufacturer's published recommendations and Specifications. 4..... Underwriters'..... Laboratgri.es,._.Inc. (UL)...requirements and _approva7.s. B. Numbers in the 600 series are the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) industry standard for finishes. C. Codes 1. Florida Building Code, 2001. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit a complete detailed hardware list and a schedule along with manufacturer's literature on each item for review. No hardware shall be delivered until the hardware schedule has been reviewed by ENGINEER. C. Hardware schedule submitted by CONTRACTOR shall list the actual product series numbers. Manufacturer's catalog requirements for actual size 2/20/04 08710 442.E1 1 FINISH HARDWARE 1 of door closers, brackets and holders shall be observed. All door sizes shall be noted on the hardware schedule and all hardware shall be in strict accordance with height, width and thickness requirements. D. The schedule shall indicate groups, type, manufacturer's name, catalog number, location and finish of each item to be provided, all in accordance with the DHI "Architectural Hardware scheduling Sequence and Format." E. The schedule shall also include a complete template list showing template references and data for each item requiring preparation of doors and frames. FART 2 PRODUCTS LI i1L "iiy�� A. Finish hardware shall be coordinated with all other work requiring builder's hardware or attaching to it. Copies of schedules, templates. and other items shall be furnished in ample time to avoid fabrication and construction delays. Each item of hardware shall be identified according to the reviewed list and schedule. All hardware shall be made to template. H. All hardware furnished in connection with doors wearing Underwriters' Labels or where necessary to meet special requirements shall be in strict accordance with conditions established by the authority having jurisdiction and shall be subject to approval of that authority. C. Hand of door shall be as shown on drawings. If door hand is changed during construction, CONTRACTOR shall make necessary changes within the Scope of the Contract. D. Exit doors shall open outward at all times from the inside without the use of key or any special knowledge or effort. E. Finish hardware required per door shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 2.02 KEYING A. All locks and cylinders shall be master keyed to the OWNER's requirements and the OWNER's existing system. _.._.. ..B....-All lock cylinders shall be construct ion'master keyed or provided with construction cylinders and construction keys. Three construction master keys shall be obtained by CONTRACTOR; 2 shall be retained by CONTRACTOR for use during construction; remaining construction key shall be provided to ENGINEER for his use. C. Furnish 5 keys per cylinder keying combination. All keys along with 5 master keys shall be delivered to ENGINEER at completion of the project. D. All keying (except when matching existing keying system or when less than 10 locksets are required) shall be done at the factory unless otherwise acceptable to ENGINEER. 08710 2/20/04 FINISH HARDWARE 2 442.E1 LI fl Cl G 1 I71 L! 1 1 I I 1 1 1 2.03 FASTENERS fasteners of suitable A. Provide all necessary screws, bolts and other size and type to secure hardware into position. Fasteners shall match hardware in material and finish. B. Hardware provided, such as expansion bolts, hex bolts, toggle bolts and other approved anchorages shall be coordinated with job and to each setting condition. C. Phillips head screws shall be used at exposed conditions. Machine screws shall be used for aluminum doors and frames. 2.04 HINGES A. McKinney Manufacturing Company, or equal. B. Minimum number of hinges per door leaf, based on height of door: 5'-1" to 7'-7" 3 pairs 7'-7" to 10'-011 4 pairs Actual number of hinges required shall be as per door manufacturer's submitted wind load calculations. hinges, based of doors: C. Minimum height of on width Up to 3' -011 4-1/211 3 t _111 to 4 1 -011 511 D. Exterior hinges shall have nonremovable pins. E. Hinge leaves shall be parallel and joint tolerance shall be 0.012 inch maximum, gauged in closed position. F. FINISH: SATIN STAINLESS STEEL, No. 630. G. HINGE TYPES: H1 Five knuckle, standard weight, two ball races, full mortise, McKinney TA2314. 2.05 LOCKS AND LATCH SETS ----A. Lock and latch sets shall be AL -Series; Saturn design, manufactured by Schlage Lock Company. B. Strikes shall have lip dimensions to fit configuration of trim. Same finish as lock and latch set. C. Backset: 'two -and -three -fourths (2- 3/4°) inches, except as noted. D.Finish: Satin Chromium Plated, No. 626. --.—E. Lock and Latch _Types: ID Type escript' ANSI Schlaae Product L1 Lockset, entrance lock F82 AL53PD L2 Latch set, no locking F75 AL10S L3 Lockset, utility room F86 AL80PD L4 Deadlock N/A N/A 2/20/04 08710 442.E1 3 FINISH HARDWARE Type Description ANSI' Schlaae Pradu__ct LID 5 Lockset, privacy lock F76 AL40S L6 Not Used L7 Lock by Door Manufacturer; N/A N/A Provide cylinders for keying to other locks as required. L8 Not Used L9 Padlock Hasp and N/A N/A Staple (SST) F. Cylinders shall be standard lever cylinder number 21-020. 2.06 CLOSERS A. LCN Closers, or equal. B. Size closers in accordance with manufacturers standards. Mount closers on interior or push side of doors. On pair of doors provide closer on active leaf only, unless noted otherwise. Provide hold open option. C. Finish- Satin chromium -plated, No. 652. D. Closer es• Cl Parallel arm LCN-146OH-TB-AL C2 Parallel arm LCN-1461H-TB-AL 2.07 THRESHOLDS (ALUMINUM) A. Pemko Manufacturing Co., or equal. B. Thresholds shall be one-piece full width of opening. Extend beyond jamb where required. C. Provide with machine screws in threaded expansion anchor at concrete. D. Finish: Mill finish aluminum. Threshold Types: T1 No. 270A 2.08 SILENCERS _._.- _.._..._... A. Provide three at single leaves and two at pairs. B. Silencers shall be manufactured by Ives; Glynn -Johnson; or equal 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. _ Foot Bolts (FBI) 1. 6-inch, stainless steel. 2 —Ultra_..TA1057 --- Stanley ...1,05"7,--or-...equal: - - ----- -- -- .--- _...__. Heavy Chain Bolt (CBI) ---------- B. 1. ..6-inch stainless steel. 2. Ultra TA1055, Stanley 1055, or equal. 08710 2/20/04 FINISH HARDWARE 4 442.El 1 1 1 1 G 1 1 LJ 1 C. Cane Bolts (CN1) 1. Deluxe heavy duty, stainless steel. 2. Provide for each door leaf. 3. Ultra CD-CB12 (1211) or CD-CB18 (1811), or equal. D. Combination Astragal and Flush Bolt Assembly (Al) 1. Surface --mount combination Astragal & flush bolt assembly shall be Ultra WS059, or equal. S. Exit Device (El) 1. Exit device shall be ED6200 Rim Exist Device with stainless steel finish as manufactured by Corbin Russwin, or equal. PART 3 8XXCVTION 3.01 GBNSRAL A. All required items of hardware, including cylinders for locks and all fitting, adjusting and security of each item neatly and firmly in place, shall be complete and in perfect working order. B. All finish hardware shall be fitted and dismantled before painting work and shall be reinstalled after finish painting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation of finish hardware. Make all Work neat and secure, developing full strength of components and providing proper function. Prevent marring, scratching, or otherwise damaging adjacent finishes during the installation of hardware. B. Do all fitting, dismantling and reinstalling of finish hardware required for finish painting work. Use strippable coating, removable tape and other means to protect and prevent staining of hardware during construction. Protective measures shall be removed and permanent lock cylinders installed prior to final cleaning. C. Latch bolts shall be installed to engage in strikes automatically, whether activated by closers or manually. In no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engage latch bolt in strike. D. Cope ends of thresholds neatly to profile of jamb. Thresholds shall be set in sealant and ends shall be sealed to jambs. 3.03 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS A. Use standard door hardware locations as published by the National Builders' Association, except as noted or detailed otherwise. B ----•Install door -silencers 3 inches from top and bottom of jamb and 1--inch above strike at single doors, and 3 inches from edges of doors in head for pairs of doors. 3.04 DXLXVZRY, STORAGR AND HANDLING A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a room under lock and key to store all finish hardware until installation is made and be responsible for loss and pilferage. 2/20/04 08710 442.El 5 FINISH HARDWARE 1 B. Each item of hardware shall be marked as to description and location of installation. C. Strippable coating or removable tape protection or other recommending means to prevent any damage or staining of hardware during construction shall be used. Such protective measures shall, be removed prior to OWNER's acceptance of project. 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The Hardware Schedule on the Drawings is a guide to functional requirements of each opening.- Provide hardware complete. END OF SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 6 2/20/04 442.El 1 SECTION 09200 LATH AND PLASTER ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install the complete. Portland Cement Plaster (stucco) and related components, B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this Project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 09900 - Protective Coatings 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. - Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals B. Submit 12-inch by 12-inch sample panels of plaster finish coats specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS PLASTER (STUCCO) ACCESSORIES 2.01 A. General: Comply with material provisions of ANSI A42.3; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of coats required. B. Plastic Lathing Accessories: Small nose corner, with performed flanges, fabricated from high impact polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Provide products of the types indicated, manufactured by Plastic Components, Inc, or equal. 1. Corner Beads: No. 2 type, min, 2-3/4" legs. 2. Casing Beads: No. 1050 style, % " grounds. 3. Expansion & Control: No. 2150X, ground. C. Diamond Mesh Expanded Metal Lath: Cut from galvanized steel, weight 3.4 pounds per square yard, conforming to ANSI A 42.4. D. Nonstructural Framing: Conform to the requirements of ASTM C 645, 25- gauge galvanized C-studs, size as noted on Drawings, and ancillary framing items for soffit as required. E. Carrying' Channels.' Cold -rolls steel, 16-gauge, free of rust, coated with factory -applied rust -inhibitive paint, 1-1/2 inches deep, weighing not less than 475 pounds per 1,000 linear feet. F. Furring Ghannels.Cold=rbllecl--steel; 16-gauges fre'Tof riistcoated __........---- with factory -applied rust inhibitive paint, 3/4-inch deep, weighing not less than 300 pounds per 1,000 linear feet. G. Tie Wire: Galvanized soft annealed steel, 18-gauge minimum. r 2/20/04 09200 442.E1 1 LATH AND PLASTER n 2.02 PLASTER (STUCCO) MATERIALS A. Base Coat Cements: Portland Cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or III; or masonry cement, ASTM C 91, Type N. B. Finish Coat Cements: Portland Cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, white; or ' masonry cement, ASTM c 91, Type N, white. C. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 2106, Type S, or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 33. E. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897. F. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable, free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster accessories.' G. Bonding Agent: Larson Products, Plasterweld; TOCH Brothers, TOK-Bond; or equal. H. Bonding Additive: Acrylic -based emulsion for bonding Portland Cement plaster base -coat to solid substrates. I. Products: Quick -Cure Ad -Liquid (Finestone Corp.); Acrylic Admix- 101 (Larsen Products Corp.); or Acryl 60 (Std. Drywall prod.). 2.03 STUCCO MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for Portland Cement plaster base and finish coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials and other requirements indicated. B. Base Coat Mix and Composition: Proportion materials for base coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregate to comply with the following requirements. Adjust mix proportions below within the limits specified to attain workability. 1. Two -Coat Work Over Concrete Unit Masonry: 1 part Portland Cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, and 3 to 4 parts sand; or l part masonry cement, 3 to 4 parts sand. 2. Three -Coat Work Over Metal Lath one of the following combinations ....indicated below: _....._-------- -- -- - a. Scratch Coat: 1 part Portland Cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2- 1/2 to 4 parts sand. b. Scratch Coat: I part masonry cement, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand. Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement, 3 to 5 parts sand. C. Job -Mixed Finish Coats: Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and in parts by volume per sum of ------ cementitious .__materials _ for --aggregates--...to--_-.comply with—one--of--the-T� following requirements: -1. 1 part Portland Cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand. 2. 1 part Portland Cement, 1 part masonry cement, 3 parts sand. 3. 1 part masonry cement, 1-1/2 parts sand. 09200 2/20/04 LATH AND PLASTER 2 442.91 i D. Mixing: Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. IPART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PLASTER (STUCCO) ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturers recommendations for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. ' 3.02 PLASTER (STUCCO) APPLICATION A. General: Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats and use bonding compound or agent to comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards for conditioning of monolithic surfaces. B. Plaster Application Standards: Apply Portland Cement plaster materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. ' 1. Spray Application: Spray apply Portland Cement plaster materials to vertical surfaces indicated to comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and PCA "Portland Cement Plaster Manual" for machine application. C. Number of Coats: Apply Portland Cement plaster or composition indicated, in two -coat applications over concrete unit masonry and three -coat applications over metal lath. D. Finish Coat Texture: Floated finish unless otherwise indicated; match ENGINEER's sample for texture and color. E. Curing: Moist cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including recommendations for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations". F. Total application thickness: H-inch, minimum. G. Stucco Accessories: Provide stucco accessories as specified below: all masonry openings. Corner Beads: All wall corners and at Casing Beads: Bottom of all stucco applications where noted on drawings. Expansion/Control Joints: As noted on drawings. 1 1 i 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION 3 09200 LATH AND PLASTER 1 1 1 1 �II 1 1 1 tm 1 1 SECTION 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the work required to provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to perform all of the necessary surface preparation and painting required to complete this contract in its entirety. B. It is the intent of this specification to paint all concrete exposed miscellaneous ferrous metals, pipes, fittings, valves, equipment and all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor items omitted in the schedule of Work shall be included in the Work of this Section where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein.. C. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted: 1. Aluminum: gratings, checkered plates, hatches, handrails, toeboards, stairways and walkways (except as required for electrolytic protection). 2. Stainless Steel, brass and bronze. 3. Piping buried in the ground or embedded in concrete. 4. Ducts, pipes and other miscellaneous items covered with insulation or plastic coated. 5. Concealed surfaces of pipe and crawl spaces. 6. Finish hardware. 7. Nonferrous architectural metals, unless speciticaily nocea otherwise. S. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of mechanical equipment. 9. Concrete slabs and equipment pads. 10. All manufactured painted electrical equipment (switchgear, transformers, motor control centers, control panels, etc.). D. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK'S$ECIPIED ELSEWHERE m A._Section-07900-- Sealants..- B. Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster. C. Individual specifications sections. 2/20/04 ' 442.El 1 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS L, 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS A. The abbreviations and definitions listed below, when used in this Section shall have the following meanings: ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society of Testing Materials AWWA American water works Association DFT Dry Film Thickness FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic HCL Hydrochloric Acid MDFT Minimum Dry Film Thickness MDFTPC Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat mil Thousandths of an Inch MIL-P Military Specification - Paint MACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NSF National Sanitary Foundation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration SFPG Square Feet Per Gallon SFPGPC Square Feet Per Gallon Per Coat SP Surface Preparation SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall -be made in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submittals will be made with the coating system data sheet included at the end of this section. C. The following shall be submitted for each proposed coating system: manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation details, application procedures, technical data sheets and dry film thickness or coverage. D. ScheSlule of Painting O eratio The CONTRACTOR shall include a complete Schedule of Painting Operations with the overall project schedule: 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE i 1 I tl 1 1 1 fl A. The paint manufacturer shall provide a representative to visit the jobsite at intervals during surface preparation and painting as may be required for product application quality assurance and to determine _.compliance with Manufacturer's instructions and these Specifications and as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with, the manufacturer's products furnished under this Contract. 1. 0 fi INSPXCTION ..- :.._.. A The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER a minimu m of three (3) days , advance notice of the completion of any surface preparation work or start--of_,-coating-application -work: --_....—__ B. Before application of the base (prime) coat and each succeeding coat, , all surfaces to be painted shall be inspected by ENGINEER. Any and all defects or deficiencies application of any shall be corrected by subsequent coating. the CONTRACTOR before 09900 2/20/04 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 2 442.E1 r ' C. Coating applications shall be checked for required MDFT as per these specifications. All coated surfaces failing to meet the MDFT requirements shall be rejected. D. For all coatings subject to immersion, consult the coatings manufacturer's written instructions for time required after system application before immersion. E. Inspection by the ENGINEER or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the Work shall not be construed to relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these Specifications. rF. All equipment required for discontinuity (Holiday) testing of steel substrates and continuity verification of concrete substrates shall be furnished and operated by the painting contractor. r1.07 PAINT DELIVERY AND STORAGE I 1 1 1 1 r] A. All materials shall be new and shall be delivered to the project site in unopened containers that plainly show, at the time of use, the designated name, date of manufacture, color, and name of manufacturer. Paints shall be stored in a suitable protected area that is heated or cooled as required to maintain temperatures within the range recommended by the paint manufacturer. 1.08 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. The location of this project requires observance and conformance with EPA Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) restrictions. EPA limits the content of VOC's in painting materials to 3.5 lbs./gallon. Information regarding the VOC content of proposed paints will be required during submittals. 1.09 WARRANTY A. CONTRACTOR shall warrant to the OWNER and guarantee the work under this Section against defective workmanship and materials for a period of two (2) years commencing on the final contract date of Final Completion of the project. B. Warranties shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01740- Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. B. 2.02 All products used in immersion service or in contact with potable water shall be ANSI/NSF certified for use in contact with potable water. Products containing lead will not be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. PAINT MATERIALS A. Products shall be manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., Sherwin- Williams, ChemRex, or equal. 2/20/04 09900 442.E1 3 PROTECTIVE COATINGS B. The following paint products are by Tnemec Company, Inc., and ChemRex are used for the basis of establishing the desired quality expected for the project. Polyamine Epoxy (Primer) Polyamide Epoxy (Potable) Polyamide Epoxy (Non -Potable) Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Acrylic Emulsion (Flat) Polyamide Epoxy Coal Tar Polyamine Novolac Epoxy waterborne Cementitious Acrylic Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy (Semi Glass) Epoxy Mastic PRODUCT YPE Cementitious Coating TNEMEC COMPANY, INC. PRODUCT NAME Series 201 Epoxoprime Series 139 Pota-Fox II Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline Series 73 Endura-Shield Series 6 Tneme-Cryl 46-413 Tneme-Tar Series 282 Tneme-Glaze Series 130-6602 Envfrofill Series 113 Tneme-Tufcoat Series 135 Chembuild CHEMREX PRODUCT NAME Thoroseal A. Furnish one (1) unopened container of each type and each color of paint used, properly marked for future use by OWNER. Minimum size of one (1) gallon. 2.04 PIPE IDENTIFICATION LABELS ri 1 ['I 1 1 11 1 A. Piping systems larger than or equal to I" diameter 1. Stick -on pipe labels shall be durable self-adhesive vinyl, meeting ANSI A13.1 for background color and lettering height as follows: Pipe__L ameter Letter Height . 111 to 2-1/211 3/411 .`,, ,. •.. . 2-5/8" to 6" 1-1/4" 6" plus 2-1/211 2. Custom flow stream identification text shall be provided per the flaw stream requirements noted on the drawings. 3. Stick -on pipe labels shall be as -manufactured by Champion America:._._ __ --- .or.equal. B. Piping systems less than 1° diameter ' 1 Labels shall be reusable plastic snap -on markers as manufactured by Champion America, or equal. 2 Custom flow stream identification text shall be provided per the flow --- -stream .-.requirements...noted- on -the -.drawings...-...-...- PART 3 EXECUTION r 3.01 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, 09900 2/20/04 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 4 442.E1 1 C r_� P 7 i LJ 1 F1 1 d r] F1 1 1 nameplates and all other surfaces not intended to be painted which cannot be removed. B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting processes. Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent paint and other materials from entering motors. 3.O2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITMONS A. Paint shall not be applied in temperatures exceeding the manufacturer's recommended maximum and minimum allowable, nor under adverse conditions such as dust, smoke -laden atmosphere, damp or humid weather. A. Painting shall be performed in strict accordance with the safety recommendations of the paint manufacturer; with the safety recommendations of the National Association of Corrosion Engineers contained in the publication, Manual for Painter Safety; Federal, State, and local agencies having jurisdiction. B. ultimate responsibility for safety is the CONTRACTOR'S 3.04 PREPARATION OF FERROUS METAL SURFACES A. All surfaces to be coated shall be prepared as specified herein and shall be dry and clean before coating. Specific surface preparation shall be specified for the individual coating systems. B. Standards for Ferrous Metal Surfaces Preparation 1. SSPC-SP-1 Chemical and/or Solvent Cleaning Remove all grease, oil', salt, acid, alkali, dirt, dust, wax, fat, foreign matter and contaminates, etc. by one of the following methods: steam cleaning, alkaline cleaning, or volatile solvent cleaning. 2. SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning Removal -of loose rust, loose mill scale and loose paint to a clean sound substrate by hand chipping, scraping, sanding and wire brushing. 3. SSPC-SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale and loose paint to a clean sound substrate by power tool chipping, descaling, sanding, wire brushing and grinding. 4. SSPC-SP-4 Flame Cleaning Dehydrating and removal of rust, loose mill scale and some light mill scale by use of flame, followed by wire brushing. 5. SSPC-SP-5 (NACE-1) White Metal Blast Cleaning 2/20/04 442.E1 5 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS Complete removal of all mill scale, rust scale, previous coating, etc., leaving the surface a uniform gray -white color. , 6. SSPC-SP-6 (NACE-3) Commercial Grade Blast Cleaning Complete removal of all dirt, rust scale, mill scale, foreign ' matter and previous coating, etc., leaving only shadows and/or streaks caused by rust stain and mill scale oxides. At least 66W of each square inch of surface area is to be free of all visible residues, except slight discoloration. ' 7. SSPC-SP-7 (NACE-4) Brush -Off Blast Cleaning Removal of rust scale, loose mill scale, 10OBe rust and loose , coatings, leaving tightly -bonded mill scale, rust and previous coatings. on:concrete surfaces, brush-off blast,.c.leaning shall, remove all laitance, form oils and solid contaminates. Blasting should be performed sufficiently close to the surface so as to open up surface voids, bughol,es, air pockets and other subsurface irregularities, but so as not to expose underlying aggregate. t 8. SSPC-SP-8 Pickling Complete removal of rust and mall scale by acid pickling, duplex pickling or electrolytic pickling (may reduce the resistance of the surface to corrosion, if not to be primed immediately). 9. SSPC-SP-10 (NACE-2) Near -White Metal Blast Cleaning Removal of all rust scale, mill scale, previous coating, etc., leaving only light stains from rust, mill scale and small specks of previous coating. At least 95% of each square .inch of surface area is to be free of all visible residues, and the remainder ' shall be limited to slight discoloration. 10. SSPC-SP-11-87 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal , Complete removal of.rust, rust scale, mill scale, foreign matter> and previous coatings, etc. to a standard as specified on a Commercial Grade Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP-6, NACE-3) by means of , power tools that will provide the proper degree of cleaning and surface profile. C. Ferrous metal shall be blasted unless otherwise specified. Blasting shall be done with a centrifugal wheel. or., compressed- -air _..blasting._---._---_.-�-- equipment, using proper abrasives to attain an average profile depth of 1.5 mils. Do not reuse sand or flint abrasives. Shot abrasives must be thoroughly clean of contamination before reuse. Blow dust and grit from ' surface with clean, dry air. Coat within 8 hours or before rust contamination occurs. D. ShQP.F'inished _surfaces: All shop -coated surfaces shall .be`protected- from damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating .areas .immediately upon detection.--Abraded--or corroded._spots on shop -coated surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) and then touched up with the same materials as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, discolored, or which require more than minor touch-up in the opinion of the ENGINEER shall be repainted. Cut edges of galvanized sheets and exposed threads and cut ends of galvanized piping, electrical conduit, and metal pipe , sleeves, not to be finished painted, shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP1 (Solvent Cleaned) and primed with zinc dust -zinc oxide metal primer. 09900 2/20/04 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 6 442.E1 , 1 L� E. Pre -Blast Cleaning Reguirements All oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants shall be removed prior to blast cleaning. Preblast cleaning methods shall use steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing. Small isolated areas shall be cleaned as above or solvent cleaned with suitable solvents and clean cloths. All sharp edges shall be rounded or chamfered and all burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects ,shall be ground smooth. Welds and adjacent areas shall be prepared such that there is: (1) no undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld bead, (2) no weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted and ( 3 ) no sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead. All embedded pieces of electrode or wire shall be ground flush with the adjacent surface of the weld bead. 1 1 1 r_ 1 1 3.05 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND MASONRY SURFACES A. All surfaces to be coated shall be prepared as specified herein and shall be dry and clean before coating. Specific surface preparation shall be specified for the individual coating systems. B. Standards for concrete/masonry surface preparation shall be as defined and specified by guideline No. 03732 (latest revision) as published by the International Concrete Repair Institute. C. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the International Concrete Repair Institute Guideline No. 03732 to provide the specified Concrete Surface Profile CSP 2 - CSP 9, and the recommendations of the repair, coating and lining manufacturer. According to ICRI, surface preparation methods that may result in a CSP 1 - CSP 9, include acid etching, detergent scrubbing, low-pressure water blasting, abrasive (sand) blasting, and high and ultra high pressure water jetting. Concrete and masonry surface preparation method shall be as selected by CONTRACTOR to meet the specified concrete surface profile requirement and the other specified surface preparation requirements. D. The Concrete Surface Profile (CSP) requirements shall be as follows: l ICRI CSP 1 - Acid Etched. 2 ICRI CSP 2 - Grinding. 3 ICRI CSP 3 - Light Shot Blast. 4 ICRI CSP 4 - Light Scarification. 5 ICRI CSP 5 - Medium Shot Blast... 6 ICRI CSP 6 - Medium Scarification. 7 ICRI CSP 7.- Heavy Abrasive Blast. 8 ICRI CSP 8 - Scabbled. --._.-..._......9...-.._..._-TGRL-CSP-..9.__-_.Heavy. ScArificat.ion..__,_ These classifications are to be used to determine depth of surface profile and are not intended to dictate surface preparation method to be employed. 3.06 PREPARATION OF EXISTING COATED SURFACES A. Existing coated surfaces to be painted shall be detergent washed and fresh water rinsed. Loose, abraded, or damaged coatings shall be 2/20/04 442.E1 7 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS cleaned to substrate by SSPC-SP2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) or SSPC-SP3 (Power Tool Cleaning). Surrounding intact coating shall be feathered. One spot coat of the specified primer shall be applied to bare areas overlapping the prepared existing coating. One full finish coat of the specified material shall be applied overall. B. The exact nature of the existing coatings is not known in all cases; and, while it is assumed that they have oxidized sufficiently to prevent lifting or peeling when overcoated with the paints specified, the compatibility shall be checked by application to a small area prior to starting the painting. If lifting or other problems occur, request instructions from the ENGINEER. 3.07 SHOP PAINTING A. All fabricated steel work and equipment shall receive at the factory at least one shop coat of prime paint compatiblewith the paint system required by these Specifications. Surface preparation prior to shop painting shall be as specified. Finish coats may be applied in the shop if acceptable to the ENGINEER. All shop painted items shall be properly packaged and stored until they are incorporated in the Work. Any painted surfaces that are damaged during handling, transporting, storage or installation shall be cleaned, scraped and patched before field painting begins. Work shall be equal to the original painting received at the shop. Equipment or steel work that is to be assembled on the site shall likewise receive a minimum of one shop coat of paint at the factory. Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be prepared and painted before erection. B. The CONTRACTOR shall specify the shop paints to be applied when ordering equipment in order to assure compatibility of shop paints with field paints. The paints and surface preparation used for shop coating shall be identified on shop drawings submitted to the ENGINEER for review. C. Shop finish coats may be the standard finish as ordinarily applied by the manufacturer if it can be demonstrated to the ENGINEER that the paint system is equal to and compatible with the >paint system specified. However, all pumps, motors, valves, pipe and other equipment shall receive at least one field applied finish coat after installation. 1 3.08 COATING SYSTEM INDEX A. The -following is a general index --to the Coating System descriptions contained herein: SYSTEM NUMBER TITLE , 1 Submerged Metal.- Potable Water 2A Exterior of New Precast Concrete 4E p -Highly Exposed Metal Y (Exist (Existing/Shop Primed)^ - Highly 7 7E 24 25 27 109 109E ill Interior Metal - Highly Corrosive Interior Metal (Existing/Shop Primed) - Highly Corrosive. Exposed FRP, PVC Interior FRP, PVC Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal Insulation Interior Concrete and Masonry (Semi -Gloss) Existing Interior Concrete and Masonry Stucco-Cementitious Coating (Flat) 09900 2/20/04 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 8 442.E1 L 1 Ci 1 ' SYSTEM NUMBER 111E TITLE Existing Stucco Cementitious Coating (Flat) 122R Existing Stucco or Cementitious Coating Repair 123 Cementitious Base Coating - Pneumatically Placed ' Concrete. 150NS Concrete Floor - Chemical Resistant Non -Skid ' 3.09 COATING SYSTEMS A. System No. 1 - Submerged Metal -Potable Water Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast clean steel to an SSPCm-SP10 ' (near white metal blast). Not required on factory primed items. ' Prime Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Potable) 6.0 - 8.0 mils DFT. Stripe Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Potable) 4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT at all weld seams, flanges and edges. ' Top Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Potable) at 6.0 - 8.0 mills DFT. ' MDFT: 14 mils for the two (2) coat system. Color: White. H. System No. 2A - Exterior of New Precast Concrete Surface Preparation: All curing oils, form oils, laitence, soluble salts and loose concrete must be removed. Concrete must be dry and thoroughly clean before coating. Prime Coat: None required. Top Coat: Polyamide Epoxy Coal Tar at 8.0 mils DFT per coat. ' MDFT: 16 mils DFT for two (2) coat system. Allow minimum 24 hour drying time between coats. Color: First Coat - Red ' Second Coat ...._... Black._ _ C. System No. 4 - Exposed Metal - Highly Corrosive. Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast clean metal to an SSPC-SP10 (near -white metal blast). ' -Prime Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Non -Potable) 7.0 Mils DFT. ------ ---- . _ ._,_. ------Sealant.:. ----------- Apply sealant--as—specified_.in-Section ....07.900 ..-..T Sealants, at location where two pieces of ' steel overlap, between flanges, etc. Top Coat: Polyurethane 3.0 Mils DFT. MDFT: 10.0 Mils for the two (2) coat system. Color: Color as scheduled on Drawings. 2/20/04 09900 442.E1 9 PROTECTIVE COATINGS E D. System No. 4E - Exposed Metal (Existing/Shop Primed) - Highly Corrosive. , Surface Preparation: Piping, fittings, and valves shall be shop (Shop Primed) Primed in. accordance with Specification Sections 15005 and 15100. Pumps and motors ' shall be shop primed per applicable Specification Sections. Surface Preparation: Remove all dirt., oil, grease, chemicals by ' (Existing) High pressure water blasting. Remove all rust and loose damaged paint by abrasive blast cleaning per SSPC-SP7 (Brush Off Blast) ' or by SSPC-SP2 & 3 Hand & Power Tool cleaning. Spot Prime: Spot prime all bake metal areas with an epoxy , mastic at 5.0 mils DFT. Prime Coat: Epoxy Mastic 5.0 Mils DFT. ' Top Coat: Polyurethane 3.0 Mils DFT. Sealant: Apply single component sealant as specified in Section 07900 - Sealants, at location where two pieces of steel overlap, between flanges, at bolts, etc. MDFT: 8.0 Mils for the two (2) coat system. Color: Color as selected by OWNER from manufacturer's standard available colors. R. System No. 7 - Interior Metal - Highly Corrosive. Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast clean metal to an SSPC-SP10 ' (near -white metal blast). Prime Coat: Top Polyamide Epoxy (Non -Potable) 7.0 Mils DFT. Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Non -Potable) 3.0 Mils DFT. MDFT: 10.0 Mils for the two (2) coat system. ' Color:._..— --.._.. As scheduled on Drawings,. ._. . F. System No. 7E - Interior Metal (Existing/Shop Primed) - Highly Corrosive. ' Surface Preparation: Piping, fittings, and valves shall be shop (Shop Primed) Primed in accordance with Specification Sections-15005 and 15100. Pumps and motors ,•. shall be shop primed per applicable Specification .Sections Surface Preparation: Remove all dirt, oil, grease, chemicals by (Existing) High pressure water blasting. Remove all rust and loose damaged paint by abrasive blast cleaning per SSPC-SP7 (Brush Off Blast) or by SSPC-SP2 & 3 Hand & Power Tool Cleaning. 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 10 2/20/04 442.E1 1 I 1 ' Spot Prime (Existing): Spot prime all bare metal areas with an epoxy mastic at 5.0 mils DFT. Prime Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Non -Potable) 7.0 Mils DFT. ' Top Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Non -Potable) 3.0 Mils DFT. MDFT: 10.0 Mils for the two (2) coat system. Color: As scheduled on Drawings. G. System No. 24 - Exposed FRP, PVC. ' Surface Preparation: Solvent cleaning, SSPC-SP1, to remove soluble contaminants. Remove all insuluble contaminants or foreign materials by hand, SSPC-SP2, or Power Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP3. Prime Coat: Polyamine Epoxy at 6.0 - 8.0 Mils DFT. ' Top Coat: High Build Acrylic Polyurethane at 2.0 - 4.0 Miss DFT. MDFT: 9.0 Mils for two (2) coat system. ' Color: As scheduled on Drawings. H. System No. 25 - Interior FRP, PVC. Surface Preparation: Solvent cleaning, SSPC-SP1, to remove soluble contaminants. Remove all insoluble contaminants or foreign materials by hand, ' SSPC-SP2, or Power Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP3. Prime Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Non -Potable) 3.0 Mils DFT. ' Top Coat: Polyamide Epoxy (Non -Potable) 3.0 Mils DFT. MDFT: 6.0 Mils for the two (2) coat system. ' As Drawings. Color: scheduled on I S stem No 27 - Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal insulation y �..... Surface Preparation:----- -Roughened surface. _...._...... _.... 1 Top Coat: Polyamide Epoxy Coal Tar at 10.0 mils DFT. MDFT: 10.0 mils for one (1) coat system. Color: Black. J. System No. 109 - Interior Concrete an d Masonry (Semi -Gloss) Surface Preparation: Surface shall be clean, dry, free of dust, oil, curing compounds and other foreign materials. Prime Coat: One (1) coat Epoxy Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic 80 SFPGPC. Top Coat: One (1) coat Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy (Semi - Gloss) at 254 SFPGPC. 2/20/04 ' 442.El 11 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS Color: As scheduled on Drawings. K. System No. 109E - Existing interior Concrete and Masonry (Semi -(Sloss) Surface Preparation: Remove all dirt, oil, grease, chemicals and loose paint by high pressure water blasting ' (3500 PSI with a turbo tip). Remove as much of the topcoats from the block filler as Possible. All remaining topcoat must be tightly adhering. Feather all edges of ' remaining topcoat. Surface Profile: ICRI CSP 1 ' Patching: Patch all existing holes in walls with non - shrink grout as specified in Section 03600 - Grout. ' Spot Prime: Acrylic Emulsion (semi -gloss) at 254 SFPGPC. Top Coat: Two (2) coats Acrylic Emulsion (Semi -Gloss) , at 254 SFPGPC. Color: As selected by OWNER from manufacturer's standard available ' L. System No. Ill - Stucco - Cementitious Coating (Flat) Surface Preparation: Allow cementitious finish a minimum of 28 days drying/curing time. Surface shall be clean, dry, free of dust, oil,, curing compounds and other foreign materials. t Prime Coat: Acrylic Emulsion at 318 SFPGPC Top Coat: Acrylic Emulsion at 318 SFPGPC ' Color: As scheduled on Drawingm:; N. System No. 111E - Existing Stucco Camentitious Coating (Flat) ' Surface Preparation: Remove all dirt, oil, grease, chemicals and loose paint by high pressure water blasting (min. 3500 PSI). Surface Profile: ICRI CSP 1 Caulking: Prepare and fill all surface cracks (s 1/4- inch) with sealant as specified in Section 07900 - Sealants. Patching: Patch all existing holes (or holes resulting.,. from work) in walls with non- shrink grout as -. —--.specif.ied-in...Sect.ion...0.3.6.00---Grout... Stucco Repair: Thoroseal plaster mix with sponge finish. ' (For damaged areas greater than 3-inch diameter) Prime: Acrylic Emulsion (Flat) at 2.0-3.0 Mils (287 ' SFPGPC) 09900 2/20/04 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 12 442.E1 Top Coat: Acrylic Emulsion (Flat) at 2.0-3.0 Mils (287 SFPGPC) . Color: As selected by OWNER from manufacturer's standard available colors. N. System No. 122R - Cementitious Coating and Stucco Repair Surface Preparation: As indicated on Drawings. First Coat: As indicated on Drawings. Second Coat: As indicated on Drawings. Color: Grey O. System No. 123 - Cementitious Base Coatings Pneumatically Placed Concrete Surface Preparation: As per coating manufacturer's recommendations. Top Coat: Thoroseal, 5 lbs. per square yard, spray applied with rough finish. Color: Gray p. System No. 150NS - Concrete Floor (Chemical Resistant) Non -Skid Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure 28 days. Prepare concrete surface by abrasive blast cleaning or acid etching to achieve a finish the roughness of 50 grit sandpaper. Surface to be clean, dry and roughened prior to application of coating. Prime Coat: Polyamine Epoxy (Primer) at 6.0-8.0 Mils DFT. Intermediate Coat: Polyamine Novolac epoxy at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT. Broadcast 50 mesh dry washed silica sand into the prime coat while still wet. Top Coat: Polyamine Novolac epoxy at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT. MDFT: 18 0 24.0 mils for three (3) coat system. Color: As scheduled on Drawings. �1 3.10 UNIDSNTIrxzD suRFAcim A. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically excluded or exempted shall be prepared, primed and painted in the mannerandwith materials consistent --- with ..these, Specifications __ .__.... The ENGINEER shall select which of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or not, shall be used for such unidentified surfaces. This painting shall be done within the Scope of the Contract. 3.11 A. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If 2/20/04 09900 442.E1 13 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1� material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun than when applied unthinned by the application of an additional coat(s). On masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture, however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. B. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA Standards as approved. C. Materials shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All materials shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added to any paint. D. Only skilled painters shall be used on the Work and specialists shall be employed where required. E. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and other metals which are shop primed before delivery at the site will not require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the painting schedule. F. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00 sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all exterior trim shall be back -primed before installation. G. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry painting shall be performed in one continuous manner structure by structure. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will by inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection. H. Before final acceptance of the Work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall be cleaned and repainted as directed by the ENGINEER ...._._ .. 3.12 APPLICATION SCHNDULE A. Coating systems shall be used at locations as scheduled on the - drawings. , B. System No. 27 - Aluminum and dissimilar metal insulation. This system shall be used on all aluminum in contact with concrete. Insulate all _... _..._ contacting___ dissimilar ..metals_. with..._this...system. _.... Neoprene_ p.a_ds.__may--be—.-- substituted to insulate aluminum from concrete or aluminum from steel. 3.13 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT A. All proposed piping, valves and equipment shall be color coded. When color coding is specified, it shall consist of color code painting and lettering identification of all exposed conduits, trough items and pipelines for the transport of gases, air, liquid and semi -liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating 09900 2/20/04 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 14 442.El r� 1 P-� n i accessories which are integral to be whole function mechanical pipe and electrical conduit system. B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted. The system shall be painted up to but not including the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the flexible conduit connected to electrical equipment. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint Color Schedule. C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment that is originating from the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted between and up to but not including the fixed flanges or connections on the equipment. D. Color coding requirements are as indicated by the Piping Schedule contained in the Drawings. E. CONTRACTOR shall submit proposed schedule for color coding pipes and equipment for approval by ENGINEER/OWNER. 3.14 PIPS LABELING A. All exposed piping shall be labeled to indicate flow stream and direction of flow. B. Labels shall be installed following completion of specified protective coating system application. C. Maximum spacing between labels shall be 10'-01, on center. D. In locations where pipes are horizontally or vertically stacked, pipe labels shall be arranged in similar. 3.15 CLEAN UP A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to collect and dispose of properly, all waste materials from the site in accordance with all requirements of the Federal, State and local Environment Protection Agencies. B. At completion of the Work, remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered, sprayed or smeared on all surfaces, including glass, light fixtures, hardware, equipment, painted and unpainted surfaces. C. After completion of all painting, the Contractor shall remove from the job site all painting equipment, surplus materials and debris resulting from this work.. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 442.E1 15 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET Paint system number (from spec): Paint system title (from spec):_ Coating supplier name: address: Local representative name: address: Surface Preparation: Paint Material Product Number/Name Coats/Minimum (Generic) _ (Proori.atary) Coverage___ Notes• ---------- _._...-------- 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS r 1 1 ti 1 f] l' J 1 1 SECTION 09901 LOGO PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the work required to provide all labor, materials,. equipment and incidentals to perform all of the necessary surface preparation and painting required to complete the logo(s) indicated on the drawings. B. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 09900•- Protective Coatings. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS A. The abbreviations and definitions listed below, when used in this Section shall have the following meanings: ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society of Testing Materials AWWA American Water Works Association DFT Dry Film Thickness FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic HCL Hydrochloric Acid. MDFT Minimum Dry Film Thickness MDFTPC Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat mil Thousandths of an Inch MIL-P Military Specification - Paint NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NSF National Sanitary Foundation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration SFPG Square Feet Per Gallon SFPGPC Square Feet Per Gallon Per Coat SP Surface Preparation SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 01300 - Submittals. B. The foll owing shall be submitted ' g for the proposed coating system - manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation details, application_...,_,_, procedures, technical data sheets and dry film thickness or coverage. C. Submittal shall include ffina_Y^ .l design details and color selection recommendations by applicator. 1.05 APPLICATOR A. Logo shall be painted by. Roy Banks Sign Systems, Pompano Beach, Florida, 954/979-0055, Central Sign Systems, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, Florida, 954/776-4319, or other qualified firm. 2/20/04 09901 442.E1 1 LOGO PAINTING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT MATERIALS A. Products shall be manufactured by Sherwin-Williams, Super Frog Enterprises, or equal. B. The following paint products are by Sherwin-Williams and Super Frog Enterprises are used for the basis of establishing the desired quality expected for the project. PRODUCT TYPE SHERWIN-WILLIAMS PRODUCT NAME Acrylic Emulsion (Semi -Gloss) Metalatex Semi -Gloss Coating, B42 Series PRODIZCT, TYPE FROG RPR S S PRODUCT NAME Sealer/Protector Frog Juice, Sun Screen Clear No. 7000 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates and all other surfaces not intended to be painted which cannot be removed. B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting processes. Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent paint and other materials from entering motors. 3.02 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Coatings shall not be applied in temperatures exceeding the "- manufacturer's recommended maximum and minimum allowable, nor under adverse conditions such as dust, smoke -laden atmosphere, damp or humid _ - -- wea.then •..... _.._--_ 3.03 COATING SYSTEM INDEX A. The following is a general index to the Coating System descriptions contained herein: ..SYSTEM NUMBER <_._..TITLE Logo (Concrete)_ Logo (Semi Gloss) 3.04 COATING SYSTEMS A. System No. Logo (Concrete) - Log (Semi -Gloms) Surface Preparation: Surface to be clean and dry. Base coating is two (2) costs of Acrylic Emulsion (flat). 09901 2/20/04 LOGO PAINTING 2 442.El Logo Coat: Acrylic Emulsion (semi -gloss) ® 1.5-4.0 DFT. Number of coats shall be per the recommendation of the applicator. Seal Coat: Sealer/Protector applied per manufacturer's recommendations. Color: As noted on approved logo drawing submittal. 5 CLEAN UP k. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to collect and dispose of properly, all waste materials from the site in accordance with all requirements of the Federal, State and local Environment Protection Agencies. B. At completion of the Work, remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered, sprayed or smeared on all surfaces, including glass, light fixtures, hardware, equipment, painted and unpainted surfaces. C. After completion of all painting, the Contractor shall remove from the job site all painting equipment, surplus materials and debris resulting from this Work. 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION 3 09901 LOGO PAINTING 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I SECTION 11037 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL PART 1 GENERAL' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers all work required to furnish and install, complete, the vertical turbine pumps specified herein, and as further specified by the individual specific vertical turbine pump specifications hereinafter. B. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.O2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Sections 11037-1 - Vertical Turbine Pump- Specific. B. Sections 11037-2 Vertical Turbine Pump- Specific. C. Section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls. D. Section 15029 - Pipeline Testing and Disinfection. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS 1.04 A. Commercial Standards (latest revision): A. r a C. 11 1 ANSI/AWWA E101 Vertical Turbine Pumps Line Shaft and Submersible Types. DEFINITIONS Field Head_ Field head in feet of liquid pumped shall be the distance from the centerline of the pump surface discharge flange to the water level in the suction well, plus the pressure in feet of -the liquid pumped measured at the surface discharge. centerline, plus the velocity head in feet at the discharge flange. Total (Bowl) Head_ Total head in feet of liquid pumped to be supplied by the pump and is the sum of field head and pump discharge column and fitting, valve and pipe losses. Ov r ffis e.n g con ...- . _-i 1. efficiencies, taking into account Overall effic y shall include��motor and pump ''' ------- efficiencies, connecting shaft friction in pump column ancidiscFiarge dead-los8es . D. Minimum Submergence_ The nominal vertical distance in inches from the floor of the wetwell or pump can to the low water level in the wetwell or pump can. 2/20/04 11037 442.E1 1 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL I 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submittals for establishing specification compliance shall include but not be limited to the following items: 1. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. The equipment manufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency corrected for materials of construction and minimum submergence required at the guarantee (design) point. Performance requirements shall be as defined in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. Include complete manufacturer's specifications including materials descriptions. 3. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction and installation including dimensions, anchor bolt locations, size and location of connections to other work, weight of equipment and bill of materials. 4. Maximum pump down thrust in pounds. 5. Short commercial test of all motors to be provided. 6. Complete NEMA required motor nameplate information. 7. Electrical connection diagrams for motors. S. Special handling instructions and requirements for storage and protection prior to installation. 9. Information certifying that the factory applied coating system meets or exceeds the requirements specified herein. 10. List of MANUFACTURER's recommended spare parts and special tools with manufacturer's part numbers and current price for each item. 11. Critical speed analysis shall be provided for each type of VFD duty pump provided. C. Complete set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01730 _ Operation and Maintenance Data. 0 & M Manuals shall be provided prior to start-up..__. D. Warranty information shall be submitted in--accordance-with -sect-ion -_.__�__._.� - 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The pumps and equipment covered by these Specifications are intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by a reputable MANUFACTURER having long experience in the production of. such pumps. The pumps furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 11037 2/20/04 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS GENERAL 2 442.E1 B. All equipment furnished under this specification shall be new and unused, shall be the standard product of MANUFACTURERS having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Proper shipping, storage and handling procedures shall be followed as recommended by the equipment MANUFACTURER and as specified herein. B. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during shipment, normal unloading, storage and installation. C. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged storage period at the site. Proper job site storage is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.. D. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing :From the ENGINEER. this provision shall not apply if the items are toolarge to be shipped in a completely assembled condition. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents. 1.08 WARRANTY A. The pump manufacturer and contractor shall warrant the pumps being supplied to the OWNER against all defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year. Warranty period shall commence on Substantial Completion date as outlined in the General Conditions. Warranties for all pumps installed under this contract shall run concurrently. B. The MANUFACTURER's warranty period shall run concurrently with the CONTRACTOR's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for proper storage of the equipment so as to remain in an "as shipped" condition. If the equipment remains in storage at the jobsite for longer than six (6) months, before installation, the CONTRACTOR shall provide factory service personnel far a complete inspection of the equipment. Any work necessary to restore the equipment to an "as shipped" condition 1.09 will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. MAINTENANCE A. Submit name, phone number and address of the nearest local supplier _ for spare pump parts and motors meeting the requirements of this specification. B. Printed instructions relating to proper maintenance, including lubrication and parts lists indicating the various parts by name, number, and diagram where necessary, shall be furnished in duplicate with each unit or set of identical units in each pumping station. A recommended spare parts list shall be included. 2/20/04 11037 442.El 3 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. B. Pumps shall be as manufactured by Johnston Pump Company or Patterson Pump Company, meeting all requirements of these specifications. C. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the MANUFACTURER, the rated capacity, head, speed, and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump. Identification plate shall also bear the identification number assigned to each pump as specified and shown on the drawings. D. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the motor manufacturer, serial number, model number, horsepower, speed, voltage, amps and all other pertinent data shall be attached to the motor. E. Pumps shall be vertical turbine type, designed and built for 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation without overheating, cavitation, or excessive vibration or strain. F. Pump wetted components and gaskets shall be compatible for contact with liquid pumped. G. Refer to the specific vertical turbine pump specifications of the individual installations for the specific requirements of each pump. 2.02 PUMP CONSTRUCTION ` A. Pump Column Pipe 1. Steel ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40. 2. Column pipe shall be flanged .per ANSI./AWWA. E101 for vertical line shaft pumps. Five=foot maximum length of column pipe sections. B. Pump Head Base Plate (Where Required) 1. Fabricated base plate shall be fabricated steel ASTM A36. Base drawings and shall be rigid late shall fabricated s shown on drpawp enough to su ort the um motor and um column. PP P _.......___...____._____._.�__,_.__ .___ ._... P_ _.w......d . -.._..- .__. ....__ 2. Pump surface plate shall be manufacturer's standard design complete with anchor bolt holes in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Pump Bowls and Suction Case -- 1. Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 30, with porcelain, vitreous enamel, _..-. fusion bonded or slurry polished lined waterways. 2. Hydrostatically test the bowls at 1-1/2 times pump shut off head. D. Impellers 1. Nickel aluminum bronze ASTM B148, alloy 954. E. Line Shaft Bearings 1. Bronze, ASTM B584, Alloy 932. 11037 2/20/04 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL 4 442.E1 i 1 F. Line Shaft h S 1. Line shaft.type: open. 2. Stainless steel, ASTM A582, Type 416. G. Line shaft sleeves 1. Stainless Steel, ASTM A582, Type 410 - 484 BHN. H. Bowl and Suction Case Bearings 1. All bronze, ASTM B584, Alloy 932. I. Pump and Head shaft 1. Stainless steel, ASTM A582, Type 416. .J. Bearing Lubrication 1. Pumped Liquid: Water. K. Discharge Head 1. Flanged 900 elbow surface discharge. Provide packed -type stuffing box with drip basin and drain connection. Hydrostatic test discharge head at 1-1/2 times pump shut off head. 2. Provide 1/4-inch NPT discharge head pressure gauge connection. 3. Discharge head shall be cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30 or fabricated steel ASTM A53, Grade B. 4. The product lubricated column assembly equipped with a packing box with bronze throttle bearing, bronze lantern ring, and stainless steel split gland with minimum 6 rings of Teflon packing. 5. Provide OSHA -type coupling guards. L. Motor Base of Pumped Head 1. Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30 or fabricated steel, ASTM A53 Grade A with mounting surface designed for a standard NEMA P flange _ __..... . _....... motor.._ . 1 dMt 1 M. Anc or Bo 1- 1. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. - 2. Size and number as required by pump manufacturer. - _..... N. __._._Intake Strainer _..._._.._.__...__.._...._..__.___._ 1. --Basket--type-stoin-1ess-Steel,--.Type- .3.04 0. Other required materials and parts shall be manufacturer's standard or meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA E101 whichever is the more stringent. 2/20/04 11037 442.El 5 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL 2.03 PUMP SUCTION BARREL I A. A fabricated carbon steel barrel, ASTM A53, Grade B, shall be supplied. The barrel shall be sized for the maximum suction pressure at the suction flange along with 1/161, corrosion allowance. Barrels shall be provided with a 150 lb. ANSI suction flange at the location shown on the drawings. Barrels to have vortex splitters - a vertical baffle opposite the inlet and a cross in the bottom. The bottom end of the barrel shall be a weld cap or plate for leveling and anchoring. B. The barrel shall be furnished with a square mounting flange, which shall be machined and drilled to match the discharge head base supplied. The barrel -mounting flange shall be located securely to the foundation by help of anchor bolts. A gasket or "O-Ring" shall be furnished between the barrel flange,: and the edischarge head depending on the liquid pumped and the .suction pressure of the system. Barrel shall be sized to limit the velocity to 5 ft/gec past the bowl assembly. C. The interior and exterior of barrel shall be coated as specified herein. 2.04 DRIVE XOTORS (General) A. Drive motors shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revised editions of NEMA MG-1, IEEE, ANSI and AFBMA Standards as applicable and shall be capable of continuous operation. B. Motors shall be designed for driving turbine type pumps, squirrel cage induction, single speed and variable speed horsepowers as specified, or as required such that the connected load shall not exceed the motor nameplate horsepower rating under any anticipated operating condition. C. Maximum temperature rise of motor windings shall not exceed IEEE and NEMA` Standards. when motor is. operated continuously at rated horsepower, rated voltage and frequency in ambient temperature of 25 deg. C. D. Each motor shall be given the Standard NEMA Short Commercial Test at the factory. Copies of the test results for each motor, certified by an official of the MANUFACTURER, shall be furnished to the ENGINEER immediately upon completion of test. Factory test results shall be submitted for review by the ENGINEER before shipment of the motors.` Duty Cycle Continuous Starting Method Full voltage, across the line, or VFD. Starting Current Manufacturer's standard winding Insulation Class H (VFD) 11037 2/20/04 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL 6 442•El I 1 1 1 1 Temperature Rase Class B Voltage, Phase, Frequency As per specific pump specification. Bearing Lubrication Grease with addition and relief fittings. Bearing Life 100,000 hours rating life as defined by AFBMA Maximum Speed As per specific pump specification F. Motor Modifications 1. Insulation Treatment: Insulife VP22000 (Encapsulation) or equivalent. 2. Threaded hub conduit box for entrance of power and control conduit. 3. Grounding lug in conduit box. 4. Normally closed thermal switches to open on overtemp. S. Motor winding heaters, 120V, 200 watts maximum. 6. Non -reversing ratchets. 7. Motors shall be premium efficiency, inverter duty. 8. Exterior motor coating shall be manufacturer's standard primer. G. Motors shall be manufactured by U. S. Motors, or equal meeting all the requirements of this Specification. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS PUMP ACCESSORIES A. Lifting Lugs 1. Lifting lugs shall be provided for equipment weighing over 100 pounds. B. Stainless Steel Nameplates 1. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the MANUFACTURER,.-— the rated capacity, head, speed, and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump. Identification plate shall also bear the identification number assigned to each pump as specified and shown on the drawings. 2. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the motor _.___.. manufacturer, -serial number, model number, horsepower,. speed, voltage, amps and all other pertinent data shall be attached to - _ the - motor . 2.06 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish the manufacturer's recommended spare parts including at least the following: 1. one (1) set of packing and lantern rings for each pump provided. 2/20/04 11037 442.E1 7 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL 1 1 B. All parts shall be furnished in containers which are clearly marked and identified as to the contents. C. Provide spare parts bill of materials with submittals for approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of the pumps shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install the pumps with the shaft plumb. Adjust the pump assembly such that the driving units are properly aligned, plumb and level with the driving units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings.' Flexible couplings shall not be considered to compensate for misalignment. After the pumps have been set in position, aligned and shimmied to the proper elevation, grout the space between the bottom of the baseplate and th& concrete foundation with a dry, tamped in, non -shrinking grout as specified in Section 03600 Grout. C. The pump base shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position, precisely leveled and aligned so that the completed installation is free from stress or distortion. All necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR and shall conform to the recommendations and instructions of the pump manufacturers. Grouting under bases after the equipment is set is included as work under this section. Pump and pump bases shall have adequate provision to collect drainage and conducted away to the nearest drain. 3.02 PROTECTIVE COATING A. All exposed and submerged ferrous parts (exclusive of motors) shall be factory primed as follows: Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast clean metal to an SSPC-SP5 (white metal blast). I Prime Coat: Tnemec Series 20 Pota-Pox, or equal, 3.0 - 5.0 Mils DFT. color ......_ Manufacturer's Standard B. Field painting shall be in accordance with and as specified in Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. 3.03 - A FACTORY TESTS Pumps --A factory test certified by the pump- manufacturer's -'test representative shall be performed on the pumps actually furnished and -written---notice. --of, the same shall - be - furnished -to -the ENGINEER..--- - Information required to be furnished at the time of test is as necessary to show conformance with the specified performance. Tests shall conform to AWWA E101, latest revision. B. Balance and Vibration: The rotating parts of each pump and its driving unit shall be dynamically balanced before final assembly. The driving unit alone shall operate without vibration in excess of the limits stated in the latest revision of NEMA MG-1. 11037 2/20/04 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL 8 442.E1 1� I I _� I � C] 17 C. Critical S eed Ana sis: Perform manufacturer's standard factory critical speed analysis on all VFD driven pump models provided. All critical speeds shall be a minimum of 15$ out of pump operation range. D. Short commercial tests of all motors provided. E. Factory test reports of all items specified above shall be submitted for ENGINEER'S approval prior to delivery of the pumps. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The pump MANUFACTURER shall furnish the services of a competent and experienced representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the pump (s) for a period of not less than two (2) days in two separate visits to inspect the installed equipment, supervise the initial test run, and to provide instructions to the plant personnel. The first visit will be for checking and inspecting the equipment after it is installed. At least one (1) of the two (2) days shall be allocated solely to the instruction of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment. This instruction period shall be scheduled at least ten days in advance with the OWNER and shall take place prior to start-up and acceptance by the OWNER. the MANUFACTURER's operation and maintenance B. The final copies of manuals specified in Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data - must have been delivered to the ENGINEER prior to scheduling the instruction period with the OWNER. 3.05 FIELD TESTS A. After pumps have been completely installed, such tests as are discharge necessary to indicate that pump installation, and performance conform to the Specifications shall be conducted in the presence of the ENGINEER. Field tests shall include all pumps included under this Contract. B. Supply all electric power, labor, equipment and incidentals required to complete the field tests. C. The following tests shall be required. 1. Function Test: Prior to plant startup, all pumps shall be inspected for alignment, quiet operation, proper proper connection and satisfactory performance by means of a function test (start-up check). consisting of the driving 2. Vibration_Test: The complete assembly, - unit and pump connected and in normal operation, shall not develop amplitudes of vibration exceeding limits recommended by ---_......the current addition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. —3--P ormance Test: ---The CONTRACTOR shall --perform field -tests --to... demonstrate pumps' conformance to the specifications to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. A test log shall be submitted to the ENGINEER as specified herein. Pump performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent readings, showing motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head for the pumping conditions as specified for each pump rpm. Each power lead to the motor shall be checked for proper current balance. 2/20/04 11037 442.E1 9 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL D. Units apparently failing to meet the Specifications to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER must be more accurately tested in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards. If the pump fails this second test, the unit will be rejected and the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a unit which will perform as specified. In addition, if the specified pump fails the second test, all identical pumps covered by this Specification shall be tested under this same provision within the Scope of the Contract. E. Field testing shall be witnessed by OWNER and ENGINEER. Forty-eight hours minimum notice required to schedule field testing. 3.06 TEST LOGS A. A test log shall be submitted to ENGINEER upon completion of each test that records the following: .. 1. General Information: Pump number, test date, beginning test time and ending test time. 2. Flow, as measured by plant instrumentation and/or field measurements. 3. Average distance from suction well water surface to pump discharge centerline for duration of test, pump discharge pressure converted to feet of the liquid pumped and corrected to pump discharge centerline, calculated velocity head at the discharge flange, and field head, all tabulated in feet. 4. Driving motor voltage and, amperage measured for each phase and three-phase kilowatts. 3.07 XANUFACTURBR'S CERTIFICATION A. Provide certificate from pump manufacturer stating that the pumps have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's stated recommendations and that the pumps meet the specified performance requirements. B. Certification to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 442.E1 11037 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS - GENERAL 10 1 1 1 1 1 I t I 11 SECTION 11037-1. VERTICAL, TURBINE PUMP - SPECIFIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PUMP DATA A. Installation location: High Service Pumps B. Tag Numbers: HSP-002, HSP-003, HSP-004, HSP-005, and HSP-006. C. Quantity: Five (5). 1.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Minimum submergence available: 81 inches (EL 10.831) B. Minimum NPSH available: 26.0 feet C. Discharge Head Size: 12 inches D. Operation Protocol: Variable speed. E. Suction Barrel: New suction barrels required for all five (5) pumps. F. Minimum Column Size: 12-inch. 1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. The liquid to be pumped is as described by the following parameters: 1. Liquid Pumped Chlorinated Potable Water (Chloramines) 2. Corrosion Factor pH = 7.5 to 9.5 3. Erosion Factor Nonabrasive 4. Largest Solid Passing 1/4-inch diameter 5. Pumping Temperature (PT) 72 degrees F. 6. Specific Gravity at PT 1.0 7. Viscosity at PT 0.95 cs 8. Vapor Pressure at PT 0.39 psia 1.04 PUMP DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of Service (COS) at maximum speed. Flow = 2500 GPM Head a 185 feet Minimum Efficiency at COS 1 = 83 percent B. Motor Requirements 1. Maximum horsepower: 150 HP ,:� pnwwr rpen:irement: 480 V. 60 Hz. 3 phase C. Pump speed: 1800 rpm (maximum). D. Pump speed operational range: 1200 rpm to 1800 rpm. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 442.El 1 11037-1 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP SPECIFIC 1 1 r� 1 i 1 i SECTION 11037-2 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP - SPECIFIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PUMP DATA A. Installation location: Filter Effluent Transfer Pumps B. Tag Numbers: TP-1 and TP-2. C. Quantity: Two (2). 1.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Minimum submergence available: 72 inches (EL 14.001) B. Minimum NPSH available: 36 feet C. Discharge Head size: 16 inches D. Operation Protocol: Variable speed. E. Suction Barrel: Not required. F. Minimum Column Size: 16-inch. 1.03 PROJECT/SXT'R CONDITIONS A. The liquid to be pumped is as described by the following parameters: 1. Liquid Pumped Chlorinated Potable Water (Chloramines) 2. Corrosion Factor pH = 7.5 to 9.5 3. Erosion Factor Nonabrasive 4. Largest Solid Passing 1/4-inch diameter 5. Pumping Temperature (PT) 72 degrees F. 6. Specific Gravity at PT.: 1.0 7. Viscosity at PT 0.95 cs 8. Vapor Pressure at PT 0.39 psia 1.04 PMIP DESIGN/PBRPORMANCR REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of service (Cos) at maximum speed. COS1 Flow = 6950 GPM Head = 60 feet Minimum Efficiency at COS 1 = 85 percent B. Motor Requirements 1. Maximum horsepower: 150 HP 2. Power requirement. 480 V, 60 Hz, 3 phase C. Pump speed: 1800 rpm (maximum). D. Pump speed operational range: 1200 rpm to 1800 rpm. 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION 11037-2 1 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP SPECIFIC SECTION 11315 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP STATION - GENERAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers all work required to furnish and install sanitary PUMP station with submersible grinder sewage pumps with submersible electric motors and all appurtenant work, complete and operable, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service. C. See Contract for Construction and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. „ 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. B. Section 11315-(1) - Grinder Pump Station - Specific. C. Section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls. D. Section 15100 - Manually Operated Valves. E. Section 15400 - Plumbing. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES A. AFBMA: Anti -Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association. B. AGMA: American Gear Manufacturers Association. C. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction. D. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute. E. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. F. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers. G. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. H. AWS: American Welding Society. I. Hydraulic Institute Standards (current edition). J. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.. K. NEC: National Electrical Code. L. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association. M. NESC: National Electrical Safety Code. N. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association O. OSHA: Standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration are to be complied with. _ . _ ,m .... _.. _...� ._ .._......... StructuresCouncil. IP. . L: UnderwritersLaboratories,_.__......_... USInc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and product data submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals, as applicable product data and shop drawings are required for all items specified in this Section. 2/20/04 11315 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP 442.E1 1 STATION - GENERAL B. Submittals for establishing specification compliance shall include but not be limited to the following items: 1. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Curves shall be submitted on 8- 1/2" x 11" sheets at as large a scale as is practical. Curves shall be plotted from zero flow at shut off head to a flaw at head no greater than 20 feet. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable. The equipment manufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand and overall efficiency corrected for materials of construction. Performance requirements shall be as defined in the Hydraulic Institute standards. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs cuts of the equipment. include complete manufacturer's ..specifications including materials descriptions. 3. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction and installation including dimensions, anchor bolt locations, size and location of connections to other work, weight of equipment and bill of materials. 4. Complete NEMA information. required motor nameplate 5. Electrical connection diagrams for motors. 6. Special handling instructions and requirements for storage and protection prior to installation. 7. List of MANUFACTURER's recommended spare parts and special tools with manufacturer's part numbers and current price for each item. C. Manufacturer's certification that pumping equipment, including motors, meets Class I, Division 1 requirements as specified by NEC, WHERE APPLICABLE. D. Complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted for each pump station in accordance with Section 01730 - Operation and Main- tenance Data. O&M Manuals shall be provided prior to startup. E. Pst .....with submitted in mmaccord ance Section01720 - Project Record Documents. F. Warranty information shall be submitted in accordance with the operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING _.__.. ----A.- Proper shipping, storage and handling procedures shall be followed as recommended by the equipment MANUFACTURER and as specified herein. -- B_.._.__All arts shall be properly protected so that_...._._------ ----..... --.._. --------------------- p-----------------------. _ no damage or deteriora- tion will occur during shipment, normal unloading, storage and installation. C. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged storage period at the site. Proper job site storage is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. 11315 2/20/04 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP STATION - GENERAL 2 403.U1 A. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER. This provision shall not apply if the items are too large to be shipped in a completely assembled condition. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pumps being supplied to the OWNER against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year under normal municipal use, operation and service. Warranty period shall begin with Date of Substantial Completion. B. The MANUFACTURER's warranty period shall run concurrently with the CONTRACTOR's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for proper storage of the equipment so as to remain in an "as shipped" condition. If the equipment remains in storage at the jobsite for longer than six (6) months, before installation, the CONTRACTOR shall provide factory service personnel for a complete inspection of the equipment. Any work necessary to restore the equipment to an "as shipped" condition will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENBRAL A. The manufacturer shall furnish and deliver fully assembled one (1) duplex unit containing two (2) submersible grinder pumps and all necessary parts and equipment, installed in a fiberglass reinforced polyester tank for in -ground installation. All equipment shall be factory installed, except for externally mounted control panel and inlet hubs which may be installed in the field. The pre -assembled station shall include the basin, submersible grinder pumps and motors, quick disconnect rail system, start -stop level controls, motor high temperature shut-off, high water alarm, shut-off valves and schedule 80 PVC discharge piping and fittings. B. The duplex submersible pump station shall be as assembled by ABS Pumps, Inc., or equal. 2.02 WSTWELL, WETWSLL TOP AND VALVE VAULT A. Wetwell - The wetwell shall be custom molded of fiberglass reinforced polyester resin and shallhave 'a minimum wall thickness of 3 16". Depthand diameter of shall be as indicated by drawings. One (1) 2-inch diameter 0-ring, seal type inlet n h diameter and one' (1) - hubs shall be provided. The hubs shall be securely fastened to the --- ---- tank -in the field- And shall be leak__tight=------- � B. Wetwell Cover - Removable aluminum cover minimum plate thickness 1/411. Cover shall be provided by pump manufacturer and shall be designed for use with guide rail systems. Basin cover shall have an integral access hatch, two (2) lifting eyes, padlock bar, padlock and a 2-inch diameter flange. Basin cover shall be capable of supporting a 150 psf vent 11315 2/20/04 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP 442.E1 3 STATION - GENERAL 1 pedestrian load and shall be as manufactured by USF Fabrication, or equal. 2.03 PUMPS (GENERAL) A. The pump shall be of the centrifugal type with the rotating cutter f mounted on the pump shaft directly against the impeller. The station- ary cutter shall be mounted in an adjustable bottom plate. The bottom plate shall be cast with grooves threading outward from the center opening of the plate to the out diameter. The impeller shall be bronze, multiple vane, semi -open. The cutter material shall be AISI 440C stainless steel with a hardness of Rockwell 60C. The common pump and motor shaft shall be 416 stainless steel supported by a heavy duty lower single row ball bearing and an upper sealed single row ball bearing, all models. All fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel. B. The rotor and stator in the motor housing shall be separated and protected from the pumped. liquid by an oil -filled seal housing incorporating two (2)' silicone carbide mechanical seals mounted in tandem. This seal housing skull be equipped with a moisture sensing probe installed between the seals, and the sensing of moisture in the seal chamber shall be automatic, continuous, and not require the pump to be stopped or removed from the wetwell. 2.04 SUBMERSIBLE MOTORS (GENERAL) A. The stator, rotor and bearings shall be mounted in a sealed submersible type housing. The stator windings shall have minimum Class F insula- tion, (155°C. Or 3110F.), and an air -filled motor NEMA B design. The pump and motor shall be specifically designed so that they may be operated partially dry or completely submerged in the liquid being pumped. Stators shall be securely held in place with a removable end ring and threaded fasteners so they may be easily removed in the field and must be capable of being repaired or rewound by a local motor service station. No special tools shall be required for pump and motor disassembly. Pump shall be equipped with heat sensors. The heat sensors shall be a low resistance, bi-metal disc that is temperature sensitive. They shall be mounted directly in the stator and sized to open between 239°F and 2570F, and automatically reset at between 1490F and 194°F. The sensor shall be connected in series with the motor starter coil so that the starter is tripped if a heat sensor opens. The motor starter shall be equipped with overload heaters so all normal overloads are protected by external heater block. B. The -motor nameplate horsepower rating shall ---not -be --exceeded, at an head -capacity point on the pump curve. C. NEMA Type B design and construction per NEMA MG-1, latest edition. D. where applicable, motors shall be approved for installation in a Class 1, Division 1 or 2 environments as classified by NEC. 2.05 GUIDE RAILS, LINING CHAINS AND GABLE RANGER A. A type 316 stainless steel guide rail base elbow shall be mounted on the floor of the pump station. The submersible pump shall be guided onto the discharge base elbow by a dual guide rail supported at the top by an upper guide bracket and at the bottom by the discharge base. When the pump is in position, the weight of the pump shall compress the Gasket and seal the connection. The area under the pump shall be free and clear of any additional support legs or guide pipes to insure free 11315 2/20/04 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP STATION - GENERAL 4 403.U1 entrance of solids to the impeller. Guide rails shall be Type 316 stainless steel pipe. B. Lifting chains shall be provided for each pump. Chains and cable hanger shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Chains shall come equipped with Type 316 stainless steel bolts for connecting chain to pump lifting handle. 2.06 EMERGENCY PUMP -OUT CONNECTION A. Aluminum 1-1/4-inch cam and groove fitting with aluminum dust cap. 2.07 VALVE VAULT A. Precast concrete valve vault shall be sized as indicated by the drawings.' Minimum wall thickness shall be 6-inches. Access hatch shall be sized as indicated by drawings. Access hatch shall be aluminum Type APS (300 psi) as manufactured by U. S. Foundry and Manufacturing Company, or equal. Hinges shall be stainless steel with stainless steel nuts and bolts. Provide cast aluminum drop handle, padlock staple, padlock, Slamlock, and automatic hold open arm with vinyl release handle grip. B. Interior and exterior of valve vault shall be coated with System Number 2A as specified in Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. 2.08 VALVES A. Sall valves (V-31) and ball check valves (V-70) shall be as specified in Section 15100 - Manually Operated Valves. 1 I 11 2.09 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor bolts shall be sized by the manufacturer and be Type 316 stainless steel. 2.10 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (TYPICAL) A. General 1. All instrumentation and controls provided under this Section shall conform to the applicable requirements of section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls. All I & C components shall be of an industrial quality equal to the components specified therein. 2. Field panel enclosure construction shall meet the requirements of Section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls, Article 2.17. 3. The P & IDs and these Specifications are not intended to completely depict all of the functional requirements of the control systems provided under this Section. The systems' supplier shall provide all additional Jinstrumentatioi and controls necessary to provide safe and operable systems. The specific control systems proposed shall--be'-sub ect to t .e---review othe-ENGINEER B. Functional Requirements 1. Submersible Duplex Pump Station, PS No. 2 a. Provide Hand/Off/Auto control HS-20(2) for each submersible pump. operation is same for each pump. in Hand mode, pump 2/20/04 11315 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP 442.E1 5 STATION - GENERAL I runs. In Off mode, pump will not run. In Auto mode, pump runs when called by floats (normal operation). In "Auto" mode, Lead/Lag pump position shall be alternated by ALT on each pump stop via FS-1. Provide run indication for each pump, RL-20(2). Provide non-resettable run time meter for each pump, ETM-20(2). b. Provide to field panel (FP) (via terminal strip and barrier relays) discrete signals from the following wetwell floats: FS-1 Pumps Off FS-2 Lead Pump On FS - 3 ,.,, Lag Pump On FS-4 High Level Alarm C. Receive at FP a discrete signal from F$-4 on high level and indicate high level alarm, HLA. d. Receive at FP a discrete signal from pump manufacturer's standard moisture probe on pump seal failure, indicate seal failure, XA-20(2) and stop pump P-20(2). e. Provide fluorescent courtesy light, convenience outlet, NEMA rated motor starters, all indicated breakers, lightning arrestor, surge capacitor, control power and isolation trans- formers (as applicable). C. Components and field panel construction shall be as specified in Section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls. D. External Interfaces 1. All wiring between panels and remote devices will be provided in Division 16, ELECTRICAL, based on the system supplier's shop drawings. Final electrical connections to devices provided in this section and all interface connections with the plant instrumenta- tion and control system will be provided in Division 16, ELECTRI- CAL, under the supervision of the system suppliers. All discrete outputs shall be dry contact closures rated 5 amperes continuous at 120 volts, ac. 2. All interface signals shall be wired to interface terminal boards in ':their respective panels. All analog signals shall be 4 to 20 mA do signals suitable for driving into 600 ohms. Discrete (two - state) signals shall be contact closures rated for 5 amps continu- ous at 120 volts. Unless otherwise specified, all analog signals to and from analog instruments shall be twisted shielded pairs. 3. The system supplier shall provide the following -discrete outputs;_ PLC-1, Existing PLC-1, Existing PLC-1, Existing PLC-1, Existing PLC-1, Existing PLC-1, Existing PLC-1, Existing 11315 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP STATION - GENERAL Pump, P-201, Run Pump, P-202, Run Pump, P-201, Fault Pump, P-202, Fault Pump, P-201, HOA in Auto Pump, P-202, HOA in Auto Wetwell High Level Alarm 2/20/04 6 403.Ul 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Power Input to FP 1. Power input to the. control panel shall be 480V, 3 phase, 3-wire, with ground. Provide main breaker, branch breakers and control power transformer. PART 3 XXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Pumps and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations, approved shop drawings and the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set by CONTRACTOR in accordance with pump manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 PROTECTIVX COATING A. Interior and exterior of precast valve box shall be protective coated as per Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. 3.03 MANUFACTURXRIS SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The pump MANUFACTURER shall furnish the services of a competent and experienced representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the equipment for a period of not less than one (1) day to inspect the installed equipment, supervise the initial test run, and to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance personnel for each individual lift station. 3.04 FIELD TESTS/START-UP A. After pumps have been completely installed, such tests as are necessary to indicate that pump installation, and discharge performance conform to the Specifications shall be conducted in the presence of the OWNER and ENGINEER. Field tests shall include all pumps included under this Specification. B. Supply all labor, equipment and incidentals required to complete the field tests. C. The following tests shall be required: 1. Function Prior to startup, all pumps shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection and satisfac- function test (start-up check). tory performance by means of a 2. Vibration Test: The complete assembly, consisting of the guide rail system and pump connected and in normal operation, shall not develop amplitudes of vibration exceeding limits recommended by the current addition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. ------3---"-- Performance Test: _ The' CONTRACTOR shall_ perform field tests to the demonstrate pumps' conformance to the specifications to sat-isfactzon-of--the--ENGINEER.---A-test-log shall --be submitted to the ___..._._..... ENGINEER as specified herein. Pump performance shall be documented by obtaining concurrent readings, showing motor voltage, amperage draw (each phase), and pump discharge and head for the pumping conditions as specified. Each power lead to the motor shall be checked for proper current balance. 2/20/04 11315 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP 442.E1 7 STATION - GENERAL D. Units apparently failing to meet the Specifications to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER must be more accurately tested in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards. If the pump fails this second test, the unit will be rejected and the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a unit which will perform as specified. In addition, if the specified pump fails the second test, all identical pumps covered by this Specification shall be tested under this same provision within the Scope of the E. Contract. Field testing shall be witnessed by OWNER and ENGINEER. 'three (3) days minimum notice required to schedule field testing/start-up. 3.05 TEST LOGS A. A test log shall be submitted to ENGINEER upon completion of each test that records the following: I. General Information: Pump tag number (a), test date, beginning test time and ending test time. 2. Flow, as measured by instrumentation and/or storage volumes. 3. Drawdown distance from wetwell water surface to pump discharge centerline for duration of test, pump discharge pressure converted to feet of the liquid pumped and corrected to pump discharge centerline, calculated velocity head at the discharge flange, and field head, all tabulated in feet. 4. Driving motor voltage and amperage measured for each phase and three-phase kilowatts. 3.06 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. Provide certificate from manufacturer stating that the duplex grinder pump station has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's stated recommendations and that the pumps meet the specified perfor- mance requirements. B. Certification to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. 11315 SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMP STATION - GENERAL END OF SECTION 8 SECTION 11315-1 GRINDER PUMP STATION - SPECIFIC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL INFORMATION A. Installation Location: On -site sanitary pump station number 2. B. Pump Tag Numbers: P-201 and P-202. C. Pump Manufacturer: abs Pump, Inc., or equal. D. Quantity: Two (2). 1.02 PROJECT/SITS CONDITIONS A. be um ed is as described The liquidto pumped b the following parameters: Y 1. Liquid Pumped: 2. Largest Solid Passing: Raw Sewage 3-inch diameter 3. Pumping Temperature (PT): 80 degrees F. 4. Specific Gravity at PT: REQUIREMENTS 1.00 1.03 PERFORMANCE A. Conditions of Service (COS) Flow (GPM1 H Ft Design Head Condition 27 22.0 1.04 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP(S) P-201 AND P-202 A. Manufacturer: ABS Pumps, Inc. B. Pump Model No.: Piranha S10/4, Impeller 163 MM C. Motor Requirements: 1. Motor Type - Air filled 2. Maximum Horsepower - 2.0 HP 3. Speed - 3500 rpm 4. Volts/Phase - 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Phase D. Pump Discharge - 1-1/4 in. E. Class I, Division 2, Group D. Installation Environment - Yes. END OF SECTION 11315-1 1 GRINDER PUMP STATION - SPECIFIC SECTION 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART-1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all engineering, labor, materials and equipment to furnish, install, adjust, test, document and start-up all process instru- mentation and controls as shown on the Drawings and specified herein, complete. B. The process instrumentation and control system specified herein shall be a complete system. C. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for ap- pearance, operation and maintenance. D. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements which apply to the work specified herein and are mandatary for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 13711 - Existing SCADA System Modifications. B. Section 13720 - variable Frequency Drive. C. Section 16000 - Electrical General Requirements. D. Section 16050 - Electrical General Provisions. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. ISA Standards and Practices for Instrumentation - Current Edition. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. The instrumentation and control (I&C) subcontractor shall be a single firm, under direct contract and direction of the general contractor. The I&C subcontractor shall assume complete responsibility for the engineering,-,... furnishing, technical advise on,. certification as to correctness of installation, final connections to, adjusting, documenting, testing and start-up of the process instrumentation and control system shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The I&C subcontractor may have the electrical subcontractor make final connections of the I&C system, but the I&C subcontractor shall be fully responsible for these connections. B-. General contractor, as distinct from the I&C subcontractor, shall provide all additional materials and labor necessary to supplement the materials and labor provided by theI&C Subcontractor as necessary to satisfy the requirements of this project. C. System acceptance shall be defined as the point in time when: 1. All record "as -built" submittals and documentation have been submitted, reviewed and accepted. 2/20/04 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 442.El I AND CONTROLS 1 2. The complete system of instrumentation and controls has success- fully completed all testing requirements specified herein. 3. All OWNER's staff personnel training has been completed. 1.05 SYSTEM INSTALLATION RESPONSIBILITY A. The general contractor shall be ultimately responsible for the complete and proper installation of the process instrumentation and control system. The general contractor shall either include install- ation within the scope of the I&C subcontractor's contract or shall provide for the installation by an experienced I&C system installer, acceptable to ENGINEER. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with'$ection 01300 - Submittals. B. Catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring diagrams, and shop drawings on all controllers, recorders, indicators, transmitters, primary elements, flow measuring equipment and appurtenances, gauges, and all other components of the system shall be provided. C. individual data (or specification) sheets shall be provided for all components provided under this section. The purpose of these data sheets is to supplement the generalized catalog information provided by citing all specific features for each specific component (e.g.: scale range, materials of construction, special options included, etc.). Each component data sheet shall bear the component name and instrument tag number designation shown on the Drawings and Speci- fications. D. Catalog information on all electrical devices furnished under this section. E. Shop Drawings and catalog material for all control panels and enclo- sures. P. Panel elementary diagrams of prewired panels. Diagrams shall be similar to those diagrams shown on the Drawings, but with the addition of all switched analog signals and all auxiliary devices such as relays, alarms, fuses, lights, fans, heaters, etc. Drawings shall include all terminal numbers. G.- Plumbing diagrams of preplumbed panels -and interconnecting -plumbing - _-.. diagrams. H. Interconnecting wiring diagrams, showing all component and panel terminal board identification numbers and external wire numbers. This diagram shall include all intermediate terminations between field - elements and panels (e.g., terminal junction boxes, motor control _._ centers, -etc.) . This diagram shall be -coordinated-with-the -Electrical--- Subcontractor and shall bear his mark showing that this has been done. ------- -Diagrams device. designations, -and symbols -shall -be -.in accordance NEMA ICA 1-101. I. A tabulation of steady state air consumption of each pneumatic instru- ment (as applicable). J Loop diagrams, which shall consist of an individual wiring and/or plumbing diagram for each analog loop showing all terminal numbers, the location of the do power supply, the location of any booster 13700 2/20/04 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 2 442.E1 relays or common dropping resistors, etc. The loop diagrams shall meet the minimum requirements of ISA S5.4 plus the following require- ments: each loop diagram shall be divided into three areas for identification of element locations: panel face, back -of -panel, and field, respectively. On each diagram present a tabular summary of: (a) the output capability of the transmitting instruments, (b) the instrument, 0) an estimate of the input impedance of each receiving loop wiring impedance based on the wire sizes and lengths shown, (d) the total loop impedance, and (e) reserve output capacity. Loop diagrams shall be on individual 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch or 11-inch by 17-inch Drawings. K. Systems testing, calibration and adjustment procedures along with the proposed calibration, adjustment and check-out forms for this project. L. Operation and maintenance manual including operating and maintenance information and specifications for all components specified under this Section. Submitted literature shall be of sufficient detail so as to facilitate the operation, removal, installation, adjustment, calibra- tion and maintenance of each component specified in this Section. 0&M Manuals shall include internal wiring diagrams for all panels. Wiring diagrams shall show all terminal block number designations and wire numbers. Operation and maintenance Manual shall also include the following: 1. Detailed descriptive control strategies and start/stop sequences in narrative English. 2. Description of equipment protection, interlocks and alarm settings. 3. Detailed descriptive instructions for clearing and resetting alarm functions. 4. Details descriptions, of normal, bypass and emergency operation procedures. 5. Final instrumentation technician field settings. 6. Final drawings in Autocad format. M. The I&C subcontractor shall submit one set of as -built Drawings on reproducible mylars of all process and instrumentation diagrams. --._.-.. P&ID's shall be same format as in Contract Documents. N. All test results, system calibration and adjustment settings shall be submitted to ENGINEER for review prior to the introduction of current to the system of individual components. 1.07 QUALITY ASSUPANCE A. -- The CO ' RACTOR s attention is directe ultoinhe integratedth � � at the in - ion and control functions re system... Therefore, it is the intention of this specification that all controls and instruments including panel assemblies, will be provided, fur- nished, assembled and shipped, along with installation supervision, inspection and start-up by one Instrumentation Subcontractor which has a minimum of five (5) years of experience on installations of similar complexity even though individual control and instrumentation components may be the standard products of separate manufacturing companies. 2/20/04 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 442.E1 3 AND CONTROLS I B. Since many control items and instrumentation devices involve the assembly and interlocking functions of many individual parts, solenoids, pressure switches, timing relays, relays, switches, push buttons, contacts, dials, charts, clocks, pens, etc., the functional system descriptions contained herein are given to allow the In- strumentation Subcontractor to choose the proper components and to assemble them so as to provide a rugged, low maintenance, easy cleaning, reliable mechanism suitable for the temperature, salt spray and humidity conditions of the South Florida coastal area and which will perform the described function(s). C. All of the equipment furnished by the Instrumentation Subcontractor shall be the latest and proven design. Specifications and Drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Every effort shall be made to minimize interference with ,the OWNER'S existing plant operation. Should any shutdown, total or partial, be required, it shall be scheduled and coordinated with the OWNER and his approval must be obtained prior to the shutdown. B. The I&C subcontractor shall obtain from the CONTRACTOR the required information on those primary elements, valves, valve actuators and other control equipment or devices that are required to be interfaced with, but are not provided within the context of this section. C. The I&C subcontractor shall coordinate his work with the CONTRACTOR to ensure that all components provided under this section are properly installed; the proper type, size and number of control wires and conduits are provided and installed; the proper type, size and number of pneumatic tubes with their conduits are provided and installed and proper electrical circuits are provided for all components and Systems. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Proper shipping, storage and handling procedures shall be followed as recommended by the equipment MANUFACTURER and as specified herein. B. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deteriora- tion will occur during shipment -- normal--- unloading ----.storage and ---- installation. C. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage I` during a prolonged storage period at the site. Proper job site storage is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. D. Factory assembled parts -and components --shall- not --:be dismantled --far shipment unless permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER. ---_-This provision .-shall --.not.--- apply- ...i.f---.the.--items--are-moo 1 arge—t.o—.be shipped in a completely assembled condition. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents. 13700 2/20/04 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 4 442.E1 I 1.10 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer and contractor shall warrant the equipment being supplied to the OWNER against all defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year. Warranty period shall commence on Substantial Completion date as outlined in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. Warranties for all equipment installed under this contract shall run concurrently. B. The MANUFACTURER's warranty period shall run concurrently with the CONTRACTOR's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for proper storage of the equipment so as to remain in an "as shipped" condition. If the equipment remains in storage at the job site for longer than six'(5) months, before installation, the CONTRACTOR shall provide factory service personnel for a complete inspection of the equipment. Any work necessary to restore. the equipment to an "as shipped" condition will be the responsibility of the,CONTRACTOR. 1.11 TEST PROCEDURE DEVBLOPXMM'AND DOCUMENTATION A. I & C subcontractor shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER for review, a detailed description of the test procedures that he proposed to perform to demonstrate conformance of the complete system of instrumentation and controls to this Specification. B. It is recommended that the I & C.subcontractor develop the test procedures in two steps by first submitting general descriptions and outlines of the tests and then, upon receipt of approval, submit the required detailed procedures and forms. C. Operational Acceptance Tests 1. The I & C subcontractor shall prepare check -off sheet (a) for each loop and an instrument calibration sheet for each active I & C element (except simple hand switches, lights, etc.). These check -off and data sheets shall form the basis for these operational tests and this documentation. 2. Each loop check -off sheet shall cite the following information and shall provide spaces for sign -off on individual items and on the completed loop by the I & C subcontractor: a. Project name; b. Loop number; - ......._. ....... .. . ... ....... C. For each element: Tag number, description, manufacturer and model number, installation bulletin, and Specification sheet number; d. Loop description; e.= Installation check; f. Termination check; _. _ __ ........ g .. Calibration check; h. Adjustment check; _.----.. S ace for.-. comments; _.__... _ j. Space for loop sign -off by I & C subcontractor and date. the following 3. Each instrument calibration sheet shall provide information and a space for sign -off on individual items and on the completed unit by the I & C subcontractor: a. Project name; b. Loop number; 2/20/04 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 442.E1 5 AND CONTROLS 1 C. Tag number; d. Manufacturer; e. Model number; f. Serial number; g. Calibration range; h. Calibration data: Input, output, and error at 10 percent, 50 percent and 90 percent of span; i. Switch setting, contact action, and dead band for discrete elements; j. Space for comments; k. Space for sign -off by I & C subcontractor and date. D. Functional Acceptance Tests The I & C subcontractor shall prepare two types of test forms as follows: 1. For those functions that can be demonstrated on a loop -by -loop basis, the form shall include: a. Project name; b. Loop number; C. Loop description; d. Test procedure description; e. For each component: Tag number, description, manufacturer, and data sheet number; f. Space for sign -off and date by both I & C subcontractor and ENGINEER. 2. For those functions that cannot be demonstrated on a loop -by -loop basis, the test form shall be a listing of the specific tests to be conducted. With each test description the following informa- tion shall be included: a. Spec page and paragraph of function demonstrated; b. Description of function; C. Space for sign -off and date by both I & C subcontractor and ENGINEER. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. The process instrumentation and control system shall provide all of the functions as described hereinafter --for each loop and as -shown by - _........_. .... ...... ....... ... the electrical and P & ID Drawings. Major equipment items are specified for each loop. However, it shall be the responsibility of the I&C subcontractor to provide all items of equipment, whether indicated or not, that are necessary to effect the required loop. performance ,.. . B . --Display and control loops are shown on the Drawings - panel (s )--_shal l--be.--provided—with--a--U--L-- abet.—and--be-..--- manufactured by a U.L. 508A panel manufacturer. Panel manufacturer shall submit proof of current enrollment in U.L.'s custom builder's program. D. Process instrumentation and control systems shall be manufactured and provided by one of the following: 04 2 20 13700 / / PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 6 442.E1 I. Commerce Controls 1133 Fourth Street Suite 202 Sarasota,FL 34236 Contact: Mr. Sean Gucken 941/366-5181 2. C. C. Controls Corporation 1235 Parklane South Jupiter, FL 33458 Contact: Mr. Luis Garcia 561/748-3737 3. C2I P.O. Box 93643 Atlanta, GA 30377 Contact: Mr. Charlie Motz 404/351-1085 4. DCR Engineering Services 502 County Road, 640 East Mulberry, FL 33860 Contact: Mr. Chuck Bradley 863/428-8080 5. Curry Controls Company 1019 Pipkin Road Lakeland, FL 33811 Contact Person: Ralph Borgsmiller 863/646-5781 2.02 FS1 FLOW SWITCH A. Units shall be GEMS FS-550 paddle -type flow switch, or equal. 2.03 L8 L$VEL SWITCH, FLOAT TYPE WITH INTEGRAL SWITCH A. Direct -acting float type consisting of a mercury switch enclosed in a float and connected to a two -conductor, combination support and signal cable. The entire assembly shall form a completely watertight and impact -resistant unit. Floats shall be of chemical -resistant polypropylene material or other corrosion -resistant material. Cable shall be rugged and flexible with heavy neoprene or PVC jacket. The actuation/deactuation differential shall not exceed 1-inch. The mercury switch shall be rated at 5 amps at 120 _VAC ._ Units shall be.---.__..... pipe mounted or suspended type as noted and provided with A MINIMUM 30 feet of cable unless otherwise noted. Each pipe mounted type shall be provided with a clamp to secure the cable to its support pipe, 2 feet of stainless steel support pipe and stainless steel pipe mounting clamps. B. Each suspended type shall be provided'"with-'necessar brackets - an vessel. The clamps to suspend the unit from the tap of a tank or suspended type shall �iriclude—ari -integral `or--attached--weight-,assemb -- for stabilization and positive operation of the unit. All mounting clamps shall be PVC or Neoprene. C. Units shall be B/W controls Series 7010, or.equal. 1 I� L� 2/20/04 442.E1 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 7 AND CONTROLS 1 2.04 L16 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSMITTER A. Hydrostatic level measurement water pilot, FMX 160 submersible transmitter, 4-20 mA output, 2 wire 10-30 VDC power, with minimum 40 foot vented cable, unless otherwise noted. B. Sensing unit shall be all Type 316 stainless steel construction. C. Range shall be per tank elevation. D. Unit shall be as manufactured by Endress and Hauser. E. Provide all accessories for a complete and functional system. F. Provide Deltapoint "S" hydrostatic pressure sensor. 2.05 M7 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL A. Circuit Breakers 1. For motor short circuit and overcurrent protection, circuit breaker shall be Square D with poles, voltage, rating and-AIC as indicated on the drawings. 2. For control circuits, units shall be Square D with poles, voltage and ratings as indicated on the drawings. Units shall interrupt the maximum prospective fault current available. B. Fuses 1. Bussman 600 volt, dual element type.. C. Control Relays 1. Control relays shall be provided with test buttons and indicators. 2. Omron or equal. D. Indicator Lights 1. Square-D trans type 6 volt, Class 9001, type SK, push to test, or equal. 2. Lens color shall be as noted. 3.. Single or dual indicator ligh't's'shall be as noted herein. 4. Provide finger -safe contact blocks. E. Selector Switches. 1. Square-D, Class 9001, Type SK, or equal. 2. Operators shall be black knob type or key switch, 4-position, 3- _.. ___..._ _position. or2-position, as noted. 3. Selector switches shall be spring return where noted. 4. Provide finger -safe contact blocks. Pi 1 F 1 �J F1 r P F-1 F. Pushbuttons. 1. Square-D Class 9001, Type SK, pushbutton, or equal. 2. Non -illuminated pushbuttons shall be black. ted _. 3. -----Illuminated _pushbuttons shall have lens colors as no ..__.,. .^. _... __. .. 4. Provide d finger -safe contact blocks. _..�... G. Elapsed Time Meter 1. hour meter, non -reset type, Cramer 635K, or equal. H. Ground Fault Duplex Receptacle 1. Leviton Duplex Receptacle or equal. 2. AC receptacle box shall be Steel City 58351-1/2 or equal. 3. Covers shall be Steel City 58-C-5, or equal. 13700 2/20/04 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 8 442.E1 L� I. Motor Starter 1. GE, Westinghouse or Cutler Hammer only, motor starters with NEMA rated contactors, minimum size 1 or as indicated on Drawings. Provide overload blocks with overloads as required. 2. Provide -auxiliary contacts as required. 3. Provide reset buttons extended through the panel face, where noted on Drawings. J. Signal Isolator I. Signal isolator shall be plug-in type. 2. AGM Electronics or equal. K. Phase Monitor 1. Diversified or equal with auto reset. L. Surge and Lightning Arrestors 1. All control panels shall be provided with surge and lightning arrestors as specified. 2. Lightning surge Suppressor a. Lightning surge suppressors shall be APT XF Series, 80 kA or equal. 3. Signal a. Panel surge arrestors (PSA) shall be Edco PC 642C Series, 2 channel or equal. b. Field surge arrestors (PSA) shall be Edco SS64 Series, pipe style or equal.. M. Fluorescent Lamp 1. 8 watt, 120v, 1211, Grainger 2V809, or equal. 2. Bulb, 8w, 1211, miniature, Phillips, or equal. N. Ground Lug 1. #1/0 Wire Ilsco AU-O, or equal. 0. Time Delay Relays 1. Time delay relays shall be programmable with adjustable ranges, DIP switch settable. 2. Omron or equal. P. Alarm Horn 1. 120v, 103 dB. 2. Faraday, or equal. Q. Signal Isolators and current trip modules be AGM -PTA Series or equal. 1. Units shall 2.06 P4 PRSSSURB GAUGE A. Units shall be bellows or Bourdon tube actuated pressure gauges. Gauges shall be, stem mounted with 4-1/2-inch dial size, unless otherwise noted. Casing material shall be black phenol with threaded _ polypropylene ring.` Seale range shall be as noted and accuracy -shall... . be plus or minus % percent of span. B. The sensing element material shall be phosphor -bronze, unless otherwise noted. C. Provide diaphragm seals as specified herein for all gauges in contact with fluids other than potable water. D. Units with ranges below 10 psi shall be bellows actuated and shall be Ashcroft "General Service Series 1180", or equal. 2/20/04 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 442.El 9 AND CONTROLS 1 E. Units with ranges above 10 psi shall be Bourdon tube actuated and shall be Ashcroft "Duraguage Type 127911, or equal. 2.07 P6 PRESSURE SEAL, DIAPHRAGM A. Units shall consist of corrosion -resistant lower housing and diaphragm and instrument mounting upper housing. Lower housing shall have NPT female process and flushing connections and shall be 316 stainless steel, unless other noted. Diaphragm shall be 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted. Upper housing shall have bleed screw NPT female instrument connection. Filling fluid shall be as noted. B. where noted, capillary assembly shall be furnished to connect diaphragm seal to instrument with length as noted. C. wherever practical, ..pressure seal shall be factory filled and .. assembled to primary element (i.e., pressure switch, pressure transmitter, ...). D. Units shall be Ashcroft Type 101, or equal. 2.08 P9 ELECTRONIC PRESSURE INDICATING/TRANSMITTER (GAUGE) A. Instrument shall be a field -mounted pressure transmitter for measuring liner 4 to 20 do output for use gauge pressure and transmitting a mA in a standard 24 vdc supply voltage system. B. The instrument range shall be fully adjustable throughout the span limit. Accuracy shall be 1 0.1% of Span. C. All process -wetted parts of the instrument shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The transmitter shall be protected by a gasketed, weatherproof NEMA 4X enclosure. The transmitter shall be approved for use in hazardous locations (nonincendive for Class I and Class II, Division 2 locations; intrinsically safe or explosion proof for Class I and Class II, Division 1 locations). Housing finish shall be epoxy. D. Transmitter shall include an integral special scaling analog -meter and a stainless steel bleed valve. E. Transmitter shall have a %-inch NPT male thread process connection. F. Transmitter shall be provided with integral mounting bracket and hardware for installation location as shown on Drawings. G. Transmitter shall be Model 3051 CG gauge pressure transmitter as manufactured by Rosemount, Inc. FWIVi When specified herein, the P9 electronic pressure indicating/transmitter gauge shall be provided with the specified diaphragm or pressure sensor. The pressure indicating/transmitter shall be factory mounted to the diaphragm -or -pressure sensor. The completed assembly shall be factory calibrated and tested to the specified. instrument-- range ,�-----------.... _ FIELD PANEL CONSTRUCTION (ENCL 3) A. Field panels shall be UL Listed, NEMA 12, enclosure with padlockable draw latches or 3-point padlockable handles conforming to the requirements of the National Electrical. Manufacturer's Association. 13700 2/20/04 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 10 442.E1 1 1 1 [1 1 n 1 1 1 1 1 f] 1 1 B. In addition to the NEMA 12 standard, the panel shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Minimum metal thickness shall be 14-gauge. 2. All doors shall be rubber-gasketed with continuous hinge. 3. Provide aluminum dead front panel for component mounting as shown on drawings. 4. Cabinet shall be mounted as indicated on the Drawings. Provide mounting ears as required. Field drilling of cabinet is prohibited. 5. Print pocket and one (1) set of reduced drawings shall be provided on interior side of door. 6. Minimum overall dimensions shall be as indicated by Drawings or as required by UL subject 508A for industrial control panels. 7. Provide door stop kits for outer cabinet door and dead front door. C. Cabinet enclosure shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Wiegman, or equal. 2.10 PANEL ELECTRICAL A. Wiring 1. All electrical wiring shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Division 16 - Electrical. Wires shall be 600- volt class, PVC insulated stranded copper and shall be of the sizes required for the current to be carried, but not below 16 AWG enclosed in either sheet metal raceway or plastic wiring duct. Wiring for signal circuits shall be twisted shielded pairs not smaller than No. 18 AWG, and be separated at least 6 inches from any power wiring. 2. All panel wiring shall be labeled with T&B Shrink-Kon HVM marker system. Wire marker numbers shall agree with control panel provided terminals. B. Terminal Blocks 1. Terminal blocks shall be one-piece molded plastic blocks with screw type terminals and barriers rated for 300 volts. Terminals shall be double sided. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification. 2. Wires shall be terminated at the terminal blocks with crimp type, preinaulated, locking forked -tongue lugs. Lugs -shall be of the --- appropriate size for the terminal block screws and for the number __-..___......-_ and_size of the wires--terminated. 3. Terminals shall be Allen Bradley 1492 series or equal. 4. Terminal numbers and wire numbers shall agree. C. Wire Ducts 2/20/04 442.E1 1. Wire duct shall be by Panduit, or equal. 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 11 AND CONTROLS D. Miscellaneous Features 1. Provide fluorescent courtesy light, convenience outlet, lightning arrestor, surge arrestor, loop power supplies (with surge protection specified herein), circuit breakers and power supply. 2. Items required shall be as indicated on the drawings. E. Power Supplies 1. Provide do power supplies as required to power instruments requiring external do power. 2. Power supplies shall convert 120V ac, 60-Hz power to do power of the appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control:to.,assure that the instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances. 3. Output overvoltage and overcurrent protective devices shall be provided with the power supply to protect the instruments from damage due to power supply failure and to protect the power supply from damage due to external failure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for all power supplies. Power supplies shall be mounted such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other components. 2.11 NAMEPLATES, NAME TAGS AND SERVICE LEGENDS A. All components provided under this section, both field and panel mounted, shall be provided with permanently mounted name tags bearing the entire ISA tag number of the components. Panel mounted tags shall be plastic; field mounted tags shall be stamped stainless steel. B. Circuit breakers and all dead front panel items shall be clearly labeled by name, no tag number. Nameplates are defined as inscribed laminated plastic plates mounted under or near a panel face mounted instrument. Service legends are defined as inscribed laminated plastic integrally mounted on a panel face mounted instrument. C. Service legends and nameplates shall be engraved, rigid, laminated plastic. Service legends and nameplates shall be fastened to the panel by screws or with a specially applied adhesive. Fastening shall not depend only on the adhesive backing of the nameplate. Unless otherwise noted, color shall be black with white letters and letter height shall be 3/16-inch. D. Field mounted tags shall be 16-gauge, 304 stainless steel with 3/16- inch high characters. E. Each panel shall be provided with a cabinet face mounted -laminated nameplate as specified above. Unless otherwise noted, color shall be black with white letters M-inch high. _ _.._. ..__..._. ---_ ..._ 2.12 ATS . Furnish�he manufacturer's recommended..... spare parts including at least the following: 1. One (1) pressure indicating transmitter. B. All parts shall be furnished in containers which are clearly marked and identified as to the contents. 13700 2/20/04 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 12 442.E1 C. Provide spare parts bill of materials with submittals for approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished appearance. H. Electrical work shall be performed in compliance with these Specific- ations. Where these Specifications and the Drawings do not delineate precise installation procedures, API RP 550 shall be used as a guide to installation procedures. C. Coordinate I&C work with the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and work of other trades to avoid conflicts, errors, delays and unnecessary interference during construction. with operation of the existing plant(s) 3.02 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Throughout this Contract, the Contractor shall provide protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage and from the effects of weather. Prior to installation, store items in indoor, dry locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. specific storage requirements shall be in accordance with the ENGINEER -reviewed I&C subcontractor's recommendations. 3.03 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturers' installation instructions explicitly, unless otherwise indicated. Wherever any conflict arises between manufac- turers' instructions, and these Contract Documents, follow ENGINEER'S decision, at no additional cost to OWNER. Keep copy of manufacturers' instructions on the job site available for review at all times. 3.04 ELECTRIC CONTROL AND SIGNAL WIRING A. Control and signal wiring external to the control panels and all power 16 - Electrical. wiring shall conform to the requirements of Division S. Control and signal wiring in control panels shall be restrained by plastic -ties or ducts. hinge wiring shall be secured at .each end so that any bending or twisting will be around the longitudinal axis of the wire and the bend area shall be protected with a sleeve. C. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length and remove surplus wire. Provide abrasion protection for any wire bundles_ which pass through holes or across edges of sheet metal. D.--' p or to be -spliced tapped shall not be.s ppedfexcept at device ,terminals or -terminal. bl_ocks._.._ - -.-- E. Panels and panel mounted equipment shall be assembled as far as possible at the I&C subcontractor's plant. No work, other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage, shall be done on the panels at the job site. 2/20/04 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 442 E1 13 AND CONTROLS F. I&C subcontractor shall observe and advise on the installation to the extent required to certify in writing that the equipment will perform as required. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The supervisory services of a factory -trained service engineer who is specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided for a period specified below during construction to assist the CONTRACTOR in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduits and special cable; mounting, piping and wiring of one of each type of device and the method of protecting all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation, the services of the above service engineer shall be provided for a period specified below for calibration and start-up of the equipment. The minimum days ;specified below,.do not relieve the Instrumentation Subcontractor from providing sufficient service to place the system into satisfactory operation. Event Du at(Minimum) Construction/Installation Assistance One (1) Eight (8) Hour Man Days I&C System(s) Startup/Calibration Two (2) Eight (8) Hour Man Days OWNER Personnel Instruction Two (2) Eight (8) Hour Man Days B. No form of energy shall be turned on to any part of the instrumenta- tion system prior to receipt by the ENGINEER of a certified statement of approval of the installation from the CONTRACTOR containing his supplier's authorization for energizing the system. C. A factory trained service engineer shall be provided for placing the system into operation. After the system is being operated by the OWNER's personnel, the service engineer shall return for a one -day instruction course in the maintenance and operation of the system. D. All instrumentation shall be calibrated in the presence of the ENGINEER in accordance with the range and accuracy specified herein. Certified test reports shall be filed with the ENGINEER. 3.06 TESTING A. All elements of the Instrumentation and Control system shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this specification. B. All special testing materials and equipment shall be provided by the I & C Subcontractor. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, the I & C subcontractor shall .provide suitable means of simulation. These simulation techniques shall be subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. C. The I & C subcontractor shall coordinate all`of his -testing with the CONTRACTOR and all other associated subcontractors. D. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Factory Tests All analog panels and panel assemblies shall be tested for proper operation at the I & C subcontractor's factory prior to the shipment of any system element to the site. Results of the 13700 2/20/04 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 14 442.E1 1 1 1 1 1 [l 1 1 factory tests shall be recorded and submitted for approval before shipment of any panel or panel assembly to the plant. 2. Operational Acceptance Tests The objective of these tests is to demonstrate that the system of Process Instrumentation and Control is READY for final operation. The I & C System shall be checked for proper installation, adjusted, and calibrated on a loop -by -loop basis to verify that it is ready to function as specified. All system elements shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly. All discrete elements and systems shall have their set points adjusted and shall be checked for proper operation (e.g., interlock functions, contact closure on rising/falling P.V., etc.). All continuous elements and systems shall have three-point calibrations performed. All controller tuning constants shall be adjusted to preliminary settings. The OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall be completed prior to starting the FUNCTIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS. The actual testing program shall be conducted in accordance with prior approved procedures and shall be documented as required hereinafter. 3. Functional Acceptance Tests The objective of these tests is to demonstrate that the system of Instrumentation and Controls is operating and complying with the specified performance requirements. A witnessed, FUNCTIONAL ACCEPTANCE TEST shall be performed on the complete system of Instrumentation and Controls. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER on a loop -by -loop and/or paragraph -by -paragraph basis. Each test shall be witnessed and signed off by bath the I & C subcontractor and the ENGINEER upon satisfactory completion. The actual testing program shall be conducted in accordance with prior approved procedures and shall be documented as required hereinafter. The I & C subcontractor shall notify the ENGINEER at least 2 weeks prior.to the date of the FUNCTIONAL ACCEPTANCE TEST.. - _ ----3:07----CLEAN-UP .._... .. _._ •__�_ A...___Keep-tlxe-premises-free from -accumulation of -waste material. -or--rubbish._...__ Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. Touch-up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, consistency and type of surface of the original finish. 2/20/04 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 442.E1 is AND CONTROLS I PART 4 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS 4.01 LOOP SPECIFICATION FORMAT A. "Functions" specify the functional performance of the loop and includes a description of any functional interlocks to be provided by the I&C subcontractor. For more precise information on a loop's functional interlocks, refer to the Drawings. B. "Components" specify the major components to be provided for a loop. Each component is identified by three pieces of information: tag number, component identification code and component name and options. C. Tag numbers example HS-1-3-7 HS - Instrumentation designation: Hand Switch. 1 = Unit process number. 3 - Loop.number. 7 = Unit or item number. is alphanumeric code used to D. Component identification code an reference a particular component specification within this section. E. Component name and options are listed as required for each specific been to define the requirement. One particular nomenclature has used action of discrete devices about their set points. "Rising" -in reference to a set point means that the contacts are closed for all process variable values above that point. "Falling" -in reference to a set point means that contacts are closed for all process variable values below that point. 4.02 POTABLE WATER STORAGE AND PUMPING A. Functions I. Provide a continuous 4-20 mA DC signal from LIT-2480 to PLC-1 corresponding to water level in new 2.0 MG ground storage tank, GST-202. 2. Measure and indicate locally high service pump discharge pressure, PI-002, PI-003, PI-004, PI-005 and PI-006. 3. Provide a discrete signal from limit switch, (at each pump check valve) to PLC-1, corresponding to check valve position status. Normally open (NO) limit switch closes when valve is open. Limit switch shall be provided by valve manufacturer, Section 15100. 4.03 NEW PLANT SITE SANITARY PUMP STATION NO. 2 A. Functions: .,. station No. 2 field panel, FunctionsanPum �. 1. Pump p components, provided under Section 11315 - Submersible G p Station - General. 2. Receive at existing PLC-1 a discrete signal from pump station No. 2 on common system.failure. 04 2 20 13700 � / PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 16 442.E1 3. Pump Station No. 2 failure shall be indicated at existing HMI as directed by existing PLC-1. B. Components 1. Field panel and field instruments shall be provided under Section - General. 11315 - Submersible Grinder Pump Station 4.04 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING PLC-1 and SCADA A. Modifications to the existing PLC-1 and SCADA system shall be as specified in Section 13711 - Existing SCADA System Modifications. 4.05 CLEARWELL TRANSFER PUMP BACKUP (FP-BU) A. Functions `"' 1. Field Panel Backup, FB-BU, shall be provided to back up the control system for clearwell transfer pumps. 2. If for any reason clearwell water level rises to the Lag Pump discrete signal shall be issued from Level Start Float, FS2, a FP-BU to new audible alarm, AH, at existing PLC-1 enclosure. Audible alarm, AH, shall also be provided at FP-BU. 3. Normal/bypass selector switch, HS. Operation shall be as follows: a. Normal: Normal operation control via PLC-1. 1 1 it 1 1 b. Bypass. When water level of clearwell rises to the LEAD START Float, FS1, a discrete signal will be issued to the transfer pump/VFD in the lead position. Pump shall run at modifiable speed preset at VFD. If water level of clearwell continues to rise to the LAG START float, FS2, a discrete signal will be issued to the transfer pump/VFD in the LAG position. Pump shall run at modifiable speed preset at VFD. When water level of clearwell falls to the stop pumps level, FSO, the discrete start signals to the transfer pumps/VFD's shall be discontinued stopping both pumps. On each pump, STOP condition the LEAD/LAG positions shall be alternated. Start/stop sequence shall continue until selector switch, HS, is returned to normal operation. 4. Provide at FP-BU a test/normal selector switch for each float -- -- -- (typ-of-.3) : --In ---normal_ mode; floats -will - provide- signals -for— bypass operation above. In test mode, float circuit is made without actual float switch contact. 5. Provide at FP-BU, amber float call indicating light (type of 3). 6. Provide at FP-BU, red bypass required, indicating light. 7. Provide at FP-BU, amber pump call indicating light (type of 2). 2/20/04 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 442.El 17 AND CONTROLS 1 H. Components: 1. Components shall be as indicated on drawings and as specified herein. END OF SECTION 13700 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS SECTION 13711 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL WORK INCLUDED 1.01 A. The Contractor shall coordinate and furnish all labor and materials to modify the existing PLC/RTU System including all hardware and programming revisions for a complete and functional system. B. Provide all equipment and re -developed PLC software files including manuals and disks for proper communication. Include all PLC located equipment, PC located equipment, interposing equipment, cable (length as required), connectors and the like. Contractor shall utilize his computer for startup and testing. After successful startup, all re- developed software shall be provided to the OWNER. PLC software and SCADA software shall be loaded onto the OWNER's computers. Backup copies of all developed files shall be provided to OWNER on CD. C. All programming, field debugging and testing shall be provided. D. In order to establish sole source responsibility for the Instrumentation and Control (I&C) System, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all systems and subsystems provided and coordination of work between system vendors. E. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance. F. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 13700 - Process Instrumentation and Controls. B. Section 13720 - Variable Frequency Drive. C. Division 16 - Electrical. D;--...Appendix C Copies of existing HSP screens. _. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. 1. It is incumbent upon the- Contractor to coordinate the work --- specified in these Sections so that a complete PLC program will be -PLC program -shall be --provided with -other . submittal ._.data,— - 2. As part of the responsibility as assigned by the Contractor, the PLC/RTU System supplier shall prepare and submit through the Contractor, complete and organized program printouts including fully annotated ladder diagrams and reports, I/O schedules, I/O addresses, Rack assignments, Communication channel/drop assignments. 2/20/04 13711 442.E1 1 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 1 3. During the period of preparation of this submittal, the Contractor shall authorize direct informal liaison between his single I&C Supplier and the Engineer for exchange of technical information. As a result of this liaison certain minor refinements and revisions in the systems as specified may be authorized informally by the Engineer, but these shall not alter the scope of the work or cause increase or decrease in the Contract price. During this informal exchange no oral statement by the Engineer shall be construed to give formal approval of any component or method, nor shall any statement be construed to grant formal exception to, or variation from these specifications. 4. The original and backup copy of the developed files shall be provided on CD -Rom. B. Complete sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. O & M Manuals shall be provided prior to start-up. 1. Manuals shall contain copies of submittal data. 2. Manuals shall contain all Engineering shop drawings with all field modification revisions. 3. Provide print out of final PLC programming. 4. Provide print out of final PLC I/O list. 5. Provide print out of final operator interface parameters. C. Warranty information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work specified herein shall be performed by the same I&C Contractor as listed in Section 13700. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant all equipment and programming for a period of one (1) year from the date of project substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS, -_ ._._ - _. _.. --- - - -._ __.._._T__. _ _._ ..... _.._ 2.01 EXISTING} PLC SYSTEM (FIELD) A. Existing PLC system is based on Modicon components. B. New field wiring terminations for new field equipment and • all be as shown on the drawings -and field coordinated.. - instrumentation shall with the approved shop drawings. C. .._shall be provided using "Proworks PLC Software" in All PLC programming agreement with the OWNER'S copy. 2.02 EXISTING COMPUTER OPERATOR INTERFACE A. Existing computer hardware and software systems shall be reused as is with programming modifications as specified herein. 13711 2/20/04 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 2 442.E1 1 I B. All SCADA programming shall be provided using Intellution in agreement with the OWNER'S copy. Copies shall be loaded onto the development, runtime, and client computers. C. Provide backup of all developed files on CD. ' 2.03 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish the following spare parts: 1. None required. B. All parts shall be furnished in containers which are clearly marked and identified as to the contents. C. Provide spare parts bill of materials with submittals for approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLC I/O SCHEDULE A. Provide PLC I/O schedule. Refer to the P&I diagram, schematic diagrams and control strategies. Provide I/O per these requirements. DI denotes Discrete Input DO denotes Discrete Output AI denotes Analog Input AO denotes Analog Output 3.02 PLC PROGRAMMING STRATEGIES, GENERAL REQUIRMU=S A. Provide all programming to fully implement the following control strategies to produce output and receive input from the instrumentation and control system and existing PLC-1. ^� B. The existing PLC-1 in conjunction, with the computer operator interface following shall provide the normal control system. The strategies describe the minimum control loguttergic requirements. Additional timers, interlocks, and logic shall be provided as required for a completely functional system. Alarms and status I/O which are required for the system shall be provided. Please note that the following control strategies do not distinguish -- - - ------between new functions or existing functions or existing functions to be modified. It shall be the responsibility of the named system provider to complete all of the programming requirements to provide the specified functions. Underlined and bolded items represent WTP.SCADA HMI,- operator interface items. CAPITALIZED AND UNDERLINED items are internal PLC-1 program adjustable software. -values, ___..--._ C. Loops 1892 and 2480 - Ground Storage Tank(s) Level Monitoring (Existing). 1. Existing tank level monitoring functions shall remain as is. D. Loop 2115 Discharge Flaw Monitoring (Existing) ' 2/20/04 13711 442.E1 3 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 1 1. Continuous analog signal corresponding to distribution system, PIT- 2115, shall be transmitted to WTP SCADA HMI (exist) via PLC-1 (exist) . E. High Service Pumping (Revised) 1. A lead -follow pump control strategy shall be used for controlling the pump start -stop sequence (normal operation). System control parameter shall be downstream discharge water main pressure. 2. The LEAD, F011, F012, F013 and F014, initial selections shall be set via the WTP SCADA HMI (exist). Except for fault conditions, the sequence shall follow the selected order. , 3. LEAD pump shall start when the distribution system pressure drops below the LEAD ST T P ESS E SETPOINT, after a time delay. PID programming in the PLC shall vary the VFD output speed reference to maintain the distribution oyatem preonureP 4. FOL1 pump shall be started when the LEAD pump is at SETPOINT FOR ADVINI! PU P, after time delay. PID Programming in the PLC shall vary and match an equivalent output speed reference to the lead and FOL1 VFD's to maintain, the r ion e pressure eetnvint,(PSI). 5. FOL2 pump shall be started when the LEAD and FOL1 pumps are at MAXTMLiM SPEE�ETPOINT FOR ADDING PUMPS, after a time delay. PID programming in the PLC shall vary and match an equivalent output speed reference to the. LEAD, FOL1 and FOL2 VFD's to maintain the distribution system pressure setgvint (PST). 6. FOL3 pump shall be started when the LEAD, FOL1 and FOL2 pumps are at MAXIMUM SPEED SETPOINT FOR ADDING PUMPS, after a time delay. PID programming in the PLC shall vary and match an equivalent output speed reference to the LEAD, FOL1, FOL2 and FOL3 VFD's to maintain the diatribHti2n system prepagrg VetRoint 7. FOL4 pump shall be started when the LEAD, FOL1, FOL2 and FOL3 pumps are at MAXIMUM SPEED SETPOINT FOR ADDING PUMPS, after a time delay. PID programming in the PLC shall vary and match an equivalent output speed reference to the LEAD, FOL1, FOL2 and FOL3 VFD's to maintain the distribution system xrrossure setpoint _(PSG. 8. FOL4 pump shall be stopped when the LEAD, FOL1, FOL2, FOW and FOL4 pumps are running at MILaIM SPEED SPJPOIHI FOR DELETING PUMPS, - after time delay. 9. FOL3 pump shall be stopped when the LEAD, FOL1, FOL2 and FOL3 pumps are running at MINIMUM SPEED SET OINT FOR DELETING PUMP ,after time delay. n 10. FOL2 pump shall be stopped when the, -LEAD,', FOL1 -and FOL2-pumps are -- running at MINIMUM SPEED gETPOINT FOR LDELgTING PUMPS, after a time - ---- delay i...— -.. -.... 11. FOL1 pump shall be stopped when the LEAD and FOL1 pumps are funning at MINIMUM SPEED SETPOINT FOR DELETING PUMPS, after a time delay. 12. LEAD pump shall be stopped when either of the following conditions are met following a time delay: 13711 2/20/04 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 4 442.E1 , a. when LEAD pump is running at MINIMUM SPEED SETP INT FOR DELETING LEAD -PUMP and the downstream water main pressure rises above the distribution By0t0m Rressureint (PSI). Or b. When LEAD pump is running and no flow is being measured by the existing plant finished water flow meter(s). 13. LEAD -FOLLOW control, strategy shall continue in the event any of the pumps are in a faulted mode. 14. When a faulted condition exists .for any pumping system fault or if the pump HOA is not in AUTO, the pump shall be automatically removed from the control strategy. When fault conditions clear or the HOA is returned to AUTO, the pump shall be automatically added, transients to the bumpless. Logic shall be applied to minimize system when deleting or adding faulted pumps/drives to the control strategies. 15. Upon receipt of discrete signal from VFD on internal diagnostic failure or pump over -temperature, indication of such shall be transmitted to WTP SCADA HMI (exist) via PLC-1 (exist). 16. The PLC-1 shall monitor the status of pump/VFD control hand switch and when hand switch its in the "Auto" position, PLC shall allow output reference speed to the associated drive in accordance with 1 the above specified pump control strategy. PLC shall also monitor position of pump/VFD hand switch and transmit position indication to WTP SCADA: HMI (exist). 17. when VFD speed output rises above 096, PLC-1 shall receive a discrete signal for run indication and transmit same to WTP SCADA ' HMI (exist). 18. PLC-1 shall receive an analog signal on actual operating speed from VFD. Indication of such shall be transmitted to WTP SCADA HMI ' (exist). 19. Should the level of the ground storage tank(s) drop below the LOW LOW LEVEL L0CKQRJ SETPQINT, all high service pump(s) PLC outputs shall be locked out of operation. Pump operation shall resume once the level of the ground storage tank(s) rises above the LOW LOW LEVEL LOCKOUT REgUME PUMPING SETTNT, following a time delay. 20. Internal PLC-1 program adjustable software set points. The following parameter elements shall be provided for system adjustment and operation: Description Range, Initial Setting a. START PRESSURE SRTPQINT -0-100 psi, 55 psi b. MINIMUM SPEED SETPOINT FOR DELETING 0-100%, 75% - -.-. _.. ..._ .. LEAD PUMP :. c. MAXIMO SPEED SE P TNT FOR hPQIN.0PUMPS 0-100%, 95$ _....d.. MINIMUM SP $ 0-100%, 7TPOINT e. LOW LOW LEVEL LOCKOUT_SETPOIET 0-25 Ft, 4 Ft f. LOW LOW LEVEL LOCKOUTUM PUMJPING 0-25 Ft, 10 Ft SETPOINT g. MISCELLANEOUS TIME DELAYS 0-300 sec, 10 sec h. Other parameters shall be provided as required. ' 21. This control strategy shall not apply to existing constant speed high service pump, HSP001. HSP001 control shall remain as is. 2 20 04 13711 442.E1 5 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 1 F. CLEARWELL TRANSFER PUMPING (REVISED) 1. A lead -follow pump control strategy shall be used for controlling the pump start -stop sequence (normal operation). System control parameter shall be water level in filter effluent clearwell. 2. The LEAD, FOL1, initial selections shall be set via the WTP SCADA HMI (exist). Except for fault conditions, the sequence shall follow the selected order. 3. Lead pump shall start when the clearwell level rises above the I&EAD START LEVEL SET PID programming POINT after time delay. The speed shall vary using in the PLC to vary the VFD output speed to maintain the CLEARWELL LEVEL MAINTAIN SETPOINT. Minimum and maximum speeds of the drive shall be programmed into the drive by the I&C Contractor, 4. FOL1 pump shall be started when the LEAD pump is at KMIMUM SPEED SETPOINT FOR ADDINTC� PfJMP, after time delay. PID Programming in the PLO shall vary and match an equivalent output speed reference to the lead and FOL1 VFD's to maintain the CLEARWELL LEVEL MAIMI SBOINT . 5. FOL1 pump shall be stopped when the LEAD and FOL1 pumps are Running at MINIMUM SPEED SETPOINT FOR DELETING PUMPS, after a time delay. 6. LEAD pump shall be stopped when either of the following conditions are met following a time delay: a. When. LEAD pump is running at MINIMUM SPEED $STP,tN FOR DELETING LEAD__PUMP and the clearwell level drops below the eIN b . When LEAD pump sz running TINT . ng a E d no flow is detected by pump discharge flow switches. 7. LEAD -FOLLOW control strategy shall continue in the event any of the , pumps are in a faulted mode. S. When a faulted condition exists for any pumping. system fault or if the pump HOA is not in AUTO, the pump shall be automatically removed from the control strategy. When fault conditions clear or the HOA is returned to AUTO, the pump shall be automatically added, bumpless. Logic shall be applied to minimize transients to the system when deleting or adding faulted pumps/drives to the control .strategies - .. .. .. 9. Upon receipt of discrete signal from VFD, on internal diagnostic failure or pump over -temperature, indication of such shall be transmitted to WTP SCADA HMI (exist). 10. PLC-1 shall monitor the status of pump/VFD control hand switch, and ..when hand switch is in the.. -."Auto::. position,.---.PLC-1--shall allow. ' -- output reference speed to the associated drive in accordance with __.._. the . above_. -spec- f ied._- pump _control st_rategy. PLC-1 shall also monitor position of pump/VFD hand switch and transmit position indication to WTP SCADA HMI (exist). 11. When VFD speed output rises above 0%, PLC-1 shall receive a discrete signal for run indication and transmit same to WTP SCADA HMI (exist). 13711 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 6 2/20/04 442.E1 1 [7 1 12. PLC-1 shall receive an analog signal on actual operating speed from VFD. Indication of such shall be transmitted to WTP SCADA HMI (exist). 13. Should the level of the clearwell drop below the LOW LOW LEVEL SETPOINT, all transfer pump(s) PLC outputs shall be locked ' out of operation. Pump operation shall resume once the level of the clearwell rises above the LOW LOW LEVEL LOCKOUT RESUME PC�MPING SETPOINT, following a time delay. ' 14. Internal PLC program adjustable software set points. The following parameter elements shall be provided for system adjustment and operation: Description Range, Initial Setting a. LEAD START LEVEL SET O N 0-10 feet b. MINIMUM SPEED SETPOINT FOR DELETINg 0-100%, 75% SPEED ADDING PUMPS 0-100%, 95% c. MAXIMUM SETPO- NT_ FOR d. MINIMINIHO SPEED S TP 0 ETING PUMPS 0-100%, 75% e. LOW LOW LEVEL LOCKOUT SETPOINT 0-10 Ft, 2 Ft f. LOW LOW LEVEL LOCKOUT RESUME EOPING 0-10 Ft, 4 Ft gSTP©INT g. MISCELLANEOUS TIME -DELAYS 0-300 sec, 10 sec ' h. Other parameters shall be provided as required. 3.03 EXISTING COMPUTER OPBRATOR INTERFACE AND PLC MODIFICATIONS (WTP SCADA HUI ) A. Provide all programming and software modifications of the existing WTP SCADA HMI program to implement the requirements for a complete and functional system as specified herein and shown on drawings. ' B. General programming shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Graphic display of all new and existing discrete and analog data. 2. 3. Reporting of all new and existing discrete and analog data. Alarm reception and acknowledgment of the new and existing alarms. 4. Control output of data from central computer to PLC-1 per P&I diagram and these specifications. 5. Software modifications shall be similar to and consistent with the existing computer operator interface. C. Specific function revisions shall be as follows: 1. General Alarm Reset a. Exist display alarm/function shall remain as is. 2. Pump/VFD Fail (Typ of 7) a. Provide display alarm/function for. all proposed high service and transfer pumps/VFD's. 3 .... ' Pressure (psi) Readout. Distribution display gfunctionskull-: remain as_ s. 4. VFD Speed (%) Readout (Typ of 7) a. Provide readout function of each VFD speed. Input value shall be actual speed output from VFD. b. Range - 0-100%. ' S. Pump Run Indication (Typ of 7) a. Existing display function shall remain as is. ' 2/20/04 13711 442.E1 7 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 6. Pump control hand/off/auto indication (Typ of 7). a. Existing display function shall remain as is. 7. Distribution Pressure Setpoint (psi). a. Input value shall be value used by PLC-1 to calculate speed reference output(s) to high service pump VFD(s). , b. Range: 0-100 psi. B. Clearwell level maintain setpoint (FT). , 1. Input value shall be used by PLC-1 to calculate speed reference output(s) to transfer pump VFD(s). 2. Range: 0-10 Feet. ' 9. LEAD/FALLOW Selection/Indication (Typ of 7) a. Selection capability shall be provided to select with pump is in the LEAD position. b. Provide indication of LEAD FOLLOW selection. 10. Pump Auto/Manual Control (Typ of 7) a. An auto/manual selector shall be provided for each pump. Manual Mode 1. When manual mode is selected, additional on -screen start/stop functions and a manual pump speed command (W) will appear. 2. Operator can use the pump start/stop and manual pump speed command (-%) setpoint functions to control selected pump (s). AuutQo Mode 1. When auto mode is selected, the on -screen pump start/stop functions and manual pump speed command (W) setpoint will not appear. , 2. In auto mode, pumps will operate automatically as specified herein to maintain the operator selected distribution pressure setpoint (psi), or Clearwell level setpoint (Ft.). c. Each pump shall have its own set of auto/manual, start/stop controls and manual setpoint display. d. When transferring from auto to manual, the transfer shall be bumpless with the current on/off status being maintained and the current PID setpoint transferring to the manual setpoint. 11. GST Level (Ft) Readout a. Existing Display Function shall remain as is. 12.-Clearwell Level (FT) Readout. a., Existing Display Function shall remain as is. 13. Sanitary Pump Station No. 2 Common Fault a. Provide display/alarm function for common fault. D. Modifications to existing ground storage tank level controls 1. The plant presently has only one ground storage tank. 2. After the completion of this project, two ground storage tanks shall be integrated into the existing PLC control strategy and SCADA system operator interface. 3. Contractor shall field investigate all the requirements associated with the level controls and indications for the ground storage tank and shall replace the level elements with a new "selected" ground storage tank level. The ground storage tank level shall be as selected by the operator from the SCADA screen. Contractor shall 13711 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 8 2/20/04 442.E1 1 1 I r modify SCADA screens to indicate the selection of ground storage tank 1 or ground storage tank 2. The selected ground storage tank ' level shall be used in all PLC control strategies for the purposes of controlling pumps, locking out wells and other elements as may be present or as. may be required for good water treatment plant ' control. 4. Contractor shall field investigate all the requirements associated with GST level control. No attempt is made in these plans or specifications to detail all work elements. 5. Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete and functional system to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. ' No. 2 E. Lift Station ' 1. Modify existing SCADA screens to receive all the digital inputs indicated by drawings. 2. Provide alarm for all alarm conditions. ' 3. Provide status for all discrete inputs. 4. Provide pump failure or alarms in 24 hr. reports. 3.04 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTINGI PLC-1 CABINET A. Existing digital readouts for ground storage tank(s) level, clearwe11 level, and distribution system pressure shall remain as is. a. Coordinate and/or provide hand switches and run lights for each transfer and high service pump. New switch and light components shall match existing. Provide new engravings as applicable, match existing ' format. C. Existing annunciator functions shall remain as is. drawings. D. Provide other modification per 3.05 DOCUMENTATION A. Fully annotated ladder diagrams, screen design graphics and other reports and documentation shall be included in the O&M manuals reflecting final corrections. Other required reports shall include but _ ..' . .. not be limited to bit, -word, --timer, counter -and memory.. usage reports ...____.-_. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the typewritten program description in the O&M manuals. The description shall include the program name, date, preparer/programmer, preparing company etc. The processing section of the description shall .include the overall structure and function of the ..... program. Describe the program run stream and a detailed description of _.._.__.how the program. operates. Describe -all input..and..outputs elements... --------..----.-- ..___. ..._-C...--Describe....how.-..fault.-.sensing..__i.s_-.achieved.....and. the—actions--required._from.-_ __.__.. operators to acknowledge or clear faults. D. After successful software start up the CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER all corrected ladder diagrams and reports as listed above as part of the O&M manuals. CONTRACTOR shall also provide to the OWNER on disk ' all annotated, developed files. The OWNER becomes the Owner of such files. r 2/20/04 13711 442.E1 9 EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 1 3.06 TESTING A. All programming shall be shop simulated as much as possible before downloading to the existing PLC-1. All elements of the program shall be checked in the presence of the Engineer and to his satisfaction. The CONTRACTOR shall provide programmers on site with instrument , technicians for the purposes of start up and testing of the system software. B. A minimum of five (5) man days shall be for -site testing. ' provided on 3.07 START UP MODIFICATIONS A. Programming modifications may be required during startup per the CITY/ENGINEER'S requirements. B. Provide an additional three (3) man days of programming time for these changes. These man days shall be in addition to time for changes required to integrate the existing PLC-1 system with other equipment vendors. , END OF SECTION SECTION 13720 ' VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide complete Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) system(s) as specified ' within and as indicated on the drawings. System shall be provided complete with all necessary accessories and appurtenances as required for a completely functional system ready for immediate use. ' B. Variable Frequency Drive manufacturer shall submit letter as part of the shop drawing submittal process indicating compatibility of variable frequency drive with pump/motor system(s) being provided for this project. ' C. Units shall be provided as specified herein and with additional requirements as indicated on plans. ' D. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance. E. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.02 A. Section 11037 - Vertical Turbine Pumps - General. ' Instrumentation and Controls. B. Section 13700 - Process C. Section 13711 - Existing SCADA System Modifications. D. Division 16 - Electrical. 1 I 1 PJ 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Shop drawings shall be submitted via the control system vendor to the ENGINEER for review and comment. Vendor shall clearly indicate his conformance to the requirements of this specification. Along with standard literature, a detailed schematic and assembly drawing shall be provided. A recommended spare parts list shall be provided. Vendor shall not- release the unit for manufacture without approved shop drawings. C. Complete set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted in accordance... with .-Section .0.17.30-.. Operation and Maintenance .Data._.O. &...M......._ .... Manuals shall be provided prior to start-up. D. Warranty information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. 2/20/04 13720 442.E1 1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 1 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. All equipment furnished under this specification shall be new and unused, shall be the product of a manufacturer having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide a full warranty covering labor, materials, the services of a ' factory authorized technician including all expenses for a period of two (2) years. During this period, manufacturer shall repair any failures associated with the drive. B. This warranty period shall begin on the contract date of Substantial Completion, no exceptions , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) ' A. Fully engineered Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) system for use with a pump/motor as listed below. Units shall utilize PWM technology. Power input shall be listed below, 3 phase. Drive shall be Series GP10 by Saftronics. The specifications are written around Saftronics. Other , bidders shall be limited to Allen-Bradley or Robicon. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 1. Minimum drive inverter amps of output shall not be less than the amps as listed by horsepower/voltage combination in Table 430-150 of the latest issue of the National Electrical code. , 2. Minimum drive overload capability shall not be less than 110% of the output rated amps for 60 seconds. 3. Installation Locations: ' Location Tag NumbersHors Rower Voltage T x u HSP-002 VFD-002 150 460 Variable ' HSP-003 VFD-003 150 460 Variable HSP-004 VFD-004 150 460 Variable HSP-005 VFD-005 150 460 Variable HSP-006 VFD-006 150 460 Variable TP-1 VFD-TP1 150 .460 Variable.. TP-2 VFD-TP2 150 460 Variable 4. VFD supplier/manufacturer shall confirm the torque application , and speed of the driven load with the connected equipment supplier/manufacturer. . B . Technology _. _...... . .... .. I . -_—__.For units-100 HP and above, -provide --18--pulse-:-with.. phase._. shifting_ T isolation transformers on the front end and included within. a ' common enclosure. 2. Units shall meet or exceed the requirements of IEEE 519. Submit , application data specific to this project. C. As a minimum, include the following features for each VFD: 13720 2/20/04 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 2 442.El 1. Exterior front cabinet door mounted equipment shall be as follows: a. Hand -Off -Auto selector switch. b. Programmer/Monitor/Display Module and required appurtenances. Display shall indicate speed in percent. ' C. Engraved legend plate shall be provided for all devices. d. Manual speed control (function of programmer/monitor/display module). e. Pilot/control devices including lights and switches. Pilot ' lights shall be transformer type, push -to -test. Pilot/control devices shall be provided as shown on drawings. f. Provide digital readouts for tank level and distribution ' system pressure. 2. Circuit Breakers ra. be Square D with poles, For control circuits, units shall voltage and ratings as indicated on the drawing. Units shall interrupt, the maximum prospective fault current ' available (See Drawings). 3. Fuses ' a. Bussman 600 volt, dual element type. 4. Control Relays a. Control relays shall be programmable. b. Omron or equal. 5. Indicator Lights a. Square-D trans type 6 volt, Class 9001, type SK, push to test, or equal. b. Lens color shall be as noted. C. Single or dual indicator lights shall be as noted herein. d. Provide finger -safe contact blocks. 6. Selector Switches ' Square-D, Class 9001, Type SK, or equal. a. b. Operators shall be black knob type or key switch, 4-position, 3-position or 2-position, as noted C. Selector switches shall be spring.return where noted. ........ ...... d. Provide finger -safe contact blocks. ' 7. Pushbuttons a.. Square-D Class 9001, Type SK, pushbutton, or equal. b. Non -illuminated pushbuttons shall be black. c.,-. Illuminated pushbuttons shall have„_lens-,colors as.noted. d. Provide finger -safe contact block. 8. Elapsed Time Meter ' a. Hour meter, non -reset type, Cramer 635K, or equal. 9. Limit switch ' a. Check valve limit switch shall be provided by valve manufacturer per Section 15100 - Manually Operated Valves. i 2/20/04 442.E1 13720 3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE b. Check valve limit switch shall be wired by VFD manufacturer/supplier. C. Installation Contractor shall provide mounting in the field. Submit detail for review and approval. d. Unit shall be used for check valve limit switch. ' 10. Signal Isolator and Converters a. Signal isolator shall be plug-in type. b. AGM Electronics or equal. ' 11. Surge and Lightning Arrestors a. All control panels shall be provided with surge and , lightning arrestors as specified. b. Lightning Surge Suppressor , 1. Lightning surge suppressors shall be APT XF Series 80 kA or equal. C. Signal 1. Panel surge arrestors (PSA) shall be EDCO PC642 Series ' for 4-20 mA DC Signals. 2. Panel surge arrestors (PSA) shall be EDCO DRS Series for discrete signals. , 12. Fluorescent Lamp a. 8 watt, 120v, 1211, Grainger 2V809, or equal. b. Bulb, 8w, 1211, miniature, Phillips, or equal. 13. Ground Lug a. #1/0 Wire I1sco AU-O, or equal. 14. Time Delay Relays a. Time delay relays shall be programmable with adjustable ' ranges, DPI switch settable. b. omron or equal , 15. Totalizer w/ Indicator a. Red Lion Controls Model IMP -Apollo, 4-1/2 digit intelligent meter, with totalization and front panel total reset. 16. Padlockable outside handle main disconnect with fuses or circuit breakers connected to door handle. A defeater shall be provided. , 17. Drive shall be provided with the capabilities to ride through brown outs and to restart on power loss and return after time delay. 19. Discrete input and output contacts shall be provided and wired to labeled terminal strip. Contacts shall be required as indicated on drawings. Three (3) additional form "C" contacts -shall be — provided. Additional slave relays shall be provided as required. 20. Provisions to receive a 4-20 MA DC signal for remote speed reference. Signal isolation shall be provided in the drive. , 21. Provide self -powered speed indication signal output, fully isolated, 4-20 mADC, 24 volts. 13720 2/20/04 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 4 442.E1 ' 22. Provisions to receive a 4-20 mA DC signal for ground storage tank. or clearwell level indication as indicated on drawings. Signal isolation shall be provided in drive. 23. Provisions to receive a 4-20 mA DC signal for distribution system pressure indication, as indicated on drawings. Signal isolation ' shall be provided in drive. 24. Provisions shall be made to be certain the operation of the drive ' shall not disturb the operation of the existing telemetry system. 25. Provide power output harmonic filters sized as required to prohibit excessive harmonic spikes. Output filter shall be a KLC filter as manufactured by Transcoil or equal. Transcient peaks ' shall not exceed 1200 V. a. Filter shall be specific for each application and location. b. Cable lengths and sizes shall be included in determining filter requirements. ' 26. Drives shall perform over operating range of pump/motor with a 15 KHz adjustable frequency to keep noise levels low. The adjustable range shall be from 2 KHz to 15 KHz. 27. VFD System Enclosure a. NEMA 12, painted steel, gasketed, Freestanding enclosure, UL labeled assembly with cooling fans and filters. Dimensions are critical. Units shall fit within the plan view space allowed or be rejected. b. Minimum metal thickness shall be 14-gauge. C. All doors shall be rubber-gasketed with continuous hinge. d. Print pocket and one (1) set of reduced drawings shall be ' provided on interior side of door. e. Minimum overall dimensions shall be as indicated by Drawings or as required by UL subject 508A for industrial control panels. f. Provide door stop kits for cabinet door(s)., g. Panel electrical C 1 ' 2/20/04 442.El 1. Wiring a. All electrical wiring shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Division 16 - Electrical. Wires shall be 600-volt class, PVC insulated stranded copper and shall be of the sizes required for the current to be carried, but not below 16 AWG enclosed in either sheet metal raceway or plastic wiring duct. Wiring for signal circuits shall be twisted shielded pairs not smaller than No. 18 AWG, and be separated at least 6 inches from any power wiring. b. All panel wiring shall be labeled with T&B Shrink-Kon _.HVM marker system._,, Wire marker numbers.shall.agree with control panel provided terminals. Terminal Blocks 1. Terminal blocks shall -be- one-piece molded plastic'blocke with screw type terminals and barriers rated for 300 volts. Terminals shall be double sided. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification. 2. Wires shall be terminated at the terminal blocks with crimp type, preinsulated, locking forked -tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for the terminal 13720 5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 1 block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. 3. Terminals shall be Allen Bradley 1492 series or equal. 4. Terminal numbers and wire numbers shall agree. i. Wire Ducts 1. Wire duct shall be by Panduit, or equal. j. Power Supplies 1. Provide do power supplies as required to power instruments requiring external do power. 2. Power,supplies,ahall convert 120V ac, 60-Hz power to do power of the appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that the instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances. 3. Output overvoltage and overcurrent protective devices shall be provided with the power supply to protect the instruments from damage due to power supply failure and to protect the power supply from damage due to external failure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for all power supplies. Power supplies shall be mounted such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other components. 28. Where indicated on plans, provide backup control of VFD system in the event of PLC failure. 29. Where indicated by plans, provide 4-20 mA DC output, self powered analogous with the VFD output amps to the motor. Provide signal converters, isolator, power supplies, and the wire as may be required. 2.02 VFD OPBRA XON A. Hand -Off -Auto mode selector 1. Discrete control a. Hand: The drive .ramps ._up to the speed reference per the 1 1 1 1 fl 1 1 local drive keypad. b. Off: Drive ramps down to the minimum speed, the output ' stops. While in the off position the drive is not permitted to run...,„ c. Auto: 37pon receiving .a -..start command, the drive ramps up , the remote speed reference. Drive shall ramp down to 2. Speed control a. The speed reference shall be from the local keypad while the local H-O-A is in the hand mode and from the remote 4-20 mADC analog input signal while in the auto mode. , b. Adjustable minimum and maximum speed settings shall be provided. 13720 2/20/04 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 6 442.E1 c. Separate adjustable ramp slope settings shall be provided for both acceleration and deceleration. - 2.03 NAMEPLATES, NAME TAGS AND SERVICE LEGENDS A. All components provided under this section, both field and panel mounted, shall be provided with permanently mounted name tags bearing the entire ISA tag number of the components. Panel mounted tags shall be plastic; field mounted tags shall be stamped stainless steel. B. Circuit breakers and all dead front panel items shall be clearly labeled by name, no tag number. Nameplates are defined as inscribed laminated plastic plates mounted under or near a panel face mounted instrument. Service legends are defined as inscribed laminated plastic integrally mounted on a panel face mounted instrument. C. Service legends and nameplates shall be engraved, rigid, laminated plastic. Service legends and nameplates shall be fastened to the panel by screws or with a specially applied adhesive. Fastening shall not depend only on the adhesive backing of the nameplate. Unless otherwise noted, color shall be black with white letters and letter height shall be 3/16-inch: D. Field mounted tags shall be 16-gauge, 304 stainless steel with 3/16- inch high characters. E. Each panel shall be provided with a cabinet face mounted laminated nameplate as specified above. Unless otherwise noted, color shall be black with white letters %-inch high. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. VFD manufacturer shall supply owner with the following: 1. Two (2) sets of fuses for every size fuse used in VFD(s). 2. Six (6)indicator light lamps of each type provided. B. All parts shall be furnished in containers which are clearly marked and identified as to the contents. C. Provide spare parts bill of materials with submittal for approval. PART 3 EXECUTION - _ _... .. 3.01 .. GENERAL A. Install equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished appearance. B. Coordinate work with the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and work of other trades _. .. _... to avoid conflicts, errors, delays and unnecessary interference with-.,. operation of the existing plant during construction. C. -- ---------�... s explicitly, unless ow manufacturers' -installation instructions otherwise indicated. wherever any conflict arises between manufac- turers' instructions, and these Contract Documents, follow ENGINEER's decision, at no additional cost to OWNER. Keep copy of manufacturers' instructions on the jobsite available for review at all times. 2/20/04 13720 442.El 7 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Provide a factory authorized service technician for two (2) man days to start up, test and place in service the unit. This service shall be extended, as required, at the manufacturer's expense, if problems arise with the drive unit(s). B. Provide separate from the start-up, one(1) man day of training. This time shall be at the convenience of the OWNER. Minimum training instructions shall include the following. 1. Routine Maintenance. 2. Programming, including entering the programming mode, changing set points, interpreting fault information. 3. Trouble shooting... 4. Fault corrections and resetting actions. 5. VFD representative shall demonstrate to ENGINEER the drive's output transcient levels using test equipment (re. oscilloscope). 6. Provide signed, typewritten test report certifying total harmonic distortion levels. 7. Provide type -written report documentation for all software parameters. For each parameter, include the range and current setting. 3.03 CLEAN-UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. Touch-up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, consistency and type of surface of the,. original finish. END OF SECTION 13720 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 8 2/20/04 442.E1 1 i I- I i i SECTION 15005 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install ductile iron pipe and all appurtenant Work, complete in place, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. All items specified herein this section may not be specifically required for this project. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the require- ments of this section with the drawings for proper completion of the work. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements which apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatary for this project. D. Like items provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.02 RELATED a. Section 02200 - Earthwork. b. Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, Structures and Equipment). 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards (Latest Revisions): ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for water. ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron fittings, 3 in . through 4 8 in . for water and other liquids. ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fit- tings. ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe. ------------------- - ---ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 - - -- -- Ductile -Iron Pipe, --Centrifugally.---_-.-. Cast, in Metal Molds or Sand -Lined Molds for Water and Other Liquids. ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in: through 24 in. and 54 in. through 64- in., for water service. 2/20/04 15005 442.E1 1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 1 ANSI/AWWA C210 ANSI/AWWA C600 1.04 SUBMITTALS Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their appurtenances. A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Shoo Drawings: Submit shop drawings of pipe and fittings to demon- strate conformance with the requirements of this Section and the requirements of the referenced standards. C. Cer i 'ca ions: when requested by ENGINEER, furnish .an affidavit of compliance for all pipe, fittings, pipe linings and other miscellaneous . pieces and accessories furnished. Affidavit shall certify that all materials supplied to the job site have been manufactured in accordance with these specifications and the referenced standards and that all tests and inspections have been conducted and approved. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests shall be within the Scope of the Contract. D. Submit complete piping layout drawings for the project site. Layout drawings shall show all fitting and valve locations. Layout drawings shall also reference location and type of all restrained joints. Detailed drawings shall be provided for all locations requiring additional detail as applicable for clarification. Joint restraint requirements shall be as shown on the drawings as specified herein. Layout drawings shall be produced and provided by the pipe manufac- turer. Bill of materials shall be included with layout.drawings. 1 E 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE, A. Inspection: All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the provisions of the referenced standards, as supplemented by the requirements herein. Notify the ....-......ENGINEER in writing of the manufacturing starting date not -less than.l4.__ days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture. B. During the manufacture of the pipe, the ENGINEER shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in process and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with the Specifications. C. Tests: Except as modified herein, all materials used in the manu- __._.,._..._..�._._..f.actur-e . of -.the pipe shall be.- tested ..in..-accordance...with-the._requirements.__ ..____.-- of the referenced standards as applicable. D. Perform said material tests within the Scope of the Contract. The ENGINEER shall have the right to witness all testing conducted; provided, that the schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the ENGINEER. E. In addition to those tests specifically required, the ENGINEER may request additional samples of any material including lining and coating 15005 2/20/04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 2 442.E1 samples for testing by the OWNER. The additional samples shall be furnished within the Scope of the Contract. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling and Stor All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully impact and free fall. handled and protected against damage, shocks, All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner which will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere. Pipe shall be handled and stored at the trench site in accordance with the following paragraphs. No pipe shall be installed where the liming or coating show defects that may be harmful as determined by the ENGINEER. Such damaged lining or coating shall be repaired, or a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished and installed. B. Stockpiled pipe shall be supported on sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 3 inches in diameter. The pipe shall not be rolled and shall be secured to prevent accidental rolling. C. Strutting: Adequate strutting shall be provided on all specials, fit- tings, and straight pipe 48 inches in diameter and larger so as to avoid damage to the pipe and fittings during handling, storage, hauling, and installation. D. All pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion of the project shall be repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR within the Scope of the Contract. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The pipe shall be of the diameter shown, shall be furnished complete with rubber gaskets and all specials and fittings shall be provided as specified herein and required under the Contract Documents. B. LayingLengths: Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 ft. with shorter lengths provided as required. C. Finish: The pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Pipe materials shall conform to the requirements of herein this specifica- ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 and unless otherwise noted tion or the drawings, all ductile iron pipe shall be as follows: Minimum Special Cases Nominal Diameter r re Cl --Thickness-Class ---- ............._ . -------...._.3.,.. thru--12.11.-.__.._.._.._._- -- — 350-Psi.------ -, 14" thru 36" 250 Psi 42" thru 54" 200 psi Flanged Pipe (all diameters) 53 (Min) B. Cement: Cement for mortar lining shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4; provided that cement for mortar lining shall be Type II or V. Fly ash or pozzolan shall not be used as a cement replacement. 2/20/04 15005 442.E1 3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 1 2.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. General: Ductile iron pipe used in this project shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50, ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 and ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 as applicable. B. Ductile iron pipe for water mains shall be standard cement lined in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 and seal coating with an asphaltic coating approximately 1 mil thick in accordance with AWWA C151. C. Flanged pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 and ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. Pipe shall be cement lined as specified above. D. Ductile iron pipe shall be of the diameter as shown on the drawings and class as specified herein. 2.04 :.. CEM$NT-MORTAR LINING A. Cement Mortar Lining for ghop Application: Except as otherwise provided herein, interior surfaces of all ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials shall be cleaned and lined by the pipe manufacturer with cement -mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. The lining machines shall be of a type that have been used successfully for similar Work. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found faulty at delivery site, the damaged or unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining conforming to these Specifications. B. The minimum lining thickness shall be as specified in ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. 2.05 PUSH -ON JOINTS (NON -RESTRAINED TYPE) A. Push -on pipe joints (non -restrained type) shall be "Fastite" as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, "Tyton" as manufac- tured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry, or equal. Push -on joints shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2.06 PUSH -ON JOINTS (RESTRAINED TYPE) A. Push -on joints (restrained type), 24-inch and smaller, shall use "Fast - Grip" gasket system by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, "Field Lok" gasket system by U.S. Pipe and Foundry, or equal. B. Push -on joints (restrained type) greater than 24-inch, shall be "LOK- Ring„ restrained joint by American Cast Iron Pipe "TR Flex" restrained joint by U.S. Pipe and Foundry, or equal. 2.07 MECHANICAL JOINTS (STANDARD) A. joints Mechanical ' j for fittings and valves shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA .C111/A21.11. 2-.08 ._._-MECHANICAL.._.JOINTS (RESTRAINED)-------__._ _ am A. Restrained mechanical joints shall be utilized for fittings and valves at locations indicated on the drawings. B. Restraint of mechanical joints shall be accomplished by using a Megalug Series 1100 restraining follower gland as manufactured by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. or equal. n 15005 2/20/04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 4 442.E1 1 I n 1 it 1 11 1 C. Mechanical joints for fittings and valves shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2.09 FLANGED JOINTS A. Flanged joints meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 shall be utilized at locations shown on the Drawings. B. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be ring type gaskets, 1/8-inch thick, compatible for the service conveyed by the pipeline. Bolts, nuts and washers shall meet the requirements of AWWA C115/A21.15 and shall be either type 304 stainless steel or standard low carbon steel as follows: type 304 stainless steel, bolts, nuts and washers shall be used for all flanged locations exposed to weather or submerged and the low carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be used for all interior flanged piping locations. 2.10 JOINT ACCESSORIES A. Joint gaskets shall be synthetic rubber as per ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Gaskets shall be compatible to applicable service. B. Joint lubricants shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer. 2.11 FITTINGS AND SPECIALS A. Mechanical joint fittings (3-inch through 24-inch) shall be ductile iron compact fittings manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 with a pressure rating of 350 psi. Fittings shall have mechanical joints in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11, B. Mechanical joint fittings (30-inch and larger) shall be ductile iron fittings manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 with a pressure rating of 250 psi. Fittings shall have mechanical joints in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. C. Fittings for flanged pipe shall be short body ductile iron with flanged ends in accordance with AWWA/C1:10 with 125# f,lspges;having•.a pressure rating of 250 psi. D. Fittings shall be coated and lined as specified for the applicable pipe application. E. Fittings shall be of the diameter and pressure class as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. 2.12 DUCTILE IRON WALL PIPES A. Provide ductile iron wall pipes of the proper diameter and with ends as shown on the Drawings for connection to adjacent ductile iron pipes where they pass through concrete walls which are to be watertight. All wall pipes' shall be provided with standard seep ring. Wall pipes shall be of a class equal to or greater than the remainder of the pipe in the — — — - - -------line: If --standard castings are not readily -available, -special -castings shall be cast or fabricated which will provide a watertight installa- tion. 2.1.3 DUCTILE IRON FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTERS (NON -RESTRAINED TYPE) A. Flange adapters shall be used as required on plain end ductile iron pipe. Flanges shall be cast from 60-42-10 as cast ductile iron for ASTM 536. Bolt pattern shall meet ANSI B16.1,125 lbs. Flanges shall contain 2/20/04 15005 442.E1 5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 1 ductile iron set screws. Flange adapters shall be Series 1000 as. manufactured by EBBA Iron, Inc. or equal. 2.14 DUCTILE IRON FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTORS (RESTRAINED TYPE) A. Flange adaptors shall be made of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and have flange bolt circles that are compatible with ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15. Restraint for the flange adaptor shall consist of a plurality of individually actuated gripping wedges to maximize restraint capability. Torque limiting actuating screws shall be used to insure proper initial set of the gripping wedges. B. The flange adaptors shall be capable of deflection during assembly or permit lengths of pipe to be field cut to ,allow a minimum 0.611 gap between the end of the piAe and the mating flange without affecting the integrity of the peal. C. The flange adaptor shall be the SERIES 2100 MEGAFLANGE adaptor as. produced. by EBAA Iron, Inc., or equal. 2.15 MECHANICAL JOINT RETAINER GLANDS A. The mechanical joint retainer glands shall be designed to fit standard mechanical joint bells with Standard T head bolts conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 and ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 of latest revision. Glands shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536-80 grade 60-42-10. Set -screws shall be of hardened ductile iron and require the same torque in all sizes. Steel set -screws are not permitted. These devices shall be UL listed and have the stated pressure rating with a minimum safety factor of 2:1 and shall be Series 100 as manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc., or equal. I� 2.16 DUCTILE IRON COUPLINGS A. Couplings for joining of plain end pipe shall be Ford Ductile Iron Couplings Style FC1, Dresser Style 153, or equal. Thrust ties, where indicated on drawings, shall be provided as required to sustain the B. pressure. . _. _.._._ _ ..._. ._.._.. maximum operating f�developed by 1-1/2 times .the specified ... max a 'ry .T- Couplings for joining of plain end pipe of different outside diameter (O.D.) Shall be Ford ductile .iron couplings FC2A, Dresser Style 162, or equal. Thrust ties, where indicated on drawings, shall be provided as required to sustain the force developed by 1-1/2 times the specified maximum operating pressure. 2.1'1 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS' A. ---Flexible-- couplings --for-use -with...-steel -pipe--shal,I-be-Dresser--Style..-3g,.. Rockwell 411, or equal. Flexible couplings for use with the cast and ductile iron pipe shall be Dresser Style 53 or 153, Rockwell 431, or equal, with zinc -plated bolts and nuts. Thrust ties shall be provided as required and shown to sustain the force developed by 1-1/2 times the operating pressure specified. 15005 2/20/04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 6 442•E1 t7 jl 1 2.18 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINT be installed in the locations indicated A. Flexible expansion joints shall on the drawings and shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to the material properties of ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 with mechanical joint ends. B. Each flexible expansion joint shall be pressure treated against its own restraint to a minimum of 350 psi. C. Each flexible expansion joint shall consist of an expansion joint designed and cast as an integral part of a ball and socket type flexible joint, having a minimum of 15 degrees deflection per ball and 4-inches minimum expansion. D. All internal surfaces and seal contact surfaces parts shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of NSF approved fusion -bonded epoxy conform- ing to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C213 and shall be holiday tested with a 1500 volt spark test conforming to said specific- ations. E. All external surfaces shall be coated with a catalyzed coal tar epoxy conforming to the material requirements of AWWA C210. F. All double -ball flexible expansion joints shall be FLEX -TEND as manufactured by ESAA Iron, Inc., or equal. 2.19 PIPE FINISH (BURIED) A. The pipe shall have smooth dense exterior and interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures. The outside coating shall be an asphaltic coating at least 1 mil thick and applied to the pipe after lining has been placed. 2.20 PIPE FINISH (EXPOSED) A. Exposed piping and fittings shall be shop primed with a catalyzed rust inhibitive epoxy primer. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 2-3 mils. Surface preparation shall be white metal blast cleaning in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council No. 10 (SSPC-SP10). Primer shall be compatible for use with coatings specified in Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE A. Inspect each piece of pipe and fitting prior to installation to insure that there are no damaged portions of the pipe. B. Before placement of the pipe in the trench, the interior of each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of an foreign substance, -which gcollected may have thereon and shall be kept clean atall times y thereafter: -_ For this u g p p nd fittings-._.__ p rpose _ the openings --of s_ of all _ i es -a in the trench shall be closed during any interruption of the Work. C. Pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C600. D. Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. No blacking will be permitted, and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the full length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of handling devices after the pipe 2/20/04 15005 442.E1 7 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 1 is laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations and for application of coating on field joints. E. In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade, within approximately one inch plus or minus. On grades of zero slope, the intent is to lay to grade. F. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstruc- tions or other causes, the ENGINEER may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, by the use of bevel adapters, or by the use of additional fittings. However, in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed the maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No joint shall be misfit any amount which will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the finished joint. In all cases the joint opening shall be the controlling factor. G. Except for short runs which may be permitted by the ENGINEER, pipes shall be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe which is laid on a downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the fallowing pipe to prevent movement. All bends shall be properly installed as shown. 3.02 PUSH -ON JOINTS A. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned, and a clean rubber gasket installed lubricated with a manufacturers approved vegetable -based lubricant. The spigot end of the pipe section shall then be inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. After the pipe lengths have been joined, a feeler gauge shall be inserted into the recess and moved around the periphery of the joint to detect any irregularity in the position of the gasket.: If the gasket cannot be felt all around, or there is a shallow area, the joint shall be disassembled. If the gasket is undamaged, as determined by the ENGINEER, it may be reused, but only after the bell end and gasket have been relubricated. 3.03 RESTRAINED JOINTS - -_ A. Provide and install restrained joint, pipe and accessories as indicated on the•Drawings and specified herein. B. Restrained joints shall be completed in accordance with the manufactur- er's installation instructions. C. Restrained type joints as specified shall be used for all joints within jack and bore casings and within 20 feet of the -limits of the casing. n......._ .....__.3.04 ._..__INSTALLATION-Or,.._PTPB,_ APPURTENANCES -- injury damage A. All valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any or to any part of the valve or adjoining pipe. All joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared prior to installation. Adjust all stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to insure proper operation. B. All valves shall be installed so that the valve Stems are plumb and in the location shown. 15005 2/20/04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 8 442.El r 3.05 THRUST BLOCK INSTALLATION A. Provide reaction or thrust blocking for all fittings, valves and other items as indicated by the Drawings. Dimensions shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. The concrete mix shall be as specified in Section 03300 - Concrete, for a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi. C. Place blocking between the undisturbed ground and the fitting to be anchored. The bearing surface shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the ENGINEER. Place the blocking so that the pipe and fitting joints will be accessible to repairs, unless otherwise shown. 3.06 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. As pipe laying progresses, keep the pipe interior free of all debris. Completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter and any other debris following completion of pipe laying and any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline. B. Disinfect all potable piping in accordance with Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, Structures and Equipment). 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION 15005 9 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER) 1 1 r] SECTION 15029 TESTING AND DISINFECTION (PIPELINES, STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work necessary to test new pipeline systems and disinfection of new pipelines, new structures and new equipment and appurtenances which will be in contact with potable water. B. Process piping and associated equipment and structures corresponding to the following flowstream identification shall be cleaned, tested and disinfected: 1. As scheduled on drawings. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements which apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards (Latest Revisions): ANSI/AWWA B300 Hypochlorites. ANSI/AWWA B301 Liquid Chlorine. ANSI/AWWA C651 Disinfecting water Mains. ANSI/AWWA C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities ANSI/AWWA C653 Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants. B. Local Permitting Authority Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP). Broward County Health Unit (BCHU).' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a minimum 48-hour advance written notice of proposed testing schedule for review and concurrence of the ENGINEER. Proposed plans for water recirculation, control, disposal and chlorine dosage shall be B. Submit copies of all test results to ENGINEER. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The disinfection shall be accomplished by the use of chlorine solutions —---_____._ prepa.redro► chloine ga.e..__sodium _hyp©chloriteor _calcium..._hypo;---- chlorite. 8. Chemicals for chlorination and temporary valves, bulkheads, or other water control equipment and materials shall be determined and furnished by CONTRACTOR subject to the ENGINEER's review. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to the construction or its future function. 2/20/04 15029 TESTING AND DISINFECTION (PIPELINES, 442.E1 1 STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT) 1 2.02 DISINFECTION SOLUTIONS A. Disinfecting solution shall be chlorine -water solution having a free chlorine residual as specified herein for the indicated disinfection procedure. The disinfecting solution shall be: 1) a liquid chlorine gas -water mixture; 2) dry chlorine gas; or 3) a calcium or sodium hypochlorite and water mixture. B. The liquid chlorine gas -water mixture shall be applied by means of an approved solution feed chlorinating device. Dry chlorine gas shall be fed through proper devices for regulating the rate of flow and providing effective diffusion of the gas into the water within the pipe being treated. Chlorinating devices for feeding solutions of the chlorine gas or the gas itself must provide means for preventing the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder. C. If the calcium hypochlorite procedure is used, first mix the dry powder with water to make a thick paste, then thin to approximately a one percent solution (10,000 ppm chlorine). If the sodium hypochlorite procedure is used, dilute the liquid with water to obtain a 1 percent solution. The following proportions of hypochlor�te.to water will be required: Product oualitity Water Calcium Hypochlorite (1) 1-pound 7.5-gallon (65-70 percent Cl) Sodium Hypochlorite (2) 1-gallon 4.25-gallon (5.25 percent Cl) (1) Comparable to commercial products known as HTH, Perchloron, and Pittchlor. (2) Known as liquid laundry bleach, Chlorox, Purex, etc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise provided herein, water for testing, flushing, disinfection and other purposes shall be furnished by the OWNER and will be made available to the CONTRACTOR at the existing facilities of the OWNER in accordance with Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary pipe, hose extensions or transportation to the point of use. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise care in the use of water. B. All pressure pipelines shall be tested. All chlorinating and testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER. C. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled as late as possible during _... the contract time period so as to----assure --=thy-maximum ---degree ---- of ---­,,.° .. sterility of the facilities at the time the Work is accepted by the — --OWNER.- ---Bacteriological testing -shall..--be..,,.performed-by-.a---certified testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER within the Scope of the Contract. Results of the bacteriological testing shall be satisfactory with FDEP. D. Release of water from pipelines and structures, after testing andr disinfecting have been completed, shall be as reviewed by the ENGINEER. 04 2 20 15029 � / TESTING AND DISINFECTION (PIPELINES, STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT) 2 442.E1 1 1 1 1 1 i 3.02 TESTING OF PIPELINES A. General 1. Conduct pressure and leakage tests on all newly installed pipe- lines. Furnish all necessary equipment and material and make all taps in the pipe, as required. The ENGINEER will monitor the tests. Test pressures shall be as per the Piping Schedule on the Drawings. 2. Testing New Pipe which Connects to Existing Pipe: New pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines shall be tested by isolating the new pipe with spectacle blinds or blind flanges or plugs. H. Hydrostatic Leak Tests 1, Equipment: Furnish the following equipment for the hydrostatic tests: Amount Description 2 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Hydraulic force pump Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. go 2/20/04 442.E1 Prior to testing, all pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate. Test all ,pipelines either in sections or as a unit. No section of the pipeline shall be tested until all field -placed concrete or mortar has obtained an age of 7 days. The test shall be made by closing valves when available, or by placing temporary bulkheads in the pipe and filling the line slowly with water. Responsibility for ascertaining that all test bulkheads are suitably restrained to resist the thrust of the test pressure without damage to, or movement of, the adjacent pipe are the CONTRACTOR's. Care shall• betaken to see that all air vents are open during filling. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate which will not cause any surges or exceed the rate at which the air can be released through the air valves at a reasonable velocity and all the air within the pipeline shall be properly purged. After the pipeline or section thereof has been filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure for a sufficient length of time to allow the concrete -or mortar lining, as applicable, to absorb what water it will and to allow the escape of air from any air pockets. During this period, bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If leaks are found, corrective measures acceptable to the ENGINEER shall be taken. The test shall consist of holding the test pressure on the pipeline for a period of 2 hours. The test pressure shall be as indicated on the pipe schedule measured at the lowest point of the pipeline section being tested. All visible leaks shall be repaired in an --acceptable--manner.-_._...._._�.- 5. Maximum allowable leakage shall be determined by the following formula: L = SD P 133,200 15029 TESTING AND DISINFECTION (PIPELINES, 3 STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT) 1 in which L is allowable leakage in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipe tested in feet; D is nominal diameter of pipe in inches; and P is average test pressure in pounds per square inch gage. Pressure during the test shall not vary more than +5 psi. An additional amount of 0.0078 gal/hr/inch of nominal valve size will be allowed if test is run against a closed, metal -seated valve. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the prescribed leakage test, the CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the excessive leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall again test the pipelines, all at no additional cost to the OWNER. C. Test Records: Records shall be made of each piping system installation during the test. These records shall include: 1. Date of test. 2. Description and identification of piping tested. 3. Test fluid. 4. Test pressure. 5. Test results. 6. Remarks, to include such items as: a. Leaks (type, location). b. Repairs made on leaks. 7. Certification by CONTRACTOR and initialed acknowledgment by ENGINEER. 3.03 DISINFECTIONI PIPELINES A.general: All potable water pipelines and appurtenances shall be disinfected as hereafter described. B. Chlorination, A chlorine -water mixture shall be applied by mews of a solution -feed chlorinating device. The chlorine solution shall be applied at one end of the pipeline through a tap in such manner that as the pipeline is filled with water, the dosage applied to the water entering the pipe shall be approximately 50 ppm. Care shall be taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution in the line being treated from flowing back into the line supplying;the water. C. Rete tion Period: Chlorinated water shall be retained in the pipeline long enough to destroy all non -spore -forming bacteria. This period shall be at least 24 hours. After the chlorine -treated water has been retained for the required time, the chlorine residual at the pipeline extremities and at other representative points shall be at least 25 Ppm• D. Chlorinating. Valves: During the process of chlorinating the pipelines, all valves and other appurtenances shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with the heavily -chlorinated water. E. Final, °Following chlorination, all treated water shall be -Flushing: thoroughly flushed from the pipelines at their extremities. Should the initial treatment' f ail to produce satisfactory disinfection - of the - pipelines, as evidenced by the chlorine residual, the chlorination _ ----procedure. --shall—be _- repeated- until •. acceptable :, results -•are --.-obtained.,-. within the Scope of the Contract. F. Residual ChIgrine Teats: After disinfection outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until the residual chlorine tests at less than 0.2 mg/1. Residual chlorine tests shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard orthotolidin test set. 15029 2/20/04 TESTING AND DISINFECTION (PIPELINES, STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT) 4 442.E1 G. If methods of disinfection differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with the directives of the local permitting authority, and all methods employed shall have approval of that agency. 3.04 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING (PIPELINES) A. Provide bacteriological testing after the water system has been pressure tested, disinfected and thoroughly flushed, as specified herein. B. Provide sample points for bacteriological testing at the source end and opposite end of pipe being tested. Intermediate sample points shall be provided as required to limit the maximum distance between sample points to 1000 feet. Types and installation of sample points shall be as shown in the standard details. C. Take samples on two (2) consecutive days from the sample points in suitable sterilized containers. Forward samples to an approved testing laboratory for bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate presence of coliform organisms, disinfection as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate absence of such pollution. Bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before system is placed in operation and it shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to obtain satisfactory samples. D. Bacteriological sampling and testing shall be completed in strict accordance with local permitting authority Rules and Regulations. STRUCTURE DISINFECTION 3.05 A. Prior to disinfection, remove any foreign material from structures. Clean using fire hoses and other tools required for adequate scrubbing and cleaning. The scrub water shall be pumped or drained from the structures before disinfection. B. A solution of 200-mg/L available chlorine shall be applied directly to be in. the surfaces of all parts of the storage facility that would contact with water when the storage facility is full to the overflow elevation. C. Method of application. The chlorine solution may be applied with suitable brushes or spray equipment. The solution shall thoroughly coat all surfaces to be treated, including the inlet and outlet piping, and shall be applied to any separate drain piping such that it will have available chlorine of not less than 10 mg/L when filled with water. Overflow piping need not be disinfected. D. Retention. The disinfected surfaces shall remain in contact with the strong chlorine solution for at least 30 min, after which potable water shall be admitted, the drain piping purged of the 10-mg/L chlorinated water, and the storage facility then filled to its overflow level. The filled water containing �_t least 2 ppm ..._..__ structures shall be with potable of--free-chlorine-and-after--24--hours -of.-contact--time-..1.. ppm-of---chlorine-- �. must remain. 3.06 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING (STRUCTURES) A. Provide bacteriological testing after the water storage structure has been cleaned and disinfected thoroughly, as specified herein. 2/20/04 15029 TESTING AND DISINFECTION (PIPELINES, 442.E1 5 STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT) 1 B. Take samples on two (2) consecutive days from the sample points in suitable sterilized containers. Forward samples to an approved testing laboratory for bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate presence of coliform organisms, disinfection as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate absence of such pollution. Bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before system is placed in operation and it shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to obtain satisfactory samples. C. Bacteriological sampling and testing shall be completed in strict accordance with local permitting authority Rules and Regulations. 3.07 CHLORINATION OF PERMANENT EQtFXPMENT AND MATERIAL A. Permanent equipment and materials to be installed shall be chlorinated just prior to their installation. B. Chlorination shall be accomplished by spraying such items with a solution having an available chlorine concentration of not less than 200 mg/L. 3.08 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Where connections are to be made to the existing water system, HTH shall be added at the points of connection. Final connection shall be made only after the written approval of local permitting authority which requires two continuous negative bacteriological tests. 3.09 CLEANING, A. Interim Cleaning: Care shall be exercised during fabrication to prevent the accumulation of weld rod, weld spatter, pipe cuttings and filings, gravel, cleaning rags, etc. within piping sections. All piping shall be examined to assure removal of these and other foreign objects prior to assembly. Shop cleaning may employ any conventional commercial cleaning method if it does not corrode, deform, swell, or otherwise alter the physical properties of the material.being cleaned. B. Final Clpani.ng: Following assembly and testing and prior to final acceptance, al pipelines installed under this section, except plant process air lines and instrument air lines, shall be flushed with water and all accumulated construction debris and other foreign matter removed. Flushing velocities shall be a minimum of 2.5 feet per second. END OF SECTION 15029 TESTING AND DISINFECTION (PIPELINES, STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT) 6 2/20/04 442.E1 r SECTION 15100 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials and incidentals for the complete installation.of the following types of manually operated valves, check valves and appurtenances shown on the Drawing and specified herein. 1. Valve Appurtenances. 2. Gate Valves. 3. Butterfly Valves. 4. Ball Valves. S. Globe Valves. 6. Check Valves. 7. Sample valves. S. Tapping Sleeves and valves. w 9. Corporation Stop. B. All items specified herein this section may not be specifically required for this project. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the require- ments of this section with the drawings for proper completion of the work. C. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, replacement and service. D. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements which apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. SUBMITTALS 1.02 A. Submit detailed shop drawings and valve manufacturer's specifications in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. Clearly indicate make, location, type, size and rating. model, pressure PART 2 PRODUCT'S 2.01 GENERAL A. All valves shall be complete with all necessary operating handwheels, chain wheels, extension stems, floor stands, worm and gear operators, operating nuts, chains, and wrenches which are required for the proper completion of the. Work included under this section. " B.----Renewable partsinvlumanufactus, packing, and shall be of types dseats v for recommended by valve 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. All units shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast on the body of bonnet or shown on a permanently attached plate in raised letters. 2/20/04 15100 442.E1 1 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES k B. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configura- tion desired. 2.03 VALVE BORES A. Valve boxes shall be of the two-piece adjustable screw type, cast iron, with 5-1/4-inch shaft of appropriate length for the installation. Extension pieces, if required, shall be the manufacturer's standard type. Valve box tops shall have raised letters saying "WATER" or "SEWER", as applicable. Valve boxes shall be as manufactured by Tyler Pipe, or equal. 2.04 VALVE STEM EXTENSIONS A. where the depth of the valve is such .that its centerline is more than 4 feet below grade, operating extension stems shall be provided to bring the operating nut to a point 6 inches below the surface of the ground and/or valve box cover. Extension stems shall have 2-inch standard operating nut and steel alignment washer. Extension stems shall be by the General Engineering Company, or equal. 2.05 LIMIT SWITCHES � A. Certain valves are required to be provided with limit switches. Switches and associated attachment mountings shall be factory 'installed and, unless otherwise indicated, limit switches shall be NEMA 6P, DPDT, adjustable plunger type, rated at 10 amps, 120 volts ac. Check the various process mechanical drawings and the instrumentation and control drawings to locate valves requiring limit switches. Limit switches shall be normally closed or normally open as indicated by the Drawings. B. Limit switches shall make when valve is 90% open or 10% closed, as applicable. C. Limit switches shall be Square D Class 9007, Type C, or equal. 2.06 IDENTIFICATION TAG REQUIREMENTS A. Exposed Valves: Each valve operator shall be provided with a 1-1/2-inch minimum diameter heavy brass tag. Each tag shall bear the valve number shown on the Drawings. The tags shall be attached to the operator with soldered split key rings so that ring and tag cannot be removed. The numbers and letters shall be of block type with 3/8-inch high numbers ._..... _. and letters engraved thereon and filled with ac ename B,. Buried Valves: Underground valve identification markers shall be 3-inch diameter, 1/8-inch thick, solid hard brass, with 1/4-inch tamper -proof hook -end rod anchor. Surface to be engraved with 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch capital letters, approximately 0.015-inch deep. Band punched lettering is not acceptable surface of marker ground smooth and epoxy coated to prevent tarnishing. 'Markers' 'shall be "Wagco- markers' or__equal.­--­-------------- ------ n 1 1 1- A. V»a Gate valves 2-1/2-inches and smaller for water service shall be a all -bronze with screwed bonnet and ends, single solid wedge gate, and nonrising stem. Valves shall be rated 125-pound SWP, 200-pound WOG,. and shall be Walworth Company figure 4; Crane Co. Cat. No. 438; NIBCO Fig 133; or equal. 15100. MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES 2 2/20/04 442.E1 1 B. y-a: Gate valves 2-1/2-inches and larger for water service shall be iron body, bronze trim with flanged ends, double disc gate with nonrising bronze stem, and:handwheel operator, conforming to AWWA C- 500. Valves shall be rated 125-pound SWP, 200-pound WOG, and shall be Mueller, or equal. C. V-3: Resilient -seated gate valves must be wedge type conforming to ANSI/AWWA C509 and UL262 for 3-inch and larger buried service. Resilient -seated gate valves, wedge -type, shall have a cast or ductile iron body and bonnet, rubber -coated cast iron disc, mechanical joint ends, non -rising stem, O-ring seals, bronze stem nut, flanged bonnet and 2-inch square operating nut. All ferrous surfaces, interior and exterior, shall receive a minimum 8 mil fusion -bonded epoxy coating conforming to AWWA C550. All valves must be UL Listed and FM approved.' AWWA, UL-FM designation must be cast into valve body. Valves shall be as manufactured by American Flow Control, Mueller, Clow, or equal. 2.08 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. All butterfly valves shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C-504, latest revision. Valves shall have ductile iron or cast iron bodies -- per ASTM A 126 C1 B with integrally cast trunions. Discs shall be of cast iron ASTM A 126 C1B or ASTM A 48 C1 40 or of ductile cast iron ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12. Disc edges shall be type 316 stainless steel or monel. Valve shafts shall be one or two piece, type 304 or 316 stainless steel and shaft diameter shall meet minimum requirements established by AWWA Standard C504 for class 150B. Disc -shaft connec- tion shall be solid and operator shall connect to the shaft with the use of keys and keyways. The use of compression or friction connec- tions is not acceptable. Valve seats shall be EPDM material for water with chloramines. Valve seats shall be located in the valve body and shall be simultaneously molded, vulcanized and bonded to the body or retained by mechanical means without the use of retaining rings, segments, screws or hardware of any kind in the flow stream. Seats shall be adjustable and replaceable in valves 2411 and larger without removing the disc and/or shaft. Valve shaft bearings shall be sleeve -type, self-lubricating and corrosion -resistant. Valves shall be as manufactured by Henry Pratt Company, DeZurik, Mueller, or equal. All interior and exterior ferrous surfaces shall be epoxy coated __.. Epoxy coatings shall be compatible for service fluid as applicable Coating for use with potable water processes shall be NSF approved for contact with potable water. Epoxy coating application shall be manufacturer's standard unless otherwise specified. B. V--20: Standard service butterfly valves 10 inches and smaller with 125-pound, full-faced, flanged ends, drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 and manual locking hand lever actuators as per AWWA C-504."' Standard service butterfly --valves 12--inches-_through.-2vinches------_.�-�-- ----- - _.---- C,---V-21: with 125-pound, full-faced, flanged ends, drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 and totally enclosed, worm gear or traveling nut -type, manual handwheel actuators as per AWWA C-504. D. V-22: Standard service butterfly valves 12 inches through 20 inches with 125-pound, full-faced, flanged ends, drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 and chainwheel actuators as per AWWA C-504. 2/20/04 15100 442.E1 3 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES 1 Chainwheels and guides shall be galvanized or cadmium -plated. Chains shall be of the size of the operating floor. chains shall be heavily galvanized or cadmium -plated and shall be smooth welded link type chain. Where chains hang in normally traveled areas, appropriate "L" type tie back anchors shall be provided and located as directed by the ENGINEER. Chainwheel operators shall be marked with an arrow and the word "OPEN" indicating direction to open. E. V-23s Buried service butterfly valves 24 inches and smaller have ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 Class 150B, integrally cast mechanical joint ends and enclosed buried service geared operators as per AWWA C-SO4. operators shall be equipped with a square operating nut and be fully gasketed and grease packed to withstand an external groundwater pressure of 10 psi, minimum. Extension stems and a ground lever valve position indicator shall be furnished for installation in each valve box. The indicator shall be hermetically. sealed. for installation inside a cast iron valve box and shall show valve disc position, direction of rotation, and number of turns from fully open to fully closed. This indicator shall be provided by the valve manufacturer, complete. F. V-24: Buried service butterfly valves 24 inches and larger shall have ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 Class 150-B mechanical joint ends and enclosed geared operators per AWWA C-504. Operators shall be equipped with a square operating nut and be fully gasketed and grease packed to withstand an external water pressure of 10 psi minimum. A valve position indicator shall be furnished for installation in each.valve box. The indicator shall be hermetically sealed for installation inside a cast iron valve box and shall show valve disc position, direction of rotation,and number of turns from fully open to fully closed. This indicator shall be provided by the valve manufacturer, complete. _ G. Vv-25:: Butterfly valves shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C504, latest revision. All valve shafts shall be connected to:operators by the use of key and keyways:. The use of compression or friction connections is not acceptable. Valves shall be flanged end, short body type, AWWA class 150B, with worm gear or traveling nut type manual .actuator as per AWWA C-504. valve bodies shall be ASTM A-743, type 316L stainless steel with 125-pound full-faced, flanged ends drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1. Discs shall be ASTM A-743, Type 316 stainless steel,. Valve shaft shall be type 316 stainless steel with self-lubricating TFE corrosion -resistant sleeve type bearings. Valve seats shall be attached to the valve body and shall be of EPDM material. 2.09 BALL VALVES A. V-30s Ball valves 2 inches and smaller, for general water, oil and air service, shall be -all -bronze, top entry type, with screwed ends, full bore ports, Teflon seats, and hand lever operators, rated 250-pound WOG minimum p Valveso.— �s Acceso� _Cat-:—No--�- -.--2330-.---�---- be —_•------.---� TFLunkenheimer Figure700�SB�renque- B. V-31s Thermoplastic ball valves 4 inches and smaller shall be rated .150 psi at 105 degrees F, with ASTM D1764, Type 1, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, ball and stems. Valves shall be of end entry, double union design with solvent weld socket ends. Valves shall have replace- able Viton seats with an O-ring backing and double EPDM O-ring stem seals. The valve shall have a left hand threaded spacing ring on one side to adjust ball tension. Valves shall have a handle for manual 15100 2/20/04 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES 4 442.E1 operation. Valves shall be of OF Plastic Systems, Type 346, Spears True Union 2000, or equal. Viton or Teflon backing rings, 0-rings, seals, and seats shall be used for sodium hypochlorite installations. C. V-31Vs Thermoplastic ball valves 4 inches and smaller shall be rated 150 psi at 105 degrees F, with ASTM D1784, Type 1, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, ball and stems. Valves shall be of end entry, double union design with solvent weld socket ends. Valves shall have replaceable Viton seats with an O-ring, backing, and double Viton 0- ring stem seals. The valve shall have a left hand threaded spacing ring on one side to adjust ball tension. Valves shall have a handle for manual operation. Valve ball shall have a.small vent in the ball to the upstream side. Valves shall be as GF plastic, Type 346 (with field drilled vent), Spears True Union (with field drilled vent), Plast-O-Matic (with optional vent), or equal. D. V_-33=- Ball valves for ammonia gas under pressure shall be 600-pound WOG, double -seal ball valves with carbon steel body, monel ball and stem, reinforced Teflon seat, Teflon seals, and screwed ends, nonlubricated. Ball shall be vented downstream to prevent gas from being trapped in the valve. Provide lever type handle for each valve. V Valves shall be Apollo 7A-130-26 Series, or equal. 11 11 I 11 11 E. V-34: Two-inch corporation stop, suitable for the insertion of a 1- 1/2-inch diffuser tube. Corporation stop shall have Mueller threads and shall be U.S. Filter/Wallace and Tiernan No. UXA17877, or equal. Main Connection shall be a complete package including diffuser, safety chain and fittings required for insertion and securing the diffuser with the safety chain. F. V-35: Ball valves 2 inches and smaller for general corrosive service shall be all Type 316 stainless. steel, .top entry type with screwed ends, full bore ports, Teflon seats and cadmium plated carbon steel hand lever operators and stem nuts, cadmium plated alloy steel body bolts and nuts and vinyl handle sleeve. Valves shall be manufactured by Whitey Company or equal. 2.10 GLOBE VALVES A. V-40: Y-type PVC globe valves, 1-1/2-inches-through 3-inches shall have spigot type end connections in accordance with ASTM D-1785 and shall carry a pressure rating of 150 psi at 68°F. Valve body material shall be translucent PVC to meet or exceed the requirements of 12454E as per ASTM D-1784. Valves shall be Y-globe valve type 301 as manu- factured by George Fischer, or equal. B. V-41$ Angle type hose valves 2-inches and smaller shall -be brass or bronze body, with rising stem, composition disc and handwheel rated 250 psi WOO minimum. Valves shall -have -standard -hose thread -on -the- -outlet --- end with cap and chain. Valves shall be James Jones Co., J-383; Powell Valve Co., Figure 150H; Jenkins Figure 112, or equal. Provide hose connection vacuum breakers for V-41 installations 3/4-inch and smaller. Vacuum breaker shall be Watts Series 8, or equal. C. y-4.2: Globe valves 3 inches and smaller shall be all bronze with screwed ends, union bonnet, inside screw, rising stem and TFE disc. 2/20/04 442.E1 15100 5 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES I Valves shall be rated 150 psi SWP, 300 psi WOG and shall be Crane Co. Cat. No. 7, Nibco T-235-Y, or equal. 2.11 CHECK VALVES A. V-7 : Ball check valve with PVC body shall meet or exceed the require- ments of ASTM D-1784. Valve shall carry a pressure rating of 150 psi at 68°F. Valves shall be ball check type 360 PVC as manufactured by George Fischer, or equal. B. V-72: The slanting disc check valve shall have a 2 piece cast iron body conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30 with flanged ends which are bolted together through the center of the valve in a manner to capture the seat on a 55 degree angle. The bronze seat ring and disc ring must be replaceable in the field without special tools or machining. The pivot pins and bushings shall be stainless steel or aluminum bronze. An indicator shall be provided to show .the position of the disc. The . area through the valve body shall be equal to the full pipe area while the area through the seat section shall be 40% larger than the inlet and outlet of the valve to achieve lowest head loss. The valve shall be rated 150 psi WOG and be•APCO Series 8,00, or equal. V-73: The check valve shall be of the silent operating type that begins to close as the forward flow velocity diminishes and be fully closed at zero velocity preventing flow reversal and resultant water hammer or shock. The valve design shall incorporate a center guided, spring loaded poppet, guided at opposite ends and having a short linear stroke that generates a flow area equal to the pipe. The operation of the valve shall not be affected by the position of installation. It shall be capable of operating in the horizontal or vertical position with the flow up or down. All component parts shall be field replaceable without the need of special tools. A:repl.aceable guide busing.shall.be provided and held in position by the valve's spring.: The spring shall be designed to withstand 100,000 cycles without failure and exert a force which allows the valve to start operating at a differential pressure of 0.5 p.s.i. and to fully open at a flow velocity of 4 F.P.S. .The valve disc shall be concave to the flow direction providing for disc 1 zatian, maximum strength a. minimal ow velocity to ....and yoen the valve:stpab full . y The valves disc and seat shall be field replaceable and have a seating surface finish of 32 micro -inch or better to insure positive seating at all pressures. The leakage rate shall not exceed one-half the allowable rate allowed by the AWWA C508 or .5 oz.- Per hour per inch of - - valve size. A BUNA-N seal shall be furnished to provide zero leakage. The seal - design shall -provide for -both a -_metal _to metal- seal- and --a-. metal---ta --.- BUNA-N seal to achieve resilient sealing at both low and high pressures without over -loading or damaging the BUNA-N seal. Silent check valve shall be VALMATIC Series 1800 Silent Check Valve, Globe Style, or equal. D. V-75: 900 straight pattern horizontal swing check valve with cast bronze body, rubber flapper, removable bronze top cleanout plug, rated 15100 2/20/04 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES 6 442.E1 125 psi wsp/200 psi wog with female NPT ends. Valves shall be Series CV as manufactured by WATTS Regulator or equal. E. V-76s horizontal swing check valves with outside lever and weight shall have an iron body, -flanged ends, bronze mounted and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C508. Valve shall have rubber faced disc and low zinc bronze seat ring for abrasion resistance. Valves shall be Clow F-5382, List 115, or equal. F. V-79t Diffuser check valves shall be all rubber of the flow operated check type with a wafer -style connection. The check valve shall be designed to slip between two ANSI 125 lb. flanges. The port area shall contour down to a duckbill which shall allow passage of flow in one direction while preventing reverse flow. The valve shall be one piece rubber construction with nylon reinforcement. The bill portion shall be thinner and more flexible than the valve body and formed into a curve of 1800. Manufacturer must have available flow test data from an accredited hydraulics laboratory to confirm pressure drop data. Company name, plant location, valve size and serial number shall be bonded to the check valve. Valves shall be of the Series 37 as manufactured by the Red Valve Co., Inc., or equal. 2.12 SAMPLE VALVE A. VV 100: Compression sink fitting, solid cast brass body with solid flange, %° - 14 NPS female threads, plain end, 4-arm handle and polish chrome finish. Valves shall be Model 0.007-1/2 by Central Brass or equal. 2.13 TAPPING SLEEVE AND VALVE A. Tapping sleeves shall be mechanical joint type with flanged outlet. Sleeves shall be manufactured from gray cast iron meeting the require- ments of ASTM A126 Grade B or ductile iron meeting ASTM A536 Grade 65- 45-12. Outlet flange drilling shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B16,1 Class 125. Working water pressure of sleeve shall be 200 psi. Test plug tap shall be provided in sleeve neck under flange outlet. B. Tapping valves shall conform to AWWA C509, resilient seated gate vales, except as modified for passage and clearance of tapping machine cutters. The opening through the valve shall be a minimum 1/4-inch larger than nominal valve diameter. Valves shall have a flanged end to meet the tapping sleeve. The opposite end shall be mechanical joint. C. Tapping sleeves and valves shall be sized as shown on the Drawings and manufactured by American Flow Control, or equal. D. -Stainless steel--sleeve--St le--,CST-EX�--extra—,CSTy vy-i-- as --manufactured- y---- --- ---- Cascade Waterworks, may be substituted for specified ductile iron sleeve at CONTRACTOR'S option. 2.14 CORPORATION STOPS A. Corporation stops shall have an AWWA threaded inlet and have an outlet for the type of service piping specified. Inlet and outlet diameter 2/20/04 15100 442.E1 7 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES 1 shall match the inlet diameter of the air release valve. Corporation stops shall be by Mueller, Ford, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Before installation, the valves shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material and shall be inspected for proper operation, both opening and closing, and to verify that the valves seat properly. Valves shall be installed so that the stems are vertical. Jointing shall conform to AWWA C600. valves shall be installed as depicted in the standard details. Joints shall be tested with the adjacent pipeline. If joints leak under test, valves shall be disconnected and reconnected, and the valve and/or the pipeline retested. B. Valves shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings in a manner recommended by the manufacturer and acceptable to ENGINEER. C. Bolt holes of flagged valves shall straddle the vertical centerline of the pipe run. Prior to installing flanged valves, the flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned. After cleaning, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten the nuts progressively and uniformly. If flanges leak under pressure, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, retighten and/or reinstall the nuts and bolts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight at test pressures before acceptance. D. Thoroughly clean threads of NPT joints by wire brushing or other approved method. Apply approved joint compound to threads prior to making joints. Joints shall be watertight at test pressures before acceptance. 3.02 VALVE BOXES A. Center the valve boxes and set plumb over the operating nuts of the valves. Set valve boxes so that they do not transmit shock or stress to the valves. Set the valve box covers flush with the surface of the finished pavement or grade as shown. Cut extensions to the proper length so that the valve box does not ride on the extension when set at grade. Valve boxes shall be installed as depicted in the Standard Details. B. Backfill shall be the same as specified for the adjacent pipe. Place backfill around the valve boxes and thoroughly compact to a density equal to that specified for the adjacent trench and in such a manner that will not damage or displace the valve box from proper alignment or grade. Misaligned valve boxes shall be excavated, plumbed and backfilled within the Scope of the Contract. C. Install brass identification marker in concrete valve box pad as shown in the standard details. 3.03 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES A. Existing pipe to be tapped shall be thoroughly clean to ensure proper seating of sleeve gasket. B. Assemble and install sleeve and gasket in strict accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions and recommendations. C. Install tapping valve. During backfilling procedures, install valve box as specified herein. 15100 2/20/04 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES 8 442.E1 D. Provide blocking or other acceptable means to support valve, existing pipe and sleeve and tapping machine until tapping and pipe bedding have been completed. E. Pressure test tapping sleeve and valve assembly at 200 psi for a two (2) hour duration, following procedures specified in Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, Structures and Equipment). Test gauge should be installed in test plug tap in sleeve neck under flange outlet. Testing shall be conducted in presence of ENGINEER. 3.04 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Shop and field painting shall be in accordance with and as specified in Section 09900 - Protective Coatings. B. Exposed valves shall be shop primed with a catalyzed rust inhibitive epoxy primer. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 2-3 mils. Surface preparation shall be commercial blast cleaning in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council No. 6 (SSPC-SP6). Primer shall be compatible for use with coatings specified in Section 09900 - Protec- tive Coatings. C. Color coding of piping shall be as specified by the Piping Schedule. 3.05 TESTING A. Valves shall be tested at the same time that the adjacent pipeline is tested. Joints shall show no visible leakage under test. Repair joints that show signs of leakage prior to final acceptance. If there are any special parts of control systems or operators that might be damaged by the pipeline test, they shall be properly protected. The CONTRACTOR will be held responsible for any damage caused by the testing. B. If requested by the ENGINEER, the valve manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit stating the materials options furnished and/or that it has complied with these and other referenced specifications. END OF SECTION 2/20/04 442.E1 9 15100 MANUALLY OPERATED VALVES SECTION 15105 SELF-CONTAINED AUTOMATIC PROCESS VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers all work necessary to completely furnish and install all of the following various self-contained automatic process valves required, complete. B. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, replacement and service. C. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15400 - Plumbing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submittals shall include but not be limited to the following items: 1. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances. 2. Complete manufacturers' material specifications including interior and exterior linings and coatings. 3. Manufacturers' installation instructions complete with all necessary piping schematics. C. Operation and Maintenance data in accordance with the requirements of Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All valves furnished under this specification shall be new and unused, shall be the product of a manufacturer having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the valves specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer and contractor shall warrant the valves being supplied to the OWNER against all defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year. Warranty period shall commence on Substantial _........... ...__... Completion"date as outlined -in -the (3eneral�Cor�'ditoiis--wa'rxanties_ for all valves installed under this contract shall run concurrently. B. The MANUFACTURER's warranty period shall run concurrently with the CONTRACTOR Is. warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for proper storage of the valves so as to remain in an "as shipped" condition. If the valves remain in storage at the jobsite for longer than six (6) months, before 2/20/04 15105 SELF-CONTAINED AUTOMATIC 442.E1 1 PROCESS VALVES 1 installation, the CONTRACTOR shall provide factory service personnel for a complete inspection of the valves. Any work necessary to restore the valves to an "as shipped" condition will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. PART 2 PRODUCTS FW§F1.� ��J+ A. All valves shall be complete with all necessary operating appurtenances included in the work with this section. B. All valves shall have the manufacturer's name, model number and the size of the valve cast on the body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached stainless steel plate in raised letters. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION TAG RIQUIRNMBNTS A. Each valve operator shall be provided with a 1-1./2-inch minimum diameter heavy brass tag. Each tag shall bear the valve number shown on the Drawings. The .tags shall be attached to the operator with soldered split key rings so that ring and tag cannot be removed. The numbers and letters shall be of block type with 3/8-inch high numbers and letters engraved thereon and filled with black enamel. 2.03 COMBINATION AIR RELEASN VALVES (CAV) A. Combination air release and vacuum valves shall have a cast iron body and cover, stainless steel float, Buna-N needle and seat, bronze plug and Delrin lever frame. The valves shall be as manufactured by ValMatic Valve and Manufacturing Company, or equal. B. Valves shall be factory primed with a rust -inhibitive primer. Primer shall be compatible for use with coating system No. 4 specified in Section 09900 _ Protective Coatings. C. The valves shall be provided according to the following table. The model numbers are for ValMatic Valve and Manufacturing Company. Inlet/Outlet Maximum Valve No. oty. Size Inches._ Model No- Ouergt,inar Pressure CAV-002A 1 1 101 CAV-002B 1 2 102 CAV-003A 1 1 101 CAV-003B 1 2 102 CAV-004A 1 1 101 CAV-004B 1 2 102 CAV-005A 1 1 101 CAV-005B 1 2 102 CAV-006A 1 1 101 _. CAV-00619 ._._ 1 2 102 .. CAV-TP1 1 2 102 PART 3 NXBCUTION 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150 psi 150, psi, 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 3.01 GMMRAL I A. Clean and inspect all valves in the open and closed positions 15105 / / prior to installing in the line. 2 20 04 SELF-CONTAINED AUTOMATIC PROCESS VALVES 2 442.E1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1_ 1 1 1 3.02 2/20/04 442.E1 B. Each valve shall be installed complete with all accessories as described herein and shall be totally automatic. C. Valve assembly shall be installed as indicated by the standard details of the contract drawings, as applicable. D. Install and adjust according to manufacturer's recommendations. E. Test valve with adjacent pipeline and repair any leaks as necessary. If there are any special parts of control systems or operators that might be damaged by the pipeline test, they shall be properly protected. The contractor will be held responsible for any and all damage caused by testing. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. Provide certificate from valve manufacturer stating that the valve (a) have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's stated recommendations and that the valves) meet the specified performance requirements. B. Certification to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. END OF SECTION 3 15105 SELF-CONTAINED AUTOMATIC PROCESS VALVES 1 1 1 11 Li 1 1 is 1 I SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, miscellaneous plumbing and piping systems. B. All items specified herein this section may not be specifically required for this project. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the require- ments of this section with the drawings for proper completion of the work. C. Like items of materials provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. D. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1; GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, Structures and Equipment). B. Section 15100 - Manually Operated Valves. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Building Codes 1. Florida Building Code, Latest Edition. B. Commercial Standards: 1. The latest revision of the particular ASA, ASTM, NBS or AWWA standard in effect at the time of advertisement for bids shall be the minimum acceptable. 1.04 .... -SUBMITTALS _.. A. Submittals during construction shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.05 EQUIPMENT ACCESSIBILITY R. -The CONTRACTOR shall be fully awareof the peculiarities and limita- tions of the space available for the installation of all materials in this-Contract.------.--__..._.___...___._........_...._,...__ ----- B. In addition, the contractor shall insure that all equipment, such as valves, traps, clean -outs, and other such apparatus shall be readily accessible. Provide access panels where required. The foregoing shall also apply in general to any part of the system which may be necessary to be reached from time to time for maintenance and operation of the system. 2/20/04 442.E1 1 15400 PLUMBING 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall conform to the require- ments of the local Building Code. B. Dielectric couplings shall be provided between ferrous and nonferrous materials. C. If instructed by the ENGINEER, furnish certified statements from the manufacturer that the material conforms to the requirements specified above. 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC), DRAIN, MASTS AND VENT (DWV) C. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40, Type II, ASTM D1785, dual marked DWV, ASTM 2665. D. PVC Fittings: Schedule 40, Type II, ASTM D2665, DWV. E. Jointar Solvent Weld. 2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPING A. Pipe: Schedule 40 or Schedule 80, Type 2, Grade 1, ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785 as required by Piping Schedule. B. Fittings: Socket type, same schedule as pipe, ASTM D2467. Threaded type, Schedule 80, ASTM D2464. C. PVC Cement: Conforming to ASTM D2564. D. Thread Lubricant: Teflon tape. E. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2,04 MILL STEEL PIPING A. Pipe: carbon steed., black, seamless or electric resistance welded, ASTM A-53, Grade A, or API 5L, Grade A. 2-inch and smaller Schedule 80 2-1/2-inch thru 6-inch Schedule 40 B. Fittings: Threaded (NPT) forged carbon steel, ASTM A-105,Schedule 40 or 80 to match pipe. C. Flanges: Forged steel, ASTM A 181, Grade I, socket weld or welding neck type, faced and drilled 300-pound, 1/16 inch raised face ANSI B16.5 standard. . D. Gaskets: 1/16-in6h thick Huna-N...composition"flat-ring type with RF'.." flanges or 1/16-inch thick full face type with flat face flanges. E. Joints: 2-inch and smaller - Threaded (NPT) Larger than 2-inch - Butt weld or flanged. 2.05 COPPER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: Seamless, ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. B. Fittings: commercially pure wrought copper, socket joint ANSI/ASME 15400 2/20/04 PLUMBING 2 442.E1 1 1 1 1 B16.29. C. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.06 COPPER PIPING, BURIED A. Copper Tubing: Seamless, ASTM B88, Type K, hard temper. B. Fittings: Commercially pure wrought copper, socket joint ANSI/ASME B16.29. C. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.07 FLEXIBLE PVC TUBING A. Flexible PVC tubing, material shall be compounded from non -toxic PVC ingredients in compliance with applicable FDA requirements. Tubing shall be reinforced to reduce elongation under pressure. B. Tubing shall be continuous from pump discharge to point of application. Lengths provided shall be as measured in field to serve any treatment unit from any lime slurry pump. C. Flexible PVC tubing shall be KB15D Series "RF" as manufactured by Kuri Tec, or equal. 2.08 ABRASIVE RESISTANT PIPING AND FITTINGS have a Brinell A. Abrasive resistant pipe and fittings material shall Hardness of 500 for 311 I.D. and from 280 to 340 for 4" I.D. or larger. Cast fittings shall be provided at each change of direction. Ninety - degree, 45 degree and 22-1/2 degree fittings shall have a Brinell Hardness of 400, and can be of the integral wearback or removable wearback type, cast with double thickness at the wearing surface. Pipe and fittings shall be Perma Flo as manufactured by Ducon Conveying Technology. 2.09 SERVICE SADDLES FOR FERROUS'NETAL PIPING A. Pipe service saddles for all ferrous metal piping except stainless steel shall be as manufactured by Rockwell, Dresser, or equal, as required for the installation. Service saddles shall be capable of withstanding 300 psi internal pressure without leakage or over stressing. The run diameter shall be compatible with the outside diameter of the pipe on which the saddle is installed. Taps shall have iron pipe threads or ANSI 150-pound standard flanges. Saddles shall have epoxy coated malleable or ducti.11,_iron bodies and stainless steel straps and.hex nuts with washers, and-neopre 'afeatb. Service saddles shall be of double -strap design. i 1 2.10 A. Service saddles for PVC pipe shall have solid polypropylene bodies with Buna-N seals- and- stainlesssteel worm -drive clamps,- or polypropylene threadedinserts with vinyl coated steel saddle bodies and type 316 stainless steel bolts. Saddles shall be Rockwell Style 342 or 352, Dresser Style 194, or equal. 2/20/04 442.E1 SERVICE SADDLES FOR PLASTIC PIPE 3 15400 PLUMBING 2.11 PIPING SUPPORTS A. Framing channels for wall mounting pipe shall be minimum 1-5/8-inch width series stainless steel channels as manufactured by Unistrut. B. Pipe clamps, nuts, bolts, washers and other miscellaneous installation hardware shall be Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. C. Piping supports for corrosive environments or chemical handling areas shall be Aickinstrut 2000 Series Heavy Duty, Vinylester, grey or beige as selected by OWNER. Provide Aickinstrut universal pipe clamps and other miscellaneous accessories for piping installation. 2.12 UNIONS A. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be'150 pounds malleable iron, zinc -coated. Unions on water piping 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger shall be flange pattern, 125-pound class, zinc -coated. Gaskets for flanged unions shall be of the best quality fiber, plastic, or leather. Unions shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. 2,13 INSULATING VLANGES, COUPLINGS, AND UNIONS A. Materials and rating shall be in accordance with the applicable Pipe Specification. Dielectric flanges and unions shall be as distributed by Epco Sales, Inc. of Cleveland, OH; Capitol Insulation Unions; or equal. insulating couplings shall be Dresser STAB-39; R. R. Baker Series 216; or equal. 2.14 DRAINS A. HD-1: HUB DRAIN. J. R. Smith Figure 3812 Duco coated cast iron drip funnel with dome bottom strainer. Top shall be set 3-3/4-inches above concrete. (Above equipment pad, where applicable.) B. AD-1- AREA DRAIN. J. R. Smith Figure 2130, Josam 32110 or equal, Duco coated'c'ast iron body, cast hinged grate, removable sediment bucket, top, and outlet same size as the connecting line as shown on Drawings. C. AD-2: AREA DRAIN. J. R. Smith Figure 2110, Josam 32110, or equal, Duco coated cast iron body, cast hinged grate, removable sediment bucketDrawings. P utlet same as the connecting line as shown on buckin..round to and o 2.15 CLEANOUTS Floor Cleanout: J. R. Smith Figure 4043, Josam 5B350 Series, or equal, with cast iron body and frame, and square, adjustable, nickel bronze top. 2.16 - EMERGENCY -SHOWER WITH EYEWASH L, 1 1� L E 1 1 1 1 . lPENETRATION eCLOSURES g 2.17 PIPE WALL (..S ffiECHANICAL TYPE SEALS) A. Mechanical type seals shallconsistof an adjustable modular bolts, synthetic rubber and plastic sealing element. The sealing element shall be kink -Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., or equal. 15400 2/20/04 PLUMBING 4 442-El �I Li B. Mechanical type seals are not required at locations where wall pipes are shown on the Drawings. 2.18 MISCELLANEOUS HOSE CONNECTIONS A. Miscellaneous cam and groove type hose fittings, caps and adaptors shall be of all aluminum construction and shall be provided and sized as indicated on the drawings. Miscellaneous fasteners and hose clamps shall be stainless steel. B. Miscellaneous cam and groove type hose fittings shall be as manufac- tured by Dixon valve and Coupling Company, or equal. 2.19 FIXTURES A. EWC: DRINKING FOUNTAIN. Oasis model OEP8WM, or equal with stainless steel top and cabinet, touch pad valve, built-in adjustable pressure regulator, P-trap with cleanout, insulated tank type water storage system, copper tubing, air-cooled compressor, adjustable thermostat and chrome plated exposed fittings. Unit shall be mounted 36-inches from nozzle to finished floor. Unit shall be UL listed and carry a limited 5-year warranty on the sealed refrigeration system. B. L-1: LAVATORY (Counter Top). BPS Architectural Products, 36-inches wide station with plastic laminate top, 1 towel and liquid soap dispenser, waste receptacle, mirror, fluorescent light, stainless steel oval sink, single lever mixer faucet, 3/8° C.P. supply with stops, 1- 1/4" P-trap. C. WC-1: WATER CLOSET. American Standard water saver "Cadet" siphon jet elongated bowl and Olsonite white #95, open front seat, or equal. D. IWH: Chronomite number S-461 in -line instant water heater, 1 gpm flow control, 4.6 kw, 120 volt, single phase. 2.20 SHOP PRIMINGS A. All ferrous metal accessories including, but not limited to, flange adapters and pipe supports shall be shop primed with a catalyzed rust inhibitive epoxy primer. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 2-3 mils. Surface preparation shall be white metal blast in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council No. 5 (SSPC-SP5). Coating shall be . materials specified in Section compatible with coating mat on 09900 - Protec- tive -Coatings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install all piping, 'fixtures, equipment, and accessories in strict accordance with the plumbing laws, rules, and regulations of the State, County and City, whichever represents the higher standard. All work shall be approved by the Plumbing Inspector. B. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of all piping, and no extra payment will be allowed for obstruction by work of other trades or local obstructions to the Work under this Contract which require offsets. Where diagrams have been made to show piping connections, the CONTRACTOR is cautioned that these diagrams must not be used for obtaining material quantities. Changes in location of equipment or piping, advisable in the opinion of the CONTRACTOR, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review before proceeding with the Work. All 2/20/04 1 15400 I442.E1 5 PLUMBING measurements and dimensions shall be verified at the site. All equipment shall be adjusted and left in a condition satisfactory to the ENGINEER. C. The Work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and no excessive cutting of construction will be permitted. Damage to buildings, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting for installation shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved, at no additional cost. D. Any preparation of the structural components of the building required for equipment and material regarding this specification of the Contract shall be done by the particular affected trade and shall, be done to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. All workmanship shall be done to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and work which is deemed unsatisfactory shall be removed and reinstalled until the acceptance of the ENGINEER is obtained. The Work carried out under this portion of the Contract shall be done in a neat and orderly fashion. E. Required materials not covered by the detailed Specifications shall meet the requirements of applicable State and local Ordinances and Codes, and shall conform to accepted plumbing practice. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF INSULATING FLANGES, COUPLINGS AND 'ONIONS A. Install insulating flanges, couplings and unions wherever copper and galvanized steel piping are connected. 3.03 PLUNSING FIXTURES AND DRAINS A. Each plumbing fixture shall be trapped and vented as required by code. Fixtures and drains shall be installed true and plumb with separate stops for each fixture supply. Galvanized nipples shall not be used between copper water supply and angle stops. Install chrome -plated canopy flanges at each fixture drain where P-trap arm enters wall. B. All floor drains shall have protective covers during construction to prevent damage to drain strainers and keep foreign material from entering drainage system.. C. At end of construction, clean all plumbing fixtures, faucet aerators and drains. Replace any fixture and/or accessories damaged during shipment or construction,. Vest all fixtures for proper operation. �. 3.04 WATER HMMR ARRESTERS.... A. Furnish and install water hammer arresters in piping systems where. shown on Drawings and/or adjacent to all pieces of equipment where quick closing valves are installed. B. Water hammer arresters shall be sized and installed in conformance with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH2O1. 3-.­05° WATER PIP A. Water piping systems shall be flushed clean of all internal debris, faucet aerators cleaned and all plumbing fixture valves adjusted for manufacturer's recommended flow. B. No water piping shall be run through electrical rooms or immediately over or within a 3-foot plan view clearance of any electrical panel or motor starter, or mechanical mounting panel. C. Exterior water piping shall have a minimum of 2.5 feet of cover. 15400 2/20/04 PLUMBING 6 442.E1 KJ I 11 1 1 I a3.06 DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Set waste and vent piping occurring above the floor slab true and plumb. Set exposed risers as close to walls as possible. Where vent stacks pass through the roof slab, fit with the specified flashing sleeve to secure the roofing. Flashing and roof connection shall be watertight. Extend vents at least 1 foot above roof. Provide cleanouts where shown and where required by code. 3.07 COPPER TUBING A. Cut tubing square and remove burrs. Clean both inside of fittings and outside of tubings with steel wool and muriatic acid before sweating. Prevent annealing of fittings and hard -drawn tubing when making connections. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. B. Copper tubing shall not come in contact with concrete. Protect tubing by wrapping with polyethylene backed, butyl rubber, adhesive tape or with a shop -applied, extruded, polyethylene coating. 3.08 PLASTIC PIPS A. All rigid PVC or CPVC pipe shall be cut, made up, and installed in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Plastic pipe shall be laid by snaking the pipe from one side of the trench to the other. Offset shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the maximum temperature variation between time of solvent welding and final use. B. Only strap wrenches shall be used for tightening threaded plastic joints and care shall be taken not to overtighten these fittings. Pipe shall not be laid when the temperature is below 40 degrees F, nor above 90 degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight. Ends to be jointed shall be shielded from direct sunlight prior to and during the laying operation. 3.09 PIPS TESTING, DISINFECTION AND CLEANING A. All testing, disinfection and cleaning shall be done in accordance with Section 15029 - Testing and Disinfection (Pipelines, Structures and Equipment). L� L END OF SECTION 2/20/04 442.E1 7 15400 PLUMBING 1� 1 1 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 I I L�l , -1 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including CONTRACT CONDITIONS, apply to all the Work specified in the Electrical 16000 Sections. 1.02 LAWS, PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. secure and pay all permits, fees and licenses necessary for the proper execution of the Work PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF Section 01010 - Summary of Work. B. Submit all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of any public agency bearing on the Work. C. Electrical subcontractor skull be a licensed Electrical' Contractor in Broward County, Florida. 1.03 DEPARTURES A. If any departures from the Contract Drawings or Specifications are deemed necessary, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for advance written approval, prior to departure. 1.04 AS -BUILT INFORMATION A. 1.05 W A set of "red -lined" electrical drawings shall be carefully maintained at the job site. Actual conditions are to be put on the drawings in red on a daily basis so the drawings will continuously show locations and routes of cable trays, conduits, pull -boxes, circuit numbers, and other information required by the ENGINEER. JOB SITE VISIT visit the project site before submitting a bid. verify all dimensions shown and determine the characteristics of existing facilities which will affect drawings or described within these Specifications. t be shown on aperformance of the Work,but which may not 1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut and prepare all openings, chases and trenches required for the installation of equipment and materials. Repair, remodel and finish in strict conformance with the quality of workmanship and materials in thesurroundings. Obtain written permission from the ENGINEER for any the alterations to structural members before preceding. 1.07 MAINTENANCE ...... . ......_..... ---....----- ---` _.. A. Render all necessary measures to ensure complete protection and maintenance of all systems, materials, and equipment prior to final acceptance. Any materials or equipment not properly maintained or protected to assure a factory new condition at the time of final acceptance shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to the CITY. 2/20/04 16000 442.E1 1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11 1.08 WATERPROOFING A. Whenever any Work penetrates any waterproofing, seal and render the work waterproof. All Work shall be accomplished so as not to void or diminish any waterproofing bond or guarantee. 1.09 TESTS A. Conduct an operating test of equipment prior to the ENGINEER'8 approval. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The tests shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER or an authorized representative. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all instruments, electricity and personnel required for the tests. 1.10 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, took, supplies, equipment, and temporary utilities to complete the work shown on the drawings and specified herein. All systems are to be completely installed and fully operational. Specifically the work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Demolition of existing high service pumps power and control systems. 2. Demolition of existing transfer pumps power and control systems. 3. Modifications to existing high service and transfer pumping equipment. 4. Addition of new high service and transfer pumping equipment. 5. Power, instrumentation, and control raceway and wire as indicated on drawings. 6. Temporary power and telephone service as required. 7. Power distribution equipment. B. Grounding. 9. Start-up testing and documentation. .10. Site Lighting. 11. Lightning Protection Systems. 12. Existing MCC and Switchboard modifications. 1.11 CODES AND STANDARDS A. General Applicable provisions of the following codes and standards and _._._.... other nodes and. -standards . required ---by the---State-_of__'lor_ida_.and__loca jurisdictions are hereby imposed on a general basis for electrical Work (in addition to specific applications specified by individual work sections of these specifications): 1. U.L.: Electrical materials shall be approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. This applies to materials which are covered by U.L. standards. Factory applied labels are required. 2. National Electrical Code. 16000 12/12/03 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2 442.El F 1 3. OSHA: Standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration are to be complied with. 4. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards are to be met wherever standards have been established by that agency, and proof is specifically required with material submittals for switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cable trays, motors, switches, circuit breakers and fuses. 5. ANSI: American National Standards Institute 6. NESC: National Electrical Safety Code 7. NFPA $20, fire protection in wastewater treatment and collection facilities. 8. Florida Building Code, Latest Edition. 1.13 ELECTRICAL TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. The CONTRACTOR shall include in the bid the cost of furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing all materials and equipment required to provide temporary light and power to perform CONTRACTOR's work during construction and until work is completed. B. Safety 1. All reasonable safety requirements shall be observed to protect hazards. Ground fault workers and the public from shock and fire interrupters shall be employed in accordance with codes. 2. Ground wires are required in all circuits. Ground poles are be required on all outlets. All metallic cases shall grounded. 3. Raintight cabinets shall be used for all equipment employed in wet areas. 1.13 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL, VORR A. General 1. Excavation or drilling, backf ill and repair of paving and grassing is to be in the bid of the CONTRACTOR. The actual Work need not by trades. However, the CONTRACTOR is be performed electrical _...._ responsible for all excavation, drilling, dewatering, backfilling, tamping, and repair of pavements and grassing required in support of electrical. Work. All areas disturbed by electrical Work shall be repaired to their original condition, or as indicated on the drawings. B. Coordination 1. The CONTRACTOR must check for existing utilities before commencing -- _ excavation ...ar.._.drilling 2. Contract drawings and other trades are to be consulted to avoid interferences with other utilities on this project. 3. In the event,of damage to existing utilities, the ENGINEER shall be immediately notified, and damage shall be immediately repaired. 4. The CITY is to be consulted to ascertain locations of existing interferences by referring to "As Built" drawings and CITY's 2/20/04 16000 442.E1 3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS experience. The excavations are to be scheduled at the CITY's convenience. C. Precautions 1. The Electrical Contractor must take every reasonable precaution to avoid interferences. in the vicinity of a suspected interference, excavations shall be dug by hand. 1.14 ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS A. Standards Products 1. Unless otherwise indicated in writing by the ENGINEER, the products to be furnished under this specification shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Units of equipment and components of the same purpose and rating shall be interchangeable throughout the project. All products shall be newly manufactured. Defective equipment or equipment damaged in the course of installation or test, shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting with the approval of the ENGINEER at no additional expense to the CITY. B. Delivery, Storage and Handling 1. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels and similar information needed for distinct identification; adequately packaged or protected to prevent deterioration during shipment, storage and handling. Store in a dry, well ventilated, indoor space, except where prepared and protected by the manufacturer specifically for exterior instructions for storage locations. 1.15 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Color Coding Conductor colors shall be in accordance with the N.E.C. and NFPA requirements. Refer also to applicable sections of these specifications. Three phase feeder and branch circuits shall be identified as follows: 120/240 480-3P 120/208-3P 120/240-3P A - Black A - Black A -Black A -Brown B - Red B - Red B-Red B-Orange N-White C - Blue C-Blue C-Yellow G-Green N Gray N White N-White G Green G Green G-Green S. Nameplates 1. The following items shall be equipped with nameplates: All motors, motor starters, motor control centers, pushbutton stations, control panels, time switches, disconnect or relays in separate enclosures, receptacles, wall switches, high voltage boxes and cabinets.- All light switches and outlets shall carry a phenolic plate with the supply identified. Special Electrical -systems --shal.l---be- --- identified---at--junction.---and--- cabinets and equipment racks. 2. Nameplates shall adequately describe the function of the particular equipment involved. Nameplates for panelboards and switchboards shall include the panel designation, voltage and phase of the supply. For example, "Panel A, 277/480V, 3-phase, 4-wire". The name of the machine on the motor nameplates for a particular machine shall be the same as the one used on all motor starters, disconnect and P.B. station nameplates for that machine. 16000 12/12/03 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4 442.E1 1 11 a 1 1 1 1 F� LJ Normal power nameplates shall be laminated phenolic plastic, white front and backwith black core, with lettering etched through the outer covering; black engraved letters on white background. Lettering shall be 3/16 inch high at pushbutton stations, thermal overload switches, receptacles, wall switches and similar devices, where the nameplate is attached to the device plate. At all other locations, lettering shall be 1/4 inch high, unless otherwise detailed on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be securely fastened to the equipment with No. 4 Phillips, round -head, cadmium plated, steel self -tapping screws or nickel -plated brass bolts. Motor nameplates may be non-ferrous metal not less than 0.003 inch thick, die stamped. In lieu of separate plastic nameplates, engraving directly on device plates is acceptable. Engraved lettering shall be filled with contrasting enamel. Equipment nameplate schedule for all equipment shall be submitted with shop drawing submittal for ENGINEER's approval. 3. All junction and splice boxes shall be labeled using permanent shipping tags attached to boxes, not covers. C. wire and Cable Identification 1. All wire and cable shall be identified at each termination point and at each pull box, splice box, junction box, or manhole. Provide permanent, waterproof, non-metallic (paper unacceptable) tags indicating the circuit number in 3/16 inch letters. 2. Individual wires within equipment enclosures shall be identified M using the equipment manufacturer's shop drawing wire numbers. Panel wire numbers and terminal numbers shall agree. wire markers shall be T&B shrink-kon HVM marker heat shrink system or an approved equal. D. Signs 1. warning signs shall comply with OSHA requirements and reasonable ' safety precautions. 1 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION 16000 5 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 SECTION 16001 1 1 C 1 I 0 1 C] 1 1 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. CONTRACTOR shall take precautionary and safety measures to assure the safety of his personnel. All wires shall be identified and disconnected from power sources before removal. B. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the OWNER, ENGINEER and FPL. C. The general demolition scope shall also include the following minimum requirements whether indicated on plans or not. 1. Before demolition, CONTRACTOR shall verify that the equipment is no longer needed or that the demolition will not adversely effect plant operation. 2. Removal of all exposed unused conduit. Removal of all abandoned wire within raceways, cabinets, outlet boxes, trenches and the like associated with equipment shown to be removed on plans. 3. Removal of all hangers and support systems which are not needed as a result of the demolition. 4. CONTRACTOR shall cover all openings as a result of demolition and removals including but not limited to the following: a. Cabinets and enclosures b. Wall and masonry openings. C. Cut conduit, instrumentation line, etc. flush with slab, fill with concrete. D. Operational Systems 1. To the fullest extent possible, all required systems shall remain operational. CONTRACTOR shall replace and/or repair existing facilities which may be damaged due to equipment removals. 2. Where required wiring passes through or uses enclosures or raceways shown for demolition. CONTRACTOR shall provide raceways and wire as required to keep those systems operational. 3. CONTRACTOR shall remove existing equipment in an orderly, planned and coordinated fashion. All replacement equipment shall be on site and ready to install immediately after the removal of existing equipment. 4. Where demolition interrupts the normal automatic control of the station, CONTRACTOR shall provide full time. manual .control .until -.- automatic control is restored. CONTRACTOR shall obtain permission of the.. owner.._ before .removing -automatic -.control.. E. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT REMOVALS A. The following include but do not limit the specific pieces of equipment for the removal and disposition: 1. Demolition of all power, control and instrument conductors for the 2/20/04 16001 442.E1 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 1II J existing transfer pump and high service pump equipment. Demolition is required for mechanical needs. 2. Demolish any and all electrical facilities of former equipment. 3. Provide temporary power, control and instrument circuits as may be required to keep facilities operational. Coordinate with OWNER and ENGINEER and obtain approval before any demolition. 4. Review all other plans especially Mechanical and Civil Plans and provide demolition in supports of those efforts. 1.03 DISPOSITION OF EQUIPMINT A. Except as otherwise indicated, all removed or demolished electrical equipment shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR. All rubble shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR. B. CONTRACTOR shall load, transport, and dispose of all or demolished equipment including all enclosed gear, cabinets, raceways, wire and Cable, supports, MCC sections, starters, circuit breakers, buckets, panel covers, light fixtures, rigid galvanized steel.,ganduit and the like. 1.04 A. RECONDED SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR shall have the freedom to perform Construction and demolition in any fashion in order he sees fit as long as the performance of his contract meets or exceeds` the following recommended sequence of construction. B. Add the branch circuit breaker to the main switchboard 1. C. Construct the high service pump building and related mechanical facilities and extend power control and instrumentation signals from the electrical room and the PLC 1 control panel to the new high service pump building. Make the new high service pump facilities operational. D. Provide demolition of the.existing high_oeruice pump equipment and related electrical facilities. E. Relocate buckets from demolished the MCC. required the portion of F. Demolish the two left most sections of the MCC as indicated by the drawings and replace the two sections with two new sections to include the feeder Circuit breakers for transfer pump 1 and transfer pump 2. G. Extend conduit and wire to the variable frequency drives for transfer pump 1 and 2. Provide the transition for transfer pumps I and 2 on a piece by piece basis. H. Provide additional temporary control facilities including power, __.. _ instrumentation and control. -wiring _and programming .as:_may. be...requi.red during any transition periods to accomplish the above. 16001 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 2 2/20/04 442.E1 SECTION 160so BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work covered by this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment, and in performing all operations necessary for the construction of the electrical work, complete and ready for use. The work shall include, but shall not be limited to the furnishing and installing of materials and equipment to provide a complete electrical system in strict accordance with the specifications, as shown on the drawings, and as is necessary and incidental to the proper 'operation of the electrical equipment described for the project. Omission of a special electrical item obviously necessary for the proper functioning of equipment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing the item as a part of the work. B. The Work shall include complete testing of all equipment and wiring at the completion of the Work and making any minor connection changes or adjustments necessary for the proper functioning of the systems and equipment. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality; sub- standard work will be rejected. C. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in every way for the service required. All material and all work which may be reasonably implied as being incidental to the Work of this Section shall be furnished within the Scope of the Contract. D. All items specified herein may not be specifically required for this project. CONTRACTOR and/or electrical subcontractor shall coordinate the requirements of this Section with the drawings for proper comple- tion of the work. E. Like items provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance. F. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16000 - Electrical General Requirements. 1.03 ,REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS. CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National --- ----.-----------Electrical ..Code -axed-all-applicable -rational;. -local- -and --state codes: --- - - B. All materials and installations shall comply with the applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install all work in conformance with all applicable codes to requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction and to the regulations of related 2/20/04 16050 442.E1 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 1 utility companies. D. All items specified herein this section may not be specifically required for this project. CONTRACTOR and/or electrical subcontractor shall coordinate the requirements of this section with the drawings for proper completion of the work. E. Any changes to the design to comply with these codes shall be included in the Hid. F. when a change is required, the Contractor shall send a copy of the change to the ENGINEER/OWNER and indicate the reasons. In no case shall any change be made if the design exceeds the minimum requirements of these codes. 1.04 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs. B. unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER, conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be. -,installed concealed. C. where circuits are shown as "home -runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. D. Harmonize the Work of the different trades so that interferences between conduits, piping, equipment and structural work will be ' avoided. All necessary offsets shall be furnished so as to take up a minimum space and all such offsets and fittings, required to accomplish this shall be furnished and installed within the Scope of the Contract. In case conflict develops, the ENGINEER's and/or OWNER's authorized representative will decide which equipment or piping, must be relocat- ed, regardless of which was installed first. E. The locations of electrical equipment and similar devices shown on the ' Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as accepted by the ENGINEER during construction. vendor's approved shop drawings shall be used for dimensions of equipment. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interferences with other work, proceed as directed by the ENGINEER and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the Work in. a workmanlike manner. F. Circuit layouts shown are not intended to show the number of fittings,.. or other installation details. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power and other electrical systems shown. Additional circuits shall be installed wherever needed to conform to the specific requirements of the equipment. G. All connections to equipment shall be made. :Win, -: accordance :.:.with -the--- approved shop and setting drawings. ____.._ _ .... _ 1.OS W _.."SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submittals shall be made for all specified equipment and materials. submittal data shall include but not be limited to catalog data, cut sheets, manufacturer's name and model number. 16050 2/20/04 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 2 442.E1 C. No material or equipment shall be ordered or shop work started until the ENGINEER's review of submittals has been completed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work under this Section shall be accomplished by persons skilled in in first performance of the required work. All work shall be done a class manner in keeping with conventions of the trade. Work under this Section shall be closely coordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflict and interference. B. The electrical subcontractor shall have experience in similar projects and shall employ a qualified supervisor with responsible experience in similar work who shall be in direct charge at all times. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect the materials and equipment of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and material of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary for the approval of the ENGINEER/OWNER at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. Electrical equipment shall at all times during construction be adequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by water. Electrical equipment shall not be stored out-of-doors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. If any apparatus has been subject to passible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such special tests as directed by the ENGINEER, at the cost and expense of the CONTRACTOR, or shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR within the Scope of the Contract. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties for all the electrical and instrumentation equipment in accordance with the requirements of Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The materials used in all systems shall be new, unused and as hereinaf- ter specified. All materials where not specified shall be of the very best of their respective kinds. Samples of materials or manufacturer's specifications shall be submitted for review as required by the ENGINEER. B -Materials and equipment used shall be labeled and listed by-UL -or FM wherever standards have been established and label service is regularly -- --------------furnished. __ All products -shall- conform -with-- the applicable . standards------ ._.•..-- of NEMA and ANSI. 2.02 GIROUNDINGi MATERIALS A. All ground rods shall be 10 foot 5/8" copperclad, unless otherwise indicated. 2/20/04 16 050 442.E1 3 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS B. Ground wires shall be soft drawn copper sized per National Electrical Code, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 CONDUIT A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (ANSI C80.1) 1. Rigid galvanized steel conduit "RGS" shall be U.L. approved, schedule 40, mild steel pipe, zinc -coated on the inside and outside. Fittings shall be zinc -coated, U.L. approved. Comply with ANSI Spec C80.1 and Federal Spec WW-C-581. B. PVC Conduit A. PVC conduit shall be Schedule 80 unless otherwise noted, and shall be U.L. approved. Comply with Federal Spec WC-1094 and NEMA TC-1. C. Flexible Conduit A. All flexible conduits shall be liquidtight, made ... of corrosion ' resistant plated steel with extruded polyvinyl covering and watertight connectors. D. Conduit End (Strain Relief) I. Shall be nonmetallic, .liquidtight, strain relief connectors straight, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts (T&B) or equal,. 2.04 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS' A. 600 Volt Power Wiring 1. Cable shall be rated for 600 volts and shall meet the requirements below: a. Conductors shall be stranded. b. All wire shall be brought to the job in unbroken packages and shall bear the date of manufacturing; not older than 12 months. C. Type of wire shall be THWN except where required otherwise by the contract drawings d. No wire smaller than No. 12 gauge shall be used unless specifically indicated. , e. Conductor metal shall be copper. f. All conductors shall be meggered after installation and _ ....-insulation must be in compliance- with=--the.:National .Electr:i-_. -- cal Code. B. Instrumentation and Control, Cable I. Process instrumentation wire shall be 16 gauge twisted pair, 600 V., cross -linked polyethylene insulated, aluminum tape shielded, polyvinyl chloride jacketed, type "XLP" as manufactured by the American Insulated Wire Co., Eaton Corp. "Polyset" or equal. Multiconductor cables with individually shielded twisted pairs shall be installed where indicated. 16050 2/20/04 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 4 442,E1 ' 2. Multiconductor control cable shall he stranded 14 gauge, 60OV., cross -linked polyethylene insulated with PVC jacket, type "XLP" as manufactured by the American Insulated Wire Co., Eaton Corp. "Polyset" or equal. C. Tray Cable 1. Where indicated on Drawings, provide power and/or control cable approved for installation in cable tray. a. Control cable shall be Type TC, UL 1277, THHN/THWN, jack- eted, copper, 60OV, Houston wire and cable, #12 gauge minimum. b. Refer to NEC 392, B, (1) single conductors. 2. Conductor shall be UL-listed Type XHHW-2, rated for cable tray use and sunlight resistance. Also, suitable for operation at 600 volts or less in wet or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90°C. Conductors shall be annealed copper as manufactured 1 by Southwire Company, or equal. 2.05 BOXES (XNTERIOR) A. outlets, junction boxes, conduits and pull boxes shall be of adequate size for the number of wires run into them. Pull boxes shall be installed where necessary and shall be placed in accessible location. All junction boxes and conduit fittings shall be cast of cadmium finished malleable iron. B. PVC and F.R.P. fiberglass reinforced plastic shall be permitted in protected location. 2.06 BOXES (EXTERIOR) A. Boxes for wiring devices (switches and receptacles) installed outdoors shall be weatherproof stainless steel with polycarbonate cover plates. Junction boxes shall be stainless steel with gasketed covers. All boxes shall be securely mounted plumb and level in readily accessible locations. Indoor boxes shall have stainless steel cover plates. B. Unless otherwise indicated, all outdoor junction boxes and pull boxes shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. r2.07 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCH A. Fusible and non -fusible disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, NEMA ' type H, quick -make, quick -break, visible blades, 600 volt, 3 pole with full cover interlock. Outside switches shall have copper Lugs. �. B. _ . _._... All disconnect switches shall be housed in a NEMA 4X, stainless steel enclosure.. unless noted otherwise on..the•..,Drawings . -._::...,-.,...r.._._> __ ... —.—._._-------___-- -C._._. Switches —shall- be-horsepowerrated _and.. as._manufac ured-_by._ the Square____.___._ D Co., or equal. D. Two (2) auxiliary contacts shall be provided where required on plans.. Contacts shall be used for heater and overload circuits. Auxiliary contacts shall open when the switch is open. 2/20/04 16050 442.E1 5 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 11 2.08 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES (600 VOLTS AND LESS) A. Terminations of power cable shall be by means of U.L. approved connectors. All connectors shall meet U.L. 4868 and shall be compati- ble with the conductor material. B. Terminate all control and instrumentation cable with fork type compres- sion lugs. C. Splicing of power, control, or instrumentation wiring will not be allowed except by written approval of the ENGINEER. Where splicing is allowed, splices shall be made with approved compression connectors, and splices shall be made waterproof at outdoor locations. 2.09 AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Gutters shall be provided per 'NEC 'article 374. B. Interior Gutters 1. Minimum gauge steel shall be 12. Gutters shal,l..be painted -with ' one prime coat and two finish coats. Final coats shall match other electrical enclosures. C. Exterior Gutters r 1. Minimum metal gauge shall be 12. Exterior gutters shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 SST. D. Submit shop drawings for all gutters. 2.10 MOUNTING AND SUPPORTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Furnish and install all supports, hangers, and inserts required to mount fixtures, conduits, cables, pullboxes, and other equipment furnished under this section or furnished for installation under this section. B. Perforated straps and wire are not permitted for supporting electrical devices. Anchors shall be of approved types. C. Framing channels for mounting disconnect switch, field panels, electrical equipment and the like, shall be minimum 1-5/8-inch width type 316 stainless steel channels as manufactured by Unistrut, or _ . _ .................equal ......... D. Pipe clamps, nuts, bolts, washers and other miscellaneous installation hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel. 2.11 TRANSFORMER ... __ ... A A. Furnish dry-type.transformer(s) with.copper..windingsas in.._:.T yyp -dicated..:by----_- _. the drawings. Transformers shall be manufactured by Square D or __.......___._._..Genera l._..E1ectric_ _-___--- 2.12 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURDS SUPPRESSION (TVSS) A. Furnish a UL listed TVSS, Innovative Technology, PTX160, NEMA 4X with fused disconnect: F 16050 2/20/04 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 6 442.E1 , 1 2.13 GROUNDING A. Ground rods shall be 10 feet x 5/811 copper clad rods unless otherwise indicated. ' B. CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment grounding conductor, minimally sized per the N.E.C. unless otherwise indicated. ' C. Grounding shall be provided per Article 250 of the N.E.C. D. Provide exothermic welded connection to the building steel and to ground rods. ' 2.14 LIGHTING AND CONVENIENCE ITEMS A. Lighting and convenience items shall be as specified on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior to all work of Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point ' where this installation may properly commence. Install all electrical work to conform with job site conditions and all Drawings and Specifi- cations. B. All "tight" conditions shall be worked out in advance by the Contractor with all involved trades. In the event of any discrepancy, immediately notify the ENGINEER/OWNER. Do not proceed with any installation in the area of the discrepancy until it has been fully resolved. No addition- al cost will be considered for work which must be relocated due to the conflicts with the work of other trades. C. Install all equipment, systems and materials in strict accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and NEMA standards for installation. If this in any way causes conflicts, immediately notify the ENGI- NEER/OWNER. ' D. Provide all mounting supports and accessories as required to install all equipment and all system components. Correlate the Shop Drawings as applicable. E. Coordinate with precast concrete supplier for locations of conduit blockouts. Blockouts shall be twice the nominal diameter of intended - conduit. ' 3.02 EXCAVATION POR ELECTRICAL WORK A. The work of this article is, defined to include whatever excavating and backfilling is necessary to install the electrical work. Coordinate ' the work with other excavating and backfilling in the same - area, including dewatering, flood protection provisions and other temporary Coordinate the work with- other---work--in-the•., same. area,--- ----- including other underground services (existing and new), landscape development, paving and floor slabs on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavation and backfilling. 2/20/04 16050 ' 442.E1 7 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS �I 3.03 CONCRETE FOR ELECTRICAL WORK , A. The work of this article is defined to include whatever concrete work is necessary or shown specifically to install the electrical work. B. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03300 - Concrete. 3.04 WATERPROOFING A. Use watertight fittings on panel or other equipment to keep out water. , Seal conduits coming from wetwell with duct seal to keep out moisture. B. Where support holes are drilled in panel or boxes, seal with butyl , rubber or other approved sealing compound inside and out. 3.05 GROUNDING A. Provide ground system as indicated on the drawings and as required by the National Electrical Code. B. All raceways require grounding conductors. Metallic raceways are not ' adequate grounding paths. Bonding conductors through the raceway systems shall be continuous from main switch ground buses to panel ground bars of panelboards, and from panel grounding bars of ' panelboards, and motor control centers to branch circuit outlets, motors, lights, etc. THESE GROUND CONDUCTORS ARE REQUIRED THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT REGARDLESS OF WHETHER CONDUIT RUNS SHOW GROUND CONDUCTORS ON THE DRAWINGS. C. All connections made below grade shall be of the exothermic type. 3.06 CONDUIT ' A. Locations 1. Conduit materials shall be used as scheduled on Drawings. ' B. Installation 1. Conduits subjected to rough handling or usage shall be removed , from the premises. 2. Conduits must be kept dry and free of water or debris with approved pipe plugs or caps. Care shall be given that plugs or caps be installed before pouring of concrete. 3. where conduits pass through exterior concrete walls or fittings below grade, the entrances shall be made watertight. This shall be done by providing pipe sleeves in the concrete with one half inch minimum clearance around the conduits and caulking with , sealant, or by means of conduit entrance seals. 4. Conduits entering panelboards, pull boxes, or outlet boxes shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts (grounding type with -_... _ lugs) and bushings, one -(1) locknut outside and one (1) locknut ' inside of box with bushing on conduit end. The locknuts shall be �_._________.r_ _.._._—.tightened .against. -the box without....defoarmi.ng...the..._. box- —.Bushings....-------._ _..._.... _ ._.,. shall be of the insulating type. 5. Field conduit bends shall be made with standard tools and equipment manufactured especially for conduit bending. 6. Where embedded conduits cross expansion joints, furnish and install offset expansion joints or sliding expansion joints. ' Sliding expansion joints shall be made with straps and clamps. 7. Exposed runs of conduits shall be installed with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members or intersections of vertical planes and ceilings, with right angle turns consisting 16050 2/20/04 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 8 442-El , n 1 __7 J 1 I 1 1 1 F 1 1 F 1 1 1 of symmetrical bends or pull, boxes as indicated on the drawings. Bends and offsets shall be avoided where possible. 8. Conduits in structural slabs shall be placed between the upper and the lower layers of reinforcing steel, requiring careful bending of conduits. Conduits embedded in concrete slabs shall be spaced not less than eight (8) inches on centers or as widely spaced as possible where they converge at panels or junction boxes. Conduits running parallel to slab supports, such as beams, columns and structural walls shall be installed not less than 12 inches from such supporting elements. To prevent displacement during concrete pour, saddle supports for conduit, outlet boxes, junction boxes, inserts, etc., shall be secured. 9. Conduit runs shall always be concealed except where indicated on plans. 10. Pull wires shall be installed in all empty conduits. Pull wires shall be No. 12 gauge copper. All pull wires shall be identified with conduit number at each end. 11. The use of running threads is prohibited and where some such device is necessary, split couplings, Erickson couplings, or equal shall be used. Where watertight conduit installations are required, watertight conduit unions shall be used. 12: Where conduits are run individually, they shall be supported by approved pipe straps secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry, expansion shields and machine screws or standard preset inserts on concrete or solid masonry; machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces, and wood screws on wood construction. The use of perforated straps or wires will not be permitted. 13. Concrete inserts and pipe straps shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 14. Wire shall not be installed until all Work of any nature that may cause damage is completed, including pouring of concrete. Mechanical means shall not be used in pulling in wires No. 8 or smaller. 15. Underground conduits not under concrete slabs, are to be buried at least two (2) feet below finished grade for circuits rated 600 volts or less, except under traffic areas where motor vehicles may cross. Under traffic areas, conduits are to be buried at least three (3) feet below finished grade. 16. All conduits shall be cleaned by pulling a brush swab through before installing cables. 17. All conduits shall be sealed at each end with electrical putty. Special care shall be taken at all equipment where entrance of moisture could be detrimental to equipment. 18. Where rigid conduit penetrates ground or concrete, the conduit _........ shall be painted with two (2) coats of asphaltic base paint one (1) foot on each side of penetration. 19. At least two (2) feet of flexible conduit shall be used at connections of all motors, transformers, motor operated valve and .gates, instruments, and other items of equipment where vibration is present. 3.07 _ WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTIONS pulled _into conduits. shall be pulled -using pulling eyes attached to conductors. B. Shields shall be grounded at only one termination point. C. A loop of each conductor shall be provided in each manhole to facili- tate the addition of future tee splices. 2/20/04 442.El 16050 9 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.08 BOXES A. Installation of boxes shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code requirements. B. Boxes shall be mounted plumb and level in accessible locations and mounting shall be secure, vibration resistant, and galvanically compatible. Hardware shall be used that is specifically intended for the purpose. When mounted in corrosive, damp or wet locations, stainless steel hardware shall be utilized. 3.09 WIRING DEVICES A. Waring devices shall be installed in device boxes approved for the application. All connections shall be made with screw terminals. 3.10 MOUNTING AND SUPPORTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Furnish and install all supports, hangers, and inserts required to mount fixtures, conduits, cables, pull boxes, and other equipment furnished under this section or furnished fox .installation under this section. B. Perforated straps and wire are not permitted for supporting electrical devices. Anchors shall be of approved types. C. All floor mounted devices (switchboards, motor control centers, transformers, etc.) shall be securely anchored to the floors. Where recommendations are made by manufacturer, these recommendation shall be followed. D. Pipe stands shall be constructed for supporting electrical and I&C equipment. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials shall be 316 stainless steel including all hardware. Pipe stands shall be set a minimum of 36" in the ground with 361, x 121, diameter concrete encase- ment. Encased pipe shall be coated with bitumastic coating. Unless otherwise indicated, top of .equipment mounting height shall be approximately 601, above final grade but shall be increased as required to maintain a minimum of 1211 from bottom of equipment enclosure to the final grade. END OF SECTION ' 1 F C rl 1 EU 160SO 2/20/04 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 10 442.E1 SECTION 16110 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials and items of service required for the completion of an all -functional and unobtrusive system of grounds, conductors and air terminals for protection against damage by lighting of designated structures as approved by the Engineer. ' Complete installation shall conform in all respects to the current requirements of L.P.I. certified system program and all legal, labor, insurance or other authorities having jurisdiction. The installing contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in this specialized work and be a certified master installer of the Lightning Protection Institute. All materials used shall be furnished and recommended for their intended use by a reputable lightning protection manufacturer who is a Manufacturer Member of the Lightning Protection ' Institute. All materials shall be provided by Thompson Lightning Protection or an equal. Installer shall be Bonded Lightning Protection Systems, Inc., Jupiter, Florida, or equal. B. The following structures shall be provided with lightning protection systems. 1. New 2,000,000 gallon ground storage tank. 2. New high service pump VFD building. ' 3. New pole -mounted area lights. 4. All other elements indicated by Drawings. C. Like items provided hereunder. shall be the end products of one ' manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance. D. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which ' contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 SUBMITTAL8. A. Submittals for Approval ' 1. Refer to Contract General Conditions for additional instructions on submittals and substitutions. where conflicts occur between the General Conditions and this Section, the more stringent requirements shall apply. 2. Shop Drawings and manufacturer's data sheets are required for all ' 3. Samples are to be supplied for any substitute as requested by the Engineer. 4. Refer to Section 01300 - Submittals for additional instructions on ' this Section, the more stringent requirements shall apply. 2/20/04 16110. 442.E1 1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 1 1 5. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and certifications on all items prior to the time such equipment and materials are to be ordered. Order no equipment or materials without approval from ENGINEER. Submittals will not be accepted for partial system submittals; submit all data at one time. submittals will be promptly returned, approved, approved as noted, or not approved. Items "approved as noted" must be changed to comply with the Engineer's comments and need not be resubmitted for "approved" status. Items "not approved" status. Items "not approved" are not suitable, requiring complete new submittals. 6. Time delays caused by rejection of submittals are not cause for extra charges to OWNER or time extensions. 7. Provide scaled plan and elevation views of all structures for which lightning protection shall be provided. These plans shall show the proposed location of all air terminals, typical air terminals, size and location for ground rods, cable, connectors and proposed methods of bonding. Bond to existing telephone and power service ground systems. 1.03 SITE VISIT A. site visit shall be required before bid to evaluate existing conditions. DART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TERMINALS A. Provide terminals as per material vendor shop .drawings. Terminal materials shall be as follows, bronze saddle and pressure plate, nickel tip highly polished, pure copper point. Provide mounting type and cable connections as required. 2.02 CABLE AND ACCESSORIES A. Provide stranded copper cable per material vendor. Provide braces, saddle, fittings and connectors as required compatible with materials. 2.03 GROUND RODS 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I A. Provide copper clad ground rods, 5/8" x 10' minimum. Provide bronze compression clamps as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ' A. Locate terminals per vendor shop drawings. All points shall be a minimum of 2' of outside building edges, corners, and ridge ends. Maximum spacing shall be 201. Maximum protection above object to be ' protected shall be,1011. --------B z _-Maintain horizontal, and downward coursing .of main- conductorand.__--- that all bends have at least an 8" radius and do not exceed 90 degrees. ' C. Support all exposed roof, downlead and bonding cables at 3' intervals. D. Ground electrodes shall be installed per Vendor shop drawings but , install at least 1' below final grade. 16110 2/20/04 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 2 442.E1 ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Interconnect Lightning Protection ground to electric, telephone, and other building ground systems per codes. F. System shall be installed per vendor shop drawings to insure proper code compliance and system certification. Any variance shall entail resubmittal and reapproval .and all costs shall be paid by the Contractor. G. As built drawings shall be provided and submitted by the Material Vendor in accordance with certification procedures. H. All materials shall be U.L. approved with "A" labels on conductors at 10, intervals and "B" labels on air terminals. I. Complete installation shall bear U.L. Master Label "C" to be secured by the system installer per U.L. 96A. J. Installation shall comply in all respects L.P.I. code 175. Installation shall be made by or under the supervision of an L.P.I. certified Master Installer. The completed installation shall receive system certification including submittal of forms L.P.I. CI-01, 02, and 03. K. Restoration to existing conditions. Contractor is responsible for restoring all areas which are disturbed by electrical work to original conditions. 1. All cutting of openings in walls, floors, ceilings, etc, required for the installation of equipment shall be repaired in strict conformance with the quality of workmanship and material in the surroundings. 2/20/04 442.E1 3 1 16110 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 1 SECTION 16160 1 Il r] L11 PANELSOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. PART 2 2.01 A. 2.02 A. B. 2.03 A. 1 1 2/20/04 442.E1 WORK INCLUDED Furnish all labor materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all panelboards as hereinafter specified and as shown on the Drawings. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturers service. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods. SURXITTALS Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. PRODUCTS RATING Panelboard ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. All panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage. STANDARDS Panelboards shall be in accordance with the Underwriter Laboratories, Inc. "Standard for Panelboards" and "Standard for Cabinets and Boxes" and shall be so labeled where procedures exist. Panelboards shall also comply with NEMA Standard for Panelboards and the National Electrical Code. Panelboard assembly shall be U.L. listed. CONSTRUCTION Interiors 1. All interiors shall be completely' factory assembled with -circuit - breakers, wire connectors, etc. All wire connectors, except screw —.__...._. terminals, shall be of the antiturn solderless-type and--all--shall-,-- be suitable for copper or aluminum wire of the sizes indicated. 2. Interiors shall be so designed that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be so designed that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping. 1 16160 PANELBOARDS 3. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction ' except when narrow column panels are indicated. Branch circuits shall be numbered by the manufacturer. 4. A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type, number of circuit breakers and ratings. B. Buses 1. Bus bars for the mains shall be of copper. Full size neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Bussing shall be braced throughout to conform to industry standard practice governing short circuit stresses in panelboards. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be copper. 2. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for' each' outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 3. Spaces for future circuit breakers shall be bussed for the maximum device that can be fitted into them. 4. Buses shall be rated for 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. C. Boxes 1. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of 4 inches on all sides. 2. ' Surface mounted boxes shall have an internal and external finish as hereinafter specified in paragraph D3. 3. At least 4 interior mounting studs shall be provided. 4. All conduit entrances shall be field punched. D. Trim 1. Hinged doors covering all circuit breaker handles shall be included in all panel trims. 2. The trims shall be fabricated from code gauge sheet steel. 3. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the panelboard shall be properly_..cleaned.and.finished with ANST.Z55.1, No. 61.1ight gray paint over a rust -inhibiting phosphatized coating. The finish paint shall be of a type to which field applied paint will adhere. 4. Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box by at least 3/4-inch all around. Surface trims shall have the same width and height as the box.,- Trims shall be fastened.with quarter turn clamps. E. Manufacturer Panelboards shall be as manufactured by the General Electric Company, or equal. 2.04 CIRCUIT BRRAXRRS A. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers with frame size and trip settings as shown on the Drawings. 16160 2/20/04 PANELBOARDS 2 442.El 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 B. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt -in type. C. Circuit breakers used in 120/240 panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 10,000 - amperes, RMS symmetrical. D. GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter) shall be provided for circuits where indicated on the Drawings. GFCI units shall be 1 pole, 120 volt, molded case, bolt -on breakers, incorporating a solid state ground fault interrupter circuit insulated and isolated from the breaker mechanism. The unit shall be U.L. listed Class A Group I device (5 milliamp sensitivity, 25 millisecond trip time), and an interrupting capacity of not less than 10,000 amperes RMS. PART 3 XXSCUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, top of cabinets shall be mounted 6-feet 0-inch above the floor, properly aligned and adequately supported independently of the connecting raceways. B. All wiring in panelboards shall be neatly formed, grouped, laced, and identified to provide a neat and orderly appearance. A type -written directory card identifying all circuits shall be placed in the card holder inside the front cover. C. Provide new lamicoid labels for all panelboards including new and existing as shown on plan. Include: Panel name, voltage, phase, wire. 2/20/04 442.E1 END OF SECTION 3 16160 PANELBOARDS 1 SECTION 16426 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Main Switchboard - Furnish and install the Service Entrance switchboard as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings. B. Distribution Switchboard - Furnish and install the Distribution Switchboard as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and completely install all switchboards as shown on the drawings and described in these specifications. D. Standards 1. The switchboards shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with NEMA PB-2 and Underwriters Laboratories No. U.L. 891 and the latest requirements of the National. Electrical Code. All sections and devices shall be U.L. listed and labeled. E. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service. F. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are r mandatory for this project. 1.02 SCOPE of WORK A. Provide new switchboard, SWBD2 to be located in the new high service pump building per plans and specifications. B. Provide modifications to the existing GE switchboard located in the electrical room. 1. Provide and install new branch feeder circuit breaker with all bussing, connections, etc. 2. Provide new switchboard section onto existing switchboard SWBD2. 3. Provide all labor and materials for a complete and functional system. C. Match materials to existing manufacturer. The existing switchboard manufacturer is GE. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings shall indicate front and side enclosure elevations with overall' dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate _legends; -equipment switchboard details:----f_ one -line diagrams; schedule; and —__...__..._.._B.-----Submittals shall -be made in accordance -with Section 01300. --Submittals ------- - -- 1.04 QUALIFICATION$ A. To be considered for approval, a manufacturer shall have specialized in the manufacturing and assembly of switchboards. B. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated. 1 12/12/03 442.E1 1 16426 SWITCHBOARDS I C. The manufacturing facility shall be registered by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to the International Organization for Standardization ISO 4002 Series Standards for quality. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in conformance with manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Each switchboard section shall be delivered in individual shipping splits for ease of handling. They shall be individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids. C. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection and/or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect structure from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. Where applicable, provide adequate heating within enclosures to prevent condensation.. E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only by lifting means provided for this express purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide installation and maintenance instructions with each- switchboard. Instructions are to be easily identified and affixed within the incoming or main section of the line-up. B. Complete set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. O & M Manuals shall be provided prior to start-up. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year from the overall project date of substantial completion. 1.08 DIMENSIONS A. The main distribution section shall be integrated into a common bus connected unit, front access only. B. Space is limited and dimensions are critical. Units requiring more space than allowed in Plan shall be rejected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment shall be furnished by GE, Square D, Cutler Hammer or -... equal. -. ..2.. 02...._...____SWITCHBOARD. —GENERAL---- A. Short Circuit Current Rating: Switchboards shall be rated with a minimum short circuit current rating of 42000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480V VAC minimum. B. Future Provisions: All unused spaces provided, unless otherwise specified, shall be fully equipped for future devices, including all appropriate connectors and mounting hardware. 16426 12/12/03 SWITCHBOARDS 2 442.E1 C. Enclosure: Type NEMA 1 1. sections shall be aligned front and rear. 2. Switchboard height shall. be 91.5 inches including 1.5 inch floor sills and excluding lifting members and pull boxes. 3. The switchboard(s) shall be of deadfront construction. 4. The switchboard frame shall be of formed steel rigidly bolted together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. 5. Steel base channels shall be bolted to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floor mounting. 6. Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and an individually removable top plate for installation and termination of conduit. 7. The switchboard enclosure shall be painted on all exterior surfaces. The paint finish shall be a medium gray, ANSI #49, applied by the electro- deposition process over an iron phosphate pre-treatment. 8. All front covers shall be screw removable with a single tool and all doors shall be hinged with removable hinge pins. 9. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings. D. Nameplates: Provide lin H x 3 in W engraved laminated nameplates for each device. Furnish black letters on a white background for all voltages. E. Bus Composition: Shall be plated copper. Plating shall be applied continuously to all bus work. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross -sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 temperature rise requirements. The phase -through bus shall have an ampacity as shown in the plans. For 4-wire systems, the neutral shall be of equivalent ampacity as the phase bus bar. Tapered bus is not acceptable. Full provisions for the addition of future sections shall be provided. Bussing shall include all necessary hardware to accommodate splicing for future additions. F. Bus Connections: Shall be bolted with Grade 5 bolts and conical spring washers. UL 891 Tables 25.1 25.2 and shall extend G. Ground Bus: Sized per NFPA70 and and the entire length of the switchboard. Provisions for the addition of future sections shall be provided. for the be from the front...... ..... _. H. Accessibility: Accessible switchboard.shall 2.03 8*1TCHBOARD INCOMING MAIN SECTION DEVICES A. Main Circuit Breaker 1. Electronic trip molded case full function 10011 rated circuit breaker _. a ..... Individually fixed mounted., through 2000A.. - __.._.... ..::. I r r _Circuit --- breaker (s) ----shall _-.-have---power-terminals—to-- accommodate cable connections. 2. Electronic Trip System 16426 SWITCHBOARDS a. The entire trip system shall be a microprocessor based, true rms sensing design with sensing accuracy through the 13th harmonic. b. Provide the following time/current curve shaping adjustments to maximize system selective coordination. Each adjustment shall have 3 12/12/03 442.E1 discrete settings and each function is independent from all other adjustments. C. LSIG (i) Adjustable Long Time Ampere Rating and Delay (ii) Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay (delay includes 12tIN and I2t OUT) (iii) Adjustable Def eatable Instantaneous Pickup with OFF position) (iv) Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup and Delay (delay includes I5t IN and I5t OUT) (v) High Level Selective Override 3. Trip a, Provide pushbutton to trip the unit. 4. Reset a. Reset the unit by manual operation of the handle. S. Unit shall be service entrance rated. 6. Provide digital multimeter, unit powered with 3 PT.s and T.S. Unit shall be equal to GE, Industrial Systems panel mount EPM-power leader. 2.04 SWITCHBOARD DISTRIBUTION SECTION DEVICES A. Branch Circuit Breakers 1. Provide electronic trip molded case full function 100$ rated circuit breaker for breakers over 1000 amp. Provide thermal magnetic breaker for all others. a 2.05 ACCESS Group mounted through 1200 A (i) Circuit breaker(s) shall be group mounted. Bolt on with mechanical restraint on a common pan or rail assembly. (ii) The interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and aligned vertically with glass reinforced polyester insulators laminated between phases. The molded polyester insulators shall support and provide phase isolation to the entire length of bus. (iii) Circuit breakers) equipped with line terminal jaws shall not require additional external mounting hardware. Circuit. breaker(s) shall be held in mounted position by a self- contained bracket secured to the mounting pan by fasteners. Circuit breaker(B) of different frame sizes shall be capable of being mounted across from each other. (iv) Line -side circuit breaker connections are to be jaw type. (v) Prepared space shall be provided for future units. A. Main and distribution shall be front access only. 16426 SWITCHBOARDS 4 12/12/03 442.E1 r 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine area to receive switchboard to provide adequate clearance for switchboard installation. B. Check that concrete pads are level and free of irregularities. C. Start work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboard in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and N.E.C. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage and grounding. B. Measure, using a megger, the insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase to ground for one minute each, at minimum test voltage of 1000 volts DC; minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 1 megaohms. NOTE: Refer to manufacturer's literature for specific testing procedures. C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque wrench per manufacturer=s recommended torque values. D. Physically test key interlock systems to check for proper functionality. E. Test ground fault systems by operating push -to -teat button. 3.04 CLEANING A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16426 12/12/03 SWITCHBOARDS 5 442.E1 SECTION 16921 l 480-VOLT MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS HART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and test the motor control centers as hereinafter specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. where expansions are made to existing MCC's, new equipment shall match existing MCC equipment. Provide new MCC sections as may be required. C. Portions of the existing MCC shall be demolished and replaced. D. Various buckets for branch feeder and starter shall be relocated to space in the MCC. MCC vendor shall be required to provide all materials to relocate equipment. Installation contractor shall provide all labor and other materials for a complete and functional installation. E. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer s service. D. See CONTRACT CONDITIONS and Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein and are mandatory for this project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods. B. Section 16160 - Panelboards. .1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The motor control centers shall be the product of a manufacturer who shall also be the manufacturer of all the circuit breakers, fused switches and motor starters included in the motor control centers. B. _._.__.._..____..._._containing All units and sections shall be U.L. labeled. Motor control centers service entrance equipment shall be U.L. labeled "Suitable For Use As Service Equipment". C. The existing motor control center is General Electric. 1.04 SUBMITTALS -- A._. Complete master wiring diagrams and elementary or control schematics, devices including coordination with other electrical control operating in.__conjunction--with._the _.motor...control- centers.._and_suitable. outline drawings shall be furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture. Due to the complexity of the control functions, it is imperative the above drawings be clear and carefully prepared to facilitate interconnections with other equipment. Standard preprinted sheets or drawings simply marked to indicate applicability to this Contract will not be acceptable. 2/20/04 16921 442.El 1 480-Volt Motor Control Centers Ll B. Submittals shall include a bill -of -material listing conductor material and insulation type as well as other hardware and equipment to be furnished. C. Where it is not explicitly shown and completely obvious from the outline drawings the following items shall be verified in a written statement accompanying the shop drawings. 1. Type of terminal blocks used and that the removal of plug-in compartments can be performed without disconnecting or removing wires. 2. Tin plating of bus. 3. Insulation and isolation of vertical bus. 4. U.L. approval D. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RATING A. The motor control centers shall be designed for 480 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire 60 Hz service and shall have short-circuit rating of not less than 42,000 amperes RMS unless otherwise indicated, symmetrical and conform the requirements of the existing motor control centers. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Structure: 1. Plug-in compartments shall totally isolate enclosed equipment. All unused openings to the adjacent vertical wiring space shall be plugged. All opening used for wiring shall have insulating grommets. 2. Vertical sections shall be mounted on steel channel sills continuous on four sides, or with steel channel sills on two sides and end cover plates. Each compartment shall be provided with a hinged door of pan construction on the front and a door opening of sufficient size to permit ready removal of any of the equipment in the compartment. Interlocks shall be provided to .prevent opening the compartment door when the disconnect device in the compartment is in the closed position. An interlock bypass device shall be furnished. Means of locking the disconnect device in the "OFF" position shall be provided. Disconnect,device operating mechanism shall not be attached to the compartment door. 5. The motor control centers shall provide equipment of type, capacity, trip ratings for the loads shown on the Drawings or otherwis-e—specified. 6. Construction shall be NEMA Class II, Type B. In so far as possible all devices and components used shall be of one manufacturer. The motor control centers shall be furnished as a completely factory assembled unit where transportation facilities and installation requirements permit. 16921 2/20/04 480-volt Motor Control Centers 2 442.E1 I r 11 [7 1 A E 0 1 1 1 r_1 1 CI 1 1 7. The motor control centers shall be finished with ANSI Z55.1, No. 61 light grey enamel over a rust resistant primer. 8. The insulation level of the complete motor assembly shall be such that it will meet the field tests required under Paragraph 3.02. B. wiring 1. All wiring shall be stranded copper. 2. Compartment wiring shall be to compartment mounted, plug-in terminal blocks that allow compartments to be withdrawn without having to remove wires from fixed terminal blocks. 3. Power wiring shall be black, control wiring shall be red, wiring energized from sources other than the starter control power transformer shall be yellow. 4. All wiring shall be permanently labeled in conformance with the wiring diagrams. C. Signage 1. Each motor control center shall be furnished with a sign marked "DANGER - 480 VOLTS". Letters shall be not less than 1-inch high, 1/4-inch stroke. Signs shall be laminated plastic, engraved red letters with a white background. 2. All compartments with voltages from sources outside of the compartment, not disconnected by the motor circuit protector, shall have a sign on the compartment door marked "CAUTION - THIS UNIT CONTAINS A VOLTAGE FROM A SOURCE OUTSIDE OF THIS UNIT". Letters shall be black on a high visibility yellow background. Background shall be laminated plastic approximately 3 inches x 5 inches. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Circuit Breakers 1. Circuit breakers shall be thermal -magnetic, molded case, 480 volt, with not less than 65,000 amperes, unless otherwise indicated, RMS interrupting capacity. All circuit breakers with 225 amperes frames and larger shall have interchangeable trips. Circuit breakers shall have auxiliary disconnect contacts when used with starters having external control circuits. B. Nameplates Unit nameplates shall be black and white laminated plastic having engraved letters approximately 3/16-inch high extending through the black face onto the white layer. Nameplates shall identify equipment controlled or circuit designation as applicable 2. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with MCC vendor to provide descriptions and tag names for MCC components. For example "TRANSFER PUMP 111, Contractor shall refer to Section 13700 and the unit process "I" drawings. 2/20/04 16921 442.E1 3 480-Volt Motor Control Centers C� PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSTALLATION A. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. circuit groups shall be supported such that circuit terminations are not stressed. B. The motor control centers shall be protected against damage at all times. Any damage to the paint shall be carefully repaired using touch-up paint furnished by motor control centers manufacturer. 3.02 TESTS AND CHECKS A. The following minimum tests and checks shall be made after the assembly of the motor control centers, by prior to the termination of any field wiring. 1. Megger terminals and busses after disconnecting devices i ' l B. sans WaVW to megger vo tage. 2. A 500 VDC megger shall be used for these tests. 3. The first test shall be made with main circuit breaker closed and all remaining breakers open. A second test shall be made with all circuit breakers closed. 4. The test results shall be recorded and forwarded to the Engineer for his review. Minimum megger readings shall be 100 megohms in both tests. The fallowing shall be done before energizing the motor control centers. I. Check all mechanical interlocks for proper operation. 2. Vacuum clean all interior equipment. 16921 480-Volt Motor Control Centers !I 1 L 1 I 1 1 1 Cl REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION CITY OF TAMARAC WATER TREATMENT PLANT PROPOSED 2.0 MDMON GALLON STORAGE TANK AND GENERATOR. BUILDING NW 77' WAY TAMARA.C, FLORIDA FOR CAMP, DRESSER & MCKEE, INC. 6365 NW 0 WAY, SUITE 320 FORT LAUDERDALE, FLORIDA 33309 ATTN: MR VICTOR PUJALS,.P.E. PREPARED BY NUTTING ENGINEERS OF FLORIDA, INC. 1310 NEPTUNE DRIVE BOYNTON BEACH, FLORIDA 33426 FEBRUARY 1999 . .. ....... NUTTING ENGINEERS OF FLORIDA, INC. ESTABLISHED 1967 Geotechnical & Construction Materials Hydrogeology.& Monitoring Wells Engineering • Inspection • Testing 1310 NEPTUNE DRIVE • BOYNTON BEACH, FLORIDA 33426 Rovnton Reach t4071736-4900 * Pomoano Beadh (30511941-8700 * FAX 14071737•0p75 F.- 9 l 11 1 CJ J 1 11 1 1 I 1 1 Ll NUTTING ENGINEERS OF FLORIDA INC. ESTABLISHED 1967 February 18, 1999 Mr. Victor Pujals, P.E. Camp Dresser & McKee, Inc. 6365 N. W. 6th Way, Suite 320 Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33309 954-776-1731 Fax 954-928-1649 Geotechnical S Construction Materials Hydrogeology & Monitoring Wells Engineering • Inspection • Testing Subject: Report of Geatechnical Exploration Tamarac Water Treatment Plant Proposed 2.0 MG Storage Tank & Generator Building NW 770' Way Tamarac, Florida Dear Mr. Pujals: Nutting, Engineers of Florida, Inc. has performed a geotechnical exploration for the proposed water treatment plant expansions at the above subject site as per your authorization. The work was performed in accordance with the letter of authorization/work assignment, dated and signed by you on January 29, 1999. The purpose of this exploration was to obtain information concerning the subsurface soil conditions at the site in order to provide site preparation and foundation design- recommendations for the support of the proposed construction. This report presents our findings and recommendations. • Summary In summary, based on the results of the test borings, it is our opinion that the proposed storage tank and generator building can be supported on conventional shallow foundation systems using conventional site preparation techniques for foundation preparation. PROJECT INFORMATION We understand that plans for this project include constructing a 2.0 MG storage tankand a generator building. The generator structure will consist of C.M.U. exterior bearing walls, with heights ranging from 10 to 20 feet high. We were provided a site plan indicating the footprint of the existing plant structures, the property boundaries and the test boring locations, which are within the proposed structures. The current site grade at the boring locations is approximately one foot above the adjacent roadway. Cl 1310 NEPTUNE DRIVE • BOYI ITON BEACH, FLORIDA 33426 Boynton Beach (561) 736-4900 • Pompano Beach (954) 941-8700 • Fax (561) 737.9975 1 GENERAL SUBSURFACE SOIL CONDITIONS USDA Soil Survey Maps As indicated in the Broward County Soil Survey Map, the subject site is mantled with the Hallandale -Urban land complex. The Hallandale soils consists of nearly level,' poorly drained soils found on low terraces between the Everglades and the Atlantic Coastal Ridge. These soils formed in sandy marine sediment over limestone at depths ranging from 7 to 20 inches. The limestone has sand and rock filled vertical solution holes from several inches to 3 feet diameter as deep as 5 feet. Depth to the limestone is variable within short distances because of the irregular surface of the limestone and numerous sand filled solution holes. The urban term means that the area has been filled, shaped and graded for urban development. Note. that the soil surveys were typically limited to a depth of six feet below grade. USGS Geological Survey Maps In accordance with the United States. Geologic Survey, the site explored has a typical geologic profile consisting of the following: +12.0 - +7.0 NGVD Pamlico sands +7.0 - -23.0 NGVD Fort Thompson limestone, intermittent sand lenses -23.0 - -68.0 NGVD Anastasia sand, with shell and sandstone lenses -68.0 -100.0 NGVD Anastasia limestone Subsurface Soil Exploration In order to evaluate the subsurface soil conditions Nutting Engineers has performed two (2) Standard Penetration Test borings (ASTM D-1586) to depths ranging from 20 (generator building) to 60 (storage tank) feet below the existing ground surface. The upper 4 feet of the test borings was sampled using a hand auger in order to avoid underground utilities. The test boring depths and locations were established by the client. Test Boring Results The test borings revealed a geologic profile consisting of a surface layerof grass and p the rock Y�Y $ _ topsoil, which is underlain b a to brown quartz fine sand,, with traces to little fragments and light brown quartz fine sand to depths ranging from approximately 4 to 5 feet below grade. From 4/5 feet to depths ranging from 17.5 to 23 feet, soft to medium hard, shelly, porous limestone with few sand and shell lenses was encountered. These soils are underlain by medium dense to dense light gray and brown quartz fine sands to a depth of approximately 50.5 feet below grade. From 50.5 to 60 feet, the maximum depth explored, hard to very hard limestone, few sand lenses was encountered. 1 NUTTING �A ENGINEERS 3 OF FLORIDA. INC. I The groundwater level was measured at the boring locations at the time of drilling. The groundwater was encountered at depths ranging from 7 to 10 feet below the existing ground surface. This elevation is subject to change because of seasonal climatic changes, construction activity, and other site specific factors: ANALYSIS AND FOUNDATION RECOAU%IENDATIONS The test borings performed for this project revealed the soils within the sampled profile are generally in a medium dense state. In order to properly prepare the building pad areas, flooding with water followed by intense surficial compaction will be required. The following sections present our recommendations for the foundation and soil preparation. Foundation/Floor Slab Analysis Once the site has been prepared in accordance with the site preparation recommendations presented in this report, the proposed structures may be supported on shallow foundation systems using an allowable soil bearing pressure of'3,000 pounds per square foot. We recommend a minimum width of 18 inches for continuous footings and 36 inches for individual footings, even though the soil bearing capacity may -not be fully developed in all cases. We recommend that the bottom of footings be a minimum of 12 inches below the lowest adjacent finished grade. It is our opinion that the floor slab system of the generator building may be constructed as a slab -on -grade floor system. We recommend that a vapor barrier be placed between the soil and concrete. We also recommend that the reinforcing steel mesh be placed at the approximate center of the placed concrete for tensile support. Settlement Analysis We have compared the field test data obtained in this exploration with our experience with similar structures and empirical relationships for bearing and settlement. Using a bearing pressure on the order of 3,000 pounds per square foot, we have estimated that the total settlement of the structure should not exceed approximately one inch- Differential settlements should be approximately one-half of the total settlement. Most of this settlement should occur upon the application of the dead load during construction. Foundation/Floor Slab Preparation Recommendations (Storage tank & Generator Building) All weeds and root zones should be stripped and removed from the construction grass, area to a lateral distance of at least S feet beyond the proposed exterior construction limits. The stripped surface should be flooded with water to aid in densifying the subsurface soils- When the water has receded, the stripped surface should be compacted with a minimum of 30 overlapping passes, or as determined by Nutting Engineers, per unit k)ANUTTING ENGINEERS a 111 area of a vibratory compactor imparting a minimum dynamic force of 20 tons. The roller coverages should be equally divided into two perpendicular directions. The vibratory roller should operate at the high frequency level at a maximum speed of 2 feet per second. The compaction operations should be observed by a Nutting representative. The upper 12 inches of the compacted surface should be checked with field density tests equivalent to a minimum of 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density. Any structural fill, including stemwall backfill, needed to bring the site to construction grade should be placed in lifts not exceeding 12 inches in loose thickness. Each lift should be compacted until densities equivalent to at least 98 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density are uniformly obtained. The upper 12 inches of footing and floor slab subgrades should be compacted to 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density prior to the placement of concrete. GENERAL INFORMATION If the storage tank cannot be water loaded prior to connecting the piping, flexible connections should be installed which are capable of allowing for at least twice the anticipated settlement. Prior to initiating compaction operations, we recommend that representative samples of the natural ground material and the structural fill material to be used be collected and tested to determine their compaction and classification characteristics. The maximum dry density, optimum moisture content, gradation and plasticity characteristics ought to be determined. These tests are needed for compaction quality control of the structural fill and natural ground soils, and to determine if the fill material is acceptable. A representative number of in -place field density tests should. be performed in the compacted existing soils and in each lift of structural fill or backfill to confirm that the required degree of compaction is obtained. The vibr